European science review

№ 9–10 2014 September-October

«East West» Association for Advanced Studies and Higher Education GmbH

Vienna 2014 European Sciences review Scientific journal № 9–10 2014 (September-October)

ISSN 2310-5577

Editor-in-chief Lucas Koenig, Austria Consulting editors Uwe Eisenberg, Austria Minik Olsen, Sweden International editorial board Melinda Boros, Hungary Miroslavka Murkovič, Slovenia Jana Ilyna, Russia Wu Pan, China Dragan Novak, Croatia Dirk Eggers, Germany Proofreading Kristin Theissen Cover design Andreas Vogel Additional design Stephan Friedman Editorial office European Science Review “East West” Association for Advanced Studies and Higher Education GmbH, Am Gestade 1 1010 Vienna, Austria Email: [email protected] Homepage: www.ew-a.org

European Science Review is an international, German/English/Russian language, peer-reviewed journal. It is published bimonthly with circulation of 1000 copies. The decisive criterion for accepting a manuscript for publication is scientific quality. All research articles published in this journal have undergone a rigorous peer review. Based on initial screening by the editors, each paper is anonymized and reviewed by at least two anonymous referees. Recommending the articles for publishing, the reviewers confirm that in their opinion the submitted article contains important or new scientific results. Instructions for authors Full instructions for manuscript preparation and submission can be found through the “East West” Association GmbH home page at: http://www.ew-a.org. Material disclaimer The opinions expressed in the conference proceedings do not necessarily reflect those of the «East West» Association for Advanced Studies and Higher Education GmbH, the editor, the editorial board, or the organization to which the authors are affiliated. © «East West» Association for Advanced Studies and Higher Education GmbH All rights reserved; no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written permission of the Publisher. Typeset in Berling by Ziegler Buchdruckerei, Linz, Austria. Printed by «East West» Association for Advanced Studies and Higher Education GmbH, Vienna, Austria on acid-free paper. Soil-ecological condition of the tailings OJSC “Abagurskaya agglomeration factory”

Section 1. Biology Berlyakova Olga Gennadyevna, Federal state budget institution of science, The Institute of Soil science and Agrochemistry of Siberian branch of the Russian Academy of Sciences postgraduate student, the laboratory of recultivation of soil E mail: berlyolga@yandex.ru Ermak Natalia Borisovna, Novokuznetsk Institute (branch) of Federal state budgetary educational institution of higher professional education “Kemerovo state University”, candidate of biological Sciences, professor of the Department of ecology and technosphere safety, head of the Department of ecology and technosphere safety E mail: [email protected] Potokina Marina Vladimirovna, Novokuznetsk Institute (branch) of Federal state budgetary educational institution of higher professional education “Kemerovo state University”, Senior lecturer of the Department of ecology and technosphere safety E mail: [email protected] Soil-ecological condition of the tailings OJSC “Abagurskaya agglomeration factory” Abstract: The article is about the possibilities of application of waste treatment facilities of municipal sew- age as non-traditional soil conditioner for the process of restoration of disturbed lands in Novokuznetsk indus- trial hub. This study represents a characteristic of sewage sludge as a potential nitrogen-phosphoric fertilizer for the remediation of toxic and sterile substrates, which compose storage of industrial waste. In 1996, a group of scientists launched a demonstrational project of sanitary erosion-preventive recultivation on the tailing dump of Abagurskaya agglomeration factory. Using comparative-geographical and comparative-genetic methods of research, the authors give the characteristics of the soil-ecological condition of key areas of the tailing dump. The study reveals, the features of structure of the reference soil profiles and characteristics of their main physical and chemical indicators (humus content, caution-exchange capacity, the value of pH and granulometric composition). Also it represents data of correlation of different groups of plants in the structure of phytocenoses on key areas. The species composition of the vegetation is largely determined by the soil-ecological conditions of those areas. So, introduction of sewage sludge on the surface of the tailing dump caused considerable artificial improvement of edaphic state, good soil-ecological condition of technogenic soil and increase of species diversity of plant groups on recultivated site as compared to self-growing area. Keywords: disturbed land, man-made landscape, tailing dump, sewage sludge, non-traditional soil conditioner, soil-ecological condition, embrysoils, technogenic soils. The introduction soil and environmental properties, including with the use of According to expert estimates of scientists, the total area non-traditional soil conditioner (improvers), in particular, of disturbed lands in the Kemerovo region is about 91,7 thou- wastewater sludge (WWS) [2], which forms as a byproduct sand hectares [1]. The natural landscape of the southern Kuz- of sewage’s treatment. bass was significantly transformed because of the influence Brown flocculent mass of activated sludge with a very large of more than 500 mining and processing enterprises. The area of the active surface of particles what is about of 100 m 2 substrate of dumps is often phytotoxic and has adverse agro- per 1 g. of dry matter, moisture in the range of 96–99,2 % and physical properties and inhibits the processes of self-growing. ash content of 25–30 %, contains 15–20 % of connections lig- Improving phytocenoses recovery conditions in this case is nohumate complex, prevails in the composition of WWS. Ac- possible by forming a root layer with potentially favorable tive sludge is rich in N, P2O5 and trace elements, such as: Cu,

3 Section 1. Biology

Mo, Zn. Forms of N, P, K, which are absorb by plants, are this, the authors of the article on the surface of the first tailing contained in concentrations close to the characteristics of dump was carried out soil-environmental large-scale shooting, + – nitrogen-phosphate fertilizers: NH4 3,5–12,3, NO3 59–111, laid soil profiles, selected samples of soils and described the

K2O 13,7, 20–40 mg. P2O5/100 g. Also, there are gradually composition of plant communities key areas [10]. deposited enough humic substances [3, 4]. The organic part In their study, the authors adhere to profile-genetic soil of the activated sludge is presented by a microbiocenosis, classification of technogenic landscapes (Kurachev, Andro- compounds of proteins, lipids, carbohydrates, lignohumate hanov, 2002). There is a class of embrysoils — young soils, substances and other. which were formed in terms of anthropogenic landscape, but WWS have a high rate of accumulation in the sludge by elementary soil processes, typical for zonal soils. When beds and at the same time they contain harmful substances, the weak differentiation of the mineral part of the profile, em- in particular, organic poisons, chemicals, salts of heavy met- brysoils differ in the morphology and genesis of organogenic als, pathogenic microorganisms, eggs of helminthes, etc. horizons. So, organo-accumulative type of embrysoils has a

This requires the development of special approaches to the leaf litterA 0 , sod type of embrysoils — horizon As , humus-ac- utilization of wastewater sludge. The demonstration project, cumulative type of embrysoils — horizon A1 [8]. In contrast, which was carried out on the tailing dump of Abagurskaya ag- the class of technogenic soils includes reclaimed land, with glomeration factory, has a double aim: the disposal of sewage the creation of artificial substrates, which similar on soil, with sludge and remediation of toxic waste of iron ore enrichment, favorable root zone layer, whose development of soil-forming which are located in the residential part of Novokuznetsk [2]. processes play rather profile transforming role [5, 7]. Detailed The object of the research mapping of soil surface tailing dump was conducted in accor- The tailing dump has area is about of 350 hectares and dance with the technology of mapping along transects length there was reclaimed over 100 million tonnes of wastes from of 10 m. (Greig-Smith, 1967; Androhanov, Kurachev, 2010). wet magnetic separation of iron ore. In the composition of The main physico-chemical characteristics of soils de- the tailings is dominated by iron-bearing minerals, such as: fined using standard analytical methods of analysis (content of magnetite 6–11 %, pyrite 9–13 %, limonite 4–8 %, hematite organic carbon Corg and humus on method I. V. Tyurin; cation 0,8–1,1 %, among non-metallic minerals — garnet, amphi- exchange capacity by Bobko-Askinazi-Aleshin in modification bole, pyroxene, epidote, serpentinite. Great level of phyto- of Grabarova and Uvarova; granulometric composition ac- toxicity and very high density rocks (3,19–3,44 g/cm 3) de- cording to the method of N. A. Kaczynski; the pH of the soil termine the long-term existence of man-made deserts on the extract — potentiometrically). surface of the hydraulic dump. Such standard methods of geobotanical and floristic re- The perspective of extraction of valuable components from searches, as the splitting of trial plots and comparative map- tails makes a conducting fundamental long-term recultivation ping, were used for characterize of composition and structure unprofitable [2, 6]. In this case it is necessary to create a sus- of plant communities (Ermak, 2013). On two key areas four test tainable vegetative cover for prevent the development of pro- sites were selected. On this sites were conducted researches of cesses of wind and water erosion. In 1996, a team of experts systematic composition, environmental indicators of vegetation from the Institute of Soil science and Agrochemistry of Siberian cover, also assessing the productivity of plant communities on branch of the Russian Academy of Sciences (Novosibirsk), also recultivation plot and self-growing area. Comparative mapping Kuzbass state pedagogical Academy (Novokuznetsk), JSC “Vo- method — this is comparing the old plans, maps, and satel- dokanal” (ib.), OJSC “West Siberian testing centre” (ib.), OJSC lite imagery with modern conditions of tailing dump. “Novokuznetsk metallurgical plant” (ib.) founded experimental Results and discussion recultivation plot with applying a layer of WWS with a capacity The characteristic of soil cover. of 30 cm. on the surface of the first tailing dump [7]. The most striking differences of soil-ecological and phyto- The original purpose of the experiments, which were cenotic indicators was characterized for key areas with recul- conducted on the tailing dump, was the creation of habitats, tivated site and self-growing plot. Following the cartographic soil and ecological functions their could ensure sustainable method of research man-made landscape, by the authors of development of the phytocenoses [7]. The study confirmed this article were to estimate the share of different types of that the sediment biogenic elements, which were introduced young soils in the structure of the soil cover in the researched from WWS and sufficient moisture let to reduce the degree plots. At the recultivation area the share of such type of yong of sterility tails and create the conditions for the existence of soil, as technozem organogenic, is 71,56 %, and the share of phytocenosis on the surface of the hydraulic dump [4]. embrysoil initial is 28,44 %. Soil cover in the plot of self-grow- Materials and methods ing was represented by embrysoil initial fully. An important part of the assessment of recovery man-made Morphological study helped to identify the main features landscape is conducting soil-environmental research, which in- of the structure of the profiles researched types of these young cluded in the diagnosis of its current environmental state soils. At low power and youth of the soil profile, in technozem with a view to its inclusion in one of the following categories: organogenic on recultivated area there are main organogenic relative, satisfactory, critical, crisis or catastrophic [7, 8]. For horizons — steppe felt A0 and sod As with capacity of up to

4 Soil-ecological condition of the tailings OJSC “Abagurskaya agglomeration factory”

10 cm. with a lumpy-porosity structure. The underlying ho- Ermak, 2009, 2011) looks like this: mesophytes 30 %, mes- rizons D1 and D2 partially painted by humic substances to a oxerophytes 47 %, xeromesophytes 7 %, xerophytes 37 % [9]. depth of 50 cm. The profile of embrysoil initial almost not In the phytocenosis of self-growing plot were identi- differentiated by genetic horizons, its composition and struc- fied 38 species of plants, which are belonging to 16 families. ture inherited from a substrate of the tailing dump, organo- 16 % of them (accordingly 6 species) belong to the family accumulative processes are not morphologically expressed. Fabaceae: Medicago sativa L., Medicago lupulina L.; 5 % (or Therefore, the profile of these soils is a soil-forming substrate 2 species) are representatives of the family Poaceae. The and may consist of several layers C1, C2, etc. proportion of motley grass is 81 % (26 species herbaceous Due to the high content of organic matter in the mass plants), such as: Artemisia vulgaris L., Artemisia absinthium, of the WWS, the concentration of total Corg in the hori- Echium vulgare L., Chelidonium majus L. and others. The grass zon As of technozem organogenic reaches 5,86 % (accord- productivity of self-growing area is 53 centner per hectare ingly 10,1 % of humus), the value of cation exchange ca- of live aboveground phytomass (18 centner per hectare of pacity is 24,73 mEq/100 g soil into horizon As , down to dry weight). The ratio of ecogroups of plants (Berlyakova,

15,53 …15,76 in the levels of D1 , D2. The content ofC org in Ermak, 2009, 2011) looks like this: mesophytes — 36 %, embrysoil initial slightly — 1,92 % (3,32 % humus), when val- mesoxerophytes 9 %, 27,5 % of xeromesophytes and xero- ues of cation exchange capacity are 15,08. The pH values of phytes (Berlyakova, Ermak, 2009, 2011). young soils are in the range of 6,99...7,17. Accordingly, the difference in the number of species for The results of granulometric analysis of young soils of the two communities is a 1,5 orders of magnitude. The diver- hydraulic dump are consistent with previously obtained sity index Simpson for phytocenosis of recultivated plot (Ber- data [Androhanov, Ovsyannikova Kurachev, 2000]. The lyakova, Ermak, 2009, 2011) was 0,56, which is characteristic high proportion of physical fractions of sand in the horizon of unstable, developing communities. The resulting index on

C1 (94,91 %) of embrysoil initial inheritied from the phase the second key area — 0,09; its usually observed in highly de- of technogenesis. Due the processes of humification and the graded natural communities with a high degree of dominance accumulation of organic substances into the WWS, the origi- of individual species. nal substrate of the dump is enriching by clay fractions, the Species, which are growing on the self-growing plot, are proportion of sand fractions reduces to 80,43 %. highly tolerant to adverse environmental conditions. The long The characteristic of vegetation cover. existence of initial plant communities determines the direc- The main feature of the vegetation of the studied man- tion of further development of plant communities and the made objects is the formation of plant communities, which are conversion of the substrate of hydraulic dump, contributing peculiar only to man-made landscapes and associated with the to the formation of ecological niches. For example, representa- phased development of soils and ecological communities [8]. tives of the family Fabaceae initiate the process of accumula- Consider the structure of plant communities on key areas tion of nitrogen in the profile of embrysoil initial, reducing the of the tailings. On the surface of not covered substrate of tail- degree of sterility of the substrate. However, this process is in- ing dump successional shifts do not occur. The species compo- hibited by exposure to adverse edaphic conditions in the sur- sition of simple meadow-marsh community on the recultivat- face layers of hydraulic dump. The high level of xeromorphic ed area was identified of seed material, which was made with of tailing dump contributes to this. WWS. Sowing longroot and bunchgrass poaceaes in 1997 and Xeromesophytes and xerophytes represented equally on a 1998 led to the development of sustainable poaceae-artemisia plot of self-growing. The emergence of mesoxerophytes on re- of culture-phytocenose. From 1999 to 2001, observed dis- cultivated plot indicates about more favorable water regime in tribution and a subsequent settlement of diasporas of higher the profile of technozem organogenic. The change in botanical plants from natural landscapes [4]. composition of the phytocenose on a community with pe- During the study of the structure of the plant community rennial grasses, where representatives of the families Fabaceae pilot sites identified 54 species of plants, which are belonging and Poaceae prevail, has largely been possible due to the pres- to 22 families [Berlyakova, Ermak, 2014]. 8 % (accordingly ence in the upper part of the soil profile of the substances that 4 species) of them, are representatives of the family Fabaceae: provide mineral nutrition of the plants root system. Melilotus officinalis Pall., Melilotus albus Medik. and other, 14 % Assessment of projective cover of grass using the grid of (7 species) — belong to the family Poaceae: Bromus arven‑ L. G. Ramensky showed strong differences: on the recultivat- sis L., Festuca pratensis Huds, Dactylis glomerata L., Poa praten‑ ed plot it was 80 %, in the area of self-growing it is not more sis L., Agrostis tenuis Sibth., Echium vulgare L. The proportion of than 10 %. In the species composition of vegetation cover motley grass is 78 % (43 species of herbaceous plants). In the on the first key area is dominated by loosely turf grasses and group of grasses dominate Artemisia vulgaris L., Artemisia ab‑ dense turf grasses, on the second — sternebrae plants. In these sinthium L., Echium vulgare L., Lappula squarrosa (Retz.). The conditions, forming of sustainable anti-erosion cover, was per- grass productivity of recultivated plot is 74 centner per hectare formed only on recultivated plot. A substrate of the tailing of live aboveground phytomass (or 41 centner per hectare of dump is very phyto-toxic and prevents to natural development dry weight). The ratio of ecogroups of plants (Berlyakova, of the vegetation cover.

5 Section 1. Biology

The conclusion stable plant community on the surface of the tailings and sig- The researches of soil cover and phytocenoses of ex- nificantly reduce the intensity of functioning of the formed perienced sites, area of each of them is 100 m 2, allowed to phytocenoses [7]. extrapolate the obtained data on typical geomorphological In the conclusion we should say that sanitary-anti-ero- areas of the surface of tailing dump and evaluate the soil-en- sion recultivation with fixing of surface levels of the hydraulic vironmental condition of recultivation plot with a complex dump, in general, is quite ecological effective, in the absence plant community as good, and accordingly, for self-groving of technologies for industrial processing of “tails”. Creating area with pioneer plant grouping as unsatisfactory. However, habitats with soil-ecological functions, which will provide the fast formation of organic-accumulative horizon using sustainable development of communities, let to reduce the WWS doesn’t make possibility to solve all soil-environmen- negative impacts of hydraulic dump. Using of WWS as non- tal problems on the surface of the tailing dump due to lack of traditional soil conditioner will solve the problem of overload signs of destruction and humification processes in profile of sludge drying beds. This type of recultivation is also the most technozem organogenic. At the same this technology of re- cost-effective from the point of view of conservation of the cultivation allows to achieve the goal is to create a relatively tailing dump, as prospective industrial mineral deposits. References: 1. Mazikin V. State and prospects of development of the coal industry of Kuzbass on the threshold of XXI century: proceedings of the Intern. scientific-practical conference. “Ecological problems of the coal industry in the region on the transition to sustainable development”, – Volume 1, – Kemerovo, – 1999, – Р. 3–22. 2. Vodoleev A., Androhanov V., Klekovkin S. Organizational and technological alternatives for recultivation of man-made disturbed lands: Eco-Bulletin of INECA, – Volume 4 (129), – Novokuznetsk, – 2008, – Р. 26–28. 3. Evilevich A., Emilevich M. Disposal of sewage sludge, – Leningrad: stroiizdat, – 1988, – 248 p. 4. Vodoleev A., Stepnov A., Kudashkina S. Prospects of technology of using of sewage sludge for recultivation: Problems of ecology and health of the industrial cities and their solutions, – Novokuznetsk, – 2004, – Р. 28–31. 5. Androhanov V., Ovsyannikova S., Kurachev V. Technogenic soils: properties, modes of functioning, – Novosibirsk: Nauka, – 2000, – 200 p. 6. Gadjiyev I., Kurachev V., Androhanov V. Strategy and prospects of solving the problems of recultivation of man-made land, – Novosibirsk: CERIS, – 2001, – 37 p. 7. Androhanov V., Kurachev V. Soil-environmental condition of technogenic landscapes: the dynamics and evaluation, – Novosibirsk: Publishing house of SB RAS, – 2010, – 224 p. 8. Dvurechensky V., Sokolov D., Toporovskaya A., Berlyakova O. Soil-ecological state of urban areas in Western Siberia (on the example of Novokuznetsk): Soil science and Agrochemistry, – Volume 2, – Alma-Ata, – 2011, – Р. 5–14. 9. Berlyakova O., Ermak N. The characteristic of soil-ecological condition of natural-technogenic systems of the city Novokuznetsk: proceedings of the Intern. scientific conference “Natural-technogenic complexes: recultivation and sustainable operation”, – Novosibirsk: publishing house of the Ocarina, – 2013, – Р. 63–67. 10. Berlyakova O., Ermak N., Potokina M. Experience of application of sewage sludge for recultivation of tailing dump OJSC “Abagurskaya agglomeration factory”: technological platform “Solid minerals”: technological and environmental problems of mining of natural and man-made deposits: reports of the scientific-practical conference 1–2 October 2013, – Ekaterinburg: Institute of mining, UB of the Russian Academy of Sciences, – 2013, – Р. 157–162.

Kondratyuk Ekaterina Yurievna Polikarpov Ivan Novikov Eugene, Institute of Systematics and Ecology of Animals, Novosibirsk, Russia, E‑mail: [email protected]

Does the maturation rate affect on longevity in red- backed voles (Myodes rutilus) in laboratory condition Abstract: Our investigation directed on testing assumptions about increase longevity through elongation age of maturation. The physiological characteristics (oxygen consumption and immunity) was different depend on sea- son born of animals of native population. For experiment in laboratory condition we used fall-born animals which

6 Does the maturation rate affect on longevity in red-backed voles (Myodes rutilus) in laboratory condition directed to “winter” or “summer’ path way development. For “winter” animals we noted delay of maturation. But in metabolic rate and level of immune response there were no significant intra-group different. These data suggested about important of transmission of information about future environmental conditions from mother. Keywords: maturation, photoperiodic control, basal metabolic rates, humoral immune response, longevity. The analysis of more than 600 mammalian species re- But in the natural population not possible get data for an- vealed positive correlation of adult life span with time to swer on question what was influence on longevity: the matura- maturity and negative — with individual growth rate (De tion rates or seasonal variability in the severity of environmen- Magalhaes, Costa, 2009). As known the individual longev- tal challenges. To answer this question we regularly measured ity is strongly depends on the time birth at seasonally breeding physiological characteristics in wild-derived juvenile individu- terrestrial rodents. Animals from late seasonal cohorts usually als of red-backed voles of the same autumn cohort whose onto- remain to be immature till the next spring and can live for genetic development was artificially routed by exposing to dif- more than one year (Olenev, 2002). Physiological mecha- ferent photoperiodic regimes that corresponds to “summer” or nisms of such variability in life span are still poor understood. “winter” conditions. Six month later light regime was inverted Possible explanation can be derived from one of the theories for both groups. All the animals were maintained in individual based on “rate-of-living” paradigm: free radical theory (Har- cages with food and water provided ad libitum. man, 1981), retrograde response, which activates mitochon- Individuals that were initially exposed to the short-day drial biogenesis, accompanies cellular ageing processes (Pas- photoperiod (8L : 16D) revealed significantly lower plasma sos et al., 2007), We investigated physiological processes in testosterone in the first two month of experiment in com- seasonally-depended aging on wild animals. parison with animals from group whose exposed to long-day In our study of native population of red-backed vole we (16L : 8D) photoperiod (fig. 3). revealed increased basal metabolic rate and decrease immune response on non-replicated antigen (SRBC) in individuals of the spring cohorts that attained maturity in the year of the birth (fig. 1, 2).

Fig. 3. Level of plasma testosterone in juvenile males of red-backed vole that were exposed to different photoperiod (* — t = 2.2; p < 0.03) But we had not found significant between-group differ- ences in basal oxygen consumption during all researched one year period (fig. 4).

Fig. 1. Basal metabolic rate of individuals of natural population of red-backed voles (* — P < 0.05; Student t‑test)

Fig. 4. Basal oxygen consumption at red-backed voles (Solid line — rapid maturated (“summer”) and dashed line — slow maturated (“winter”)) The level of humoral immune response was estimated by antibody titers (total Ig). This level also had no significant in- Fig. 2. Specific immune response of individuals of natu- tergroup differences. However, the inversion of dark-lite re- ral population of red-backed voles gime from “summer” to “winter” lead to increased of total (* — P < 0.05; Student t‑test) antibody titers (t = 2.2; p < 0.05) (fig. 5).

7 Section 1. Biology

Significant differences in metabolic rates and immunity were also revealed in an experiment with “reversed” proto- col (animals with different time of born exposed by the same photoperiod) [6]. These results can be explained by the pres- ence of transfer of information about the environment during the prenatal period and time raising.

Fig. 5. Total antibody titers in plasma of red-backed voles (White column — fast maturation (“summer”) and dark column — delayed maturation (“winter”)) This data is consistent with winter increase of humoral im- munity described by Moshkin et al., 1998 in wild population of red-backed vole. In general we can conclude that in constant laboratory conditions, rate of sexual maturation had not effect on physi- ological traits essential for the survival from the point of view of rate-of-living theory. Respectively animals of both groups Fig. 6. Cumulative proportion of survival animals had the similar rates of survival (U = –0.5; p = 0.6; n = 51; Cox- (Solid line — rapid (“summer”), dashed line — slow Mantel Test) (fig. 6). maturation (“winter”), Plus — animals living still) References: 1. De Magalhaes J. P., Costa J. A database of vertabrate longevity records and their relation to other life-history traits//Jevol Biol. – 2009. – 22 (8): 1770–1774. 2. Harman D. The aging process//Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. – 1981. – 78 (11): 7124–7128. 3. Moshkin M. P., Dobrotvorsky A. K., Mak V. V., Panov V. V., Dobrotvorskaya E. A. Variability of immune response to het- erologous erythrocytes during population cycles of red (Clethrionomys rutilus Pallas) and bank (Cl. glareolus Schreber) voles//Oikos. – 1998. – 82 (3–4): 131–138. 4. Olenev G. V. Alternative types of ontogeny in cyclomorphic rodents and their role in population dynamics: An ecological analysis//Russian Journal of Ecology. – 2002. – 33 (5): 321–330. 5. Passos J. F., von Zglinicki T., Kirkwood T. B. Mitochondria and ageing: winning and losing in the number game//Bioes- says. – 2007. 29 (9): 908–917. 6. Rogovin K. A., Bushuev A. V., Khruschova A. M., Vasilieva N. Yu. Resting metabolic rate, stress, testosterine, and induced im- mune response in spring and fall born males of campbell’s dwarf hamsters: maintence in long day conditions//Biology bulletin reviews. – 2014. – 4 (3): 181–191.

Orlova Darya Genadievna, Orenburg State Pedagogical University, Postgraduate Student, Department of Natural Sciences and Economics E‑mail: [email protected]

Bio-morphological characteristic of some wood and bush plants of maloideae web. subfamily of Orenburg with regard to the variability of fruit and seed parameters Abstract: The article presents the research of changes of morphological characteristics of fruits of three genera of Maloideae Web. subfamily. Variability coefficient is used as variability measurement to compare the degree of vari- ability of characteristics. Significant differences were revealed for linear sizes, which indicate the inhomogeneity of

8 Bio-morphological characteristic of some wood and bush plants of maloideae web. subfamily of Orenburg... the studied material. The method of correlation analysis established the medium interrelation between fruit mass and its length and width. Keywords: Maloideae Web., morphology, variability, variability coefficient, fruits. Lately, works on the use of natural plant resources have Digital information was processed by generally accepted become more and more current. In this regard, special atten- methods of mathematical statistics [2, 268–297; 4, 99–101]. tion is paid to all-round study as well as further use of berry Results of research plants in business activity [3, 139–142]. Moreover, many It is believed that the variability of a characteristic is in- plants have a decorative value due to diversified forms, sizes significant, if variability coefficientС ( V) does not ex- and colors of fruits, which is undoubtedly important when ceed 10 %, of the average value, if СV is more than 10 %, but using them in landscape gardening in urban environment. less than 20 %, and it is significant, if variability coefficient is The Maloideae Web. subfamily includes fruit seed cul- over 20 % [2, 268–297]. Depending on the degree of vari- tures. Apple, pear and quince trees are usually considered the ability, there are three main groups of characteristics with most important cultures in this subfamily. But, nowadays, low, medium and very high degree of variability. such genera as chokeberry, ash and hawthorn are becoming The evaluation of individual variability of morphological popular [1, 14–17]. characteristics of fruits (Table 1) shows that for most stud- The seeds that are grown and later used in the same ied species, insignificant variability (less than 10 %) is typi- natural zone are deemed to have the best sawing quali- cal. The most stable characteristics may include the width of ties [5, 3–4]. This is precisely why the conduct of researches a fruit; fluctuation of this characteristic in all species is not on uncovering the loci of genetic fund of wood and bush high and maximal value is 8,9 % for hybrid ash. The number of genera of aborigines and introducents in a particular zone, seeds in 1 fruit was highly variable for all species (Сv changes evaluation of their biological and ecological properties, seed from 1,4 to 43,7 %). The characteristic with medium degree productivity and qualities of seed material is of certain sci- of variability is the mass of 1 fruit (1,0–14 %) and the weight entific interest. of 100 fruits respectively (1,4–13,5 %). The goal of our work was to present bio-morphological The medium mass of fruits varies from 0,5 to 0,8 g. The characteristic of generative representatives of Aronia Medik. highest medium mass of fruits is of the representative of Cra‑ (chokeberry), Crataegus L. (hawthorn) and Sorbus L. (ash) taegus L. — Crataegus Arnoldiana and accounted for 3,63 g genera in terms of the degree of variability of fruit parameters, (Fig. 1). Also, Arnold hawthorn has the maximal values for yielding capacity and seed productivity. all other parameters. 9 species served as main objects in the work: Aronia mela‑ According to the obtained values, all studied species can nocarpa (Michx.) Elliot. (black chokeberry), Crataegus altaica be divided into three groups: Lge. var insica C. K. Schneid. (Altai crataegus, the form with 1. Small fruit plants: Crataegus dahurica, Crataegus al‑ parted leaves), Crataegus Arnoldiana Sang. (Arnold hawthorn), taica var insica; Crataegus dahurica Koehne. (Dahurian hawthorn), Crataegus 2. Medium fruit plants: Aronia melanocarpa, Crataegus shlo‑ sanguineа Pall. (red hawthorn), Crataegus shlorosarca Maxim. rosarca, Crataegus sanguineа, Sorbus aucuparia, Sorbus hybridа; (green hawthorn), Crataegus Maximowiczii C. K. Schneid. 3. Big fruit plants: Crataegus Arnoldiana, Crataegus Max‑ (Maximovich hawthorn), Sorbus aucuparia L. (mountain ash), imowiczii (Table 1, Fig. 1). Sorbus hybrida L. (hybrid ash). The seeds of the studied species were analyzed accord- Method of research ing to three indicators: length, width of a seed and mass of The main parameters of measurement were: fruit size 1000 seeds. All indicators have different degree of variabil- (length, width), fruit mass, mass of 100 fruits, number ity in the studied seeds. The length of seeds is different for of seed in a fruit, yield of seeds from 100 fruits, seed sizes all nine species and changes within the limit from 0,3 cm. to (length, width), weight of 1000 seeds (GOST 13056.6 –97). 0,74 cm. The width of seeds varies less: the width of a seed Morphologically ripened fruits were selected from upper and was 0,2 cm. for four species — minimal value, 0,38 cm. for medium decks and peripheral parts. two species — maximal value. The weight of 1000 seeds The degree of variability was determined through the cal- was the most variable among all analyzed characteristics of culation of variability coefficient [4, 99–101]. seeds — the degree of variability changed from 0,5 to 7,6 % To compare the variability of morphological characteris- (mass changes from 1,42 to 58,6 cm.) (Table 2). tics as variability measurement, variability coefficientr ( ) was With the results obtained in the course of consistent mea- used, the evaluation of which was performed according to the surements of length, width and mass of fruits, we managed to method proposed by Dospekhov B. A. If ta ≥ ttheor, the correla- conduct a complete correlation analysis (Table 3). tion relationship is significant, and at at < ttheor — it is insignifi- The conducted correlation analysis revealed significant cant [2, 268–297]. Furthermore, it is believed that at r < 0,3 the and insignificant correlation relationship between separate correlation dependence between characteristics is weak, me- morphological parameters. There is a positive direct relation dium at r = 0,3–0,7, and strong at r > 0,7 [2, 268–297]. with medium degree between all studied characteristics.

9 Section 1. Biology %

, – 20 V 2,5 1,0 0,6 3,7 21,5 13,4 13,85 С %

, – – V 2,8 7,2 7,6 0,5 3,7 0,7 2,8 С 100 fruits – Pcs. 369 ± 46 323 ± 25 417 ± 2,6 371 ± 1,2 463,3±8,2 297 ± 34,5 360 ± 7,65 Number of seeds in of seeds in Number 273,3±26,9 %

, 18 V 3,2 2,0 8,5 1,4 8,6 3,5 19,2 43,7 С Weight of 1000 seeds Weight – – cm 54,1±0,3 1 fruit 30,5 ± 2,8 21,0 ± 0,9 3,6 ± 0,06 1,42 ± 0,02 14,4 ± 0,04 58,6 ± 1,25 Pcs. 3,0 ± 0,3 3,4 ± 0,4 4,8 ± 0,1 4,6±0,06 4,3 ± 0,05 3,3 ± 0,16 3,7 ± 0,03 3,7 ± 0,01 1,35 ± 0,14 Number of seeds in of seeds in Number %

, – V 3,1 1,4 1,7 4,5 9,5 8,6 2,0 13,5 С %

, V 4,5 8,9 3,3 6,0 3,5 1,5 8,2 4,5 17,0 С g – 300 ± 2,5 71,2 ± 5,5 50,8 ± 0,5 45,1 ± 1,2 65,9 ± 3,6 6,93±0,42 99,5 ± 2,36 191,83±4,2 Weight of 100 fruits Weight Width %

, – 14 V 3,4 5,7 1,0 11,4 1,12 4,78 19,6 С cm 0,38±0,01 0,2 ± 0,006 0,3 ± 0,005 0,2 ± 0,007 0,2 ± 0,004 0,2 ± 0,006 0,26 ± 0,01 0,34 ± 0,009 0,38 ± 0,003 g – Fruit mass Fruit 2,20±0,1 0,5 ± 0,14 0,68±0,04 0,77 ± 0,06 3,63 ± 0,07 0,69 ± 0,02 1,0 ± 0,005 0,45 ± 0,003 Seed size Seed %

, V 3,8 8,9 4,6 1,0 4,6 0,8 % 1,13 1,67 8,15

, С V 1,9 3,3 1,8 2,2 5,8 5,4 0,02 1,54 0,65 С Width cm 1,0 ± 0,02 1,0 ± 0,05 1,54±0,03 1,03 ± 0,03 1,76 ± 0,01 1,07 ± 0,02 Length 0,92 ± 0,009 0,92 ± 0,005 1,12 ± 0,005 %

, Fruit size Fruit 27 V 5,0 5,0 4,0 0,9 2,6 6,7 1,55 2,17 С cm 0,74±0,02 0,3 ± 0,003 0,5 ± 0,005 0,55 ± 0,005 0,46 ± 0,004 0,39 ± 0,004 0,72 ± 0,009 0,39 ± 0,001 0,47 ± 0,007 Length cm 1,0 ± 0,03 0,8 ± 0,01 1,0 ± 0,02 1,50±0,02 1,03 ± 0,02 1,93 ± 0,02 1,01 ± 0,03 1,03 ± 0,16 0,78 ± 0,004 L. genera Table 1.– Data of linear parameters and mass fruits some representatives Aronia Medik., Crataegus L., Sorbus L. genera Table 2. – Data of linear parameters and mass seeds some representatives Aronia Medik., Crataegus L., Sorbus Name of a plant Name Name of a plant Name Sorbus aucuparia Sorbus hybrida Maximowiczii Crataegus Crataegus Arnoldiana Crataegus insica var altaica Crataegus Crataegus dahurica Crataegus Aronia melanocarpa Aronia Aronia melanocarpa Aronia shlorosarca Crataegus sanguineа Crataegus Crataegus shlorosarca Crataegus Crataegus sanguineа Crataegus Crataegus dahurica Crataegus insica var altaica Crataegus Crataegus Arnoldiana Crataegus Maximowiczii Crataegus Sorbus aucuparia Sorbus hybrida

10 Bio-morphological characteristic of some wood and bush plants of maloideae web. subfamily of Orenburg...

Fig. 1. Hawthorn fruits: А. Crataegus sanguineа (red hawthorn); B. Crataegus Arnoldiana (Arnold hawthorn)

Table 3. – Correlation analysis according to linear parameters and mass of fruits Pair correlation coefficient Species Length-mass Width-mass Length-width

r ta ttheor r ta ttheor r ta ttheor Crataegus sanguinea 0,56 2,18 2,16 0,69 2,90 2,16 0,55 2,13 2,16 Crataegus dahuruca 0,74 3,40 2,16 0,64 2,70 2,16 0,67 2,80 2,16 Crataegus altaica var insica 0,08 0,29 2,16 0,65 2,04 2,30 0,08 0,28 2,16 Crataegus arnoldiana 0,74 3,28 2,16 0,05 0,17 2,16 0,40 1,38 2,16 Crataegus Maximowiczii 0,76 4,74 2,0 0,8 5,23 2,0 0,56 0,30 2,0 Aronia melanocarpa 0,55 2,13 2,16 0,28 0,99 2,16 0,01 0,034 2,16 Sorbus aucuparia 0,23 0,80 2,1 0,55 1,89 1,2 0,11 0,38 2,2 The most significant interrelation was discovered be- deae Web. subfamily growing in the conditions of Orenburg’s tween the parameters length-mass and length-width, i. e. the extreme continental climate was presented. length of fruits correlates positively with the mass of fruits It was established that for each of studied genera, indi- (r = 0,3 – 0,7), also, it is in close interrelation with the width vidual variability varies within different limits. of fruits in most studied species. Materials on evaluation of individual variability of fruits of Weak correlation relationships were reveled in Cratae‑ the studied species give grounds to distinguish several groups gus altaica var insica between the length and width of fruits among them. Crataegus Arnoldiana and Crataegus Maximow‑ (r = 0,08), and also between the length and mass of fruits iczii had the highest quantitative parameters of fruits. Accord- (r = 0,08). For these parameters, the dependence was not ing to combination of these characteristics, the fruits of this discovered in Sorbus aucuparia: r = 0,23 and 0,11 respectively. species should be recognized as big fruit. Crataegus dahurica, Conclusions Crataegus altaica var insica. have relatively low sizes, which is The evaluation of individual variability of morphological characterized by small fruit against the background of other characteristics of fruits and seeds of some spieces of Maloi‑ species. References: 1. Vitkovsky V. L. Fruit plants of the world. – SPb.: Published by «Lan», – 2003. – P. 14–17. 2. Dospekhov B. A. Method of field experience (with the basis of statistical processing of research results). – M.: Agropromiz- dat, – 1985. – Р. 268–297. 3. Evtukhova O. M., Teplyuk N. Yu., Shemberg M. A. Individual variability of morphological and chemical characteristics of fruits of cranberry tree in the southern part of the central Siberia//Chemistry of natural raw material, – № 2. – Р. 139–142. 4. Zaitsev G. N. Method of biometrical calculations. Mathematical statistics in experimental botanics. – M.: «Nauka», – 1973. – Р. 1–256. 5. Panina T. A. Morpho-biological ground of seed productivity of bush species (aborigines and introducents) in the steppe zone of the South Ural. Author’s summary. Dissertation of a Candidate of biology. – Orenburg, – 2010. – Р. 3–4.

11 Section 2. Geography

Section 2. Geography Volkova Tatiana Aleksandrovna, Associate Professor at the Department of International tourism and management Antipceva Julia Olegovna, Associate Professor at the Department of physical geography Mishchenko Aleksander Aleksandrovich, Associate Professor at the Department of physical geography, Kuban State University E‑mail: [email protected]

Prospects of preservation and present condition of geological and geo-morphological sites of tourist interest in Krasnodar region Abstract: Geological and geo-morphological monuments of nature in Krasnodar region are popular sites among tourists; hence, their present and future condition depends directly on the character and pace of recreation develop- ment. Moreover, Russian legislation on environmental management, which is currently at the stage of active reforma- tion, influences further existence and successful functioning of these natural sites. Keywords: Krasnodar region, geological nature monuments, geo-morphological nature monuments, nature preservation, specially protected natural sites, recreation. The territory of Krasnodar region is exclusively rich in Reference of a site to a narrow profile of a geological or unique natural complexes and separate natural sites. Nomi- geo-morphological nature monument certifies about its spe- nally, they can be divided into two groups: some of them have cific as a relief or recourses element (for instance, geological nature preservation status established by the state, i. e. spe- uncovering, morphostructure, relief form). Whereas, land- cially protected natural sites (SPNS), the other are so called scape and complex profile of a nature monument, that a geo- sites of tourist interest and not subject to protection officially. logical or geo-morphological formation can be, indicates that Both are very popular among the outdoor recreation lovers. a concrete site is specific as well as the space surrounding it, Nowadays, nature monuments have become a tourist the nature complex with all its alive and unalive components destination, short-term as a rule (so called weekend get- (Akhun mountain, Sobor cliff etc.). aways). The most popular among such sites are: Soberbash A geological nature monument is a unique site (a com- mountain, Indyuk rock massif, the cave of Fanagoriya, Guam plex of interrelated sites) of natural origin or a site that fully ravine and other. and visually characterizes the course of geological processes Nature monuments are rare or remarkable natural and their results for the given area. sites valuable from scientific, cultural or healthcare point. Stratotypes, geological uncoverings that can be a sample They may include both formations of isolated character, such when establishing a relative age of deposits, are very interest- as cliffs, separately located trees, springs as well as entire areas, ing from a scientific prospective, which enables us to learn small territories, such as mountains, ravines etc. All nature about the development of geological history of the given site monuments are usually divided into geological, geo-mor- (for example, a coastal line near Gelendzhik on the Black phological, hydrological, botanic and complex and landscape Sea is formed of typical carbonate flysch of cretaceous age monuments, when same site includes several unique or typical and pronounced as the nature monument «Flysch») [3]. components. Another unique example of geological nature monuments There are 73 nature monuments of regional significance of the region are pseudo-volcanic forms of Taman peninsula, on the territory of Krasnodar region. which have a significant importance from the view of geology Maximal number of nature monuments in the region is of oil and gas, recreation and healthcare, educational tourism of botanic character aimed at preservation and recreation and educational activity [4]. of valuable botanic sites; smaller number refers to landscape Geo-morphological nature monuments are special relief sites, which are aimed at preservation and recreation of na- forms that are interesting due to their external appearance, ture complexes. sizes and origin. They are valuable from the scientific view

12 Prospects of preservation and present condition of geological and geo-morphological sites of tourist interest in Krasnodar region and as sites of educational excursions. Geo-morphological data (passports, map and photo materials) are kept at several monuments are sometimes difficult to distinguish from geo- environmental management organizations at the same time, logical ones. For instance, cliffs can be viewed as a geological which make access and work with this material difficult. monument if they are formed of a rare combination of rock As it is known that at the end of last year the law № 33‑ФЗ substance or there are petrification fossils in them; also, as a «About protected nature territories» as of 14.03.1995 was geo-morphological site if these are interesting due to external amended again. For instance, such category as SPNS was appearance and scale beats of rock formations. It is difficult removed and the functions and management of nature pres- to refer coves to one of these categories as they demonstrate ervation parks and national parks as recreation resorts and the course of development of geological processes and, at the territories were significantly reconsidered. Further existence same time, are a complicated relief form. of nature monuments remains without changes [1]. But now, One can give many examples of geo-morphological na- there are unprecedented cases that contradict radically envi- ture monuments on the territory of Krasnodar region: they in- ronmental management legislation. Herewith, there were at- clude sites of river valleys (Khadzhokhskaya narrow), forms tempts to deprive Kanyon caves of their nature monument created by selective denudation (Bogatyrskiye caves), abra- status [5]. There is no objective ground because the condition sion (Parus cliff) etc. [4]. of the given site is satisfactory; it hasn’t changed much under The observation of the condition of SPNS and, particu- the impact of recreation load as the frequency of visits is low larly, nature monuments is reflected in annually published offi- due to difficult access. cial materials. According to «The report «on the condition of It is important to perform inventory of nature monuments. environmental management and environmental protection in Large-scale inventory of nature monuments in Krasnodar re- Krasnodar region in 2012», currently, there are 404 nature gion was conducted in 1997–1999 by the staff of the Depart- monuments of regional importance on the territory of Kras- ment of geography of Kuban State University S. A. Litvinskaya nodar region. Most number of nature monuments refers to and S. P. Lozovoi. One of the results of this work was complex botanic sites and the smaller number refers to landscape sites. description of nature monuments of significant scientific, edu- The work on approval of boarders and squares of nature mon- cational and practical importance. In this respect, it should be uments of regional importance as well as on passport docu- noted that inventory should become a compulsory periodic mentation of nature monuments in Krasnodar region, within procedure apart from other environmental management events. which passports for 34 nature monuments of regional impor- Furthermore, there is a need for current systematic con- tance were prepared and approved, was done in 2012 [2]. At trol of the condition of nature monuments, the level of rec- the first glance, published figures certify about annual system- reation load, presence of and adherence to protected zones atic observation of nature monuments. However, there are and creation of an appropriate cadaster of nature monuments. few problems. For instance, the very preservation activity on It is important to emphasize that, to make the preservation of the territory of nature monuments is often of nominal char- nature monuments more important, it is required to develop acter. The flow of tourists to these sites is not regulated and environmental culture of the population, promote the value a systematic monitoring of the condition of sites is not per- of natural sites for human beings and science, because they formed. Another problem is the current absence of a unified have scientific and cultural-historical value and form the trea- cadaster of nature monuments in Krasnodar region. Different sure of the nation. References: 1. Amendments to the law about specially protected nature sites//Official website of the President of the Russian Federation. – [Electronic resource]. – Access mode: http://www.kremlin.ru/acts/19951 (access date: 15.06.2014). 2. Report «On the condition of environmental management and environmental protection in Krasnodar region in 2012». – Krasnodar, – 2013. 3. Litvinskaya S. A., Lozovoi S. P. Nature monuments of Krasnodar region. – Krasnodar: «Periodika Kubani», – 2005. 4. Pecherin A. I., Lozovoi S. P. Nature monuments of Krasnodar region. – Krasnodar: «Knizhnoe izd-vo», – 1980. 5. Deprivation of «Kanyon» caves of a nature monument status prematurely//Website of ecological shift team in the Northern Caucasus. – [Electronic resource]. – Access mode: http://www.ewnc.org/node/12440 (access date: 20.09.2014).

13 Section 3. History and archaeology

Section 3. History and archaeology Babkova Nadezhda Vyacheslavovna, Kharkov State Academy of Culture, lecturer of the Department of History of Ukraine and World History E‑mail: [email protected]

“Cossack with Musket” in the process of formation of Ukrainian state symbols in the 20–21 century Abstract: the paper is dedicated to the history of national emblem formation during the establishment of Ukrai- nian State. It deals with the part that was played by the coat of arms of Zaporizhian Host — the “Cossack with Mus- ket” — in such process. Keywords: Ukrainian State, national emblem, historical tradition. Every nation within its history pedestals in its conscious- a symbol of creative peaceful labour. Around the plough, in ness this or that melody, this or that architectural monument, a semicircle, they had to put the symbol of the old Kievan an animal or a bird, a plant or a river. Some of them become State of Vladimir the Great, the coat of arms of the Kingdom the official symbols of nation and state. Within the Ukrainian of Galicia-Volhynia, and the coat of arms of the Hetmanate — history abundant in such elements, Cossack kleinods were the Cossack with musket. At the bottom, under the plough, treated with particular respect, which was reflected in the pro- there were to be the emblems of Kiev and Lvov as two ma- cess of restoration of the Ukrainian national statehood. One of jor cultural centers of Ukraine. At the top, there had to be a the most important issues on such path was the development dove with an olive branch from the seal of the so called “Great and legitimization of the national state symbols — the flag, Duchy of Ruthenia”, 1657. As shield bearers, M. S. Grushevsky the coat of arms and the anthem. proposed to use the symbol of working people — a woman At the official level, the issue of national emblem creation with a sickle and worker with a hammer [4, 28]. appeared after the 29th of June 1917, when the representatives Independent of the authority M. S. Grushevsky had, of the Temporary Government — O. F. Kerensky, M. I. Teresh- his desires remained unfulfilled. The Commission failed to chenko and I. G. Tsereteli — undertook an obligation to rec- adopt any particular decision, and the problem was solved ognize the Central Council as the supreme government au- not so much due to its activity, as due to an impulse “from thority in Ukraine [8, 110]. On the 16th of September 1917, beyond”. In December 1917, the first bank notes of the Ukrai- M. S. Grushevsky published his thoughts regarding the Ukrai- nian People’s Republic and post stamps were issued, wherein nian-emblem symbols in the newspaper “Narodna volia” (“Na- a trident was already portrayed. tional will”) [6, 4]. The author had no preferences in respect of On the 1st of March 1918, the Small Council, which at this or that emblem image. The Ukrainian intelligentsia split that time was located in Korosten City, made a decision to down the middle on the issue of a new state emblem: supporters adopt as an emblem of the Ukrainian People’s Republic the of a historical course, who drew upon the national and historical symbol of the Kievan State during the reign of Vladimir the tradition of the Ukrainian nation, and supporters of a modern Great [16, 26]. The main reason for choosing the trident as a course, the main idea whereof was to develop a new emblem national emblem was the need in emphasizing the heredity of symbol for the young state. The Chairman of the Central Coun- Ukrainian state formation from the Kievan Rus, and the idea cil was also among those who supported the second one. of unity of Ukrainian lands that were united into a single pow- In November 1917, a meeting of the Preparatory Com- erful state formation right in the epoch of Vladimir the Great. mission took place under the chairmanship of M. S. Grush- V. G. Krichevsky, a drawing artist, was entrusted with making evsky, among the participants whereof were historians, law- design sketches of a new symbol. yers and artists. Though there were proposals made in favor Already before the official approval of trident, mass media of the “Cossack with musket”, M. S. Grushevsky insisted on started having heated disputes in respect of appropriateness the idea, which also found its supporters, that the symbol was to take such symbol for an emblem of the new state. On the not fit for the emblem of new Ukraine [3, 5]. 22nd of January 1918, L. M. Tsegelsky in his article gave prior- The Commission considered several designs of new em- ity, among other national emblems, to the golden Galician blems. And namely, the Central Council Chairman proposed lion and to Cossack with musket. According to the author, to use a golden plough against the blue background as it is those symbols that fully characterized the establishment

14 “Cossack with Musket” in the process of formation of Ukrainian state symbols in the 20–21 century of statesmanship in Ukraine [14, 1]. The next author’s article state symbols development came up again. After the deed criticized the emblems proposed by Grushevsky — the as- of association of the West-Ukrainian People’s Republic and semblage with plough, golden stars and letters, and again the Ukrainian People’s Republic, there appeared a need in proposed the Galician lion and Cossack with musket [15, 1]. the creation of an emblem of the United Ukraine. A project Leonid K. also made a stand for the Cossack with musket, approved by the Ministry of People’s Education of the Ukrai- who fully considered it to be the product of creative work of only nian People’s Republic provided for making an emblem in the our people, and there existed no similar emblem among the em- form of a shield that is vertically divided in two parts; the first blems of other nations. Moreover, the Cossack’s image was a cre- one would depict a Cossack of blue color with a rifle, against ation of the magnificent and brilliant period of our history that the golden background (the symbol of the Zaporizhian Host, brought glory and eternal life to our people and history. It is the the Hetmanate and partially of the Right-Bank Ukraine), in emblem of a period in our history that symbolizes struggle for the second one — a golden lion in a blue field (the emblem and defense of the whole national independence [13, 27–28]. of Galicia from the ancient times), along the vertical line — Having taken the above statement as a basis, the Cos- a panel depicting the golden symbol of Prince Volodymyr sack with musket was supported also by G. I. Narbut and against the blue background. The crest would be a flying dove V. L. Modzalevsky, who later became the authors of the Ukrai- with an olive branch (the emblem of the Great Duchy of Ru- nian State emblem project at the times of Hetman P. P. Sko- thenia, 1659), instead of mantling — a cartouche in Ukrainian ropadsky [10, 122]. baroque style [11, 119]. Due to the military and political situ- After the Hetmanate was established, V. L. Modzalevsky ation of Ukraine that came about in the end of 1919 – begin- and G. I. Narbut started working toward cancellation of the ap- ning of 1920, the project couldn’t be implemented. proved emblems and seals of the Ukrainian People’s Republic, Only after proclamation of the modern Ukrainian State, while criticizing them for unsatisfactory aesthetic appearance there again came up the issue of using the coat of arms of the and incompliance with heraldic standards. In a reporting notice Zaporizhian Host in state heraldry. Thus, Article 20 of the addressed to the State Secretary, S. V. Zavadsky, dated 19 June, Constitution of Ukraine stipulates that the Great National Em- it was stated that G. I. Narbut agreed to develop projects of new blem of Ukraine shall be established taking into account the privy and great state seals, as well as an emblem [5, 101]. small National Emblem of Ukraine and the coat of arms of the A project of privy seal was finished by Narbut on the 23rd of Zaporizhian Host [9, 6]. For execution of the Supreme Coun- August. It depicted a Cossack with musket in an 8‑side shield; cil’s Decree “On State Symbols of Ukraine” dated 3 September the shield framed a baroque cartouche and crowned a trident; in 1996 and the Decree of the Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine a circle on both sides there was an inscription saying “Ukrainian dated 2 November 1996 “On Holding a Tender for the Best State”. Those were the elements that indicated the continuity for Design Sketch of the Great National Emblem of Ukraine and the Hetmanate not only of the historical tradition of the Kievan the Best Text of the National Anthem of Ukraine”, a specially Rus formation and the Cossacks, but also that of the Ukrainian formed State Commission for preparation and holding of the People’s Republic [16, 1–2]. Narbut managed to finish the -fi tender for the best design sketch of the Great National Em- nal versions of the state seal and emblem only in the middle of blem of Ukraine, on the 11th of June 1997 approved a project November. The projects were transferred to the Head Admin- prepared by a team of contributors composed of M. F. Dmy- istration of Arts and National Culture by the State Secretary, triyenko, O. A. Ivakhnenko, V. S. Mitchenko, Yu. K. Savchuk. S. V. Zavadsky. Under his signature, on the 21st of November, The new state symbol looked as follows: a golden trident invitations were sent out to participate in commission’s work on a blue shield held by a yellow lion in a crown and a Cossack chaired by P.Ya. Doroshenko, on the agenda whereof it was to with musket. Under the shield there was a band in national discuss the emblem and seal projects [17, 1]. colors and wheat ears interwoven with cranberry bunches. According to P. P. Gai-Nyzhnyk, the sketch designed by And a crown above everything. The image of lion represented G. I. Narbut was approved on the 29th of November 1918 by western regions of the country, of Cossack — eastern part the Special Commission for Ukrainian Emblem Development of the state, cranberry — the aggregate image of Ukraine, as the National Emblem of Ukrainian State [2, 108]. Howev- crown — the state sovereignty [7, 7–9]. er A. B. Grechylo considers that such symbol was never actu- In January 2001, the Supreme Council of Ukraine re- ally officially adopted. An evidence thereof was also a report- ceived a bill proposing to approve such project. According ing notice of the Chairman of Commission for Development to L. Volga, the design sketch wasn’t approved because it of Emblem Design for the Ukrainian Peoples Republic of the generated many remarks. First of all, the crown — a symbol Directorate times, which stated that no emblem — the Cos- of monarchy — had nothing in common with our historical sack with musket in a shield and the symbol of Prince Vladi- tradition; second of all — the Cossack referring in the project mir in a crest — was never approved by the Hetman govern- to the coat of arms of Zaporizhian Host failed to correspond ment [11, 118]. But still, it was used in various spheres in the thereto neither iconographically, nor by colors; third of all — era of P. Skoropadsky’s government. there were given remarks in respect of the mantling size [1, 4]. When the Directorate’s government came to power and After much discussion, on the 18th of July 2009, the Cabi- the Ukrainian People’s Republic was restored, the issue of net of Ministers of Ukraine approved the draft Law “On the

15 Section 3. History and archaeology

Great Emblem of Ukraine”, the basis whereof was practically of Ukrainian Cossack State came up in the course of reunifica- without changes formed by a design developed by employees tion of West-Ukrainian People’s Republic and the Ukrainian of the Institute of History of Ukraine of the National Academy People’s Republic. The Cossack with musket had to become of Sciences of Ukraine in 1997. At this point, the project is one of the symbols of the united Ukrainian lands. However, under consideration of representatives of the special-purpose just like in the previous period, the project was adopted only committee for state building and local self-government of the on paper. Supreme Council of Ukraine [12, 18]. Development of the process of including the Cossack Thus, during the XX century, together with the attempts with musket in state heraldry started anew after proclamation to restore the Ukrainian statesmanship and formation of na- of our state’s independence. According to the Constitution of tional symbols, there arose the issue of the part of Cossack Ukraine, it is this element, which shall make a component part traditions in such process. For the first time, such problem of the Great National Emblem of the country. Employees of appeared in the era of the Central Council, but its represen- the Institute of History of Ukraine of the National Academy of tatives rejected using the coat of arms of Zaporizhian Host Sciences of Ukraine developed a project, but as it gave rise to as a central element of new state heraldry. Much greater de- numerous remarks of both, specialists and common citizens, velopment was reached by such process in the reign of Het- the draft law on the Great National Emblem of Ukraine still man P. P. Skoropadsky, but according to archive sources, the remains at the stage of review by the Special-Purpose Com- great and privy state seals depicting the Cossack with musket, mittee of the Supreme Council. Thus, just like in the period due to change of political regimens, remained only in proj- of the 1917–1921 national-liberation competitions, the issue ect in the end. When the Directorate’s government came to of using the Cossack with musket in the state emblem still power, the issue of restoring the tradition of using the emblem remains unsolved. References: 1. Волга Л. Чому так важко народжується Великий Державний Герб?//Урядовий кур’єр. – № 80–81, – 2008. 2. Гай-Нижник П. П. З історії створення державного герба та печатки Української держави Павла Скоропадського//Ар- хіви України. – № 6, – 2001. 3. Гломозда К. Українська національна символіка: походження, традиції, доля. – К.: Академія наук Української РСР, – 1989. 4. Гломозда К. Ю. Історичні гербові відзнаки та прапорові барви України//Український істор. журнал. – № 4–5, – 1990. 5. Гречило А. Проекти герба та печатки Української держави Павла Скоропадського//Український археографічний щорічник. – Вип. 12, – 2007. 6. Грушевський М. Про гербові знаки України/М. Грушевський//Народная воля. – № 153, – 1917. 7. Дмитренко М., Савчук Ю. Великий і Малий Державні Герби України//Світогляд. – № 1, – 2007. 8. Дорошенко Д. І. Історія України 1917–1923 рр. – Ужгород, – 1932. 9. Конституція України. – Х.: Фоліо, – 2014. 10. Мозалевський В., Нарбут Г. До питання про державний герб України//Наше минуле. – Ч. 1, – 1918. 11. Про створення української національно-державної символіки у роки визвольної боротьби (1917–1920 рр.)//Укра- їнський історичний журнал. – № 4, – 1999. 12. Рябоконь А. Уряд пропонує Раді затвердити Великий герб України/А. Рябоконь//Газета по-українські. – № 863, – 2009. 13. Сергійчук В. І. Національна символіка України – К.: Веселка, – 1992. 14. Цегельский Л. До питання українського державного гербу//Українське слово. – № 807, – 1918. 15. Цегельский Л. До питання українського державного гербу//Українське слово. – № 811, – 1918. 16. Центральний державний архів вищих органів влади та управління України (далі ЦДАВО). – Ф. 1063. – Оп. 1. – Сп. 6. 17. ЦДАВОВ. – Ф. 1064. – Оп. 1. – Сп. 94.

Dalibor M. Elezović, University of Mitrovica, Ph. D, Department of History, the Faculty of Philosophy E‑mail: [email protected]

Seifert’s explication of historicism and the subject of research of historical science Abstract: This paper considers the interpretation of historicism and historical method that was given by a philoso- pher of science, Helmut Seifert. For this philosopher, the subject of study of historical science is comprehensive, and

16 Seifert’s explication of historicism and the subject of research of historical science does not refer only to political history events, or the works of great men, but it refers to state institutions, churches, legal and economic systems, different languages that have become historical, all types of records and testimonies. The task of a historian (whom he compares with a criminologist), is to successfully discover the facts of the past, even when historical sources do not present them directly. Keywords: historical science, historicism, Helmut Seifert (1927–2000), methodology, historical method. History as a science develops in accordance with the so- after Bach, in that period music could have developed to such cial conditions of the epoch in which the individual creates, an extent that one could say that Beethoven’s music is better and thus, the interpretation of history is a process that lasts, than Bach’s” — roughly, in the sense that a modern stereo and to which philosophers of history pay constant attention. system is better than an old gramophone. Another observer One of the philosophers of science who improved the inter- of history could, however, say: “What the ancient Greeks and pretation of history and the subject of its research is Helmut Romans achieved is exemplary even for us today. It has never Seifert (1927–2000), a famous German philosopher and a been achieved again, and we can do nothing better than to researcher of scientific methodology. He is an author of sev- be oriented towards the models, which the ancient people eral valuable studies of philosophy of science and hermeneu- established in politics, science and art.” Seifert is certain that tics. His work “Introduction to the Philosophy of Science,” understanding diversity, and equal values, as well (everything which discusses the methodology of the humanities, historical we have encountered throughout history), is not self-implied. method, and hermeneutics, was published in several editions, This is a very late fruit of human insight, and for a long time — even after his death [1, 2]. or rather, always, even in times of the seemingly inviolable rule Let us begin with Seifert’s interpretation of historicism of historicism — such conception of historical was in a tough and his question: “What is historicism?” Considering the ba- competition with other conceptions of history [1, 64]. sic assumption of historicism on respecting the autonomy of The main question of our interest in Seifert’s introduction the past [10, 28], Seifert enters into the interpretation of his- to the philosophy of science is his interpretation of the subject toricism in a practical manner. If we asked a friend whether he of research of historical science. In historical science, the histori- would rather spend his holidays on an East Frisian island or eat cal method is dominant, while other methods are included in it rice chicken, he would probably look at us puzzled, and it would or support it. In addition, some general and specific methods be similar with our next question, what he appreciated more: and procedures occur as the methods of cognition, the logical Mozart or an Airedale Terrier. If he even dignified that with a re- basis of scientific research, whereas the basic research method is sponse, it would be something like this: the stated things cannot historical. Even Kant and Hegel (the two most important rep- be compared whatsoever. All those things are nice in their own resentatives of German classical idealist philosophy), with their way — in fact, one could enjoy them all at the same time: for works, had the most powerful influence on the orientation and example, on vacation one could eat chicken fricassée or scratch research interests of historians. Kant believed that the principal a dog, and at the same time listen to Mozart’s symphony in G subject of historical research is the state, because only in the minor. By giving us this answer, our friend, without being aware state and by the state, humanity can prosper. Historical science of it, would explain to us what “historicism” is [1, 63]. has obtained its confirmation in Kant’s notion that the past can Seifert states another option, instead of mentioned pleas- be understood only if historical phenomena are examined in ant things — beautiful places for vacation, delicious food, pre- their evolution and by the greatest number of diverse histori- cious family, good music — that we compare what we con- cal evidences. The task of historians, according to Humboldt, sider to be “historic equalities”: Roman and Prussian history, consists in connecting the general and particular, basing their the characters and works of Alexander and Napoleon, Bach’s research on specific historical methods [2, 363]. and Beethoven’s music, the Catholic and Protestant German Seifert writes that the subject of research of historical sci- tradition, and so on. Then, according to him, the thesis of his- ence is “non-declaratively paraphrased as a product of man- toricism is as follows: all such historical equalities are mutually kind.” Thus, it would include not only known unique external of “equal value.” He concludes that evaluating them mutually events of political history, in terms of traditional teaching — would be just as pointless as evaluating (comparing) a tour- understood as works of great people, but also, for example: ist destination with a good meal, or a noble dog with noble institutions such as the state, church, legal and economic sys- music. This seems somewhat acceptable, as long as it is about tems, as well as various languages that have become historical, things that have nothing in common and therefore cannot all kinds of records, such as diplomas, acts, bills, notes, diaries, be in direct competition with each other [1, 63]. letters, devices, buildings, works of art of all genres, various lit- Seifert potentiates the obviousness of problematization erary and scientific manifestations — including things that are of this question when “similar” things should be compared in not “products of mankind” but so-called “nature” [1, 69–70]. some way: two centuries as a whole, two important politicians, According to Seifert, what most people through the usual the works of two great composers, and so on. For example, teaching of history receive is a stereotype: that history is the when one hears the names “Bach” and “Beethoven,” he might sum (whole) of “histories,” external events, and works of great be tempted to say: “Well, Beethoven lived a hundred years men. This understanding does not come by itself: moreover,

17 Section 3. History and archaeology it is somehow imposed by science. In fact, the specialization of For Seifert, history is not what the writers of history: sciences has led to the state in which some scientists are prone annalists, chroniclers, biographers, memoirists, historiogra- to a narrowed conception of “historical science.” As one of the phers, novelists, authors of textbooks, present in mutually problems of historical science, Seifert states the fact that the dependent commentary. Rather, history is the past (all the term “historical science” usually implies only a part of “his- way until the point that we call the present), which we have to torical sciences.” In fact, it implies historical sciences studying decipher from millions of different testimonies — regardless “political history” and fields that are immediately adjacent to of the fact whether interdependent stories exist for a particular them, such as history of the church, history of law, economic field or not. Ahasver von Brandt depicts this state of affairs and social history. According to this narrowed sense, “histori- precisely with the following words: “We would know almost cal science” does not include so-called “philologies” and the nothing about medieval economic history if we were only re- science of art, i. e. those disciplines that concern with history, ferred to (retold) sources” [1, 71–72]. languages, literature, and art — the history of science, technol- The practice favors Seifert’s consideration of historical ogy, medicine, and so on [1, 70–71]. research. It is known that, in research, nothing can be done According to Seifert, even some fields whose content di- without the analysis and synthesis, abstraction, concretiza- rectly belongs to the history of science have seceded from “his- tion, generalization, and other logical-cognitive methods torical science” in the narrow sense. Those are: chronology, the and procedures, including qualitative research. Even Marc science of sources, paleography, the study of documents and Bloch believes that, in studying history, there are often acts, shields, seals and coins. There is a controversy here: do moments when this study requires an interdisciplinary ap- these fields of study still fall under “historical science” — or proach [7, 126; 6, 400–401; 9, 75–78; 10, 331; 4, 20–21]. are they actually independent sciences? Obviously, this does According to Jürgen Kocka, in modern historical science, not have much in common with our broad understanding of there is a need for the use of other complementary methods “history of science.” How is it possible that, for example, pale- [3, 17–18]. ography and the study of acts are not a part of historical science, Seifert’s comparison of methods of studying history is but the history of medicine and the history of art are? [1, 71]. particularly illustrative when he compares them with the According to Mirjana Gross, in historical science today, the work of detectives from crime novels. Accordingly, the per- term method has a different meaning; there are various types petrator does not talk about what he did, at best he remains of methods: biographical, comparative, typological, method of silent. In an unfavorable event, he tries to mislead his pursu- generalization, quantitative, causal, intentional, and generic, as ers by false statements and fabricated traces. The detective’s well as the method of understanding and narration. She con- task is to gradually reconstruct the crime process, following cludes that “ […] the term historical method means either one the smallest clues, traces, signs and indications — always be- of these procedures, or all of them together” [2, 363–364]. ing aware of the fact that someone wants to trick him. Seifert Such narrowed conception of historical sciences, which emphasizes that a historian works similarly. His task is to does not include the doctrine of sources and of laws, will of successfully discover the facts of the past, even when they course have fatal consequences. Seifert states that “naive under- are not directly presented to him by historical witnesses. standing of students, who think that “history” is what the his- Namely, he examines his material even in case of problems tory books retell about Bismarck” “are satisfied with the finished whose solutions, in advance, are not subject to the purpose product of presenting a historical theme.” In fact, “history” is of the material [1, 72]. not composed of already told stories that only have to be retold. Seifert’s interpretations of the subject of research of his- Rather, “history” is an entire contexture of manmade products, torical science are still in use, and his contributions to the which we have to reconstruct on our own by using the available philosophy of history and historical methodology have influ- material, critical analysis, and interpretation [1, 71]. enced the development of modern historiography. References: 1. Seiffert Helmut. Einführung in die Wissenschaftstheorie 2. Zweiter Band: Geisteswissenschaftliche Methoden: Phänom- enologie – Hermeneutik und historische Methode – Dialektik. – Мünchen: C. H. Beck, – 2006. 2. Gross Mirjana. Suvremena historiografija: korijeni, postignuća, traganja. Zagreb: Novi liber, Zavod za hrvatsku povijest Filozofskog fakulteta Sveučilišta u Zagrebu, – 2001. 3. Kocka Jürgen. Sozialgeschichte in Deutschland seit 1945 Aufstieg – Krise – Perspektiven, Gesprächskreis Geschichte (Bd. 47), – Bonn: Friedrich-Ebert-Stiftung, Historisches Forschungszentrum, – 2002., – P. 1–37. 4. Делетић Здравко. Истраживање историје. – К. Митровица. – 2014. – 345 p. 5. Elezović Dalibor. Historians in The Age of Digitization of Archival Documents, The First International conference on development of historical and political sciences in Eurasia, 21th September, – 2014, – Vienna: “East West” Association for Advanced Studies and Higher Education GmbH, – P. 8–10. 6. Suvakovic Uros. On Exceeding of Division for Qualitative and Quantitative Researches in Conteporary Scientific Meth- odology. Srpska politička misao, – no. 4, – 2011, – P. 395–420.

18 The criticizm of the policy of “militray communism” applied in Soviet Armenia by the social-political thought...

7. Šušnjić Đuro. Metodologija: kritika nauke. – Beograd: Čigoja štampa, – 2005. 8. Милић Војин. Социолошки метод. – Београд: Завод за уџбенике и наставна средства, – 1978. 9. Bloch Marc. Apologija historije ili zanat povjesničara. – Zagreb: Srednja Europa, – 2008. 10. Тош Џон. У трагању за историјом. Циљеви, методи и нови правци у проучавању савремене историје. – Београд: Clio, – 2008. 11. Бродел Фернан. Списи о историји, – Београд: Српска књижевна задруга, – 1992. 12. Брајзах Ернст. Историографија: стари век, средњи век, ново доба. – Београд: Clio, – 2008.

Stepanyan Khachatur Rostomi, Candidate of historical sciences, ASPU after Kh. Abovyan, Docent of the Chair of the History of Armenia E‑maij: [email protected]

The criticizm of the policy of “militray communism” applied in Soviet Armenia by the social-political thought of Armenian Diaspora (1920–1930s) Abstract: The social-political thought of Diaspora highly criticized the policy of militray commuism of the newly sovietized Armenia in 1920–1930s. The reapplication of cruel experience that was failed in Russia was a real nonsense for Armenia that was destroyed after the wars. Moreover, the explanations for the expropriations have no justification.The policy of military communism in Armenia that was facing serious social-political period also had its consequences.The representatives of the social-political thought of Diaspora were of the same opinion that it was the main reason for February revolution. Keywords: Soviet Armenia, militray communism, Bolshevik, social-political thought of Armenian Diaspora. On November 29, 1920 after the defeats of the Arme- Military communism was based on rationing of food stuff. nian army in the Turkish-Armenian war Armenian militray Only some part of the food stuff would be left for the villag- revolutionary committee formed in Baku entered Ijevan ac- ers (for eating and as a seed), and the rest would be seized for companied by the Soviet army and announced the downfall state needs. All the factories, workshops and means of produc- of Dashnak Government and the Sovietization of Armenia. tion would be nationalized. Despite the fact that the policy Armenian Revolutionary Committee together with the help of military communism was not justified in Russia the newly of Soviet Russia promised to restore the country’s destroyed formed Armenin Bolshevik government decided to apply it in economy and build a new life. Armenia [2, 21]. On December 2, 1920 the treaty of Yerevan was signed Expropriations were carried out in villages with the di- between Russian SFSR authorized representitive Boris Le- rect participation of people’s commissariat and local revolu- gran and representatives of the Armenian government Dro tionary committee for the reason of helping the Soviet army. and Hambarcum Terteryan. The treaty provides a peacful The central committee of the Communist party of Armenia transition of the power from the Dashnkas to the Bolshe- urged the villagers to deliver bread for the Red army with their viks. The principles of the transition of the power were es- own vehicles [3]. tablished as follows: The power in Armenia was temporarily It should be noted that there was no consensus of opin- given to the military revolutionary committee till the con- ion in the policy of military communism of the communist gress of councils which included 5 communists and 2 left- government of Armenia. The president of the Armenian revo- dashnak representatives; the members of Armenian Revolu- lutionary committee Sargis Kasyan was against applying the tionary Federation and non-bolshevik socialist party would economic policy of Russia in Armenia. not be subjected to persecution for their earlier struggle Despite the internal disputes Armenian Bolsheviks against the communist party and the Soviet Russian guar- started to apply the policy of military communism that had anteed the independence of Soviet Armenia [1, 101–102]. failed in Russia. Expropritaions were handled in the rough- However, the newly formed Bolshevik party didn’t fulfill its est way without taking into account the peculiarities of the obligations. country and the people. Armenian communists applied vari- Armenian communists didn’t have their own develop- ous methods and techniques of ravage and plunder within a ment plan for the country so they repeated the Russian ex- short period under the name of the so-called expropriation. perience and the most vivid example of it was the practice In the social-political frames of the Armenian diaspora of “military communism” policy. the issue of militray communism applied in Armenia became

19 Section 3. History and archaeology a subject of serious discussion, which, by the way, was one Referring to the problem of seizure Vratsyan points of the main reasons of the anti-Bolshevik uprising in Febru- out also the work of Bolshevik historan Bagrat Boryan and ary 1921. In the series of ratings about the policy of military concludes that even Bolshevik historians criticized this communism the most prominent are the expatriated members policy [7, 206]. Boryan was one of the unique historians of the National Salvation committee. of The Soviet Union who dared to reveal the real reasons Turning to the issue of expropriations, the former mem- of the rebellion while even a decade didn’t pass, where the ber of the Salvation committee Irazek (Hakob Ter-Hakobyan) expropriations were also highlighted. “Without organized points the unprecedented ferocity of the Revolutionary com- and disciplined governing methods, without preaching pre- mittee’s adopted policy. The Bolsheviks were trying to change paratory work and without taking into consideration the the regime by force forgetting the fact that all the revolutions specific conditions of the country the revolutionary com- and rebellions are the result of violence [4, 307]. mittee came up with a slogan. Confiscate and capture the Irazek says that the expropriations began to become ration of the private individuals of the towns and the supply commonplace soon after the first days of the sovietizaton of of the bread of the peasants”, writes B. Baroyan [10, 126]. Armenia. The population was plundered everywhere, in cit- In fact, S. Vratsyan confirms the anti-democratic nature of ies and villages. “And because it was badly organized, and the Bolshevik expropriations according to the conclusions of community was mostly immoral, outlaw and opportunist, so Soviet historian. By the way, “Droshak” periodical also refers the so-called expropriation turned into widespread looting to the viewpoint of Bagrat Boryan [11, 4–8]. and became a real disaster for the whole country”, concludes Diaspora’s social-political thought also criticizes the the eyewitness Irazek [4, 308]. According to the former presi- expropriation policy of the Bolshevik governement as the dent of the Salvation committee, Simon Vratsyan, the expro- expropriated ration and goods were being taken out from priations increased in severity when the presidnet of Cheka the country. Gevorg Atarbegyan arrived in Armenia [5, 86]. Vratsyan also “White flour, condensed milk, kakao, sugar, leather, cloth- states that primarily the food supplies of the peasants were ing was sent from Armenia in auto carriers as a present to “Mr. seized [9, 99]. Lenin” or “Red army”, writes Vratsyan [7, 204]. The same Thus, the leaders of the uprising against the government politican states that people waited for assistance from Russia showed their great dissatisfaction towards the military com- while their last morsel was taken and sent to Russia [8, 544]. munism policy carried by the same authorities. Both Irazek Armen Sevan describes Bolshevik expropriations as of- and Vratsyan convicted that among the reasons of February ficial loot, and complained that the last means of living of uprising the key role played the expropriation policy of the people were taken by force for feeding the russian army in Bolsheviks with its most severe forms. Bolshevik’s policy was Armenia or were sent to the soldiers of Baku or Russia as a disastrous for the country. present [12, 93]. In fact, most of the seized items were sent It is noteworthy that the methods of expropriation were out of the country, while there was an immediate need of it in gradually “improved”. S. Vratsyan states that in these expro- Armenia. This was done for the naive purposes to make the priations the most accuartely planned and organized thing people in Azerbaijan and Russia believe that there was a regu- was, surely, the “ration week” or according to the description lar transportation of goods among these 3 socialist republics. of Yerevan residents the “plunder week” at the end of Janu- Besides, Armenian Bolshevik leaders wanted to prove Russian ary [6, 111]. Inspired by the successs of the plunder week, Bolshviks that they were devoted communists. Bolsheviks were planning other weeks, for example “linen Avetis Arshakuni, a diaspora figure, when speaking about week’’. Vratsyan ironically points out that in this way Yere- the arbitrariness in the expropriations, states that they some- van lays aside bourgeois prejudices and firmly stands on the times end up with the family’s honor reviling [13, 43]. Onik way of communist construction. Armenian proletariat ful- Mkhitaryan tells about these expropriations with the follow- filled its historic mission on the doorway of Asia [6, 113]. ing impression. “By saying communism they (Bolsheviks) Thus, according to Vratsyan by saying communist construc- understood unrestrained loot, violence that was typical for tion, Armenian Bolsheviks, meant the theft and robbery of the 18th century Persian khans, human’s moral destruction the property of people. and hellish enslavement” [14]. In fact, expropriations were The seizure was getting more absurd. As Vratsyan de- accompanied by the violation of the diginity of families, the scribes the revolutionary committees in villages demanded cruelty of the violence was compared with khan brutality of not only sheep, cow and chicken, but also butter, cheese and the 18th century Armenia. eggs. The villages in the basin of Lake Sevan were obliged to The prime minister of the first Republic of Armenia Hov- supply fish to the Bolsheviks. The most absurd thing was the hannes Qajazuni who was in exile also referred to the expro- demand of hunting animals. For example in Jrvezh village a priations of the Bolsheviks. As it is known Qajaznuni came up tribute was given to the partridge [9, 99]. In some cases not with a critical report in 1923 about the Armenian Revolution- only animals and ration, but also money, gold, jewellery, car- ary Federation and left the party. Nevertheless, Qajaznuni who pets, silk and other precious fabrics, sugar, soap and various was criticising the ARF also criticized the expropriation policy clothes were taken from ransaked houses [5, 86]. of the Bolsheviks stating that it was one of the main reasons

20 The criticizm of the policy of “militray communism” applied in Soviet Armenia by the social-political thought... of the February revolution. Here are the words of Qajaznuni. Thus, the newspapers in Diaspora also criticized the pol- “Every dictatorship is a violence by its nature and cannot be an- icy of militray communism led by the Bolsheviks. Touchig other thing. Every revolutionary government is forced to turn upon the issue in the frames of February revolution, various to drastic and extreme measures and this is also an unavoid- arbitrary activities are described, that were carried out during able necessity, that stems from the situtation. But the violence expropriations for state and revolutionary needs. of Bolsheviks and the cruelty applied in Armenia had a spe- Non Dashnak figures also referred to the issue of militray cific trait, that was even more irritating and intolerable, that communism. the violence was useless, superfluous and pointless. February Prominent historian Arshak Alpoyachyan who was in revolution was thoroughly the affair of the Bolsheviks, a natu- Kahire, also criticized the policy of Bolshevik expropriations, ral consequence of their violence and endless expropriations, that was the main reason for February revolution. Alpoyachy- that destroyed the last remnants of the economy, depriving the an writes that in provices behind the control of central gov- starving people from the last piece of bread” [16, 46]. ernment, local adventurous and inscrupulous figures taking A special committee for expropriating houses was cre- advantage of the opportunity were oppressing people and ated in order to obtain apartments for the newly arrived Bol- rankling peasants. Bolsheviks demanded to provide the food shevik military figures. Another prime minister of the first products to the Red Army. Expeditions were organizing rum- Republic of Armenia Alexsander Khatisyan stated the fact mages and were taking weapons and militray clothing from the that he had worked under the Tsarist reaction conditions for peasants, officially they took goat and sheep and non officially almost 20 years and didn’t notice such violence, as he saw after butter, cheese, jewellery, money and etc [19, 250]. The result Bolsheviks came to power. Thus the prime ministers of the of the expropriations was the increase of the number of com- First Republic of Armenia who were in exile indeed empha- plainers. “The expropriation of goods, the nationalization of sized the policy of military communism applied by Bolsheviks factories and even mills also contributed to the humiliation when speaking about the reasons of February revolution. of people”, writes Alpoyachyan [19, 251]. The policy of militray communism was highly criticized Anti Dashnak figure S. Baghdasaryan from Persia writes by the press in Diaspora. about the expropriations, “The revolutionary committe didn’t Referring to the issue of expropriations Boston “Hayre- take into account the specific conditions of Armenia and act- nik” (Homeland) periodical notes that it was accompanied ed in the same way as the majority did in Russia and that was by special violence and was carried out ruthlessly [15]. The the biggest mistake of the committee which resulted in the periodical concludes that instead of carrying construction February revolution of 1921” [20, 13]. work the Soviet government was organizing robbery in Ar- In fact, the policy of militray communism of Armenia was menia. Even condensed milk and sugar that was brought criticized not only by the Dashnaks who were deprived from from America as an aid was expropriated and sent to Rus- authority. Various non Dashnak figures from Diaspora also sia. Konstantinoupolis “Chakatamart” (Battle) periodical blamed the Bolsheviks in organizing large-scale expropria- also states about the expropriation of the food stuff that was tions in Armenia. sent to Russia and Azerbaijan received from America [17]. In the end it should be mentioned that in some places Referring to the issue of military communism the “Chakat- sponataneous revolts were organized because of the expro- amart” writes that the 25th of Januray of 1921 was announced priations that were suppressed by the punitive units sent from a raid day.According to the command each person had the Yerevan [6, 114]. right to keep only a month’s supply, that is 1 pound of flour Thus, the social-political thought of diaspora criticized and 2 pounds of oil and so on. But the raid was a terrible the policy of militray communism of the newly sovietized Ar- thing that lasted 24 hours. That was not a raid but a real menia. The reapplication of cruel experience that was failed in robbery. Robbery is something more terrible. “They took Russia was a real nonsense for Armenia that was destroyed arbitrarily everything from houses and particularly they put after the wars. Moreover, all the explanations for the expro- their severity on West Armenians”, mentions the periodi- priations have no justification. The policy of military commu- cal [17]. The issue of the the expropriation of private librar- nism in Armenia that was facing serious social-political period ies is discussed in one of the editions of the “Chakatamart”, at that time also had its consequences. The representatives which as Bolsheviks explained was because of the fact that of the social-political thought of Diaspora were of the same bourgeois couldn’t read books [18]. opinion that it was the main reason for February revolution. References: 1. Khatisyan A. The origin and development of the Republic of Armenia. “Hayrenik” monthly, – Boston, – 1926, Octo- ber (in Armenian). 2. Ghazakhetsyan V. Armenia in 1920–1940. – Yerevan, – 2006 (in Armenian). 3. “Communist”. – Yerevan, – 1920, December 14 (in Armenian). 4. Irazek. February 18, “Journal of memories of ARF Dashnaktsutyun (1890–1950)”. – Boston, – 1950 (in Armenian). 5. Vratsyan S. Memories from the recent past. “Hayrenik” monthly, – Boston, – 1924, January (in Armenian).

21 Section 3. History and archaeology

6. Vratsyan S. Memories from the recent past. “Hayrenik” monthly, – Boston, – 1924, March (in Armenian). 7. Vratsyan S. Armenia between bolshevik hammer and Turkish plate. – Boston, – 1941 (in Armenian). 8. Vratsyan S. Republic of Armenia. – Yerevan, – 1993. 9. Sasuni K. February uprising. “Hayrenik” monthly, – Boston, – 1925, October (in Armenian). 10. Boryan B. Armenia, the International Diplomacy and the USSR, – v. II, – M - L, – 1929 (in Russian). 11. “Droshak” monthly. – Paris, – 1931, – No 1–2 (in Armenian). 12. Sevan A. The revolution of February 18. “Vem” magazine, – Paris, – 1936, – No 1 (in Armenian). 13. Arshakuni A. February uprising. “Hayrenik” monthly, – Boston, – 1927, February (in Armenian). 14. “Hayrenik” newspaper, – Boston, – 1928, February 18 (in Armenian). 15. “Hayrenik” newspaper, – Boston, – 1931, February 19 (in Armenian). 16. Qajaznuni H. ARF Dashnaktsutyun has nothing more to do. – Vienna, – 1923 (in Armenian). 17. “Chakatamart” newspaper, – K. Polis (Istanbul), – 1921, March 5 (in Armenian). 18. “Chakatamart” newspaper, – K. Polis (Istanbul), – 1921, March 9 (in Armenian). 19. Alpoyachyan A. The independent Armenia, “Annual calendar of all ” (comp. by Theodik), 16th year, – K. Polis (Istanbul), – 1923 (in Armenian). 20. Baghdasaryan S. The Soviet Armenia. – part 1, – Tehran, – 1927 (in Armenian).

22 Posoperative pain treatment with epidural injection after lumbаl disc surgery

Section 4. Medical science Hakobyan Arman Pargevi, Central Clinical Military Hospital of RA, PhD in medical science, Department of Neurosurgery E‑mail: [email protected]

Posoperative pain treatment with epidural injection after lumbаl disc surgery Abstract: About 30% of patients feel pain after spine surgery. This recurrent pain is result of nerve root swelling. The selective nerve root blockade under RX-control with steroid injection was performed with high efficiency. Keywords: recurrent radicular pain, spine surgery, nerve root swelling, epidural steroid injection. Introduction space. A high level of phospholipase A2 (PLA2), an enzyme About 200,000 lumbar laminectomy and discectomy sur- that helps to regulate the initial inflammatory cascade, has geries are performed every year in the United States. Approxi- been demonstrated in herniated disk material from surgi- mately 90 % of these surgeries will result in a good outcome. cal samples in humans. Leukotriene B4, thromboxane B2, For the remaining 10 % of patients who do not do well after and inflammatory products also have been discovered within spine surgery, the search for a solution to their continued pain herniated human disks after surgery. The best cost effective begins with an assessment of the likely cause of that back pain way to treat this complication is steroid injection into the or leg pain. The formation of scar tissue near the nerve root is a epidural space. An epidural steroid injection is performed to common occurrence after back surgery. For this reason, the im- help reduce the inflammation and pain associated with nerve portance of scar tissue (epidural fibrosis) as a potential cause root compression. Nerve roots can be compressed by a herni- of postoperative pain is commonly called failed back surgery ated disc, spinal stenosis, and bone spurs. When the nerve is syndrome. The 80,000 patients a year who continue to have compressed it becomes inflamed. In summary, the evidence is chronic, disabling back pain after one or more spinal surgeries good for radiculitis secondary to disc herniation with local an- are said to have failed back surgery syndrome. Most Common esthetics and steroids and fair with local anesthetic only; it is Causes of Failed Back Surgery is Foraminal stenosis 25 %–29 %, fair for radiculitis secondary to spinal stenosis with local anes- Symptomatic degenerative disc disease 20 %–22 %, Pseudoar- thetic and steroids; and limited for axial pain and post surgery throsis (failure of fusion) 14 %, Neuropathic pain 10 %, Recur- syndrome using local anesthetic with or without steroids [9]. rent disc herniation 7 %–12 %, Facet joint pain 3 %, Sacroiliac Epidural injections are one of the most commonly per- joint pain 2 % [2]. formed interventions in the United States in managing chron- There are a lot of reports demonstrating mechanisms, ic low back pain [3]. clinical demonstration, treatment of patients with Failed Back Epidural steroid injections are used with increasing fre- surgery syndrome. In many cases the pain recurrenece occurs quency as a less invasive, potentially safer, and more cost-ef- after 3 or more months after surgery [10; 11; 12]. Radicular fective treatment than surgery. However, there is a lack of data pain often is the result of nerve root inflammation with or to judge the effectiveness and safety of epidural steroid in- without mechanical irritation. Inflammation within the epi- jections for spinal stenosis. Epidural injection of 1–3 ml. dural space and nerve roots, as can be provoked by a herniated of 0.25–1 % lidocaine followed by 1.5–3 ml. of 40 mg/ml disk, is a significant factor in causing radicular pain. triamcinolone is performed. The choice of which steroid to There is a lot off explanation of pain recurrence after spine use is at the discretion of the treating physician based on his or surgery like a postoperative fibroses or cyst reformation after her usual clinical practice. Betamethasone (6–12 mg.), dexa- surgery [1]. methasone (8–10 mg.) or methylprednisolone (60–120 mg.) There is a theory of nerve root swelling which is the rea- may also be used [4; 5; 6; 7; 8; 13]. son of pain [14]. Historical evidence of nerve root inflamma- So the aim of our work is to treat with the method of ste- tion has been demonstrated during surgery in patients with roid injection to epidural space the patients who have recur- radicular low back pain (LBP) from lumbar disk herniation. rent pain in early (7–15 days) after spine surgery. Animal research in dogs and rats also has revealed severe in- Methods flammation locally within the epidural space and nerve root We have operated on 204 patients with lumbar disc after injection of autologous nuclear material into the epidural herniation with endoscopic transforaminal approach. In all

23 Section 4. Medical science cases the adequate herniation extraction and discectomy was the first week from surgery. The pain wasn’t so strong as in the performed. The endoscopic visualization with Rx-guiding of preoperative period. There are no disc prolapse recurrence on working cannula and forceps help to confirm the productivity MRI examination preformed in early postoperative period. So of surgery. the results of MRI examination let us explain the pain of this The operations were performed under epidural anesthe- patients as a result of nerve root swelling. For treatment we use sia. During anesthesia solution of bupivacaine is used. The nerve root blokes with steroid injections. The injections have working time of that anesthetic is about 5–7 hours which let been done by the method described by Juergen Kraemer in the us estimate the results of surgery on the next day because no handbook Spinal Injection Techniques. The injections were effect of anesthesia was at that time. The patients gave their performed under C‑arm control. The point of needle injection remarks comparing the pain in leg in pre and postoperative pe- was middle line, the 2,0 ml. 1 % of lidocaine was used for soft riod. The pain was estimated by VAS scale. The 82–85 % of pa- tissue. The 16G spine needle was immersed from middle line tients had good results, they mentioned that they didn’t have under a little degree to the necessary disc space. The impor- any pain and didn’t need any drugs. The 28–30 % of those pa- tant point is the right way of spinal needle positioning. The tients came back in the period of two weeks after operation for control of procedure was done in anterioposterior and lateral examination and told about the pain in leg which occured after RX view which is shown in the picture below (Pic. 1).

Pic. 1. The picture shows the RX-control in anterioposterior position spinal needle placement During the needle placement patients can feel pain in leg high effectiveness 85 % of this method for treatment patients which lets us be sure that the tip of needle is near the nerve with recurrent pain after spine surgery root. After it 1,0 1 % solution of lidocaine and 120 mg. of meth- Conclusion ylprednisolone is injected. In most cases the pain decreases In 30 % of patients after minimal invasive spine surgery after 3–5 minutes. Patients leave the hospital after one hour. recurrent pain is a result of nerve swelling. In this cases MRI Results must be preformed to exclude the new disc prolapse. Se- The nerve blockades were performed in 32 cases, 11 pa- lective nerve root blockades performed under RX control tients needed additional injections that were performed after are effective and non invasive method for treatment of this a week. Following up patients during 8 weeks let us confirm patients. References: 1. Bydon Ali, MD, Xu Risheng, AM, Parker Scott L. , BS, Matthew J. McGirt, MD, Bydon Mohamad, MD, Ziya L. Go- kaslan, MD, Witham Timothy F., MD. Recurrent back and leg pain and cyst reformation after surgical resection of spinal synovial cysts: systematic review of reported postoperative outcomes. – The Spine Journal – Volume 10, – Issue 9, – P. 820–826, –September 2010. 2. Ragab Ashraf, MD, Richard D. de Shazo, MD, Jackson. Management of Back Pain in Patients with Previous Back Surgery. The American Journal of Medicine, – Vol. 121, – No 4, – April 2008 – Department of Orthopedics, Department of Medi- cine, University of Mississippi Medical Center. 3. Benyamin R. M., Manchikanti L., Parr A. T., Diwan S., Singh V., Falco F. J., Datta S., Abdi S., Hirsch J. A. The effectiveness of lumbar interlaminar epidural injections in managing chronic low back and lower extremity pain., – Pain Physician. – 2012 Jul-Aug; – 15 (4): E363–404. 4. Botwin K., Brown L. A., Fishman M., Rao S. Fluoroscopically guided caudal epidural steroid injections in degenerative lumbar spine stenosis. – Pain Physician. – 2007, – 10 (4): 547–558. 5. Botwin K., Gruber R., Bouchlas C., Torres-Ramos F., Sanelli J., Freeman E., Slaten W., Rao S. Fluoroscopically guided lumbar transforaminal epidural steroid injections in degenerative lumbar stenosis: an outcome study. Am J Phys Med Rehabil – 2002, – 81 (12): 898–905. 6. Friedly J., Chan L., Deyo R. Increases in lumbosacral injections in the Medicare population: 1994 to 2001. Spine – 2007, – 32 (16): 1754–1760.

24 Peculiarities of anesthesiology of minimal invasive spine surgery

7. Friedly J., Nishio I., Bishop M. J., Maynard C. The relationship between repeated epidural steroid injections and subsequent opioid use and lumbar surgery. Arch Phys Med Rehabil – 2008, – 89 (6): 1011–1015. 8. Friedly Janna L., Bresnahan Brian W., Comstock1 Bryan, Turner Judith A., Deyo Richard A., Sullivan Sean D., Heagerty Patrick, Bauer Zoya, Nedeljkovic Srdjan S., Avins Andrew L., David Nerenz and Jeffrey G. Jarvik. Study Protocol- Lumbar Epidural Steroid Injections for Spinal Stenosis (LESS): a double-blind randomized controlled trial of epidural steroid injec- tions for lumbar spinal stenosis among older adults, BMC Musculoskeletal Disorders – 2012, – 13: 48. 9. Manchikanti L., Buenaventura R. M., Manchikanti K. N., Ruan X., Gupta S., Smith H. S., Christo P. J., Ward S. P. Effective- ness of therapeutic lumbar transforaminal epidural steroid injections in managing lumbar spinal pain. – Pain Physician. – 2012 May-Jun; – 15 (3): E 199–245. 10. Martin B. I., Mirza S. K., Comstock B. A., et al. Reoperation rates following lumbar spine surgery and the influence of spinal fusion procedures Spine. – 2007; – 32 (3): 382–387. 11. Rainville J., Hartigan C., Martinez E., et al. Exercise as a treatment for chronic low back pain. Spine J. – 2004; – 4 (1): 106–115. 12. Schofferman J., Reynolds J., Herzog R,. et al. Failed back surgery: etiology and diagnostic evaluation. Spine J. – 2003; – 3 (5):400–403. 13. Theodoridis Theodoros, Kraemer Juergen. Spinal Injection Techniques Thieme, – 2009 – Р. 113–135. 14. Kim Yu Yil, MD, Lee Jun Hak, MD, Kwon Young Eun, MD, and Gim Tae Jun, MD. Spinal Nerve Root Swelling Mimicking Intervertebral Disc Herniation in Magnetic Resonance Imaging – A Case Report, – Korean J Pain. – Mar 2010; – 23 (1): 51–54.

Hakobyan Arman Pargevi, Central Clinical Military Hospital of RA, PhD in medical science, Department of Neurosurgery E‑mail: [email protected] Abrahamyan Samvel Panduchti, Central Clinical Military Hospital of RA, Department of Anesthesiology Peculiarities of anesthesiology of minimal invasive spine surgery Abstract: the 204 percutant RX-controled lumbal disc extractions have been done in our department. The trans- foraminal approach was preformed, the disc herniation was extracted under endoscopic control. In all cases the epi- dural anesthesia was performed. We would like to introduce the peculiarities, complications of epidural anesthesia. Keywords: epidural anesthesia, peculiarities, complications, endoscopic lumbal discectomy. Introduction The epidural anesthesia with only sensor block is perfect The advantages of minimal invasive spine operations for such operations because it lets patient be in comfortable which are called other way key hall or endoscopic opera- position during surgery until surgical instruments touch the tions are less tissue trauma, and the endotracheal intuba- nerve root, in this cases patients feel pain and the surgeon stops tion is absent. This two factors let surgeon activate patients the movies and checks the position of instrument. So epidural after 3–4 hours after surgery and minimize the duration of anesthesia and analgesia are used widely during surgical pro- hospitalization up to one day. This kind of operations were cedures and for pain control. This is generally regarded as safe performed under local anesthesia which is the most popular and effective method of anesthesia [2]. There are different method for this type of surgery. For relaxation and com- complications after epidural anesthesia. For example authors fort of the patient, sedation with intravenous Midazolam or report four cases of neurological complication after epidural Fentanyl was administered by the anesthetist. Some patients anesthesia. After summering the possible reasons authors did were uneasy about having the operation performed under the following conclusion. The conclusions to be drawn from local anesthesia and so the operation was done under general these experiences are as follows: [1] ischemic injuries to the anesthesia [1]. spinal cord may occur in children during epidural anesthesia, The local anesthesia with intravenous sedation is not but spontaneous infarction of the spinal cord also may occur in enough in some cases, as because of pain patients feel dis- patients who experience hypotension absent epidural anesthe- comfort and their motions are difficult to control, but usage of sia; [2] collection of outcome data for a large number of chil- local anesthesia helps to prevent nerve root injury. The general dren undergoing epidural anesthesia is necessary and desirable anesthesia is perfect for patient and surgeon too, but there is to define the magnitude of risk, thought at this time to be quite possibility of nerve root damaging because there is no pos- small; toward that end, the PRAN continues to accumulate sibility to have verbal contact with patient. data in North America and to enroll new participating sites,

25 Section 4. Medical science with case numbers of approximately 35,000 in their database; of cervical, thoracic, and lumbar epidurals. They therefore pro- and [3] further laboratory and clinical investigations are de- pose that the mechanism responsible for the early onset of neu- sirable to define the pressure–volume relationship of the epi- rological symptoms was direct penetration of the spinal cord dural space, and the effect of transient epidural hypertension during attempted epidural catheterisation and subsequent in- on spinal cord bloodflow and perfusion, to guide clinicians in jection of fluid into the substance of the cord, producing local- choosing an appropriate local anesthetic volume and rate of in- ized hydromyelia [12; 13]. jection, as well as the safety of adjuvant-containing local anes- Method thetic solutions in the developing central nervous system [3]. The catheterization of epidural space of lumbal spine was Although the exact pathophysiologic mechanism remains a performed prior 1–2 hours before surgery. A little dosage of matter of speculation, it is theorized that excessive epidural fat anesthetic was injected before patients are sent to OP room. might impinge upon the spinal cord, nerve roots, vessels, or This let confirm the right position of epidural catheter if the even facet joints, which normally allow egress of fluid placed in analgesia occurs. The general principals of epidural space cath- the epidural space. Using data from the full NAP3 report the eterization was the same as it is introduced in literature. The risk of a severe neurological complication after preoperative point of catheterization is L1‑L2 level, after getting to epidural epidural anesthesia is calculated to be 1 : 3 703 (n = 100 000) space the tip of epidural catheter was moved to upper level or when the patients who recovered are included [4]. Preexist- to the down. The Solution of 0,25 % 20,0 ml. Bupivacaini or ing spinal canal pathology is a recognized risk factor for adult Kirocaini was used just before skin incision, after it depend on patients undergoing epidural analgesia [5; 6]. surgery duration 0,125 % 10,0 ml. of anesthetics were injected Patients with compressive myelopathy due to lower tho- every 30–45 minutes. The most important is that analgesia and racic lesions, especially epiconus lesions (ranging from the anesthesia was done in a quantity that only sensor anesthesia lower level of the T10 vertebra to T12‑L1 intervertebral disc occur, we try to avoid of motor block, this mentions that all level present with pain or motor disturbance of the lower limbs, the steps of operation like soft tissue incision, bone drilling, which is similar to the symptoms of lumbar radiculopathy. There ligamentum cutting can be performed without pain, but if are asymptomatic thoracic lesions in approximately 30 % of pa- surgical instruments touch nerve root the patient fell it and tients undergoing lumbar decompressive surgery. The decom- let surgeon know about it. We think that it is the best way to pressive surgery could cause a change of pressure at the level of prevent nerve root damaging in cases when endoscopic view of the pre-existing missed compressive lesions, causing pressure nerve root is difficult and don’t let recognize nerve root exactly. on the neural elements [7]. The authors report two cases of Intravenous Diazepami injecton was done to patients who have postoperative cauda equina syndrome in patients undergoing feeling of fear. In cases of not enough analgesia solution Fen- single-level lumbar microdiscectomy in which intraoperative tanili in a dosage of 50–150 mkg. was also done intravenous. electrophysiological monitoring was used. In both patients, the Results amplitudes of cortical and subcortical intraoperative somato- In 167 cases (82 %) the anesthesia was good enough that sensory evoked potentials (SSEPs) abruptly decreased dur- let finish surgery without any problem. In 15 cases (7,3 %) ing discectomy and foraminotomy. In the first patient, a slow, there was a need for intravenous Diazepami injection because partial improvement of SSEPs was observed before the end of that patients feel fear and discomfort which progressively the operation, whereas no improvement was observed in the grew up during the surgery. It was interesting that 2 of that second patient. The authors’ findings support the proposition 15 patients after Diazepami injection became more irritated that intraoperative SSEP monitoring may be useful in predict- which is reason of idiopathic reaction. In 22 cases (10,7 %) ing the development of cauda equina syndrome in patients the epidural anesthesia wasn’t enough effective and intrave- undergoing lumbar microdiscectomy [8]. The clinical features nous injection of solution of Fentanili was preformed. of 12 patients with neurologic complications following lumbar In 42 cases (20,5 %) a sudden headache occurs during epidural anesthesia or analgesia were introduced. Authors think surgery when saline solution under high pressure was inject- that neurologic complications may be more severe in the pres- ed through irrigation tubes of endoscope. This is a procedure ence of spinal stenosis or after inadvertent subarachnoid injec- which is preformed in cases of hemorrhage during endoscopic tion of anesthetic or analgesic agent [9]. The complications may step of surgery for making better endoscopic visualization. As occur during placement of the epidural catheter or from the ef- a consequence big volume of solution under a high pressure fects of the drugs given during the procedure [10]. Despite the goes into the epidural space which is a reason of headache. Only potential risks, the frequency of severe, permanent neurological aspiration through the endoscopic working channel helps to complications related to epidural catheterization based on pro- pass this headache, intravenous drugs infusion was ineffective. spective and retrospective studies, seem to be extremely low at We had 5 (2.4 %) patients with neurological complications after roughly 0.1–1/10 000 procedures [11]. Radiculopathy, cauda epidural anesthesia. Two of them had paresthesia only which equina syndrome, and myelopathy are all recognized causes of were treated by steroid drugs and gabapentin during two three permanent neurological disability after epidural anesthesia and. weeks. In three cases paresthesia with dysfunction of bladder The authors describe the clinical and radiological findings of and bowel were present. It was classic clinical manifestation three cases of intrinsic spinal cord damage occurring as a result of cauda equina syndrome. In two cases clinical syndromes

26 Specific features of the childbirth process and postpartum period in Women with epilepsy appeared after 48–72 hours of surgery, one patient felt the par- allows patient and surgeon to complete the surgery with high esthesia and dysfunction of bladder and bowel after 5–6 hours comfort. There is a little rate of complications but unfortu- from surgery and epidural anesthesia. In all cases MRI were nately this complications are very dangerous and treatment prepared, no any mechanical damaging of nerve roots or spinal of neurological complications like cauda equine syndrome is cord on surgery level were founded. This all patients fell pain not effective. For prevention of this complications we sug- during operation on level Th 5 – Th 8 and had episodic loss of gest to do epidural catheterization especially moving the tip consciousness. There was no episode of arterial pressure hypo epidural catheter as low as possible at the level of L4‑L5‑S1. or hypertension during surgery. The anesthetic drug concentration must be minimized as The follow up of this patients during two – three months possible. Before operation intravenous infusion of 1,0–1,5 l shows poor recovery of neurological symptoms. solution and 16mg of Dexamethasone must be done. In cases Conclusion of feeling pain during operation on upper thoracic spine and The epidural anesthesia with only sensor block during having episodic loss of consciousness the risk of cauda equna endoscopic lumbal disc surgery is safe and effective which syndrome is high. References: 1. Chan W. B. Peng, Yeo William and Seang Tan. Percutaneous endoscopic lumbar discectomy: clinical and quality of life outcomes with a minimum 2 year follow-up. Journal of Orthopaedic Surgery and Research. – 2009, – 4: 20. 2. Buggy D. J., Smith G. Epidural anaesthesia and analgesia: better outcome after major surgery? – BMJ. – 1999, –319: 530–1. 3. Meyer Mark J. , MD, Krane Elliot J. , MD, Goldschneider Kenneth R. , MD, and Klein Norma J. , MD. Neurological Com- plications Associated with Epidural Analgesia in Children: A Report of 4 Cases of Ambiguous Etiologies. Anesth Analg – 2012, – 115: 1365–70. 4. Moen V., Dahlgren N., Irestedt L. Severe neurological complications after central neuraxial blockades in Sweden 1990–1999. Anesthesiology – 2004; – 101: 950–9. 5. Aldrete J. A., Reza-Medina M., Daud O., Lalin-Iglesias S., Chiodetti G., Guevara V., Wikinski J. A., Torrieri A. Exacerbation of preexisting neurological deficits by neuraxial anesthesia: report of 7 cases. J Clin Anesth – 2005, – 17: 304–13. 6. Moen V., Dahlgren N., Irestedt L. Severe neurological complications after central neuraxial blockades in Sweden 1990–1999. Anesthesiology – 2004. – 101: 950–9. 7. Fushimi K. , Miyamoto K. , Hioki A. , Hosoe H. , Takeuchi A. , MD, PhD, Shimizu K. Neurological deterioration due to missed thoracic spinal stenosis after decompressive lumbar surgery a report of six cases of tandem thoracic and lumbar spinal stenosis. Bone Joint J – 2013; – 95‑B: 1388–91. 8. Dimopoulos V., Fountas K. N., Machinis T. G., Feltes C., Chung I., Johnston K., Robinson J. S., Grigorian A. Postopera- tive cauda equina syndrome in patients undergoing single-level lumbar microdiscectomy. Report of two cases. Neurosurg Focus. – 2005 Aug 15. – 19 (2): E11. 9. Yuen E. C., Layzer R. B., Weitz S. R., Olney R. K. Neurologic complications of lumbar epidural anesthesia and analgesia. Neurology. – 1995 Oct; – 45 (10): 1795–801. 10. Liu S., Carpenter R. L., Neal J. M. Epidural anesthesia and analgesia. Their role in postoperative outcome. Anesthesiol- ogy – 1995; – 82: 1474–506. 11. Dahlgren N., Tornebrandt K. Neurological complications after anaesthesia. A follow-up of 18 000 spinal and epidural anaesthetics performed over three years. Acta Anaesthesiol Scand – 1995; – 39: 872–80. 12. Yuen E. C., Layzer R. B., Weitz S. R., et al. Neurologic complications of lumbar epidural anesthesia and analgesia. Neurol- ogy – 1995; – 45: 1795–801. 13. Wilkinson P. A., Valentine A., Gibbs J. M. Intrinsic spinal cord lesions complicating epidural anaesthesia and analgesia: report of three cases. J Neurol Neurosurg Psychiatry – 2002; – 72: 537–539.

Gafurova Malika Ravshanovna, Tashkent Institute of postgraduate medical education, Postgraduate student, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology No. 2. E‑mail: malika‑[email protected] Specific features of the childbirth process and postpartum period in Women with epilepsy Abstract: This paper assessed impact of epilepsy on the labor course and postpartum period; it was discovered that complicated labor course and postpartum period exceeds several times than those in the population. However,

27 Section 4. Medical science with adequate preconception preparation of women with epilepsy, it is possible to achieve significant improvement in the pregnancy outcomes for both mother and fetus. Keywords: epilepsy, pregnancy, childbirth, the postpartum period. Outcomes of pregnancy and childbirth constitute a set In 2 (4.44 %) patients from the Group 1B late spontaneous of quality indicators that reflect mainly the level of perinatal miscarriage has been occurred at the 17–18 and 20–21 weeks care provided to pregnant women. At the same time, peri- of pregnancy, which in both cases was associated with worsen- natal outcomes are closely connected with the health of ing of neurological disease of the mother. And in 1 (2.22 %) mother, whose level is determined by degree of adaptation epileptic women a late induced miscarriage happened at the of her organism to her pregnancy and severity of complica- 21–22 week of gestation due to severe pre-eclampsia and lack tions joined. Perinatal outcomes in women with epilepsy, of the conducted therapy effect. of course, depend on characteristics of the disease during Spontaneous delivery has been occurred in 28 (62.22 %) gestation process as a result of effect of changes in the central pregnant epileptic women and in 42 (72.24 %) healthy wom- nervous system, hormonal balance, in particular, in produc- en. Frequency of induced delivery in Group 1B was 13.33 % tion of oxytocin and characteristics of antiepileptic therapy and exceeded corresponding figures in the reference group by during pregnancy [3, 13–17; 6, 61–74]. 1.4 times (9.43 %). Purpose of these studies was to identify features of the Basic indications for induction of delivery were severe epilepsy influence on the course of childbirth process and pre-eclampsia, premature discharge of amniotic fluid and postpartum period and development of appropriate integrat- tendency to protracted pregnancy. ed preparation of women with epilepsy to delivery to improve Thus, delivery through natutal maternal passages has outcomes of pregnancy for both mother and fetus. been occurred in 34 (75.56 %) pregnant women with epi- Materials and methods for obtaining reliable data 3 groups lepsy, which is 13.11% less than that in healthy women have been identified among 155 surveyed pregnant women: (88.67 %). Group A1 — 57 pregnant epileptic women that under- Early discharge of amniotic fluid has complicated the went full prenatal preparation, course of delivery by 2 times more often in women from Group 1B — 45 pregnant epileptic women who did not Group 1B (24.44 %) than in healthy women (11.32 %). Pri- receive prenatal preparation in full volume; mary uterine inertia has been recorded in 22.22 % cases in epi- Group 2 — reference group — 53 healthy women. leptic women, which is 2.4 times higher than in the reference Results: pregnancy in 30 (66.67 %) of women with Group (9.43 %). Development of secondary uterine inertia epilepsy and in 48 (90.56 %) of healthy women was ended has been observed in pluripara women — in 3 (6.67 %) pa- with timely delivery. Preterm delivery has been occurred tients with epilepsy and in 1 (1.88 %) pregnant woman from in 9 (20 %) patients from Group 1B and in 3 (5.66 %) preg- the reference Group. nant women from the reference group, belated delivery — in Analysis of the childbirth duration in the test groups is 3 (6.67 %) cases and in 2 (3.77 %) cases, respectively. given in Table 1, where significant fluctuations of this indica- Thus, in epileptic patients untimely delivery was observed tor have been recorded from 2 hours 15 minutes to 15 hours 3 times more frequent. 50 minutes. Table 1. – Childbirth duration in the surveyed women Tested groups Delivery Average duration of childbirth Primary 8 hours 35 minutes ± 45 minutes* Epileptic Maternity patient Secondary 5 hours 40 minutes ± 25 minutes* Primary 11 hours 25 minutes ± 50 minutes* Healthy Maternity patients Secondary 6 hours 15 minutes ± 35 minutes* * — p < 0.05 difference is valid between pregnant women from Group 1B and Group 2 As the table shows, in maternity patients with epilepsy 224.6 ± 32.1 ml. (p < 0.001). In 3 (6.67 %) women fromthe shortening of the delivery duration was marked both in pri- Group 1B hemorrhage in the postpartum period has reached mapara and multiparous women compared with those in the 350 ml. or more, which exceeds alowable volume. This is group of healthy women. That is, despite high incidence of 3.5 times more than in healthy women (1.88 %). In one case uterine inertia, rapid delivery (in 35.56 % of patients) was (2.22 %) in the postpartum period manual removal of pla- often observed in patients with enilepsii — 34.6 % cases in centa and release of afterbirth was conducted due to dense primiparous and 36.8 % cases in multiparous women. attachment of the uterine cake Hypotonic bleeding was de- The volume of blood loss during delivery through natu- veloped in two patients (4.44 %) with epilepsy in the early ral maternal passages in patients of the Group 1B ranged postpartum period which was stopped through conservative from 100 ml. to 450 ml., averaged 320 ± 35.7 ml. (p < 0.001) way (in one case — after emptying the bladder by catheter, and was significantly different from the results in the Group 2 by using uterine massage externally, by application of cold

28 Specific features of the childbirth process and postpartum period in Women with epilepsy to the abdomen and intravenous injkection of oxytocin in under endotracheal anesthesia and in 9.1 % — under epidural the second case — after manual examination of the uterin anesthesia (with compensated form of disease). cavity). Causes of abdominal delivery in the surveyed group of Thus, our study confirms the literature data that factors women are shown in Table 2. predisposing to bleeding in the postpartum period and early In Group 1B cesarean section was often performed due postpartum period in women with epilepsy are: disorders of to ineffectiveness of the labor induction in premature dis- neurohumoral homeostasis, anemia, burdened obstetric and charge of amniotic fluid, which in the structure of indications gynecological anamnesis and application of anti-epileptic for abdominal delivery was 45.5%. Herewith during antenatal drugs [1, 13–17; 7, 799–820]. discharge of amniotic fluid in all cases labor induction was in- Surgical delivery by cesarean section was performed in effective, that gives us a reserve to optimize management of the Group of patients with epilepsy in 11 (24.44 %) patients, pregnancy and reasonable delivery planning. Also it should be that is 2 times more often than in the reference Group (in 6 noted that there is a very small percentage of indications for (11.3 %) women). Operation in 90.9 % cases was carried out operative delivery on the part of fetus (2.22%). Table 2. – Indications for operative delivery Epileptic women Healthy women Indications Abs % Abs % Inefficiency of delivery induction with premature discharge 5 11.11 2 3.77 of amniotic fluid Premature detachment of placenta 1 2. 22 – – Pelvic presentation 1 2. 22 1 1.88 Aged primipara 1 2. 22 1 1.88 Pre-eclampsia treatment failure 2 4.44 1 1.88 Uterine scar 1 2. 22 1 1.88 Acute fetal hypoxia 1 2. 22 1 1.88 Epileptic seizure in delivery 1 2. 22 – – Increased attacks 3 time a day 1 2. 22 – – The share of indications for cesarean section due to compensation of pathology of the nervous system showed neurological diseases of mother in the structure was 18.2 %. that the average amount of blood loss increases with fre- In 2 (4.44 %) women tubal ligation has been performed, quency of epileptic seizures. The greatest number of compli- provided that in one case there was uterine scar and third cations of delivery was observed in multiparous women with delivery and in another case there was epilepsy with mental epilepsy [2, 66–68; 5, 91–95]. During delivery in pluripa- disorders. rous women with epilepsy premature discharge of amniotic Thus, in most cases with epilepsy — in 9 (81.8 %) wom- fluid, secondary uterine inertia, hypotonic bleeding, perineal en — causes of cesarean section was obstetric pathology and tears and surgical delivery occure more than in primaparous not epilepsy and its complications. Analyzing frequency of and multiparous women. Higher percentage of the maternity complications during childbirth with epilepsy we have dis- passage injuries is a reserve for rational labor management in covered that with increase of the delivery number the rate the process of fetus expulsion and extension of indications of complications shall increase as well (Table 3). Analysis of for application of operational facilities during delivery (such the dependence of the blood loss volume on the degree of as perineo- and episiotomy). Table 3. – Complications of the childbirth process and early postpartum period, depending on the parity of delivery in epileptic patients Parity of delivery Total Complications Primaparous Multiparous Pluriparous Abs % Abs % Abs % Abs % Premature discharge of amniotic fluid 11 24.44 2 7.69 5 35.71 4 80 Primary uterine inertia 10 22.22 6 23.07 4 28.57 – – Secondary uterine inertia 3 6.67 – – – – 3 60 Cesarean section 11 24.44 2 7.69 6 42.85 3 60 Ruptures of maternity canals 7 15.56 5 19.23 2 14.28 – – Pathology of separation and detachment of 1 2.22 – – 1 7.14 – – placenta Hypotonic hemorrhage 2 4.44 – – – – 2 40 Manual inspection of the uterine cavity 1 2.22 – – – – 1 20

29 Section 4. Medical science

We have also conducted analysis of particular features of compensation diseases (8.69 %). Thus, frequency of compli- the delivery process depending on the degree of the epileptic cations of pregnancy and delivery is directly proportional to process compensation. It was discovered that the number of the degree of compensation of the nervous system disease complications in delivery increases with worsening of neu- and increase of the delivery number. rological disease during pregnancy. In subcompensation of The course of postpartum period largely depends on pe- epilepsy premature discharge of amniotic fluid complicated culiarities of pregnancy and delivery. Table 4 shows that post- delivery process in 36.84 % cases, abnormalities of labor in partum period in women with epilepsy was often complicated 42.1 % cases, bleeding in 26.31 % cases, and in compensated by uterus subinvolution in 15.56 % cases and hypogalactia in disease course — in 17.39 %, 21.7 %, 8.69 % cases respectively. 13.3 % cases. The same complications have been recorded in the Operative delivery was performed in the group with decom- reference Group in 3.77 % and 7.54 % cases respectively. Dur- pensation of epilepsy in 66.67 % cases, which is 1.8 times high- ing ultrasound examination in the postpartum period in two er than in the group with subcompensated course of disease cases (4.44 %) we have found remains of placental tissue in the (36.8 %), and 7.6 times more often than in the group with uterus, thereat curettage in​​ the uterine cavity was carried out. Table 4. – Complication of the postpartum period among surveyed women Epileptic women Healthy women Complications Abs % Abs % Endometritis 2 4.44 – – Subinvolution of uterus 7 15.56 2 3.77 Hypogalactia 6 13.33 4 7.54 Mastitis 1 2.22 1 1.88 Total complications 15 33.33 7 13.2 The most frequent disorders of the lactation function prognosis of the pregnancy outcome for both mother and occurred in primaparous women [4, 588–595]. Among sur- fetus. Therefore, this group of women requires adequate pre- veyed women with epilepsy there was hypogalactia in 83.33 % natal preparation and targeted therapeutic and preventive of primaparous, whereas among healthy primaparous women actions. hypogalactia was recorded 1.6 times less. Prediction of various complications, rational tactics of Overall incidence of the complicated course of postpartum pregnancy management and selection of optimal methods of period was 33.33 % in women with epilepsy, which is 2.5 times delivery from the perspective of perinatal obstetrics in women higher than among healthy maternity patients (13.2 %). with epilepsy is a reserve for further reduce of obstetric and Conclusions: Our investigation results suggest that perinatal pathology. epilepsy is a perinatal risk factor, that significantly worsens References: 1. Adamyash L. V., Kunkina Y. B., Zhidkova I. A., Kaznacheeva T. V. Molecular-based influence mechanisms of epilepsy and antiepileptic therapy on reproduction system of women; (literature review)//Problems of reproduction. – 2009. – Vol. 15. – № 2. – P. 13–17. 2. Vlasov P. N. Planning and management of pregnancy in women with epilepsy//Attending physician. – 2004. – № 6. – P. 66–68. 3. Dobrokhotova J. E., Gecht A. B., Lokshina O. B. et al. Some aspects of pregnancy and delivery in women with epilepsy//Russian Bulletin for obstetrician. – 2005. – Vol 5. – № 6. – P. 13–17. 4. Mukhin K. Y., Petruhin A. S. Application of antiepileptic drugs and breastfeeding of babies. In: Epileptology in childhood. Ed. A. S. Petruhina. – M: Medicine – 2000; – P. 588–595. 5. Reader F. K., Avakian G. N., Badaljan O. L. et al. Peculiatities of epilepsy in pregnant women//Neurological Bulletin named after V. M. Bekhterev. – 2006. – Vol. 38. – № 3/4. – P. 91–95. 6. Andermann E., Dansky L., Kinch R. A.//Complications of pregnancy, labour and delivery in epileptic women. In: Epilepsy, Pregnancy, and the Child. – 2004. – Raven Press, New York. – P. 61–74. 7. Pennell P. B. Pregnancy in women who have epilepsy. Neurol, clin. – 2004. – 22 (4). – P. 799–820.

30 Influence of the harmful factors of manufacture of synthetic detergents and cleaners on the clinical-functional parameters...

Ibragimova Feruza Ikromovna, Senior scientific employee-researcher, Assistant of Department of Orthopaedic Stomatology of the Bukhara Branch of the Tashkent State Stomatological Institute Jumatov Urozmat Jumatovich, DM, professor of Department of Therapeutic Stomatology of 1‑Stomatology of the Tashkent Institute of Improvement of doctors Idiev Gayrat Elmuradovich, PhD, associate professor, Manager by the Department of Orthopaedic Stomatology of the Bukhara Branch of the Tashkent State Stomatological Institute E‑mail: ss‑[email protected]

Influence of the harmful factors of manufacture of synthetic detergents and cleaners on the clinical-functional parameters of the oral cavities in the workers Abstract: It is established, that under the conditions of manufacture of the synthetic detergents and cleaners among working there are observed decrease in enamel acid-resistence, increase in electroconductivity of the teeth dense tissues and decrease of capillary stability in the gingival in comparison with control group of the studied sub- jects which precede to development of caries of the teeth and parodontium diseases. Keywords: oral cavities, the synthetic detergents and cleaners, enamel of the teeth, dental caries, parodontium. It is well known, that on the influence of adverse ecologi- Results and discussion. The data of the researches per- cal and industrial factors the mucosa of the upper respiratory formed have shown (table 1) that the level of a hygienic condi- tract as well as of oral cavity respond for the first turn [1, 2]. tion of the mouth has appeared to be equally (p > 0.05) low in Meanwhile the functional disorders in the oral mucosa the both groups of patients. seem to be early preclinical findings of the occupational ex- The pliability of enamel of teeth to action of the acid posure of the toxic substances on the patients’ body [3, 4, 5]. buffer at workers in the manufacture of SDC was found The purpose of the present research was the study of lower in 19.3 % of cases (p < 0.001), than in the persons of some clinical-functional parameters of oral cavity in workers at control group, and electroconductivity of the dense tissue manufactures of the synthetic detergents and cleaners (SDC). of teeth, on the contrary, is higher by 1.6 µА (p < 0.01), Materials and methods. This study included 120 work- that indicates, on our opinion, about a developing risk fac- ers of the Joint-Stock Company “Navoyiazot”, producing the tor for formation of caries of teeth and is the earliest sign of basic ingredients of SDC (studied group). Besides there was this disease among the workers of the manufacture of SDC. stu-died hygienic index of the oral cavity, the enamel acid- By the earliest attribute of this disease among working in resisting, electroconductivity of the dense tissue of the teeth, manufacture SDC. Shiller-Pisarev and Kulajenko tests and index of the peripheral The interpretation of the given tests of Shiller-Pisarev and circulation in the parodontium. For comparison the similar Kulajenko and as well as the index of peripheral circulation research was carried out in 118 employees of administration, of the parodontium tissue showed that chronic inflam-matory mechanics, drivers, watchmen and population living in the area process in 31.9 % (p < 0.001) were observed more often in the near the factory, but not having of direct contact with industrial workers than in the persons from control group, the stability of factors of Joint-Stock Company “Navoyiazot” (control group). capillaries in paradontium tissues reduced by 23 s. (p < 0.001), In order to study more comparable data and exclusion index of the peripheral circulation decrease by 40.9 % of influence of the effect of sex, age and length of service on (p < 0.001). The received changes of clinical-functional pa- studied parameters the research was carried out only in men at rameters of the oral cavity in the workers, evidently, precede the age of 35–44 years with the length of service to 5 years in to development of dental caries and parodontium, diseases, the both studied groups. The functional parameters of the oral that correlates with the literature data [2, 3, 5]. cavity were also compared in the physiological norm [2, 3]. These data also confirmed the results of our clinical in- The data received were processed with use of the program vestigations that among the workers (p < 0.01) there were Microsoft Excel, the reliability of differences was determined frequently revealed dental caries, gingivitis and parodontitis by Student’s criterion. than in the persons of сontrol group.

31 Section 4. Medical science

Table 1. – Clinical-functional parameters of the oral cavity in workers at the manufacture of SDC and in the persons of control group (M ± m) Physiological Group of workers Studied parameters Reliability norm studied control Hygienic index, score 0–1 5.5 ± 0.6 5.4 ± 0.3 > 0.05 Enamel acid-resisting enamel, % 40 65.6 ± 2.5 46.3 ± 1.9 < 0.001 Dense tissue electroconductivity of the teeth, µA teeth, мкА 0 3.0 ± 0.2 1.5 ± 0.07 < 0.01 Shiller-Pisarev test, % 0 77.3 ± 2.2 45.4 ± 1.5 < 0.001 Kulajenko test with Index of peripheral circulation 50–60 24.1 ± 1.3 47.1 ± 1.7 < 0.001 Index of peripheral circulation, % 80–100 21.2 ± 0.7 62.1 ± 1.4 < 0.001 Thus, having analyzed the own and literary data it is peripheral circulation which, apparently, precede to develop- possible to say, that under the conditions of manufacture of ment of dental caries and parodontium diseases among the synthetic detergents and cleaners in the workers there is ob- workers. Therefore these disorders can serve as integrated served decrease of the acid-resisting of the enamel, increase in parameters of negative influence of production factors of the electroconductivity of the dense tissue of the teeth, reduction making of SDC on the health and condition of the oral cavity of the gingival capillary stability and index of parodontium of the workers. References: 1. Agaeva D. F. A complex estimation of a risk degree of the parodontium pathology in the workers of superphosphate plant//Azerbaijan medical journal. – 2008. – № 3. – P. 18–20. 2. Masagutova L. M., Bakirov A. B., Ribakov I. D. Specific sensibilization and local immunity of the oral cavity under the conditions of chronic aerogenic loading//Clinicheskaya i laboratornaya diagnostica. – 2013. – № 4. – P. 27–29. 3. Obraztsov Yu. L. Ecological aspects of the stomatological pathology//Stomatology. – 1997. – № 5. – P. 75–79. 4. Peker R. Ya. Professional damages of the oral cavity tissues. – Moscow. – 1987. – 25 p. 5. Lawson C., Wolf S. Pharmacol. Rep. – 2009. – Vol. 61. – N 1. – P. 22–23.

Khwan Oleg Innokentyevich, senior scientific assistant, applicant to Forensic medicine and medical law department with the course of pathologic anatomy and section course, Tashkent pediatric medical institute E‑mail: [email protected]

Characteristic lesions of liver in cases of car accident trauma with lethal outcome Abstract: Morphologic peculiarities of close lesions of liver are various, and that is linked with the variety of formation conditions. Though, in spite of the variety of morphology of liver lesions, some types of the lesions and their combinations appear only in specific kinds of automobile traumas. Keywords: close lesions of liver, automobile trauma, morphological peculiarities. Topicality. Automobile trauma takes a leading place in damage appearance, and the methods of surgical treatment. the structure of mechanical lesions. According to statistical Different from surgeons forensic specialists pa id unjustified data mortality of traffic accidents (TA) occupies the third little attention to close trauma of liver made by obtuse objects. place after cardiovascular diseases and new formations [2]. Those few works of forensic character published in literature, Every year about 55 mln. car accidents happen in the revealed only some features of that problem [4]. Even in au- world and cause the death of 1.2 mln. people and 8 mln. get thorized dissertations dedicated to various kinds of traffic trauma. The economic loss of TA in some countries is consid- trauma [3, 4] the lesions of liver were paid very little attention. ered to be 2% and more of the foreign exchange earnings [5]. The opinion on problem of the frequency of close trauma of Close trauma of liver made by obtuse objects drew sur- liver is not unequivocal in the literature, dependently on the geons’ attention for a long time because of difficult diagnosis, time and source of the statistic data. severe progress and high lethality rate. They worked out the During the last decade the number of the cases with the problems of diagnosis, morphology of lesions, mechanisms of close trauma of liver started rising, and, in the opinion of some

32 Characteristic lesions of liver in cases of car accident trauma with lethal outcome authors, that is directly linked with fast development of vari- conditioned by the direction of object motion. The length of the ous kinds of transport, which serve to be the main reason of raptures varied from 1.5 cm. to complete separation of an organ. severe traumas [1]. When the impact was done by an automobile from front The specificity of the study of close trauma made by ob- side backward the raptures mostly located on diaphragmal tuse objects in forensic medicine is multipolar researches. In surface of the right lobule of liver. A strong impact in 14.6 % practice all lesions appearing in certain kinds of obtuse trauma (21 cases) formed several raptures (from 2 to 5) directed along such as traffic, industrial, falling from height and others are the impact line of the object causing trauma up to 9 cm depth. studied simultaneously. Though the necessity of the further For example, a victim of a car accident who died because of perfection of forensic expertise demands more detailed and strong impact from the frontal side backward had the following profound study of the character and peculiarities of close le- lesions of liver: 5 raptures with linear and arch shape on the sions of certain organs including liver [1; 4; 5]. diaphragmal surface of the right lobule sized from 1.5 x 1 cm. Thus, the study of the peculiarities of lesions of liver to 7 x 0.2 cm. on the border of the IV, V and VIII segments of caused by automobile trauma is actual problem in medicine liver, directed backward and a little bit to the left. The sixth and particularly forensic medicine. rapture sized 7.5 x 0.2 cm. located on the right surface of the The aim of the research: is to study the peculiarities right lobule with smashed parenchyma edges inside to 0.5 cm.; of close lesions of liver in car accident traumas with lethal two foci of sub-capsule hemorrhages 5 x 3.5 cm. and 4 x 3 cm. outcome. on the visceral surface of the right lobule in the area of renal The materials and methods of the research: The mate- fossa, corresponding to the VI and VII segments close to liga- rial for the research were 144 forensic expertise conclusions ment attachment. of corpses with body injures got in car accidents from 2004 to The lesions of liver caused by the forward impact are simi- 2013 performed in the center of Tashkent city bureau of FE. lar to the lesions from the impact to the anterior surface of the The analysis of forensic expertise conclusions showed that body, but with different direction of the raptures. The raptures the frequency of getting close trauma of liver is much higher of the right lobule (also prevailingly diaphragmal surface) last among men — 106 (73.6 %) cases, than among women — up to 9 cm., in 12.6 % cases pass from the diaphragmal surface 38 (26.4 %). Among them there were 97 (67.4 %) pedestri- of the lobule through the dorsal edge to the visceral surface ans, 11 (7.6 %) passengers, 36 (25 %) drivers. In 15 cases the and penetrate inside to 5 cm. drivers had alcoholic intoxication. In 19 cases pedestrians had At the moment of the impact in both forward and back- alcoholic intoxication. ward directions there is formation of remote stellate raptures Most often close trauma of liver were met in the groups of the capsule and parenchyma, and hemorrhages and rap- from 20 to 40 years old (57.6 %), I. e. the most active and tures deep inside the organ (central). workable age. Among children that kind of trauma was ob- Damages of hepatic ligaments are very characteristic served in 9.7 % cases. for the morphology of liver trauma caused by car accident. Combined traumas of head, thoracic cage, inner organs A strong impact to a body made by an obtuse object causes with fractures of limbs were observed in the absolute majority sudden drift of liver and over extension of the ligaments, in the of the cases (99.3 %). process of which sub-capsule hemorrhages and rapture of the Isolated lesion of liver was noted in 1 case. ligaments can occur. These kinds of traumas we observed in Besides, we observed combined lesions of organs such 10 victims (6.9 %). A part of liver lesions with the aforesaid as lesions of spleen (51cases), kidneys (48 cases), small and mechanism appears on the side opposite to the place of ex- large intestines (8 cases), bladder (3cases), pancreas (11 cas- ternal impact effect on the liver because of stroke to vertebral es), stomach (5 cases), lungs (87 cases) and heart (14 cases). column or a costal arch (usually moderate hemorrhages). The greatest amount of car accidents was observed in Thus, the morphologic peculiarities of these lesions spring season. are very diverse, and it is linked with the variety of the condi- The results of the research: in autopsies we revealed tions they are formed in. though, in spite of the variety of the that in 50 % cases location of close trauma of liver caused by morphology of liver lesions, certain lesions and their combi- direct impact, raptures and chinks were on visceral surface; nations appear only in specific kinds of car accident traumas. in cases of commotion and result of “anti-struck” — 25 % su- Conclusion: a forensic expert, after definition of the type perior surface. of traumatic impact based on the character of liver lesions, can Arch-like raptures of the capsule and tissue of liver we suppose the possibility of the cause of these traumas in cer- observed in 4.2 % cases with the liver drift to the side of mo- tain conditions, surely taking into account other morphologic tion of the wheel which pressed the body of a victim. The data, achieved in the expertise of a corpse. Unconditionally, protuberant surface of the rapture indicated the direction of a dogmatic approach to the definition of the type of trau- the wheel rolling across the body of a victim lying on his back. matic impact according to the character of hepatic lesion is The most characteristic lesion of liver in car accidents is rap- not acceptable. A certain tolerance can be accepted, as the ture (70.8 %). The raptures had linear, arch, winding, spindle- mechanisms of hepatic lesions’ formation are complicated shaped, tree-like, radial and other forms with direction mostly enough and there are possible deviations in the process of

33 Section 4. Medical science lesion characteristic features formation, which is dependent of the impact vary variable if made by obtuse objects with on many factors such as conditions of traumatic impact, power limited and unlimited surfaces and others. References: 1. Yermolov A. S., Abakumov M. M., Sokolov V. A. and co-authors. Common problems of medical help in the cases of com- bined trauma.//Surgery. Pyrogov’s journal – 2003. – № 12. – P.7–11. 2. Kosheleva L. N., Rudneva N. S., Fillipov M. N., Sarkisyan B. A. The analysis of lethal autotrauma in Barnaul city for 2009–2010//Actual problems of forensic medicine and expert practice. – Barnaul-Novosibirsk – 2011. – Ed.17. 3. Novoselov A. S. Forensic estimation of the morphologic peculiarities of the lesions for diagnostics of drivers and passengers of the frontal seat in the cases of frontal crush of car. Abstract for diss. CMS – Moscow, – 2010. – P.3. 4. Sosedko U. I. Diagnostics of the main kinds of traumatic impact at the traumas of abdominal organs made by obtuse ob- jects. – Izhevsk, – 2001. – С. 123. 5. Peden M. et al. Pzerention of zoad inyures. World heal organization. – Geneva, – 2002. – 200 s.

Komshuk Tetiana Sergiivna, Bukovinian State Medical University E‑mail: [email protected]

Comparative characteristic of fetometrycal indicators of cerebrospinal fluid system of the fetal brain in the second trimester of gestation Abstract: It was conducted a comparative characteristic of regional fetometrycal indicators of CSF system of the fetal brain in the second trimester of pregnancy of women living in the Chernivtsy region with similar data of Great Britain and Kharkov (Ukraine). Keywords: fetus, cerebrospinal fluid system, fetometry. Introduction. The most important problem of obstetric Purpose — to provide a comparative analysis of fetom- service is improving of quality and effectiveness of prenatal etrycal indicators of Chernivtsy region fetuses in the second diagnostics of fetal growth and development. One of the trimester of gestation with those of other regions. key components of this diagnostics is ultrasound photom- Materials and Methods. Studied 164 results of the ul- etry — measuring of various anatomical structures of the trasound examination of pregnant women in the second tri- fetus, which is a compulsory component of the ultrasound mester of physiological gestation who are living in Chernivtsy examination in obstetrics [1, 15–16]. Comparison of feto- region. Ultrasound examination was performed on the base metrical findings with standard data of specific region allows of Medical Genetic Center (MGC) of Chernivtsy Regional to determine conformity of the size of fetus and its gestation- Diagnostic Center (ChRDC). al age, estimate the rate of growth and clarify the pregnancy Retrospective analysis of 2004–2008 years was con- term [3, 16–17]. ducted by studying of ultrasound examination conclusions In modern literature on ultrasound diagnostic in obstet- of pregnant women in different periods of gestation. Esti- rics are described numerous of fetometrycal indicators which mated fetometrycal normal size of circumventricular sys- are developed by domestic and foreign authors for their popu- tem. A comparative analysis of the size of the anterior and lations using Percentile approach [2, 86–87]. posterior horns, the body of lateral ventricles, a large cistern Analysis of literature shows that differences between and subarachnoid space of the brain was made with the same the nomograms of fetometrycal ultrasound indicators may data of other regions. be associated with ethnic features of anthropometric indi- There were used general statistical methods for biomedi- ces [5, 183–184]. cal research. In Ukraine as a whole and in its separete regions fe- Discussion of the research results. tometriycal regional standards are not available, and using of Weight and growth parameters of newborns and, con- foreign authors normohram often leads to a large number of sequently, fetuses in different countries and even in differ- false positives and false negative results of delay of intrauterine ent regions of the same country, differ significantly. Genetic, development. Therefore, the actual problem is the develop- ethnic, natural — this is not the whole list of factors that ment of regional standards of ultrasound fetometry, because affect on the growth, weight and rate of intrauterine fetus their use will ensure a correct assessment of fetal growth dy- development [5, 183–184]. namics and increase the effectiveness of prenatal diagnostic Therefore, different regions have their own peculiarities of congenital anomalies [4, 113–115]. of fetometrycal indicators.

34 Comparative characteristic of fetometrycal indicators of cerebrospinal fluid system of the fetal brain in the second trimester of gestation

Absence of developed regional indicators of fetal develop- E. A. Yakovenko (1994, Kharkov), N. V. Medvedev et al. ment forces doctors to choose particular normohrams, which (2000, Moscow) norms. are acceptable for this area, or use the one included in the On the result of our study as a basis for the development of using ultrasound software. Not knowing and not analyzing regional fetometrycal indicators of CSF system of brain was tak- accuracy of normohram for specific region, some perinatolo- en data of observation of fetal development in Chernivtsy region gists carrying the fetometry are using multiple normohrams and was performed a comparison with those of other regions. of different authors, with the following computer processing Estimation of CSF system size was carried out in trans- of the parameters and calculation of some «average» period ventricular plane. The structure and size of the lateral ven- of gestation [7, 79]. tricles of the brain and its vascular plexus were analyzed Disagreement on this problem leads to the fact that in (table 1). The measured parameters were compared with the same region or in the same city investigations are con- those in other regions. ducted by various normohrams, which leads to a lack of se- As shown in Table 1 regional indicators are very dif- quence, a significant reduction of accuracy and quality of ferent from those rates in the UK, and are compared with fetometrycal research [6, 80]. those in Kharkiv. In modern literature there are a large number of stan- In transcerebellum plane were evaluated dimensions of dard fetometrycal parameters. In our country the most subarachnoid space and a large tank, whose diameter is nor- widely used are V. N. Demidov et al. (2001, Moscow), mally not exceed 10.0 mm. (table 2). Table 1. – Normative values of brain structures measured in transventricular plane Duration of ChR UK ChR UK ChR Kh pregnancy Anterior horn Posterior horn Body of the lateral ventricle (weeks) (mm.) (mm.) (mm.) 17–18 4.61 ± 0.45 7.1 ± 0.10 5.39 ± 0.47 7.05 ± 0.31 5.20 ± 0.41 5.1 ± 0.24 19–20 5.19 ± 0.97 7.3 ± 0.12 6.05 ± 0.99 7.20 ± 0.22 6.08 ± 0.82 5.65 ± 0.42 21–22 5.51 ± 0.52 7.6 ± 0.13 6.42 ± 0.16 7.35 ± 0.10 6.40 ± 0.51 6.25 ± 0.33 23–24 5.79 ± 0.49 7.85 ± 0.09 6.68 ± 0.65 7.55 ± 0.23 6.63 ± 0.74 6.70 ± 0.45 25–26 5.88 ± 0.36 8.15 ± 0.14 6.75 ± 0.39 7.70 ± 0.24 7.25 ± 0.66 7.05 ± 0.25 27–28 6.86 ± 0.52 8.35 ± 0.74 7.57 ± 0.53 7.85 ± 0.53 7.71 ± 0.62 7.74 ± 0.63 Note: ChR — Chernivtsy region, Kh — Kharkiv (E. A. Yakovenko, 1994), UK — United Kingdom (R. Snijders, 1994) Table 2. – Normative values of brain structures measured in transcerebellum plane Duration of ChR T ChR UK Kh pregnancy (weeks) Subarachnoid space (mm) Large tank (mm) 17–18 7.06 ± 0.62 6.10 ± 0.10 5.39 ± 0.49 4.45 ± 0.31 4.90 ± 0.41 19–20 8.70 ± 1.40 6.50 ± 0.12 5.48 ± 0.53 4.90 ± 0.22 5.53 ± 0.82 21–22 5.76 ± 0.46 6.80 ± 0.13 5.71 ± 1.13 5.55 ± 0.10 6.10 ± 0.51 23–24 9.68 ± 1.22 7.10 ± 0.09 6.26 ± 1.37 5.95 ± 0.23 6.36 ± 0.74 25–26 10.63 ± 1.02 7.15 ± 0.14 7.5 ± 0.38 6.30 ± 0.24 6.75 ± 0.66 27–28 12.40 ± 1.03 7.25 ± 0.26 7.71 ± 0.62 6.70 ± 0.37 6.85 ± 0.42 Note: ChR — Chernivtsy region, Kh — Kharkiv (E. A. Yakovenko, 1994), T — Tomsk (A. M. Korostisheva, 2010), UK — United Kingdom (R. Snijders, 1994) As shown in Table 2 regional indicators differ from similar of CSF system to improve the accuracy of diagnosis of hydro- figures in Tomsk and are compared with those in Kharkiv and cephalus in Chernivtsy region. the United Kingdom. Using of single regional fetometrycal parameters is a pre- Conclusion. The results of the study allow us to recom- requisite for standardization of results of ultrasound monitor- mend the use of regional settings of fetometrycal indicators ing of fetal development during 4–10 months. References: 1. Demidov V. N., Rozenfeld B. E. Ultrasound computer Fetometry//Ultrasound diagnostics in obstetrics, gynecology and pediatric. – 1996. – № 1. – P. 14–19. 2. Demydov V. N., Bichkov P. A., Lohvynenko A. B. et al. Ultrasound Biometrics, reference tables and equations//Clinical Lec- tures on ultrasound diagnosis in perynatology/Ed. Medvedev M. V. and Zikyna B. N. – M.: «Diagnosis», – 1990. – P. 83–92. 3. Medvedev M. V., Judina E. V. Ultrasound fetometry in obstetric practice//Clinical Lectures. – 2000. – P. 15–36. 4. Strizhakov A. N., Bunin A. T., Medvedev M. V. Fetal Ultrasound Study in the II and III trimester of pregnancy. In.: Ultra- sound Diagnostics in Clinical Obstetrics. – M., – 1990. – P. 112–131.

35 Section 4. Medical science

5. Esetov M. A., Esetov A. M. Experience of development of regional indicators of fetometry//Ultrasound diagnostics in obstetrics, gynecology and pediatric. – 1999. – № 3. – P. 182–185. 6. Ultrasound fetometry: lookup tables and nomograms/Ed. M. V. Medvedev. – M.: Real Time, – 2002. – P. 80. 7. Makogon A. V., Mahotyn A. A., Korostishevskaya A. M., Kalenytskaya L. V. Pathology of corpus callosum. Three-dimen- sional ultrasound diagnostics and MR-tomography//Ultrasound and functional diagnostics. – 2008. – № 2. – P. 79.

Nabiyev Abduvali Mirzaliyevich, MD, Tashkent regional ophthalmologic clinics, chief E‑mail: [email protected] Zakhidov Ulugbek Basitovich, CMS, applicant of Tashkent advanced medical studies institute, Eye diseases department E‑mail: [email protected]

Refractometric value and eсhobiometric researches in progressive myopia Abstract: we observed 507 patients (1002 eyes) with various degrees of progressive myopia. Echobiometric studies were supplemented by tonographic methods. The integrated study revealed discrepancy of clinical refraction and the size of the eyeball in 30 % of the patients. 42.4 % of the patients had clinical signs of juvenile glaucoma. Clini- cal manifestations of juvenile glaucoma with progressive myopia require detailed study of pathology and selection of medical therapy. Keywords: juvenile glaucoma, progressing myopia. The study of myopia pathogenesis, working out the meth- Studying the literature dedicated to glaucoma in people ods of prevention of its progressing is still one of actual prob- with progressing high degree myopia, we were confirmed that lems of the modern ophthalmology. According to the modern polymorphism of anatomical-physiologic alterations, absence data the leading place in children and teenager’s morbidity is of differential-diagnostic criteria and serious prognosis of glau- taken by refraction abnormalities (33–75 % of detected pa- coma with progressing myopia are not described clearly [4]. thologies); among the refraction abnormalities about 80 % The aim of the research: is to detect clinical importance is myopia [10]. Besides that, myopia is one of the main rea- of refraction metering and echobiometric studies of progress- sons in the nosologic structure of invalidity of vision, taking ing myopia for improvement of the efficiency of the existing the third place in the structure of invalidity of vision and the diagnostic and therapeutic methods. second place in the structure of pediatric invalidity [8]. The materials and methods. We performed examina- According to various authors, the spread of myopic refrac- tion of 507 patients (1002 eyes) with various degrees of pro- tion in patients with glaucoma varies from 6 to 34 % [5, 11]. gressing myopia. The age of the patients was from 15 to 32 It is notable, that the risk of glaucoma appearance increases (24.8 ± 3.5 years), among them 155 men and 352 girls. There with intensification of refraction from hyper metropia to myo- were 135 patients with light degree myopia (266 eyes), among pia high degree [1, 7]. them 36 (70 eyes) with astigmatism component; 264 with Juvenile glaucoma as one of clinical types of congenital mild degree myopia (522 eyes) — 148 patients with astigma- glaucoma and its pathogenesis is conditioned by congeni- tism (293 eyes) and 108 patients with high degree (214 eyes), tal defects of UPK or drainage system of the eye in the pe- among which 85 (169 eyes) with astigmatism. riod of embryonic development. In spite of the relatively Some of thesepatient were supervised before by oculist- low frequency of morbidity among other eye pathologies in doctors in their residence districts with various degrees of children (0.1 %) in the structure of blindness the congenital myopia and they received ambulatory treatment several times. glaucoma is a factor of invalidity in 2.5–7 % cases. We performed the checking of the patients using tradi- Clinical aspects of progressing myopia and congenital tional ophthalmologic methods (visometering, tonometer- glaucoma are presented in literature detail enough [9]. The ing, tonography, static and kinetic perimetering, biomicros- unit — weakened sclera, hydro dynamic disorders, internal copy, gonioscopy with the help of three-mirror Goldman’s eye pressure — one of the basic segments in the mechanism gonioscope). Clinical refraction was detected with the help of myopia development [6]. But the complexity of early di- of Huvitz 3100 refractometer (South Korea). The examina- agnosis of glaucoma with myopia is conditioned, as a rule, by tion of optic nerve disk was performed with the help of direct decreased ophthalmic tension in case of myopia [3]. ophthalmoscopy and estimation of its parameters according

36 Refractometric value and eсhobiometric researches in progressive myopia to A. P. Nesterov’s classification. Ultra-sound echobiometer- The first group included 355 (703 eyes) patients with cor- ing was done with the help of Oftascan mini B («Alcon»), responding clinical refraction and the size of APA. Among the computer perimetering (Peritest‑300, Russia). examined patients we detected: 99 (196 eyes) with light myo- The results and discussion pia, 184 (364 eyes) mild and 72 (143 eyes) with severe myo- At the primary check-up 507 patients (1002 eyes) pia. We detected astigmatism in 24 patients (47 eyes) with complained worsening of far vision (100 %), manifesta- light myopia (24.2 %), 94 (187 eyes) with mild form (50.5 %), tions of visual discomfort (81.9 %), visual fatigue (34.9 %), and 53 (106 eyes) patients with severe myopia (74.3 %). worsening of twilight vision (31.9 %) and progressing of The second group included the results of examination myopia (38.1 %). of 152 patients (299 eyes) with discrepancy of the data of Besides the aforesaid methods of patients’ checking we refraction and APA. Among them, there were 36 people compared compliance of echobiometric values of eye-ball to with slight myopia (70 eyes), 80 with mild form (158 eyes) clinical refraction, paying special attention to the correspon- and 36 with severe myopia (71 eyes). Astigmatism of vari- dence of the received data in the calculation of prolongation ous degrees was detected in 12 cases of light degree myopia of sagital axis of the eye 1,00 mm. equal to 3,00 d [1]. (23 eyes) or 33.3 %, 54 cases (106 eyes) or 67.9% with mild On the basis of the performed studies, dependently on form, and 32 (63 eyes) or 87.7 % cases with severe myopia. the correspondence of the results of clinical refraction and eye The values of visometering, clinical refraction, APA of the anterior-posterior axis (APA) examination the patients were eye ball in these groups according to the degrees of myopia divided to two groups. are presented in Table 1. Table 1. – The values of clinical studies in the research groups I‑group Myopia degree II-group Myopia degree n = 703 eyes n = 299 eyes Values light mild severe light mild severe n = 196 n = 364 n = 143 n = 70 n = 158 n = 71 Acuity of vision 0.61 ± 0.002 0.23 ± 0.004 0.09 ± 0.002 0.42 ± 0.004 0.18 ± 0.002 0.06 ± 0.002 Astigmatism, % 24.1 % 51.3 % 74.5 % 32.4 % 67.8 % 87.9 % Refraction, М 1.65 ± 0.12 4.01 ± 0.82 9.81 ± 2.72 1.71 ± 0.14 4.12 ± 0.81 9.91 ± 2.82 APA, mm. 23.3 ± 0.5 24.5 ± 1.1 27.2 ± 1.1 23.9 ± 0.6 25.2 ± 1.1 28.5 ± 1.1 Note: n — number of eyes We selected maximal glass correction for the examined diagnosed (JG). The representatives of the second group patients on the basis of the achieved data of visometering, with discrepancies of APA data and clinical refraction had clinical refraction and presence of astigmatism of various de- JG in 42.4 % cases. The results of these patients’ examination gree and angles. served the subject of our other articles. The patients of the first group corrected the values to According to some authors’ opinion [4, 6] discrepancy of 0.8–1.0 by means of glass correction, anisometropia (18.7 %) clinical refraction and APA values is linked with the growth was not explicit. Examination of the second group showed an- of sagital size of eye-ball and enlargement of its volume. That isometropia in 47.8 % cases and it was more explicit depend- manifestation is a result of chronic disorder of internal eye li- ently on the degree of myopia in one of the eyes. On the basis quor (IEL) flow, linked with retardation of anterior chamber of clinical refraction data 38.3 % of the patients had intoler- angle development. According to the data provided by vari- ance in the selection of maximal improving glass correction. ous authors [2; 5; 6], biochemical and morphologic checking Tonometric values in the second group of the patients of sclera in that age category show that the number of elastic were higher, and internal eye pressure (IEP) was at the av- fibers prevail collagen ones. In relation to that, the structure erage level of 21.5 ± 0.19 mm. mercury column, while in of the eye-ball becomes more elastic, pliant, and subject to the first group the values of IEP were at the average level extension. The rise of IEL amount can be the reason of en- of 17.5 ± 0.13 mm. mercury column. largement of the eye-ball. In our opinion, progressing of myo- In relation with echobiometric values and APA sizes dis- pia is secondary in relation to IEL volume increase appearing crepancy with the data of clinical refraction and higher values consequently to the disorder of outflow caused by retardation of IEP in the second group we decided to check glaucoma. The of development of the structures of drainage zone — gonio- patients of the first group were also checked for comparison. dyskinesis. That disorder leads to the rise of IEP. The exten- The patients had day tonometring, tonography, static sion of fibrous membrane of the eye-ball is accompanied and kinetic perimetering, biomicroscopy, gonioscopy with by extension of the vascular membrane and retina, causing the help of three-mirror Goldman’s gonioscope, direct and worsening of the trophics of nerve cells and optic nerve. Ap- reverse ophthalmoscopy, loading and unloading tests. parently, the rise of IEP in that group of the patients can be Among the examined patients of the first group with trigger mechanism in the etiology and pathogenesis of juve- progressing myopia in 12.6 % cases juvenile glaucoma was nile glaucoma.

37 Section 4. Medical science

Conclusions: eye-ball in 42.4 % cases juvenile glaucoma was diagnosed, Discrepancies of the values of clinical refraction and APA while in 12.6 % patients glaucoma was detected with the cor- sizes of the eye-ball in 30 % of the patients with progressing responding aforesaid data. myopia. Discrepancy of the clinical refraction values with the sizes Among the patients with progressing myopia with dis- APA of the eye-ball in the patients with progressing myopia crepant values of clinical refraction and APA sizes of the can be one of the criteria to suppose juvenile glaucoma. References: 1. Avetisov E. S. Myopia. – Moscow “Medicine”, –1999. – 59 p. 2. Akopyan A. I. Interrelation of biomechanical parameters of the eye and its role in the development of glaucoma, myopia and combined pathology (preliminary article)//Modern methods of diagnostics and therapy of the diseases of cornea: scientific-pract. Conf: Collection of scient. art. – M., – 2007. – P. 243–250. 3. Gulidova E. G., Strakhov V. V., Alekseyev V. V. Analysis of hydro dynamic values of the eye with progressing myopia and background various degrees of internal eye pressure//50th scientific-practical conference, dedicated to the 60th anniversary of Yaroslavl regional clinical hospital. Abstracts of the report – Yaroslavl, – 2008. – P. 45–47. 4. Doljich G. I., Shlik I. V., Doljich R. R. Clinical varieties of glaucoma in people with acquired severe myopia//Bulletin of ophthalmology. – 1999. – № 6. – P. 3–5. 5. Yegorov E. A., Nesterov A. P., Zolotaryev A. V. Topography of drainage zone of the eye.//Ophthalmology: national manual S. E. Avetisov edition. – M: Geotar-Media, – 2008. – P. 693–699. 6. Yomdina E. N. Practical application of the results of biomechanical researches of corneal capsule of the eye//Russian na- tional ophthalmologic forum. Collection of scientific works – Moscow, – 2008. – P. 536–540. 7. Kuleshova O. N., Sadovaya T. N. Phenotypical manifestations of the syndrome of dysplasia of connective tissue in the cases of primary glaucoma and myopia//Siberian Consilium. – 2007. – № 3. – Р. 21–24. 8. Libman E. S., Kaleyeva E. V. The status and dynamics of invalidity as a result of vision disorders in Russia//IX congress of Russian ophthalmologists. Abstracts of the reports – Moscow, – 2010. – Р. 73. 9. Moshetova L. K., Koretskaya U. M. Glaucoma of myopic eye//Clinical ophthalmology. – 2003. – № 2. – Р. 51–52. 10. Nefedovskaya L. V. Medical-social problems of vision disorders in children in Russia. – М., – 2008. – 256 p. 11. Mastropasqua L., Lobefalo L., Mancini A. at al. Prevalence of myopia in open angle glaucoma//Eur. J. Ophthalmol – 1992 – Vol.2. – No 1 – P. 33–35.

Nazirova Zulfiya Rustamovna, senior scientific assistant, Ophthalmology and pediatric ophthalmology department, Tashkent pediatric medical institute E‑mail: mbshakur@mail. Ru

Optimization of the therapy for children with allergic diseases of eyes Abstract: a special pathogenetic complex therapy provides multi-level protection of intestine, stimulating im- mune response and activating non-specific factors of protection. Key words: allergic diseases of eyes, children, therapy. Topicality. In the whole world allergic diseases of eyes etiopathogenetic (i. e. it is the main reason of ophthalmic are urgent problems of ophthalmology: from 4% to 32% of pathology development, for example autoimmune uveitis, population suffer these diseases and it tends to increase, first of sympathetic ophthalmia), complicating (complicate the all explained by worsening of ecologic conditions in industri- progress of a pathologic process caused by other factors, ally developed countries. The frequency of allergic damages of such as infection or trauma in an eye) and asso ciated (with- eyes is conditioned by the fact that in its tissues and structures out significant effect on the development of ophthalmic dis- there is significant amount of all components compulsory for eases, but can lead to the worsening of the therapy results, allergic reactions’ progress [1; 2; 3]. as in case of post traumatic cataracts, separation of retina, Disorders in the immune system of an organism effect complicated short sight) [4, 7]. the progress of almost all nosologic forms of ophthalmologic Micro flora of gastro-intestinal tract of an organism is in- diseases. The part of immunologic drifts can vary: leading — terrelated with its immune system. Endogenic flora of intestine,

38 Optimization of the therapy for children with allergic diseases of eyes the main representatives of which are bifid bacteria, stimu- counter” and “Cytokine” test systems (JV, SRI Very Clean lates lymphoid apparatus, synthesis of immunoglobulins, in- Bioagents). terferon and cytokines, increases the level of properdine and The study of intestinal micro flora was based on method- complement, increases the activity of lysosyme [8]. Conse- ic recommendations of V. G. Petrovskaya and A. Z. Smoly- quently the disorder of normal micro flora, immune status anskaya (1984). The main part of the research was per- and manifestation of the disease should be considered in a formed in compliance with N. M. Gracheva and co-authors’ union, and the part of trigger mechanism in a certain case method (1986). can be played by any of these components. The main place Dynamics of immunologic and micro biologic tests per- of allergens’ penetration to an organism of a child is mucous formance was made in 1 month after the therapy. of intestine. That’s why in case of disbacteriosis disorders of di- Results of the research: The parallel study of eubiotic gestion and protection of mucous membrane of intestine pro- status of intestine and immunologic values of children with mote excessive penetration of allergens to a child’s organism allergic diseases of eyes showed the presence of direct link be- and formation of long-lasting and stable sensitizing gradually tween the detected pathologic alterations and that served the transferring to some allergic disease [5]. So, complex therapy basis for differentiated inclusion of the new generation agents of allergic diseases in children obligatory includes correction for normal intestinal micro flora — probiotic Bifilaxx Immuno of intestine disbacteriosis. Disbacteriosis is one of the main to the complex therapy. On the basis of the detected hemato- reasons of allergic diseases and intake of probiotics is abso- logic values and disorders in cytokine status both in lachrymal lutely required [6]. liquid and blood we prescribed Kurantil — dipiridamol 25mg. The aim of the research: to optimize the therapy tactics Ascarutin — combined agent of vitamins group was for children with allergic diseases of eyes on the basis of micro prescribed for strengthening of the immunity of the sick biologic and immunologic researches. children with ADE. Materials and methods of the research: 57 sick children For normal functioning of cell membranes, improvement (114 eyes) with allergic diseases of eyes (ADE) aged from 6 to of energetic and exchange processes we prescribed Taifon. 14 years old were examined in the basic clinic of Tashkent pe- Monitoring of immunogram values in the process of the diatric medical institute. Among them 39 (68.4 %)were boys, therapy showed that the performed complex pathogenetic and 18 girls (31.6 %). therapy promoted positive drifts in the immunologic values Clinically 40 patients (71.2 %) had conjunctivitis, of the children with ADE both in case of allergic alterations of 5 (8.8 %) — keratoconjunctivitis, 12 (21.0 %) — blepharo- the eye surface and infectious-allergic ones (table 1). conjunctivitis. Etiologic diagnostics of allergic diseases of After the therapy we detected positive dynamics of eyes started with clinical examination, taking into account the immunity values in children. The values of cell-mediated complaints of itching, burning, redness of eyes, feeling of part in all the children reached the control values. In the hu- “sand in eye-lids” and the character of excretion from con- moral part there is also positive dynamics, though children junctive cavity. Objective examination showed hyperemia with allergic damage of eyes had IgE values above the con- and loose conjunctive with folliculosis, moderate mucous trol ones 2.6 more. But after the therapy 2.7 times reliable or mucous-putrid excretion. After the cytologic scrape decrease was noted. from conjunctive, checking of eye-lashes for demodecosis The positive dynamics after the therapy was also reg- and IEA of blood, the patients were divided to 2 groups de- istered in the study of cytokine status of the children pendently on the etiology of the process. The first group — with allergic diseases of eyes. IL‑1b after therapy dimin- 28 children with infectious-allergic alterations, the second ished 2.4 times in the group with infectious-allergic diseases group — 29 children with allergic alterations of eye sur- of eyes (Р < 0.01) and 3 times in the children with allergic face. The control group consisted of 12 healthy children un- diseases of eyes (Р < 0.01). Though these values in the group der 14 years old without clinical-functional and laboratory of children with allergic diseases of eyes exceeded the control symptoms of allergic diseases. The criterion of exclusion ones to 30.5 ng/ml (Р < 0.01), and to 52.6 ng/ml in the group from the research in all groups was intake of antihistamine with infectious-allergic diseases of eyes (Р < 0.01). and hormonal agents. Amount of IL‑4 after the complex pathogenetic ther- All sick children had standard ophthalmologic checking. apy in both groups decreased up to the control values. The The phenotype of immune competent cells was de- amount of TNF-а in the children with allergic diseases of eyes termined in 57 children with the help of monoclonal an- with various genesis had positive dynamics after the therapy, tibodies produced by Sorbent Ltd. (Russia). The amount but anyway it didn’t reach the control values. of immunoglobulins was detected by the method of radi- In the study of intestinal micro flora of the given cat- al immune diffusion Manchini (1969) using mono-specific egory of children we detected remarkable deviations of dys- serums against IgA, IgM, IgG. Concentration of interleu- biotic character, on the basis of which 1 and 2 degrees of kins and interferons (IL‑1β, IL‑4, TNF-α and IgE) in blood disbacteriosis were determined. After the therapy there is serum and lachrymal liquid was checked by firm-phase im- notable positive dynamics of intestinal micro flora values, mune enzyme analysis method with application of “Protein presented in the Table 2.

39 Section 4. Medical science

Table 1. – Dynamic values of the immune status of the children with allergic diseases of eyes before and after the therapy 1 group 2 group Control Values (n=28) (n=29) (n=20) Before therapy Immune correction Before therapy Immune correction Leu 6.9 ± 0.30 8.6 ± 0.32 6.7 ± 0.24 7.9 ± 0.34 6.7 ± 0.17 Lymph 32.9 ± 0.80 42.4 ± 1.16 32.6 ± 0.52 38.4 ± 1.07 32.6 ± 0.34

LymphABS 2253.2 ± 151.4 3850.6 ± 250.8 2203.2 ± 96.1 3060.5 ± 175.4 2206.2 ± 73.1 CD3 53.6 ± 1.24 48.9 ± 0.81 53.4 ± 0.99 42.8 ± 1.31 53.6 ± 0.33

CD3ABS 1223.2 ± 98.84 1875.9 ± 130.9 1167.6 ± 57.6 1317.9 ± 91.52 1186.3 ± 43.42 CD4 28.2 ± 1.21 24.4 ± 0.78 28.3 ± 0.49 26.4 ± 0.87 28.3 ± 0.31

CD4ABS 632.2 ± 47.65 936.1 ± 63.06 631.2 ± 34.4 822.7 ± 57.30 631.1 ± 20.74 CD8 23.4 ± 0.86 25.8 ± 0.64 22.7 ± 0.55 19.2 ± 0.78 22.7 ± 0.41

CD8ABS 533.9 ± 46.64 1012.2 ± 80.1 495.6 ± 20.91 580.6 ± 38.56 497.9 ± 16.12 CD16 18.6 ± 0.58 21.8 ± 0.71 18.6 ± 0.59 15.8 ± 0.44 18.6 ± 0.24

CD16ABS 417.2 ± 30.22 856.0 ± 73.4 407.0 ± 21.13 490.2 ± 32.68 407.1 ± 11.39 CD19 24.9 ± 1.21 31.2 ± 0.68 25.0 ± 0.66 29.2 ± 1.06 24.0 ± 0.40

CD19ABS 558.1 ± 46.14 1199.3 ± 79.01 554.5 ± 31.40 908.4 ± 64.02 531.0 ± 21.22 CD25 25.6 ± 0.92 29.2 ± 0.73 26.1 ± 0.76 26.2 ± 0.94 25.1 ± 0.25

CD25ABS 585.4 ± 52.29 1100.5 ± 61.53 576.6 ± 29.40 796.9 ± 51.21 556.2 ± 21.53 CD95 23.6 ± 1.19 29.8 ± 0.76 23.3 ± 0.60 33.8 ± 0.79 23.3 ± 0.31

CD95ABS 557.4 ± 47.15 1153.9 ± 81.39 516.0 ± 27.76 1013.4 ± 51.5 518.2 ± 21.29 IgA 148.6 ± 3.56 183.8 ± 2.89 148.0 ± 2.93 180.7 ± 4.64 148.0 ± 1.17 IgM 97.5 ± 3.17 137.1 ± 4.11 96.6 ± 3.08 152.1 ± 3.92 96.6 ± 1.90 IgG 1247.3 ± 30.4 1198.8 ± 22.51 1252.1 ± 31.5 909.3 ± 38.32 1120.5 ± 31.96 IgЕ IU/ml 36.2 ± 3.36 26.1 ± 1.31 35.2 ± 1.01 254.9 ± 5.12 94.1 ± 1.68 ИРИ 1.2 ± 0.07 1.1 ± 0.02 1.3 ± 0.06 1.1 ± 0.02 1.3 ± 0.06 IL‑1b ng/ml 29.5 ± 0.75 200.2 ± 3.10 82.1 ± 3.00 178.3 ± 5.14 60.0 ± 1.31 IL‑4 ng/ml 29.4 ± 1.60 53.7 ± 1.72 32.8 ± 1.11 60.7 ± 3.04 28.8 ± 1.12 TNF-α ng/ml 38.5 ± 1.50 92.3 ± 2.16 57.5 ± 0.86 57.6 ± 1.29 42.0 ± 1.26 Table 2. – Dynamic values of intestinal micro flora of the children with allergic diseases of eyes before and after the therapy 1 group 2 group Control Values (n=28) (n=29) (n=20) Before therapy After therapy Before therapy After therapy Total amount of anaerobes 10.8 ± 0.57 8.8 ± 0.18** 10.6 ± 0.41 8.6 ± 0.23*** 10.1 ± 0.21^ Bifidobacteria 9.71 ± 0.14 7.2 ± 0.38** 9.2 ± 0.23^^^ 5.9 ± 0.37*** 9.1 ± 0.14^^ Lactobacteria 9.28 ± 0.54 6.2 ± 0.35*** 9.21 ± 0.23^^^ 5.8 ± 0.29*** 8.9 ± 0.14^^ Total amount of aerobes 7.82 ± 0.09 8.6 ± 0.07*** 7.9 ± 0.28 8.5 ± 0.05*** 7.8 ± 0.12^^ Lactose positive 8.46 ± 0.38 7.7 ± 0.16 8.65 ± 0.35 8.0 ± 0.14 8.6 ± 0.2 Lactose negative 2.21 ± 0.33 3.4 ± 0.49*** 2.56 ± 0.31^ 2.9 ± 0.34* 2.43 ± 0.11 enterococci 4.03 ± 0.12 5.4 ± 0.14*** 4.6 ± 0.57 5.5 ± 0.11*** 4.7 ± 0.27 Staphylococcus aureus – 3.6 ± 0.24 0 3.5 ± 0.39 0 Epidermal Staphylococcus 2.3 ± 0.19 4.4 ± 0.34** 2.21 ± 0.09^^^ 4.4 ± 0.35*** 2.5 ± 0.21^ Candida 2.6 ± 0.06 3.9 ± 0.31** 2.84 ± 0.23^ 4.0 ± 0.43** 2.31 ± 0.09^ Proteus 1.3 ± 0.2 2.3 ± 0.15** 1.73 ± 0.17** 2.2 ± 0.13** 1.43 ± 0.29^ Note: * — reliability of the data with the control group (* — Р < 0.05; ** — Р < 0.01; — *** — Р < 0.001); ^ — reliability of the data between the values before and after the therapy (^ — Р < 0.05; ^^ — Р < 0.01; ^^^ — Р < 0.001) There was no reliable difference in the amount of anaer- The study of bifidobacteria amount showed that in the chil- obes and the control values after the complex pathogenetic dren with ADE the values increased in comparison with the val- therapy in the children with ADE. ues before therapy and reached the control ones. The same pic- As it is seen from the table 2 children of the 1st group ture was observed in the analysis of lactobacteria amount. after complex therapy had total amount of anaerobes equal to The study of the total amount of aerobes proved the 10.6 ± 0.41 lg CFU/g and 10.1 ± 0.2 in the 2 group. complex pathogenetic therapy for the children with ADE

40 Anthropometric parameters of the head and maxillofacial part in Children with diabetes mellitus... promoted the decrease of the values down to the control the values before therapy and almost reached the control fig- ones in both groups (7.9 ± 0.28 con 7.82 ± 0.09 lg CFU/g ures. The same tendency is observed in the study of Proteus. and 7.8 ± 0.12 con 8.5 ± 0.05 lg CFU/g). Thus, after the complex therapy children with ADE had The amount of lactose positive colon bacilli both in case of recovery of intestinal micro flora both in cases of allergic dis- allergic diseases of eyes and infectious ones reached the con- eases of eyes and infectious diseases. trol values (8.65 ± 0.35 con 8.6 ± 0.2 con 8.46 ± 0.38 lg CFU/g) Conclusion: after the therapy. 1. Children with allergic diseases of eyes have peculiari- The values of lactose negative colon bacilli after the com- ties of immunologic status dependent on the etiology of the plex therapy exceeded the values of the control group a little bit. process. The rise of Staphylococcus is a pathogenic factor, especial- 2. Children with allergic damages of eyes have regis- ly Staphylococcus aureus amount in the examined children tered explicit deviations of dysbiotic character testifying the before the therapy was almost 5 times higher than normal, 2 degree of dysbacteriosis. and after the therapy there was a notable decrease. 3. The special pathogenetic complex therapy provides The number of isolated strains of Candida after the multi-level protection of intestine, stimulating immune responce complex therapy decreased 1.3 times in comparison with and activating non-specific factors of organism’s protection. References: 1. Astakhov U. S., Riks I. A. The modern methods of diagnostics and therapy of conjunctivitis: methodic recommendations. RDs.: St. Petersburg medical univetsity, – 2007. – 68 p. 2. Kurbacheva O. M. Allerhic conjunctivitis. Modern approach to the clinical forms and diagnostics//Refraction surgery and ophthalmology. – 2010. – V. 10. – № 2. – P. 46–49. 3. Maychuk U. F., Pozdnyakova V. V., Yakushina L. N. Application of Okomistin eye drops for conjunctivitis and blepharocon- junctivitis, accompanied by allergic reaction//Catarrhal and refraction surgery. – 2011. – V.11, – № 4. – P. 65–68. 4. Malinovskaya V. V., Korovina N.A., Zakharova I. N. Correction of local immunity disorders in case of intestinal dysbiosis in children//Russian medical journal. – 2006. – Volume 14. – № 1 – P. 57–61. 5. Napomnyashikh V. A. Cell ion regulators in the complex therapy of ophthalmic diseases. Manual. – M.: RegBioMed. – 2010. – 136 p. 6. Borchers A. T., Selmi C., Meyers F. J. Probiotics and immunity//Gastroenterol. – 2009. – № 44 (1). – С. 26–46. 7. Ono S. J., Abelson M. B. Allergic conjunctivitis apdate on pathophysiology and prospects for future treatment//J. Allergy Clin. Immunol. – 2005. – Vol.1, – No. 115. – P. 118–122. 8. Penders J., Thijs C., van der Brandt P. A. Gut micribiota composition and development of atopic manifestations in infancy: the KOALA//Birth Cohort Study. – Gut, – 2007. – № 56 (5). – С. 661–667.

Norova Mavjuda Bakhodurovna, Assistant of Department of Pediatric Stomatology of the Bukhara Branch of the Tashkent State Stomatological Institute Teshaev Shukhrat Jumaevich, DM, professor, Manager by the Department of Anatomy and Operative Surgery with a Topographical Anatomy Bukhara State Medical Institute Baymuradov Ravshan Radjabovich, 1st year undergraduate of Anatomy and Operative Surgery with a Topographical Anatomy Bukhara State Medical Institute E-mail: ss‑[email protected]

Anthropometric parameters of the head and maxillofacial part in Children with diabetes mellitus and its complience to the principle of the golden ratio Abstract: The study details the morphometric parameters of the head and maxillofacial region in a 9‑year-old children, divided into 2 groups — health and diabetes mellitus. The obtained data are compared against the param- eters of the golden ratio.

41 Section 4. Medical science

Keywords: diabetes mellitus, maxillofacial part, anthopometric parameters, the golden proportion, the golden ratio, the morphological height of face. Diabetes mellitus (DM) is a chronic syndrome of hyper- 9‑year-olds with DM (II-group). Clinical and anthropometric glycemia, developing as a result of the impact of genetic and methods followed by statistical data processing were used to exogenous factors. Nowadays, more than 120 million people obtain the parameters of the face and head. The measurements are suffering from this disease around the globe. The annual were made between standard cranio-metrical points with cali- number of newly diagnosed cases exceeds 6–10 % relative to pers (division value 0,1 mm.). Head circumference — mea- the total number of patients, which leads to their doubling ev- sured by mea-suring tape, the longitudinal dimension of the ery 10–15 years [2–4; 9]. According to various authors, from head, the transverse dimension of the head, zygomatic and 3,5 to 8 % of all patients with DM are chil-dren — in the ages mandibular facial diameter measured by tazomer. of 6 to 13 years [6; 7; 10]. In 2007 the total population of chil- Results of research and their discussion. Research dren in the world (0–14) reached 1,8 billion, of which 0,02 % showed that head size of 9 boys of the first group size circum- had DM. This means that approximately 440,000 children ference ranged from 50,2 to 56,1 sm., on average (AV) — have DM and 70,000 new cases are diagnosed each year [5; 8]. 53,42 ± 0,14 sm. Longitudinal diameter of the head varies DM occurs in children relatively sharply and without from 16,2 to 17,8 sm. AV — 16,78 ± 0,12 sm., and the trans- cure, usually acquiring heavy progressive course [7; 8; 12]. verse size of the head ranged from 11,8 sm. to 13,4 sm. AV — This development of DM in children is due to the intensive 12,15 ± 0,09 sm. transverse size of the forehead varies from growth of the body of the child and, accordingly, enhanced 9,85 sm. to 11,4 sm., AV — 10,57 ± 0,1 sm. Multilevel or vertical metabolism. The period of DM in children de-pends on the head diameter is in the range of 11,8–13,5 sm., with an AV — age of the child, when the disease begins. The younger the 12,16 ± 0,07 sm. Zygomatic diameter ranging from 9,0 cm. to child, sick with MD, the harder it runs and the more various 10.4 cm. AV — 9,39 ± 0,12 sm. and mandibular diameter var- the threat of complications are [5; 6; 12]. ies from 8,7 sm. to 10,2 sm. AV — 9,51 ± 0,12 sm. morpho- Limits of variation of the anthropometric parameters logical face height ranged from 12,0 sm. to 13,2 sm. — AV (AP) of body parts of children of the same age tend to go be- 12,5 ± 0,14 sm., and physiognomic face height of 17,0 sm. to yond the size of the oscillations in younger or older children. 18,2 sm. — AV — 17,48 ± 0,21 sm. This is a transgressive variability which provides necessity of Analysis of the MPH and MFP of the nine-year-old healthy quantitative determinations [1, 2]. girls of the first group sho-wed that the length of the head cir- A lot of rules and standards have been suggested to de- cumference ranged from 51,2 to 56,1 cm., AV — 53,9 ± 0,14 sm. scribe the ideal proportions of the human body, but it is the Longitudinal diameter of the head varies from 16,5 to 17,9 sm. golden ratio which defines its true beauty. The golden propor- AV — 16,80 ± 0,12 sm. and the transverse dimension of the tion was first described in 4. BC. It represents unique division head from 12,8 sm. to 14,4 sm. AV — 13,45 ± 0,09 sm. The line AB into two segments (AC and CB) such that AB is divid- transverse dimension of the forehead ranged from 10,1 sm. to ed by the AU and the ratio is equal division of the segment AC 12,3 sm. AV — 11,05 ± 0,1 sm. Vertical head diameter varies NE. The result of this division is the number φ, equal to 1,618. from 12,9 sm. to 14,5 sm. AV — 13,76 ± 0,07 cm. Zygomatic Thus, the golden ratio (GR) is the ratio of interactive propor- diameter ranging from 9,1 sm. to 10,4 sm. AV — 9,7 ± 0,12 sm. tions, in which the whole is connected with its big part, as a big and mandibular diameter ranging from 8,1 cm. to 9,9 sm. part is connected with a small part [Shaparenko P. F., 1994]. AV — 9,05 ± 0,12 cm. morphological face height of 12,1 sm. to The form in the basis of which there is a combination of 13,9 sm. — AV of 12,85 ± 0,14 sm. physiognomic face height symmetry and the GR contribu-tes to the best visual perception of 17,7 sm. to 19,0 sm. — AV — 18,14 ± 0,21 sm. and the emergence of feelings of beauty and harmony. Propor- Studies have shown that head circumference length of 9 year tions of the various parts of our body are the number very close old boys of the second group (children with DM) ranges from to the golden section. If these proportions coincide with the val- 50,4 to 56,4 sm. AV — 53,62 ± 0,14 sm. Longitudinal diameter ue of the Fibonacci numbers (1: 1,618), the appearance or the of the head ranges from 16,1 to 18,0 sm. AV — 16,8 ± 0,12 sm. human body is considered to be perfectly folded [9]. a cross head size ranged from 11,7 sm. to 13,7 cm. AV — In addition, the study of morphometric parameters of the 12,45 ± 0,09 sm. transverse dimension forehead varied from head (MPH) and the dental system in DM in childhood may 10,1 sm. to 11,6 sm. AV — 10,87 ± 0,1 sm. Vertical head diam- be one of the first signs of the diagnosis of this pathology. eter ranges from 11,8 sm. to 13,5 sm. AV — 12,16 ± 0,07 sm. The purpose of the study — to determine the AP head Zygomatic diameter ranging from 9,0 sm. to 10,7 sm. AV — and MFP of 9‑year-old healthy children and children with DM 9,5 ± 0,12 sm. and mandibular diameter ranging from 8,9 sm. and correspondence of the results to the GR. to 10,6 sm. AV — 9,98 ± 0,12 sm. Morphological face height of Materials and methods. The studies were conducted in 11,7 sm. to 12,9 sm. — AV 12,05 ± 0,14 cm. and physiognomic school and, the children’s de-partment of the regional endo- face height of 16,7 sm. to 17,7 sm. — AV — 16,98 ± 0,21 sm. crinology clinic. The resulting AP were studied by dividing the Analysis of the MPH and MFP of nine-year-old girls children into 2 groups: 9‑year-old healthy children (I‑group), of the second group showed that the length of the head

42 Anthropometric parameters of the head and maxillofacial part in Children with diabetes mellitus circumference ranged from 52,9 to 55,8 sm. with AV — Examining the conformity MPF of 9‑year-old children 54,89 ± 0,14 sm. The longitudinal diameter of the head is with diabetes to the principle of the GR have shown that the within 16,7–18,0 sm. AV — 17,5 ± 0,12 sm. Transverse head upper part of the face in 9‑year-olds boys ranged from 5,7 sm. size ranged from 13,0 sm. to 14,7 sm. AV — 13,95 ± 0, 09 sm. to 6,3 sm. AV — 5,85 ± 0,11 sm., while in the 9 year old girls it transverse size of the forehead ranged from 10.9 sm. to was from 5,6 sm. to 6,9 sm. AV 6,06 ± 0,13 sm. The middle 12,7 sm. AV — 11,05 ± 0,1 sm. Vertical head diameter varies part of the face in 9‑year-olds boys ranged from 5,3 sm. to from 13,0 sm. to 14,9 sm. AV — 14,46 ± 0,07 sm. Zygomatic 6,4 cm. AV 5,65 ± 0,12 sm., while the 9 year old girls within — diameter ranging from 9,5 sm. to 10,4 sm. AV — 9,7 ± 0,12 sm. 5,3–6,6 sm. AV — 5,95 ± 0,14 sm. The lower part of the face in and mandibular diameter ranging from 8,7 sm. to 10,9 sm. 9‑year-olds boys with DM ranges from 5,4 sm. to 6,2 sm., AV AV — 9,89 ± 0,12 sm. morphological face height is in the 5,49 ± 0,13 sm., and 9 year old girls, this parameter varied from range — 11,0–13,1 sm. AV — 12,2 ± 0,14 sm., and physiog- 5,3 sm. to 6,4 sm. in average — 5,85 ± 0,13 sm. nomic face height from 17,0 –18,3 sm. AV — 17,94 ± 0,21 cm. The GR of the distance from the tip of the chin to the top of The three division of face is generally accepted in anthro- the eyebrows of the boys of the second group (11,8 ± 0,13 sm) pologists: the top — from the border of the hairy part of the to the distance from the top of the eyebrows to the top of forehead to the middle brow, middle — from the middle brow (7,2 ± 0,11 sm) is 1: 1.64, while in the girls of the second group to under nose points lower — from under nose point to the (12,2 ± 0,12 sm/7,6 ± 0,10 sm.) it is 1: 1.60. chin. When these three dimensions are correct the face is con- Thus, studies have shown that MPH of the children with sidered to be the ideal corresponding to the GR. diabetes is larger than healthy ones. In our opinion this is due The measurements showed that the upper part of the to the constant changes in the level of insulin (hormone sta- face in 9‑year-olds boys of the first group ranges from 5,8 cm. tus) in a young body, which affects the volume of the brain to 6,6 sm. AV — 5,91 ± 0,12 sm., and in 9 years old girls from (cerebral edema). Parameter of the face of healthy children is 5,7 sm., up to 6,9 sm. AV 6,03 ± 0,16 sm. Middle part of the larger than children with DM. This demonstrates the back- face of boys of the first group ranged from 5,7 sm. to 6,6 sm. wardness of the developing bones of the face and dental sys- AV 5,95 ± 0,14 sm., and in 9 year-old girls within — 5,5–6,8 sm. tem in DM. MPH and jaw face area in girls is big-ger than AV — 6,04 ± 0,15 sm. The lower part of the face in 9‑year- boys in both groups. This demonstrates the backwardness of olds boys of the first group ranges from 5,9 sm. to 6,5 sm. AV the MPH and MFR in boys in comparison with the girls in 5,82 ± 0,15 sm., and 9‑year-old girls in this group ranged from the same age. 5,5 sm. to 6,8 sm. AV — 6,12 ± 0,14 sm. The comparison shows The ratio of the upper, middle and lower parts of the that the ratio of the distance from the tip of the chin to the top of face in girls of the both groups is closer to the law of the the eyebrows in males (12,5 ± 0,16 sm.) to the distance from the golden ratio, compared to boys. In the first group relation- top of the eyebrows to the top of (7,6 ± 0,14 sm.) is — 1: 1.65. ship between the MPF is more appropriate to the number of The GR of the distance from the tip of the chin to the top parameters or Fibonacci GR compared with the second group. of the eyebrows (12,5 ± 0,16 sm.) to the distance from the top In the second group the size of the upper segment of the face is of the eyebrows to the top of (7,7 ± 0,16 sm.) in girls is 1: 1,62. more than the lo-wer segment. References: 1. Bogomolov E. S., Kuzmichev Y., Badeeva T. V. et al. Physical development of modern students of Nizhny Novgorod//Medical almanach – 2012; – 3 (22): 193–8. 2. Dedov I. I. Guidelines for Pediatric Endocrinology/II Grandfathers. – M.: Publishing Univer-sum. – 2006. – 600 p. 3. Malyutina E. S. Clinic-morphological features of placental insufficiency in pregnant women with diabetes mellitus complicated with preeclampsia. Author. cand. honey. Sciences. – Moscow. –2008. – 22 p. 4. Peter Dj. Uotkins. Diabetes-ABC of Diabetes/M. I. Balobolkin. – 2‑M.: Bean. – 2006. – 476 p. 5. Khanas Ragnar, Donahue Kim S. , Klingensmith Georgiana, Peter D. F. Svift. Introduction/Diabetes in Children and Adolescents/Clinical Consensus ISPAD practical. Translated from English. under red. prof. V. A. Peterkovoy, – September 2009. – 6–8 p. 6. APEG. (Australasian Paediatric Endocrine Group). Australian Clinical Practice Guidelines: Type 1 diabetes in children and adolescents: Australian Government: National Health and Me-dical Research Council; – 2005. 7. Couper J. J., Donaghue K. C. Phases of Diabetes in children and adolescents Pediatric Diabetes – 2009: 10 (Suppl. 12): 13–6. 8. Delamater Am. Psychological issues in children and adolescents with type 1 diabetes mellitus. In R. Menon and M. Sperling (Eds.), Pediatric diabetes. Kluwer Academic Publishers, – 2003. 9. Dubner H., Keller W. “New Fibonacci and Lucas primes,” Math. Comp., – 68: 225 (2003) 417–27, S1‑S12. MR 99 p. 10. Gale E. A. Dying of diabetes. Lancet – 2006: 368 (9548): 1626–8. 11. IDF. Incidence of diabetes. Diabetes Atlas – 2006: 2. 12. Kordonouri O., Maguire A. M., Knip M., Schober E., Lorini R., Holl R. W., Donaghue K. C. Other complications and conditions associated with diabetes in children and adolescents. Pediatric Dia-betes – 2009: 10 (Suppl. 12): 204–10.

43 Section 4. Medical science

Ploshchenko Yulia Alexandrovna, State Establishment “Dnipropetrovsk Medical Academy Ministry of Health of Ukraine”, Ukraine E‑mail: [email protected]

Perioperative changes of levels of Interleukin–6 and Endotheline–1 in elderly patients during anesthetic management of surgical interventions Abstract: The work is devoted to the study of perioperative change of markers of damage to the cardiovascular system in elderly patients during anesthetic management of surgical interventions. Keywords: elderly patients, ischemic heart disease, Interleukin–6, Endotheline–1. The rapid development of medicine leads to an increase in portion of the artery. Destabilization of atherosclerotic life expectancy, leading to an ever-growing number of elderly. plaques is determined by the high activity of the chronic in- The increasing number of elderly patients is a major problem flammatory process. for Surgery and Anaesthesiology. It is expected that in Europe Endothelial dysfunction plays an important role in the by 2020 older people may reach 30 %, of which 70 % will suf- development of coronary artery disease. In the endothelium fer from coronary heart disease, and the number of surgical produces a number of substances with vasoconstrictor and non-cardiac interventions in this group can reach 25 % of the procoagulant activity, as well as factors that have an anti- total. For these patients is characterized by a large number of coagulant and vasodilator effects. Intact endothelium has comorbidities generalized decrease in vital body functions, anticoagulant, antithrombotic and antiplatelet activity and which significantly increases the operational risk and the de- ensures the free flow of blood through the blood vessels. velopment of intra- and postoperative complications, such as When the situation is the opposite of CHD, dominated by neurological disorders, acute lung injury, myocardial dysfunc- products of endothelial factors have procoagulant and pro- tion, acute renal and hepatic failure [1, 630]. agregant effect [2, 233]. Appropriate preoperative management of patients with Synthesis of endothelin–1 determines endothelial dys- concomitant somatic pathology leads to minimize operational function is a trigger in the pathogenesis of CVD, and well risk and mortality during anesthesia and surgery. With opera- ahead of the appearance of clinical signs of disease. Endothe- tions in elderly and senile important point is the choice of the lin‑1 is a potent and long-acting vascular constrictor. Elevated method of anesthesia, which is largely dependent on factors levels of endothelin‑1 observed in acute myocardial infarc- such as age and general condition of the patient, the presence tion and congestive heart failure. Endothelin–1 is not the only of a severity and comorbidity, emotional status of the patient, marker for vasoconstriction of coronary vessels, and coronary the volume of future surgery planned. artery disease, but also has a deleterious effect on the cardiac At that advanced age is taken into account as a factor muscle, which could lead to decomposition of cardiac com- that increases the operational and anesthetic risk, even in the plications in the perioperative period. absence of comorbidities. Anesthetic risk is increased in the IL–6 — protein molecular weight of 26 kD, relates to presence of: hypertension, coronary heart disease, chronic a multifunctional cytokine and stimulates the proliferation congestive heart failure, chronic nonspecific lung diseases, di- of T‑lymphocytes, macrophages, endothelial cells. Acts as a abetes, peripheral vascular disease, kidneys, joints, changes in growth and differentiation of B‑lymphocytes, hepatocytes the central nervous system. and neurons, activated endothelial cells, monocytes and pro- The main mechanisms leading to the development of coagulant reactions occur. IL–6 modulates immunological acute coronary syndrome, unstable angina and acute myo- processes, inflammation, proliferation, and apoptosis [4, 293]. cardial infarction, are atherosclerosis and thrombosis. The goal was to examine and assess endothelial function Studied a variety of risk factors for development and pro- and dynamics of the level of pro-inflammatory interleukin‑6 gression of coronary artery disease, but has not yet been fully in elderly patients with concomitant cardiovascular disease in explained, that is the root cause and the main trigger of acute the pre-and postoperative non-cardiac surgery. coronary events. In the widely discussed recently inflamma- Material and methods tory theory of atherosclerosis. Clinical studies performed in the clinic of the Depart- Numerous clinical-pathological and experimental stud- ment of Anesthesiology, Intensive Care and Emergency ies in recent years indicate that the arterial wall in atheroscle- Medicine FPO SE «Dnepropetrovsk Medical Academy» rosis is affected with the participation of immune mechanisms. Health of Ukraine (Head. Department. — Professor, MD As a result of inflammation occur thickening of the inner layer O. M. Klyhunenko). Clinical base — KU «Sixth City Hos- of the artery, necrosis of the core layer, segmental proliferation pital», Department of Anesthesiology and Intensive Care. of cells of the inner and middle layers, deposition of lipids and Inclusion criteria were: patients of both sexes; age from 60 to calcium, blood clots in the pathologically altered segmental 85 years; the physical status of patients — ASA II-ASA III;

44 Perioperative changes of levels of Interleukin–6 and Endotheline–1 in elderly patients during anesthetic... carrying out elective surgery expectancy abdominal under obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), chronic renal failure total intravenous anesthesia. (CRF), anemia, the defeat of the main vessels of the head and Exclusion criteria were: failure of a patient to participate in neck, and others. the study; the physical status ASA IV class, a history of poly- Furthermore, the purpose of the examination was to as- valent allergy, decompensated diabetes mellitus, acute stroke, sess efficacy of the therapy and the need for its correction epilepsy, organic damage to the central nervous system; before surgery. The study involved 55 patients aged 60 to 82 years who Methods of preoperative evaluation of patients: com- came to the hospital for elective surgery in the abdominal plete blood count, including platelet count, urinalysis, X‑ray cavity. At the stage of anesthesia preparation for surgery all (fluoroscopy) chest, blood glucose, evaluation of hemostasis the studied parameters were taken into account together in a (prothrombin time, activated partial thromboplastin time,) single group, patients were further divided into 2 subgroups assessment of renal function (glomerular filtration rate, creati- based on sexgender — women (n = 22) and men (n = 23). nine clearance, potassium, sodium, creatinine, urea (Cockroft- Patients were representative for the main demographic indi- Gault), resting ECG. cators such as gender, age, severity of condition classification All patients received pharmacological treatment of ASA, body mass index. myocardial infarction and hypertension to include nitrates, Table 1. – Clinical characteristics of patients β-blockers, angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibi- tors, some patients — with the use of calcium antagonists Number of patients 55 and diuretics. Gender male/female 23/22 Laboratory studies with determination of endothelin‑1 The average age of 72.5/73.62 and IL‑6 in EDTA-plasma by enzyme immunoassay (Bio- Condition according to ASA II/III 32/23 medica and set “Elisa Diameb” (France) were carried out on Body mass index 28.1 ± 6.86 the basis of “Diagnostic Centre Medical Academy.” Measure- Condition for EuroScore > 5 % ments of IL‑6 levels were performed by means of commer- The level of cardiovascular risk high cially available enzyme-linked immunosorbent assays (Orge- Used accounting demographic and metric parameters, nium Laboratories, Vantaa, Finland). The appropriate volume comorbidities accounted for systems: cardiovascular, respi- of sample or standard was applied to a 96‑well microtiter plate ratory, urinary, endocrine system, taking into account prevail- precoated with the corresponding monoclonal antibody. After ing hemostasis. Preoperative preparation of elderly patients the aspiration of the wells, plates were washed with a specific with cardiovascular pathology was conducted according to surfactant provided by the manufacturer. A solution of en- the recommendations ESC Guidelines (2009) Guidelines zyme-linked polyclonal antibody and substrate was added to for pre-operative cardiac risk assessment and perioperative each well. The optical density of each well was read at the ap- cardiac management in non-cardiac surgery [3]. propriate wavelength. Extended preoperative examination and treatment re- Study was conducted in accordance with the require- quired patients with the following conditions: coronary ments of the Ethics Committee. Statistical processing of the artery disease, angioplasty and stenting of the coronary ar- results was performed using the package MS Excel 2007. Data teries in history, coronary bypass surgery history, cardiac ar- are presented as M ± m. Statistically significant value was con- rhythmias and conduction, including presence of implanted sidered p < 0.05. devices, heart failure, essential hypertension, patients con- Results and discussion stantly receiving vitamin K antagonists (VKA), patients In conducting preoperative examination of patients with without clinical signs of heart disease, but with risk factors regard to operational risk for anesthesia — ASA was found for coronary heart disease. that the severity of 58 % of patients meet the second degree of In addition to the ASA classification we deteriorated risk risk, 42 % of elderly patients — III degree for ASA. stratification of cardiac events with: evaluation of surgical In the analysis of comorbidity coronary heart disease in risk (the risk of myocardial infarction or death from car- the form of diffusion and atherosclerotic cardiosclerosis diac causes within 30 days after surgery) [ACC/AHA], risk met in 30.6 and 58.3 % of cases, respectively; Hypertensive stratification depending on the condition of the patient due heart was available in 4.37 % of patients, arrhythmias — in to functional status of the patient, expressed in metabolic 11.6 %. Additional pathology of the respiratory system as con- equivalents, scale EuroScore. comitant highlighted in 27.4 % of patients, disorders of the Preoperative examination consisted by identification endocrine system — 3 %, urinary — 8.51 % in elderly patients. and assessment of the severity of disease of the cardiovascu- Varicose veins of the lower limbs suffered 11.4% of patients. lar system: ischemic heart disease (acute coronary syndrome, Almost 25 % of elderly patients with abdominal pathology was myocardial infarction, angina pectoris, condition after surgery observed joint presence of comorbidity on several systems. on the heart), CHF, life-threatening cardiac arrhythmias, It is known that the synthesis of endothelin‑1 largely presence of implanted devices (pacemaker/ICD/CPT), determines endothelial dysfunction, which is a trigger in significant comorbidities, diabetes mellitus (DM), chronic the pathogenesis of cardiovascular disease (atherosclerosis,

45 Section 4. Medical science hypertension, thrombosis), and well ahead of the onset of Thus, we can assume that endothelin–1 is not only a mark- clinical signs of disease. Endothelin‑1 is a potent and sus- er and the expression of vasoconstriction of coronary vessels tained vascular constrictor of efficiency, which is much high- and coronary heart disease, but also has some damaging ef- er than the potential vasoconstrictor angiotensin II (A II) fects on the heart muscle itself, which can lead to the devel- (Randall M., 2001), for which he received a fair description opment of cardiac complications in the perioperative period. of “the most powerful of all known short-lived, but long-term We have compared the levels of endothelin–1 in elderly mediators.” Cardiac effects of endothelin‑1 (vasoconstriction patients with concomitant cardiovascular pathology in pre- and ischemia) realized through receptor system (receptor sub- and postoperative 1 day after surgery and for 5 days. In the type A), localized mainly in the smooth muscles of coronary preoperative period, the level of endothelin–1 in all patients arteries. A number of receptors sensitive to endothelin‑1 was was significantly increased by 45 % compared with the refer- found in the membranes of cardiomyocytes and their num- ence values (values of endothelin‑1 in plasma obtained during ber increases along with increased levels of endothelin–1 lev- the examination of healthy persons according to the literature, els in terms of experimental and clinical myocardial infarction, were 0.1–0.35 fmol/ml) (Table. 2). Thus, we have received which gives reason to assume a direct effect of the peptide on confirmation of laboratory manifestations of cardiovascular the myocardium. Increased endothelin–1 content in periph- disease with signs of endothelial dysfunction in patients who eral blood observed in acute myocardial infarction and heart planned noncardiac surgery. At 1 day after the operation level failure. The concentration of immunoreactive endothelin–1 marker that we studied, increased significantly compared with significantly increased in patients with essential hypertension the preoperative values. By the fifth day postoperative levels stage II–III hypertension and symptomatic. There is evidence of endothelin — 1 in both study subgroups was significantly of predominantly local production of endothelin–1 in heart decreased to preoperative baseline, but did not reach the ref- failure and cardiac arrhythmia. erence values. Table 2. – The value of endothelin–1 and interleukin–6 in the stages of research 1 stage 2 stage 3 stage The level of endothelin–1 marker, fmol/ml 0.556 ± 0.02 0.627 ± 0.01* 0,582 ± 0.013* The level of interleukin–6 marker, pmol/ml 4.81 ± 0.9 35.39 ± 13.4* 10,47 ± 1.2* Note: * – р < 0.05. In the preoperative period, the level of interleukin–6 in and proinflammatory interleukin–6 in plasma, indicating the all patients exceeded the reference values of 2 times. At 1 day presence of endothelial dysfunction and activation of pro- after the operation level of the marker, which we explored, inflammatory system. increased compared with preoperative values up to 10 times. In the early postoperative period, the vascular endothe- By the fifth days of positive dynamics in the form of a reduc- lium responds to the release of vasoconstrictor and pro-in- tion of interleukin‑6 is almost 3.5 times as compared with flammatory markers in the surgical trauma, the early postoperative period, but did not reach the values By the fifth day of the postoperative period with signs of before surgery. endothelial dysfunction and inflammation in elderly patients Conclusions decrease, but not disappear completely. In elderly patients with concomitant cardiovascular In order to clarify the mechanisms of influence and effects disease, which is planned to conduct non-cardiac surgery of existing endothelial dysfunction and inflammatory further showed a significant increase in the levels of endothelin–1 research is needed. References: 1. Devereaux P. J., Goldman L., Cook D. J. et al. Perioperative cardiac events in patients undergoing noncardiac surgery: a review of the magnitude of the problem, the pathophysiology of the events and methods to estimate and communicate risk. CMAJ – 2005, – 173 (6): 627–634. 2. Unic Adriana, Lovorka Derek, Hodak Natasa, Marijancevic Domagoj, Ceprnja Marina, Serdar Tihana, Krhac Maja, Romic Zeljko. Endothelins – clinical perspectives. Biochemia Medica – 2011, – 21 (3): 231–42. 3. Poldermans D., Bax J. J., Boersma E. et al. Guidelines for pre-operative cardiac risk assessment and perioperative cardiac management in non-cardiac surgery. The Task Force for Preoperative Cardiac Risk Assessment and Perioperative Cardiac Management in Non-cardiac Surgery of the European Society of Cardiology (ESC) and endorsed by the European Society of Anaesthesiology (ESA). European Heart Journal – 2009, – 30 (22): 2769–812. 4. Landis C. Pharmacologic strategies for combating the inflammatory response. J Extra Corpor Technol – 2007, – 39: 4: 291–295.

46 Expert diagnostics of diabetes mellitus in the cases of sudden death

Ruziyev Sherzod Ibadullayevich, senior scientific assistant, applicant to Forensic medicine and medical law department with the course of pathologic anatomy and section course, Tashkent pediatric medical institute E‑mail: [email protected]

Expert diagnostics of diabetes mellitus in the cases of sudden death Abstract: A complex of informative signs characteristic for diabetes mellitus was revealed as a result of the research and it will provide a possibility to make objective forensic-medical diagnosis in cases of death because of diabetes mellitus and its complications. Keywords: sudden death, diabetes mellitus, forensic-medical expertise. Topicality. During the recent decades there is noted 1. Common criteria — remoteness of a death, place of a sudden rise of diabetes mellitus (DM) morbidity. And ev- corpse detection, short data about the circumstances ery 10–15 years the numberof patients with DM double [2]. of death; Diabetes mellitus leads to early invalidity and lethality, con- 2. External features — appearance of a corpse; body ditioned first of all by macro and micro angiopathic compli- weight and size, constitution, color and peculiarities cations such as atherosclerosis and ischemic heart disease, of skin; neuropathia, retinopathia and osteoorthropathia [6]. Diabetic 3. Internal features — macroscopic: the structure of or- angiopathia is the most often cause of death — up to 80 % gans and pathologic alterations there; microscopic: of the patients with diabetes mellitus [5]. It should be noted results of forensic-histologic analysis; that in these cases most often there is sudden death when the 4. Forensic-medical diagnostics and expert conclusions. corpse should undergo obligatory forensic-medical checking. The analyzed group was selected on the basis of principle According to the data of many researches [1; 3; 4] lethality of lifetime suffered various forms of diabetes mellitus verifica- among the patients with DM is 2 times greater in compari- tion (according to medical documents). The main accent of son with the group of those who died suddenly but didn’t the work was done to the inner examination of a corpse. have diabetes mellitus. In these cases diabetes mellitus was Results and discussion. The status of vessels of brain — we met very rare (as the essential or associated pathology) in the pain attention to the thickness and winding of the walls and posthumous diagnosis. That, apparently, was linked with the presence of atherosclerotic plaques. In the checked archive ma- difficulties of posthumous diagnostics of DM as the main rea- terial the vessels of brain were described as “thin, elastic” — son of death performed by forensic-medical experts. 9.5 %, “dense, winded” 20.5 % and “thick walls” 70 % of the Posthumous diagnostics of DM as the main reason of cases. In 62.4 % of the cases we registered the presence of ath- death is associated with a lot of difficulties such as absence of erosclerotic plaques in the vessels of brain. Though the sizes and medical documentation about patient’s lifetime health status spread of the plaques were not mentioned in any of the cases. available for a forensic-medical expert; absence of pathologic- Mass of heart was defined according to P. F. Kalitiyevski’s morphologic signs specific for DM; no method of checking classification (1987): as a guide heart mass less than 200 g. of the corpses of those who died suddenly for reliable detection an adult was considered to be atrophic one, and more than of diabetes mellitus [5]. 300 g. for women and 360 g. for men — hypertrophic. Ac- Significant difference between the values of morbidity, cording to our observations heart was hypertrophic in 78.8 % data of lethality because of complications and the frequency cases — heart mass was in the limits of normal range. It should of posthumous diagnostics of DM with the forensic-medical be noted, that among 140 cases of the examined corpses only examination of a corpse testify the presence of multiple prob- in 30 cases (21.4 %) hearts were weighted, others were not. lems of posthumous forensic-medical diagnostics of diabetes Sizes of heart. Aiming to make a system of possible values of mellitus, as well as the main reason of sudden death. heart sizes, we studied the normal value proposed by Sinelnikov: All the aforesaid served the objective basis for the perfor- length 12–15 cm., width 8–11 cm., thickness 6–8 cm. If any of mance of the given research of the problem of posthumous these three sizes of heart was over or less than normal ones, that diagnostics of diabetes mellitus. heart was considered to be big or small correspondingly. Thus, The aim of this research was working out of morphologic we have got the following results: heart was hypertrophic in criteria for posthumous diagnostics of diabetes mellitus. 81 corpses (51.9 %), in 16 cases the sizes of heart were not not- Materials and methods of the research. 140 forensic- ed. In the rest of the cases heart sizes were in the normal limits. medical expertises taken from the archive of the Town FME The thickness of ventricular wall — normally it is as fol- bureau of the RU of Tashkent city for 2005–2011 served to lows: left — 1.2–1.4 cm., right — 0.3–0.4 cm. The thickness be materials for the research. For the analysis of the expert of the right ventricle wall was not measured in 13 cases, conclusions we took into account the following criteria: left ventricle — 15 cases. The thickness of the wall of the

47 Section 4. Medical science right ventricle exceeded the normal values in 20 cases which is characteristic for fatty dystrophy. In rare cases there (14.3 %). The thickness of the left ventricular wall exceeded was description of meg-nut liver (16 cases — 11.4 %) and the normal values more often — in 74 cases (52.9 %). In loose hepatic tissue (8 cases — 5.7 %). 2 cases the thickness of the left ventricular wall was much Main pathologic morphologic signs of diabetes mellitus less the normal one (0.6 cm. and 0.8 cm.). are alterations of pancreas. It should be taken into account Loose myocardium, characteristic for cardiomyopathy, that insult, hyalinosis and amyloidosis of Largenhanse islands, was described in 67 cases (47.9 %), and in 42 cases (30.0 %) — glycogen infiltration of renal tubules and nodular glomerula elasticity of myocardium was not noted. In the rest of the cases sclerosis, so “typical” for diabetes mellitus, were met in few there were variants of the normal values. cases (16 cases, 11.4 %) and these data are not considered to One more important symptom of cardiomyopathy — be informative and pathognomic at the moment. At the same excessive fat accumulation on the surface of heart — was time diabetes mellitus is often accompanied by non-specific observed in 46 cases (32.9 %). Though, it should be noted, alterations such as fibrosis and linomatosis of pancreas. Infor- that in 40.2 % of the cases there was no information about fat mation about mass and sizes of pancreas was rarely met in the accumulation. archive data; only in 6 forensic-medical conclusions, it is 4.3 % Color of myocardium. Only in 15 cases (10.7 %) cardiac from the total number of cases. muscle had red-brown color (mature meat color). In 6 cases Sizes of pancreas were often described in words (very (4.2 %) there were descriptions of brown color or hue of myo- small, normal sized, thin, etc). It should be noted, that in cardium. Yellow color, characteristic for myocardial fatty dys- 67 cases (47.9 %) the gland was reduced in its size, indicat- trophy was mentioned in 19 cases (13.6 %), brown color of ing the presence of pathologic processes in it — specifically cardiac muscle in 10 cases (7.1 %), and in the rest of cases — atrophy of island apparatus. myocardium looked putrid. The density of the gland: loose or a little bit loose gland was We registered focal alterations of myocardium: in 25 cases described in 17 cases (12.1 %), in 68 cases (48.6 %) — there (17.9 %) post-infarction cardiac sclerosis, and it was natural, was condensation of pancreas. Hemorrhage to the tissue of taking into account the spread of atherosclerotic processes in pancreas was noted in 16 cases (11.4 %). In 4 cases (2.9 %) — that group. Small-focal cardiosclerosis was registered in vessels were described to be “widened, filled with blood”. Other 52 cases (37.1 %). cases had no description of the vessels of pancreas. Areas of uneven blood saturation, characteristic for sec- Insufficient attention of the experts to pancreas caused ondary cardiomyopathies, were observed in 63 cases (45.0 %). sub-quality sample prescription from pancreas for forensic- Often there were noted signs of coronary vessels athero- histologic analysis (in 35 cases — 25 %). In the most cases sclerosis — 92 cases (65.7 %), in the 8 cases the area of athero- the checked samples of pancreas contained the following sclerotic alterations reached 90 %, in 23 cases — up to 70 %, microscopic alterations: fibrosis (45 %), linomatosis (33 %), 50 cases to 50 %, 20 cases to 30 %. Atherosclerotic alterations sclerosis (21 %) and atrophy (9 %) of pancreas. of aortal wall were noted in 102 cases (72.9 %). Thus, the results of our research showed that any of 140 cas- Mass of liver. For the detection of the mass of liver were es of sudden death had no diabetes mellitus or diabetic coma studied the data proposed by Kalitiyevski P. F. (1987): a liver diagnosis as the main cause of death. Poor quality of forensic mass more than 2300 g. for men and 1800 g. for women was expert conclusions also should be noted, as it had negative effect considered to be pathologically enlarged; and the mass less on the gathering and analysis of archive data. Anyway we were than 1200 g. for both sexes — reduced. able to detect the most informative pathologic morphologic cri- In 20 cases of our observations (14.3 %) liver was en- teria of diabetes mellitus, which can be surely useful for forensic larged, and in 84 cases the mass of liver was not mentioned. diagnostics in the cases of sudden death. In the rest of the cases (25.7 %) — the mass of liver was in Conclusions: compliance with the normal values. The margin of liver was Absence of the “Diabetes mellitus” or “Diabetic coma” described only in 46 cases among which 14 (10 % from the diagnosis in the medical certificates testifies the expert ignor- total number) — the margin was sharp. ing of the case materials and medical document, and also poor Color of liver: for the systematization of possible colors quality of corpse expertise. of liver we introduced the code of hues and color of spectrum. Incompetent analysis and wrong interpretation of the Yellow hue of liver, indicating the presence of fatty dystrophy, data of inner checking of corpses often leads to inaccurate was noted in 62 cases (44.3 %). forensic-medical diagnostics. Pathologic alterations in hepatic tissue were noted Definition of criteria self-descriptiveness in cases of dia- in 72 cases (51.4 %). Most often descriptions included yel- betes mellitus make them available for using in posthumous low inclusions, impregnations or total yellow color of liver, diagnostics. References: 1. Balabolkin M. I. Diabetology. – М.: Medicine, – 2000, – 672 p. 2. Dedov I. I., Shestakov M. V. Diabetes melitus. – М.: Universum Pablishint, – 2003, – 456 p.

48 The character of dysbiotic changes in the acute period of stenosing laryngotracheitis of respiratory tract

3. Panchenko Y. P. Ischemic heart disease and diabetes mellitus – insidious tandem//Heart. – 2004. – V.3. № 1 (13) – Р. 9–12. 4. Petryaikina Y. Y., Ritikova N. S. Diagnostics of diabetes mellitus 1 and 2 types//Attending physitian. – 2005. – № 5. – Р. 17–20. 5. Samarkina O. U. Posthumous diagnostics of latent diabetes mellitus in forensic medical practice. Abstruct of the disserta- tion of CMS., – М. – 2011, – 24 p. 6. Bell D. S. Diabetic cardiomyopathy a unique entity or a complication of coronary artery disease?//Diabetes Care. – 1995. – № 18. – Р. 708–714.

Samieva Gulnoza Utkurovna, The assistant of Samarkand State Medical Institute, Republic of Uzbekistan E‑mail: samieva‑[email protected]

The character of dysbiotic changes in the acute period of stenosing laryngotracheitis of respiratory tract Abstract: There is a high degree of contamination of mucous URT with Staphylococcus aureus (in 20 %), α-hemolytic streptococci (20 %), complex associations (30 %) in the recurrence of SLT at an early age and in remission. Keywords: respiratory tract, acute period of stenosing laryngotracheitis. Relevance. The mucous membranes of the respiratory tract URT pathogenic and conditionally pathogenic Gram-positive carry out a barrier function is to prevent fixation and penetra- and Gram-negative flora with reduction of releasing of normal tion extraneous substances and microorganisms in the internal saprophytic microflora. Undoubted the leadership in this pro- environment of the human body and for this reason the study cess in the acute period of the disease is Staphylococcus aureus. of the microbial landscape is of scientific interest [1; 3; 4; 5]. It occurs as a monoculture and as associations — in combina- Material and methods. In 275 children aged from tion with other pathogenic agents. The prevalence of S. aureus 6 months to 5 years with the generated recurrent of stenos- of the respiratory tract in the acute period of high in both type ing laryngotracheitis studied the microbial landscape of the PSLT and RSLT. In the acute period of PSLT Staphylococcus mucous membranes of the upper respiratory tract (URT) by aureus was isolated from the nasal in 28 % of the surveyed chil- conventional methods of bacteriological examination includ- dren, and in 25 % from the oropharynx. In RSLT this microbe is ing crops of secretions from nasal and oropharynx on nutrient found in 39 % of cases in the nasopharynx and in 23 % of chil- medium with subsequent identification. dren in the oropharynx. In associations S. aureus often sown Results and discussion. We compared the character of from oropharyngeal in patients with RSLT — in 22 % of cases. dysbiotic changes of the respiratory tract in the acute period In the acute phase of the disease α-hemolytic streptococ- of the disease depends on the age of our patients and we have cus is determined more frequently in oropharyngeal in pa- marked frequent infection of mucous membranes with Staphy- tients with PSLT (17 %), while in RSLT it was determined ex- lococcus aureus in all age’s periods [2]. In the acute phase of the tremely rare (2 % of cases). E. coli was detected on the mucous primary Stenosing laryngotracheitis in children from 6 months, of URT in the acute period of RSLT as in PSLT (6 and 8 %, up to 3 years are determined most denominated violations of respectively). Candida species in the oropharynx in PSLT re- microbiocenosis of mucous of respiratory tract in the nasophar- vealed in 25 % of cases, RSLT — in 18 % from the nasopharynx ynx and in the oropharynx (normal microflora composition is also were secreted the mycelium of the fungus, as in PSLT as present in 9.5 % and 9 % of patients, respectively). We have well as in RSLT. The complex associations of microorganisms not identified such regularities in the acute period of RSLT. Dur- were observed only in the nasopharynx in patients with PSLT, ing remission at PSLT the normal microbial composition of the in RSLT they were found in the nasopharynx (15 %) and in the respiratory tract is reversed only in a half of the surveyed from oropharynx (23 % of the patients). Gram-positive pathogens in 6 months. up to 3 years, at an older age structure of the normal the acute phase of SLT are found mainly in the form of associa- flora in the nasopharynx in 33 % of children aged 3–6 years tions, especially with Staphylococcus aureus, and do not have and 22 % at the age of 6 years and older. The normal microbial such a high representation in the URT, as S. aureus. landscape of the oropharynx in children up to 3 years in remis- In the acute period of RSLT complex associations patho- sion of PSLT was determined in 50 % of cases, in the other two gens were more common in older children in the oropharynx groups — only 25 %. In the remission of RSLT restoration of (43 %). The presence of such changes of microbiocenosis char- normal flora from 0 to 3 years was observed only in 16 % over acterizes the severity of dysbiotic processes and the duration of 3 years — in 50 % cases the normal microflora is saved. In the their existence. In the acute period of PSLT above regularities acute period are marked a significant shift in the microbioce- are not detected, although such pathogens as Candida, E. coli, nosis of the respiratory tract in both type of SLT. Disbiotic pro- Klebsiella, often are secreted in older children. Affection of mu- cesses characterized by settling in the mucous membranes of cous membranes of the respiratory tract with Staphylococcus

49 Section 4. Medical science aureus in remission is very high, both in primary and in recur- frequency of discharge of fungi Candida (75 %), pneumococ- rent SLT. But the process of settlement with this pathogen of cus (50 %), complex associations of micro-organisms (75 %) the mucous in RSLT is expressed in a greater degree. In PSLT and the most aggressive pathogens — S. haemolyticus (25 %) the emission level of S. aureus from the nasopharynx is 32%, in and E. coli (25 %). In young children the composition of the RSLT reaches almost 50 %. Alpha-hemolytic streptococcus is microflora of URT in remission is mainly represented by found in RSLT only as associations and only in the orophar- Staphylococcus aureus and pneumococcus (14 %). At older ynx — up to 17 % of cases, in PSLT p‑hemolytic streptococ- ages, the leadership remains with Staphylococcus aureus cus is found in the nasopharynx as a mono-culture — to 7 % (50 %), pneumococcus (25 %) and complex microbial asso- in the oropharynx in the form of associations — to 20 % in ciations (50 %). Discharge of Staphylococcus aureus from the observed patients. The pneumococcus was revealed in respira- mucous URT in RSLT was observed in children of all ages tory tract in remission of PSLT in 13 %), in RSLT — only in reaching in older children 83 % (in the nasopharynx and oro- the oropharynx in 12 % of patients. Complex associations of pharynx). Complex combinations of pathogens and microor- pathogens in remission occur in RSLT in the nasopharynx al- ganisms, such as E. coli, S. haemoyiticus and Candida species most 2 times more often than in PSLT. Complex combinations are determined in remission predominantly in older children. of pathogens were revealed in the oropharynx in remission of In children older than 3 years, the main representatives of the PSLT quite often — at 33 %, in RSLT — 26 %. As in the acute microflora were S. aureus, pneumococcus, hemolytic Staphy- period and during remission are detected phenomena of deep- lococcus aureus (42,17 and 17 %, respectively). In this age ening of the dysbiotic processes in the nasopharynx at RSLT. group, we noted the absence release of Gram-negative bacte- Candida species in nasopharyngeal in remission of PSTL ria — Klebsiella, E. coli, as well as α-hemolytic streptococcus. were not discharged, in RSLT are determined in 3 % of patients. Despite the frequent administration of antibacterial drugs in In the oropharynx the detection rate of these pathogens in the children of this age, Candida species and complex associations primary and recurrent SLT is about the same — 20 %. Kleb- out of the oropharynx were determined only 8% of patients. siella in the respiratory tract in remission of PSLT was not There is a high degree of contamination of mucous URT detected, in RSLT was revealed in 3 % of cases. Detection of with Staphylococcus aureus (in 20 %), α-hemolytic strepto- of E.coli from the nasopharynx at the primary and recurrent cocci (20 %), complex associations (30 %) in the recurrence SLT is approximately the same level and is 7 and 6 %. Coloni- of SLT at an early age and in remission. It was established a zation of oropharyngeal with this pathogen in RSLT increased considerable reduction of S. aureus discharge from the mucous almost in 2 times compared with PSLT — 12 and 7 % respec- of URT in compare with the acute period (from 83 to 20 %), tively. The normal flora is presented in remission, as well as in while the proportion of α-hemolytic streptococcus in this age the acute phase, both in primary and in recurrent SLT pre- group (remission) increases from 0 to 20 %, also increased seed- dominantly with α-hemolytic streptococcus. The discharge ing of E. coli (0 to 10 %) and complex associations (0 to 30 %). of Staphylococcus aureus from the mucous of the respiratory Conclusion: We observed worsening of disbioceno- tract in remission period of PSLT mentioned more frequent- sis process of respiratory tract in SLT characterizing by ly in children aged from 3 to 6 years. settling in the mucosa of the respiratory tract firstly with S. aureus as a monoculture was isolated from mucosa of pathogenic gram-positive, then adding of gram-negative nasopharyngeal in 100 % of these children, and 50 % — of microflora, even micro-organisms, which unusual in this the oropharynx. In children of this age also noted the great ecological niche. References: 1. Акоев Ю. С., Сенцова Т. Б., Яцык Г. В., Пинаева А. Р., Катосова Л. К. Новый взгляд на дисбиозы у новорожденных детей//Российский педиатрический журнал. – 2000. – № 5. – С. 13–14. 2. Балкарова Е. О., Чучалин А. Г., Грачева Н. М. Вирусно-бактериальный дисбиоз и клинико-морфологические изменения респираторного и желудочно-кишечного тракта при атопическом синдроме.//Пульмонология. – 2008. – № 2. – С. 47–53. 3. Бриткова Т. А., Лекомцева О. И., Юзефович Н. В., Петракова И. А., Гуськов А. П. Факторы риска и профилактика синдрома острой дыхательной недостаточности у детей с рецидивирующим ларинготрахеитом//Материалы все- российской научно-практической конференции «Неотложные состояния при инфекционных заболеваниях у детей: факторы риска, диагностика, терапия». – СПб., – 2008. – С. 18. 4. Миронов А. Ю., Савицкая К. И., Воробьев А. А. Условно-патогенные микроорганизмы при гнойно-воспалительных забо- леваниях JIOP-органов и менингитах.//Журнал микробиологии, эпидемиологии и иммунологии. – 2001, № 2. – С. 36–39. 5. Орлова С. Н., Аленина Г. М., Караваев В. Е., Бердунова Е. Г., Калистратова Е. П. Микробиоценоз слизистых оболочек респираторного и пищеварительного трактов у детей со стенозирующими ларинготрахеитами//Четвертый конгресс детских инфекционистов: Материалы. – М., – 2005. – С. 141. 6. Орлова С. Н., Бердунова Е. Г., Калистратова Е. П., Аленина Т. М., Караваев В. Е., Черняева С. В. Вирусно-бактери- альный дисбиоз респираторного и желудочно-кишечного трактов у детей со стенозирующими ларинготрахеита- ми//12 Национальный конгресс по болезням органов дыхания. – М., – 2002. – С. 201.

50 Protein sensibilisation has different effect on the contractile function of «fast» and «slow» skeletal muscles of a mouse in vitro

Teplov Alexander Yurievich, Kazan State Medical University, Associate Professor, Department of Pathology E‑mail: [email protected] Farkhutdinov Albert Mansurovich, Kazan State Medical University, Senior Teacher, Department of Pathology E‑mail: [email protected]

Protein sensibilisation has different effect on the contractile function of «fast» and «slow» skeletal muscles of a mouse in vitro Abstract: The work analyzes the impact of allergic transformation of the organism on the contractile function of isolated skeletal muscles (SMs) of the lower leg of a mouse. It is shown that both «fast» (m. EDL) and «slow» (m. soleus) SMs change their contractile properties during protein sensibilisation (PS). The vector of change of strength and pace of contraction both at cholinomimetic carbacholinum (CC) and at KCl in the conditions of PS for muscles with different phenotype is of diverse nature. There is a presupposition that changes of the contractile function of SMs are determined by both changes of choline mediated processes of activation of a membrane of muscle fibers (MFs) and changes in the system of electromechanical connection (EMC). Keywords: Skeletal muscles, contractile properties, protein sensibilisation. It is well known that allergic transformation of the organ- conditions of isometry, which was achieved by stretching of ism is accompanied by a change of morphofunctional state of the medicine of the muscle during 20 minutes with the force skeletal muscles (SMs) of homoithermic animals [1]. One of of 0,5 g. at the constant perfusion by a Krebs solution. The con- the mechanisms ensuring the development of adaptive pro- traction was registered by the force meter. Agonist ChC was cesses in the tissues and organs during the allergic transfor- studied in the concentrations from 2 х 10–5 M to 3 х 10–3 M. KCl mation of the organism is a change of potassium-dependent was studied in the concentrations from 50 to 250 mmol/l. The processes of cell activation [2]. On the other hand, variability contractile function was analyzed according to the indicators of functions of the muscle system is one of the brightest mani- of contractions of muscles to ChC and KCl. The power (Рос) festations of these processes. And, if mechanisms, including and velocity (Vос) of muscle contraction to the substances in potassium-mediated ones, of functional variability of smooth submaximal and maximal concentrations were estimated. muscle organs, primarily airway, during an allergy are studied The contraction of isolated SMs to the increase of con- quite in detail, the questions of flexibility of SMs in the above centration of ions К+ is a convenient «test» to study EMC mentioned conditions remain absolutely unstudied. The rel- processes [7], and it allows defining the role of choline-me- evance of the given problem is determined by undiscovered diated processes in the mechanisms of activation of MFs of mechanisms of compensatory changes in the operation of mo- membrane when comparing with the contractile response to tor muscles during compulsory vaccination of sportspeople ChC. This role can be determined quantitively as a correlation before the competition. of maximal power that the muscle can develop at the contrac- The objective of the work is to study mechanisms of im- tion to ChC to maximal power developed at the contraction pact of protein sensibilisation (PS) on the contractile response to ChC (РChCmax/PKClmax). of different isolated muscles of the lower leg of a mouse: Results. It was shown that ChC in submaximal concen- «fast» (extensor digitorum longus — m. EDL) and «slow» tration (7 х 10–4 M) activated the contraction of m. EDL of (solei — m. soleus) provoked by humoral agents — cholino- a non-sensibilized mouse with the power of 76,6 + 6,1 mg. mimetic carbacholinum (CC) and potassium chloride (KCl). and velocity of 14,3 + 1,6 mg/sec. At PS, the power of con- Materials and methods: The experiments were performed traction of the fast muscle reduced to 61,9 + 12,2 mg. and on mice of both sexes with the mass of the body 17–22 g. the velocity almost didn’t change — 13,6 + 4,1 mg/sec. The animals were sensibilized twice by ovalbumin (OVA) In the soleus muscle of a non-sensibilized mouse, with the gel of aluminum hydroxide (2 mkg. of dry gel sub- ChC in submaximal concentration (5 х 10–4 M) activated stance + 150 mkg. of OVA in 0,5 ml. of physiological solution) the contraction of the power of 237,8 + 20,6 mg and veloc- abdominally [3]. The second injection was given in 14 days ity of 13,1 + 1,0 mg/sec. PS lead to the increase of power — after the first one. The animals were selected for the experi- 353,2 + 23,1 mg. (p < 0,01) and velocity — 16,6 + 1,5 mg/sec ment at the peak of sensibilisation — on 7–10th day after the of the contraction of the slow muscle. second sensibilising injection. Mechanomyographic studies The power of contractile responses of m. EDL to maximal were conducted on the medication of an isolated muscle in the concentrations of the agonist (4 х 10–3 M) and KCl (250 mmol/l)

51 Section 4. Medical science

had the following values in the control group: 103,83 + 15,70 mg. the vector of power and velocity dynamics of the contractions and 136,69 + 6,73 mg. (РChCmax/PKClmax — 75,9 %) at PS be- to ChC in maximal concentration. The power and velocity of came 52,13 + 14,66 mg. (p < 0,05) and 142,72 + 23,83 mg. the «fast» muscle reduces. As for the «slow» muscle, its ve-

(РChCmax/PKClmax — 36,5 %) respectively, i. e. the value of locity also reduces but its power increases. Such dynamics

РКХmax/PKClmax — reduced to 48 % of the control at PS. certifies about changes of choline-mediated processes of acti- For the soleus muscle, the power of contractile responses vation of MFs membrane, but not EMC system ensuring Са 2+ to the agonist in maximal concentration (2 х 10–3 M) and KCl dependent mechanisms of SMs contraction. Our experiments (150 mmol/l) that had the following values in the control group: show that choline-mediated mechanisms of SMs activation

322,32 + 30,18 mg. and 643,23 + 69,59 mg. (РChCmax/PKClmax — are primarily subject to changes. 50,1 %) changed respectively to 475,14 + 52,66 mg. (p < 0,05) The use of the correlation of maximal power of carbo- and 1470,49 + 186,05 mg (p<0,01) (РChCmax/PKClmax — 32,3 %) choline and potassium contractions in the analysis proves at PS, i. e. the value of РChCmax/PKClmax reduced to 64,5 % from the ability of PS to differently change contractile properties the control at PS. of muscles with different phenotype. In both cases the values

Discussion. The analysis of the results shows the differ- of РChCmax/PKClmax reduced; however, it was more expressed for ence in the contractile function of «fast» and «slow» mus- the «fast» muscle (reduction to 48,1 %) than for the «slow» cles of the lower leg of a mouse manifested in the differences one (reduction to 64,5 %). It is obvious that both noted facts: of characteristics of their contractions to the agonist and KCl. discovered effect of PS on the power of ChC-activated con- Discovered functional variability has a morphological basis, traction in «soft» muscle unlike the «fast» one, and the which is confirmed by literature data. The difference in the ability to change the power of potassium contracture, have a power of contractions to ChC is directly connected to the common nature in their basis and determine the mechanisms composition of fibers, in our opinion. The soleus-like muscle of SMs flexibility. Apparently, discovered changes of contrac- contains 50–60 % of «slow» fibers, and m. EDL is 97–100 % tile properties of SMs at PS primarily affect choline-mediated made of «fast» ones [5]. Consequently, a big contraction processes of MFs activation and are of a divergent character power of the soleus muscle to ChC is the result of its bigger for «fast» and «slow» muscles. responsivity to cholinomimetic and is determined by a big The work presented a complex evaluation of a contrac- number of choline-receptors (ChR) in the area of synapse. tile function to a range of initiators of contraction in different The sizes of the end plate in MFs of «slow» muscle is 3 times concentrations that allows conducting an objective analysis of longer than in MFs of «fast» one (m. EDL) [4]. the condition of a contractile apparatus of an isolated mouse. The functional differences of the studied SMs are con- Particularly, registration of a contraction to submaximal con- firmed by their contractions to KCl, which complies with the centration of ChC showed quantitative differences in the data of Dulhunty A. F. [8] and Lorcovich H. [9]. Working on mechanisms of effect of sensibilisation to choline-mediated lower leg’s muscles, these authors confirmed the presuppo- processes of activation of «fast» and «slow» muscles. In- sition stated by Zhukov E. K. [10] and Nasledov G. A. [11] cluding of the potassium contracture in the analysis enabled claiming that the potassium contracture has its own pecu- to presuppose the participation of other stages of SMs con- liarities for every kind of MFs when characterizing the EMC traction in the mechanisms of their adaptation during an al- system. lergic transformation of the organism. Qualitative evaluation PS changes the functional properties of SMs of a mouse. of these characteristics allowed establishing differences in the Herewith, for «fast» and «slow» muscles, they differ in their reaction of «fast» and «slow» muscles of a mouse in PS con- orientation and quantitively. Considering the possible mecha- ditions. Determination of the level of participation of different nisms of PS effect on functional and contractile properties stages of muscle contraction in the mechanisms of discovered of SMs, one should pay attention to the following aspects. changes requires further research. According to literature sources, changes arising in MFs in Conclusion: Allergic transformation changes function- the course of PS can affect the surface membrane [6], EMC al properties of SMs of a mouse affecting choline-mediated mechanisms or the system of contractile proteins [1]. Differ- processes of activation of muscle fibers membrane and EMC ences in the mechanisms of a change of functional proper- mechanisms, which leads to significant differences in changes ties of «fast» and «slow» muscles at PS are confirmed by of «fast» and «slow» muscles. References: 1. Guschin I. S. Anaphylaxis of smooth and cardiac muscles. – M.: Meditsina, – 1973, – 175 p. 2. Yuan P., Leonetti M. D., Hsiung Y., MacKinnon R. Open Structure of the Ca2+ Gating Ring in the High-Conductance Ca2+ – Activated K+ Channel. Nature, – 2011, – 481 (7379): 94–97. 3. Guschin I. S., Zebreva A. I., Bogush N. L. and others. Experimental model for the development and evaluation of ways to control immediate allergy. Pathological, physiological and experimental therapy. – 1986, – 4: 18–23. 4. Fahim M. A., Holley J. A., Robbins N. Topographic comparison of neuromuscular junctions in mouse slow and fast twitch muscles. Neuroscience – 1984, Sep; – 13 (1): 227–35.

52 Disadaptation infants at high risk — the result of the negative impact of complicated pregnancy and childbirth

5. Florendo J. A., Reger J. F., Law P. K. Electrophysiologic differences between mouse extensor digitorum longus and soleus. Exp Neurol. – 1983, Nov; – 82 (2): 404–12. 6. Ado A. D., Stomakhina N. V., Tuluevskaya L. M., Fedoseeva V. N. Protein spectra and phospholipidic composition of membranes rich in choline-receptors from skeletal muscles of rats in the conditions of sensibilisation. Bul. experim. biol. medicine – 1984, – V. 99; – 7: 84–86. 7. Lawler J. M., Hu Z., Barnes W. S. Effect of reactive oxygen species on K+ – contractures in the rat diaphragm. J. Appl. Physiol. – 1998, – V. 84; – 3: 948–953. 8. Dulhunty A. F. Slow potassium contractures in mouse limb muscles. J. Physiol. – 1981, – 314: 91–105. 9. Lorcovich H. Potassium contractures in mouse limb muscles. J. Physiol. – 1983, – 343: 569–576. 10. Zhukov E. K. Essays on nervomascular physiology. – L: Nauka, – 1969, – 288 p. 11. Nasledov G. A. Tonetic muscular system of the vertebrata. – L: Nauka, – 1981, – 187 p.

Tumaeva Tatiana Stanislavovna, Mordovian Republican Clinical Perinatal Center, Head of the department of functional diagnostics E‑mail: [email protected] Naumenko Elena Ivanovna, Mordovia State University, Chair of Pediatrics, Assistant professor E‑mail: [email protected]

Disadaptation infants at high risk — the result of the negative impact of complicated pregnancy and childbirth Abstract: The purpose of the study- the influence of adverse maternal factors violation postnatal adaptation of newborns at high risk. The study included 747 newborns (270 preterm), of which 440 children born by caesarean section. In the formation of neonatal disadaptation factors had the greatest significance burdened obstetric and gyne- cological history mothers (abortion, inflammatory diseases of female genitalia, nulliparous age older than 30 years in conjunction with various somatic and obstetric pathology), complicated pregnancy (growth retardation, threatened abortion, hemodynamic instability in the mother-placenta-fetus), intrapartum period (deterioration women extra- genital pathology, preeclampsia, severe, chronic hypoxia and/or acute asphyxia, which started bleeding). Keywords: risk factors for antenatal and intrapartum periods, caesarean section, premature, cerebral hypoxia- ischemia, neonatal disadaptation. Relevance. Problems of women’s health in various stages of complications of pregnancy, labor and perinatal pathology. of gestation, and the status of the developing fetus and new- Aim of this study was to evaluate the significance of risk factors born occupy one of the leading places in the modern health for antenatal and intrapartum periods in the development of care. The most common cause of disability of the child popu- early adaptation disorders in infants at high risk for the develop- lation is diverse defeat the perinatal period [1; 2; 3]. In case ment of perinatal pathology. of violation functioning of the various systems of the parent Patients and methods. A comprehensive clinical and in- body, responsible for the development of adaptive changes strumental study of health 690 newborns at risk in the early during pregnancy, numerous physiological adaptive processes period of adaptation. The main group (I) of 290 children born are imperfect [4; 5]. This promotes the formation of obstetric by cesarean section and post-hypoxia-ischemia (120 full-term, pathology (noncarrying, preeclampsia, anemia, etc.), exacerba- 170 preterm). Comparison group‑1 (II): 150 full-term infants tion of chronic and/or manifestation of latent diseases. The risk after caesarean section with no signs of cerebral ischemia dur- of perinatal pathology increases the formation of pregnancy and ing the early adaptation. Comparison group‑2 (III): 250 new- childbirth complications leading to operative delivery [6; 7]. borns from natural birth with the transfer of hypoxic-ischemic Modern techniques used in obstetrics and neonatology can (150 full-term, 100 preterm). Exclusion criteria: children with not completely neutralize the effects of pathological factors congenital abnormalities, infectious processes, syndromic dis- on children from high-risk groups (preterm, born surgically, orders. Control group (IV)-57 full-term newborns of physi- children who have suffered hypoxia-ischemia, etc.) [8; 9; 10]. ological pregnancy and birth with Apgar score 8/8 points. To In this regard, a detailed examination of pregnant women and study the dependence disorders early neonatal adaptation pro- the identification of risk factors are essential for the prevention cesses at increased risk from exposure to pathological factors

53 Section 4. Medical science of antenatal and intrapartum periods analyzed stationary cards Results and discussion. Of all studied 540 (72 %) chil- mothers in the groups studied with the evaluation of obstetric dren suffered cerebral hypoxia-ischemia of varying severity. and gynecological history, physical status, studied the spectrum In 362 (48 %) infants revealed disturbance of early adapta- of indications for cesarean delivery. Statistical data processing tion with significant prevalence in survivors hypoxia-ischemia was carried out using the «Statistica». Quantitative indicators (χ² = 57,92, p = 0,000). In the study groups have been identi- were analyzed by Student’s test with the arithmetic mean (M), fied all mothers burdened obstetric and gynecological history standard error of the mean (± m) and the corresponding level (Table 1). of confidence; to compare qualitative variables used criterion χ². Table 1. – Analysis of some indicators of obstetric and gynecological history mothers studied groups I group, n = 290 III group, n = 250 II group, IV group, Indicators 1‑subgr., 2‑subgr., 1‑subgr., 2‑subgr., n = 150 n = 57 n = 120 n = 170 n = 150 n = 100 Age, years 27,2 ± 0,65 28,6 ± 0,82 29,3 ± 0,81 25,8 ± 0,79 26,3 ± 0,96 26,9 ± 0,71 Рrimigravida, n ( %) 66 (55 %) 67 (39 %) 40 (27 %) 85 (57 %) 50 (50 %) 23 (40 %) First birth, n ( %) 77 (64 %) 85 (50 %) 69 (46 %) 93 (62 %) 60 (60 %) 28 (49 %) Abortions, n ( %) 28 (23 %) 67 (39 %)* 42 (28 %) 38 (25 %) 42 (42 %)* 10 (18 %) Miscarriages, n ( %) 4 (3 %) 29 (17 %)* 1 (0,6 %) 6 (4 %) 25 (25 %)* – Repeated cesarean, n ( %) 21 (18 %) 18 (11 %) 48 (32 %) – – – Inflammatory diseases of 21 (18 %) 40 (24 %)* 11 (7 %) 33 (22 %)* 24 (24 %)* 5 (9 %) female genitalia, n ( %) Note: * — reliability of differences comparing groups of women from the control at p < 0,05 Women in their first pregnancy was less compared to pronounced effect extragenital pathology. The main damag- women who have a first birth (p > 0,05). Abortions among ing factors that determine the occurrence of fetal abnormali- mothers whose children suffered hypoxia-ischemia (95 (33 %) ties in diseases of pregnant refers hypoxia. It contributes to the in the study group, 80 (32 %) in the comparison group‑2), deterioration of metabolic processes and the removal of meta- significantly higher than in controls (10 (18 %) (χ² = 4,53, bolic products of fetal intoxication, promotes the formation p = 0,033 and χ² = 4,01, p = 0,045). Especially often sponta- of other pathogenic influences. In our study, extragenital pa- neous abortions, medical abortions (χ² = 8,15, p = 0,004) were thology in pregnant women identified in 56–78 %, combined detected in women with preterm labor. Changes relating to ar- pathology recorded in 19–37 % of cases (p > 0,05) with the tificial interruption of pregnancy, especially the first pregnan- relative prevalence of morbidity in women surgically delivery. cy, the most common cause of recurrent miscarriage, compli- Burdened obstetric and gynecological history and somatic cations in childbirth and the postpartum period (occurrence disadvantage women contributed to the development of com- of abnormalities of labor, bleeding, postpartum diseases, etc.). plications of pregnancy, especially in the study group (Table 2). The risk of pregnancy complications increases in inflamma- Preeclampsia varying severity (in 52–58 % of the cases), and tory diseases of internal genital organs, including the problems anemia (from 37–42 % of women) often formed in women after childbirth and abortion [11]. comparison groups in contrast to the control group (p < 0,05). In our study, the mothers whose children suffered Threatened miscarriage occurred in 28 % of women from the hypoxia-ischemia, significantly more prevalent chronic main group and in the comparison groups in 21–23 % of cases, and/or acute inflammatory diseases of female genita- reaching the level of statistical significance with the control lia (61 (21 %) and 57 (23 %) in the study group and the only in the main group. On the background of complicated comparison group‑2 with respect to 5 (9 %) in the control pregnancy, more than half (54 %) women had a core group of group, χ² = 3,89, p = 0,049 and χ² = 4,83, p = 0,02 respec- chronic placental insufficiency, and in the comparison groups, tively). The frequency of miscarriage (ectopic pregnancy, in 26–30 % of cases. When placental insufficiency disrupted non-developing pregnancy) in the study groups were com- the structure and function of the placenta, worsen conditions parable (2–9 %, p > 0,05). Repeat cesarean section reported in for supply of gas exchange and excretion of metabolic waste 11–32 % of women. Surgery on the uterus predispose to the for- products from the body of the fetus. As a result, hypoxia, growth mation of its insolvency in the future (degenerative processes, retardation, susceptibility to birth asphyxia, birth injuries and fibrosis, the threat of spontaneous rupture during pregnancy diseases in the neonatal period [1; 2; 3; 8; 10]. and childbirth, etc.) [12].Thus, women of delivery by caesarean Totality of pathological factors complicated pregnancy section can be attributed to the high risk group for the develop- formed a number of pregnant women is a cesarean delivery ment and frequency of obstetric pathology. (Fig. 1). The most commonly performed operative deliv- The formation of complicated pregnancy, in particular ery with repeated cesarean delivery (18–32 %), antepar- the development of preeclampsia, especially in the second tum discharge of amniotic fluid and the development of half, hypochromic anemia and other complications has a the weakness of labor (9–12 %) started asphyxia (6–17 %),

54 Disadaptation infants at high risk — the result of the negative impact of complicated pregnancy and childbirth severe preeclampsia (6–14 %), severe somatic pathology women; χ² = 23,18, p = 0,000). It should be noted that in the of women (13 %). In this combined indications dominated comparison groups for a number of indications for the cesar- women group (in 119 (41 %) versus 49 (27 %), χ² = 6,68, ean section identified the differences did not reach statistical p = 0,010), especially in preterm pregnancy (in 94 (55 %) significance level. Table 2. – Analysis of some pregnancy complications I group, n=290 III group, n=250 II group, IV group, Indicators 1‑subgr., 2‑subgr., 1‑subgr., 2‑subgr., n=150 n= 57 n=120 n=170 n=150 n= 100 Рreeclampsia, n (%) 62 (52 %)* 95 (56 %)* 87 (58 %)* 81 (54 %)* 50 (50 %)* 17 (29 %) χ² 10,31; р = 0,001 12,01; р = 0,000 64,24; р = 0,000 Fetoplacental insufficiency, n(%) 52 (43 %)* 104 (61 %)* 39 (26 %) 46 (31 %)* 30 (30 %)* 9 (16 %) χ² 26,08; р = 0,000 1,87; р = 0,171 4,25; р = 0,039 Аnemia, n (%) 40 (33 %)* 69 (35 %)* 55 (37 %)* 68 (45 %)* 38 (38 %)* 9 (16 %) χ² 9,14; р = 0,003 7,48; р = 0,006 12,91; р = 0,000 Threatened miscarriage, n (%) 33 (28 %)* 48 (28 %)* 34 (23 %) 32 (21 %) 20 (20 %) 8 (14 %) χ² 4,12; р = 0,042 1,41; р = 0,231 0,95; р = 0,338 Note: * — significant differences comparing groups of women from the control at p<0,05

Note: 1‑uterine scar (scar insolvency, repeated cesarean section); 2‑high myopia; 3‑vitro fertilization program; 4‑large fruit, clinical fetal head size mismatch pelvis of the mother; 5‑anomaly bony pelvis and genitals; 6‑prenatal rupture of membranes, uterine inertia; 7‑abnormal fetal presentation; 8‑growth retardation; 9‑nulliparous age older than 30 years in conjunction with various somatic and obstetric pathology; 10‑placenta previa, placental abruption; 11‑severe preeclampsia; 12‑began asphyxia; 13‑chronic fetal hypoxia; 14‑heavy-somatic disorders are women Fig. 1. Main spectrum of indications for cesarean section in the comparison groups Thus, the analysis of antenatal and intrapartum periods violation of placental blood flow; somatic diseases mothers. of development of children from high-risk groups identified The severity of pregnant women contributes to a violation pathological effect of multiple maternal factors, in most cases of labor, the emergence of threatening conditions of the fe- combined, which played an important role in shaping the neo- tus, leading to the impossibility of delivery naturally form- natal maladjustment. ing indications for cesarean section. Study of the causes and Conclusions. Violation of early postnatal adaptation of significance assessment of risk factors in the development of newborns at high risk due to the combined action of the bur- perinatal pathology creates opportunities for timely correc- dened obstetric and gynecological history (abortions, mis- tion maternal factors, the organization of effective medical carriage pregnancy, inflammatory diseases of female genita- care for newborns at high risk, enhancing the quality of life lia, repeat cesarean section); during pregnancy complicated of children in the following age periods, which is an important with the development of preeclampsia, anemia, preterm labor, medical and social. References: 1. Ivanov D. O., Shabalov N. P., Petrenko V. Hypoglycemia newborns. Obstetrics and Gynecology – 2014, – 5: 19–26. 2. Szymankiewicz M., Matuszczak-Wleklak M., Vidyasagar D. Retrospective diagnosis of hypoxic myocardial injury in pre- mature newborns. J. Perinat. Med – 2006, – 34: 3: 220–225.

55 Section 4. Medical science

3. Kaijser M. Perinatal Risk Factors of Ishemic Disease: Disentagling Roles Birth Weight and preterm Birth. Circulation – 2008, – 117: 405–410. 4. Guriev D. L., Okhapkin M. B., Karpov N., Blinov D. V. Course and outcome of pregnancy complicated by preeclampsia, depending on the type of maternal central hemodynamics. Obstetrics and Gynecology – 2011, – 7–2: 14–19. 5. Arzhanova O. N., Kapustin R. V., Komarov E. K. et al. The pathogenetic mechanisms of obstetric complications in gestational diabetes. Journal of Obstetrics and women’s diseases – 2011; – 5: 3–10. 6. Krasnopol’skii V. I., Logutova L. S., Petruhin V. A. Place abdominal and vaginal operative delivery in modern obstetrics. Reality and Prospects. Obstetrics and Gynecology – 2012, – 1: 4–8. 7. Tully L., Gates S., Brocklehurst P. et al. Surgical techniques used during caesarean section operations: results of a national survey of practice in the UK. European Journal of Obstetrics & Gynecology and Reproductive Biology – 2002, – 102: 2: 120–126. 8. Kulakov V. I., Barashnev Y. I. High-risk newborns. – Moscow: GEOTAR Media, – 2006. – 528 р. 9. Jain L., Dudell G. Respiratory transition in infants delivered by cesarean section. Seminars in perinatology – 2006. – 30: 5: 296–304. 10. Signore C., Klebanoff M. Neonatal morbidity and mortality after elective cesarean delivery. Clin Perinatol – 2008. – 35: 2: 361–371. 11. Molochkov A. V., Bagramov G. E., Murakami S., Maĭkov O. A., Seregina P. E., Veredchenko A. V., Popkov S. A. Immunological aspects of the pathogenesis of chronic endocervicitis on background rubtsovoĭ deformation sheĭki uterus. Obstetrics and Gynecology – 2014. – 2: 57–59. 12. Krasnopol’skii V. I., Logutova L. S., Buyanova S. N. Reproductive problems operated uterus. – Moscow: Miklos, – 2006, – 160 р.

Usmanov Shukhrat Urazalievich, senior scientific assistant, Research Institute of Traumatology and Ortopedics, Healthcare RUz Djuraev Ahror Mahmudovich, Doctor of Medical Sciences, professor, Head of the department of pediatric orthopedics, Research Institute of Traumatology and Ortopedics, Healthcare RUz E‑mail: mbshakur@mail. Ru

Optimization of detection and treatment osteoporosis in children Abstract: the combination of distal Us-densitometry and roentgenoabsorbtiometry is high informative method of diagnosis and monitoring for osteoporosis and osteopenia in pediatric practice. Timely pharmacotherapy correc- tion osteoporosis and allows to prevent the decrease of bone mineral thickness and increase the given index. Keywords: osteoporosis, osteopenia, bone mineral thickness, children. Topicality. Osteoporosis (OP) is the most often meta- more often as the symptom of different diseases, that allows bolic disease of human skeletone, being characterized with to consider the children to have chronic pathology group with the decrease of bone mass to the unit of bone volume wih- high risk of osteroporosis development [2]. Polyaetiologicity, tout changing it’s mineral and organic components’ ratio, be- polymorphism of clinical picture, small amount of diagnostic ing accompained with microarchitectural disorders of bone devices, allowing to reveal decrease of bone mineral thickness tissue, leading to increase of bones’ breaking and fractures’ (BMT) at the early stages, make difficult the fight with OP. It risk [2; 5; 7]. Last decades carrying out epidemiologic stud- leads to large material expenses at treatment the given patents ies convincingly proved, that OP problem is associated with and early disability in their working able age [1–4]. the childhood (1). The disorder of bone formation process or At the modern stage of orthopedics there is no possibil- chronic diseases lead to decrease of bone firmness already in ity to work out algorythms combinations of ultrasound distal the childhood, and, as sequense, to increase OP risk develop- densitometry and reontgenoabsorbtiometry in ambulatory ment, and, bones fractures in future [4]. practiсe and program of complex treatment patients with Epidemiological data witness that maximum fractures in given pathology, demanding further investigation. childhood cover from 5 to 7, and, from 13 to 14 years old peo- The aim of study: evaluation of pilot introduction re- ple, and it can be caused with considerable inlargement of body sults in practice of ambulatory diagnosis for methods of dis- length at that period on the background of age bone mass. Ex- tal Us-densitometry and reontgenoabsorbtiometry as the cept that, last time the cases of osteoporosis in children became reviewer method.

56 Optimization of detection and treatment osteoporosis in children

Materials and methods: The study was carried out in At revealing OSP (T‑criterion is from – 1 to 2, 5) in chil- out-patient conditions at 78 children (5–14 years old), having dren of group 2 and 3 the preventive and dietary recommen- chosen with random sampling from the number of adressing dationns were given. At revealing OP (T‑criterion from – 2, to pediatrician, surgeon, traumatologist, endocrinologist. Boys 5 and lower) in children of groups 2 and 3 the continious were 37 (48 %), girls were 41 (52 %). According to the meth- course of calcitonin per 200 ME intranasally in combina- ods of taking diagnosis the patients were divided into 3 equiv- tion with calcium (500–1000 mgl/daily) and VitD (400– alent groups by anthropometric indices: gpoup 1 (24) with 800 ME/dialy) were prescribed. taking standard diagnostic algorythm without Us-densitome- The children with revealed OSP and OP, on the back try; group2 (23) with Us-densitometry (Omnisens‑7000) in ground of treatment the control of Us-densitometry once per children with osteopenia (OSP) and OP, when the treatment 6 months, were recomendead. The reontgenoabsorbtiometry was performed only by the orthopedist; group 3 (31) with tak- was carried out once a year. ing Us-densitometry at risk OSP and OP at joint treatment of Results and discussion: There are presented data on age orthopedist and specialist of X‑Ray diagnosis. The reontgeno- and sex contingent of examined children, being compared absorbtiometry (DTX‑200, Denmark) of forearm bones was with the age criteria, marked with little overweight of the girls’ carried out as reviewer method of evaluation BMT. number, in table 1. Table 1. – General age-sex characteristics of patients (%) Boys Girls Groups Total Middle age Abs % Abs % Group 1 24 (30,7 %) 12,2 ± 1,3 11 14,1 13 16,6 Group 2 24 (30,7 %) 13,1 ± 1,2 12 15,3 12 15,3 Group 3 30 (38,4 %) 12,3 ± 1,2 14 17,9 16 20,5 Total 78 (100 %) 12,4 ± 1,3 37 47,4 41 52,5 The initial data patients for group 2, who were prescribed The number of prescribed Us-densitometries at children Us-densitometry, being observed by the orthopedist, OSP was in group 2 were by 1.84 times more than it was in group 3. revealed in 16 children, and by the data of reontgenoabsorbtiom- The analysis of taken of taken results in examined groups ety it was in 15 (one boy’s T‑criterion was 0, 98). The number of revealed, that in group 1 the standard diagnostic algorythm patients with revealed OP by the data of Us-densitometry were was used without Us-densitometry and reontgenoabsorb- 7 people, and, in control reongenoabsorbtiometry it was also 7. tiomety. In group 2 from 24 children 15 revealed OSP, and In group 3 the initial number of patients with taken Us- 7 had OP. In group 3 the number of presriptions for Us- densitometry were 30, number of persous with revealed OSP densitometry by the treating physician together with X‑Ray were 20 children, by the data of reontgenoabsorbtiometry doctor were 30 patents, from those 20 revealed OSP and they they were 20. Number of children wihn OP were 20, by 12 revealed OP. the results of roentgenoabsorbtiometry they were 12. Table 2. – Rate of primary revealing osteopenia and osteoporosis in examining groups (%), Number of patients (%) Groups Us-densitometry Osteopenia Osteoporosis Fractures Gr. 1 (n = 24) – – – 6 Gr. 2 (n = 24) 24 15 7 2 Gr. 3 (n = 30) 30 20 12 1 Total 4 (n = 78) 54 35 19 9 The analiysis of primary rate for revealing OSP and At analiysis of taken results for Us-densitometry in pa- OP, coming from the ratio: the number of revealed osteo- tients with osteoporosis, belonging to examining groups penia/osteoporosis/the general number x 100 % in groups 2 and 3 on the background of trealtment with calciotonin in revealed, that the rate of ostopenia display in group3 was 66, combination with calcium and Vit. D, the true statistic in- 6 %, that is by 0.6 times higher than in group 2, where the crease of BMT is abserved for 3 years of observation. The given index was 62.5 %. data, being taken with the method of roentgenoabsorbtiom- The rate of osteoporosis revealing in group 3 is 40 % etry, prove the data of Us-densitometry (table 4). that is in 1.8 times more than in group 2, where it was de- By the data of roentgenoabsorbtiometry in patients with termined with 29.1 % index. The rate of osteopenia and osteoporosis, belonging to groups 2 and 3, on the background osteoporosis revealing in the examined patients group of treatment with calciotonin in combination with calcium 3 was higher than in group 2, that shows the more effective and Vit. D, it is observed the true increase of BMT for the next algorythm of revealing OSP and OP with the way of Us- 3 years of observation. It can be marked the positive effect of densitometry, being coordinated between orthopedist and treatment with calcitonin in children of groups 2 and 3, being X‑Ray doctor. proved with increase of BMT.

57 Section 4. Medical science

Table 3. – Results of Us-densitometry (Laverage significances of T‑criterion ± CKO) Month of examination Patrents with osteoporosis (n = 19) T‑criterion

March is primary examination –2.87 ± 0.41 November is control in 6 months –2.56 ± 0.26 May is control in 6 months –2.19 ± 0.18 December is control in 6 months –1.79 ± 0.31 March is control in 6 months –1.55 ± 0.22 December is control in 6 months –1.34 ± 0.19 March is control in 6 months –1.22 ± 0.21 December is control in 6 months –23 ± 0.36 Table 4. – The results of roentgenoabsorbtiometry (average) significanse of T‑criterion ± CKO Months of examination Patients with revealed osteopenia (n=35) T‑criterion March is primary examination –2.78 ± 0.37 May is secondary examination –2.21 ± 0.31 March is control examination –1.49 ± 0.24 March is control examination –1.25 ± 0.18 Conclusions: Putting into practice of children’s examina- contingent. The combination of distal Us-densitometry and tion the method of Us-densitometry with the aim of diagnostic roentgenoabsorbtiometry is high informative method of di- algorythm on revealing OP and OSP in children allows to agnosis and monitoring for OP and OSP in pediatric practice. make timely diagnosis, and, to treat the given pathology, Timely pharmacotherapy correction OP and allows to prevent that leads to decrease the fractures’ number in the examining the decrease of BMT and increase the given index. References: 1. Benevolskaya L. I. Manual on osteoporosis. – M: Medicine, – 2007. – P. 23–28. 2. Kotelnikov G. P., Korolyuk I. P., Shehtman A. G, X‑Ray diagnosis of osteoporosis: modern state and perspectives//Clinical medicine. – M., – 2008, – W3. – P. 66–70. 3. Radionova S. S., Morozov A. K., Lyaginskiy A. V. Evaluation of diagnostic significance of osteodensitometer DXL Cals- can-the first serial device, being found on three-component model of tissues.//Osteoporosis and osteopathy. – M, – 2006. – W. – P. 12–17. 4. Rojinskaya L. Y. Part of calcium and Vit. D in phophylaxy and treatment osteoporosis.//Osteoporosis and osteopenia. – M, – 2009. – W2. – P. 37–40. 5. Borges J. L. C., Brandao C. M. A. Low bone mass in children and adolescents//Arq. Bras. Endocrinol. Metab. – 2006. – Vol. 50. – N. 4. – P. 775–82. 6. Leonard M. B. Assessment of bone mineralization in children and adolescents//Clinical Reviews in Bone and Mineral Metabolism. – 2004. – Vol. 2. – N. 1. – P. 3–18.

Hamdamov Bahtiyor Zarifovich, Bukhara state medical institute, Uzbekistan, PhD, Associate professor of faculty and hospital surgery E‑mail: [email protected]

Comparative evaluation of methods of amputation related to tibiotartus with severe forms of diabetic foot syndrome Abstract: The results showed that the improvement of technology implementation in mioplastic amputation lead to a significant shortening of the surgery time, decrease the likelihood of infection of the wound surface during surgery and a dramatic reduction of postoperative wound infections from the amputation stump of the tibia from 15.4 % to 3.5 % of cases. Keywords: mioplastic amputation, diabetic foot syndrome, critical limb ischemia. The rise in the number of people suffering from diabe- tions such as diabetic foot syndrome (DFS). The develop- tes is triggering a proportional increase in severe complica- ment of necrotic suppurative process in diabetes mellitus

58 Comparative evaluation of methods of amputation related to tibiotartus with severe forms of diabetic foot syndrome and diabetic foot in 20–35% of cases leads to a compulsive In the publications we have covered the results of the amputation. Unfortunately a rising number of patients with new method of surgical intervention at the level of the tibia diabetic foot syndrome with symptoms of critical limb isch- at DFS CLI. This method of amputation (used in the control emia — CLI [1; 3], marks the last decades. Development group patients) lead to a dramatic reduction of postoperative of critical ischemia indicates a complete circulatory decom- complications from the amputation stump leg and creates pensation that occurs in 30–42 % of patients with severe favorable conditions for the prosthesis (knee saved). But the diabetic foot syndrome [2; 5]. Expected mortality in CLI technical execution of this surgery is sorely time — consum- patients with DFS increases from 25 % during the first de- ing (soleus muscle is dissected for subsequent hysterectomy velopment of DFS to 60–70 % [4; 7; 8]. Accordingly, the formed in the tunnel between the tibia and the back skin and necessity for a high amputation reaches 52–95 % within musculo-fascial flap). Increasing the amount of time of the 3 years and entails a mortality of 40 % to 70 % over the surgery under severe CLI leads to possible risk of infection next 2–3 years. of the surgical area, and creates conditions for suppurative So far, the reconstructive surgery has been the only effica- complications. This has led to an attempt to improve the cious form of treatment of patients with CLI DFS [1; 3; 7]. surgery mode, which would eliminate the drawbacks men- Traditionally used conservative therapy, which includes long- tioned above. term intra-arterial therapy, anticoagulants, rheological agents, The proposed surgical technique has some peculiarities. angioprotectors and local treatment (necrectomy, amputation First, the skin and subcutaneous tissue are cut, then the fascia of the foot) is not effective enough and is accompanied by shin. The rear flap is cut longer than the front one parallel loss of a limb in 37 % of patients within 1 year. Revasculariza- to the edges of the shinbone along the lower third of the leg tion of the arterial bed of the lower extremities in practice is where the overlap occurs. Further the process of sterilization possible only in 35–50 % of patients. The latter is associated of NVB and over splitting of tibia. This technique allows a with questionable success of an isolated surgical revascular- complete overview of the operating wound. Gastrocnemius ization in patients with multi-level type and predominantly muscle bluntly is separated from the soleus, the latter very eas- distal lesion localization. In these situations, surgeries, which ily peeled from the gastrocnemius muscle, which is located allow you to save the knee joint (amputation at the tibia), are more superficially and also from deep muscles of the back lay- welcomed and significantly improve the quality of life of pa- er of the shin. Further, m. soleus bluntly, using a palm is taken tients in the postoperative period. out to the point of attachment at the fibular head. Clipped dis- Nowadays, one of the topical problems in modern sur- tally 3–4 cm. distal, simultaneously it is stitched to the remain- gery is the application of less traumatic surgeries at lower leg ing fragment of muscles, thereby eliminating the possibility of DFS with CLI. bleeding. Formed rear gastrocnemius musculo — cutaneous Research objective. Comparative efficacy evaluation of Пар sutured by the front Пар formed cylindrical shape right improved methods of amputation at the tibia at DFS with CLI. tibia stump. The proposed technique performing amputations Material and methods. The results of amputations at dramatically shortens the surgery time and improves visibil- the tibia in 250 patients with a syndrome of diabetic foot ity of the surgical area. This amputation technique was per- and critical limb ischemia were analyzed. The pool included formed in the main group of operated patients. 170 (68 %) men and 80 (32 %) women. The age of patients Results and discussion. 110 patients in group I were per- ranged from 30 to 87. The majority of patients were with formed at the level of amputation tibia Mitish — Svetukhin. severe disorders of vital body functions. According to the The pool included 30 (27.3 %) patients with apparent signs technique of the surgery at the level of the tibia, all patients of renal failure, and 25 (22.7 %) patients with distinct signs of were divided into 2 groups; I — control group comprised myocardial ischemia, 12 (10.9 %) patients with postinfarction 110 patients who underwent amputation at the level of the cardio sclerosis having the signs of heart vascular insufficien- tibia with Mitish — Svetukhin. II- basic group consisted of cy, 55 (50 %) patients who had signs of systemic inflammatory 140 patients who underwent amputation at the level of the response syndrome, 17 (15.4 %) of which were septic shock tibia, with an improved technique of Mitish-Svetukhin’s with multiple organ failure phenomena (MON). Analysis of proposed methodology. The indications of limb amputation postoperative complications of the amputation stump showed were: occlusion of the main arteries of the lower limb with that patients in the control group developed a wound infec- decompensation of collateral blood flow and widespread tion in 17 (15.4 %). Mortality rate of the investigated groups suppurative process on foot, spreading wet gangrene reach- achieved 6.5 %, and the generalization of wound infection was ing to the lower third of the leg, total dry gangrene of the the cause of deaths in 8% of cases. In 5 (4.5 %) cases due to the foot, the presence of anaerobic surgical infections in the progression of wound infection, there was a need for a con- lower limbs (clostridial or non-clostridial), critical limb isch- secutive amputation at hip level. In 140 patients in group II – emia not amenable to medical correction, the spread of local who had undergone amputation with an improved method co necrotic suppurative process on foot beyond the two ana- morbidities and indicators of systemic inflammatory response tomical regions with signs of development of systemic in- with the development of septic shock were comparable in pa- flammatory response syndrome (SIRS). tients in the control group.

59 Section 4. Medical science

Patients of the main group, the development of post- surface during surgery and a dramatic reduction of post- operative wound infection from the amputation stump was operative wound infections from the amputation stump observed in 5 (3.5 %) patients, which was ceased by local of the tibia. ointment wound bailouts and adequate antibiotic therapy. Conclusions: While deaths related to wound infection and generalization 1. In the diabetic foot syndrome with obvious signs of infection were not observed. of critical limb ischemia by- selecting a high amputations Thus, a comparative analysis of surgery involvements method is mioplastic amputation with removal of m. Soleus, at tibia in diabetic foot with signs of CLI patients of the since it increases the functionality of the stump and improved groups I and II showed that the technology implementa- opportunities for its further prosthetics. tion improvement of mioplastic amputation with the re- 2. Improvement of technology implementation of mio- moval of the m. soleus led to a significant shortening of plastic amputation with the removal of m. Soleus, leads to a the operative time (without changing the essence of the reduction in the number of postoperative wound infections surgery itself), infection likelihood reduction of the wound from 15.4% to 3.5% of cases. References: 1. Antoniuc C. M. Features of surgical treatment of patients with complicated forms of diabetic foot syndrome/C. M. Antoniuc. N. V. Sviridov, A. G. Popondopalo//Clinical. Surgery. – 2005. – № 10 – P. 36–39. 2. Antsifirov M. B. Diabetic foot syndrome: current trends in treatment and prevention/M. B. Antsifirov, E. J. Kolinichenko//Rus. Medical journal. – 2005. – V. 13, № 6. – P. 367–370. 3. Grekova N. M. A method for improving the results of surgeries for local necrotic diseases of the foot in diabetes/ N. M. Grekova, Y. Lebedev, V. N. Bordunovsky/Journal of Surgery by LL Grekova. – 2003. – № 5, – T.165. – S. 78–81. 4. Necrotic lesions of the lower extremities/R. M. Ahmedov, B. B. Safoev//Bukhara – 2010. – P. 221. 5. Karimov S. I., Babadzanov B. D., Islamov M. S. Diabetic gangrene of the lower extremities. – Т: «Shark”. –2003. – P. 240. 6. Ovcharenko D. V. Subintimal angioplasty with multileveled artery lesions in a patient with chronic critical ischemia of both lower extremities/D. V. Ovcharenko, M. Kaputin, I. E. Bohr, V. Soroka//International Journal of Interventional Cardiology. – 2006. – № 10. – P. 38–41. 7. Svetukhin A. M. Pathogenesis and complex surgical treatment of suppurative forms of diabetic foot syndrome/A. M. Svetukhin, A. B. Zemlyanoy, Istratov V. G. etc.//Surgery. – 2003. – № 3. – P. 85–89. 8. Armstrong D. G. Negative Pressure Wound after partial diabetic amputation: a multi – centered, randomized controlled trial/D. G. Armstrong, L. A. Lavery//The Lancet. – 2005. – Vol. 366. – P. 1704–1710.

Khudoynazarov Khayrulla Khamitvich, assistant of Common and pediatric surgery department, Tashkent Medical Academy E‑mail: [email protected] Tadjibayev Alisher Tukhtapulatovich, MD, senior scientific assistant, Hem dialysis department, Republican scientific center of emergency medical service E‑mail: [email protected]

Optimization of therapy methods for children with epispadia associated with extrophy Abstract: a modification of sphyncteroplasy by Dershavin and a new method of removal of symphysis dfiastsis have been used in 32 patients. Good and satisfactory outcomes accounted for 90.6 % patients. In 2 months following the operation no rentgen picture divergence of symphysis has been detected in the patients. Keywords: epispadia, extrophy of bladder, cyst plastics, symphysis, total urine incontinence. Introduction. Recently the interest of specialists to the urinary system, but also other organs and systems [3; 6]. problems of urine incontinence in cases of severe forms of In spite of the topicality of the problem in literature there is epispadia is growing, as the number of patients with these no enough information on the problem of epispadia associ- defects is also increasing. In this group of patients aging ag- ated with bladder extrophy and accompanied by urine in- gravates not only morphologic and functional disorders of continence [1; 5]. The available few works mostly cover the

60 Optimization of therapy methods for children with epispadia associated with extrophy problems of urethroplastics in the cases of congenital defects penis down. Epipubic cut of skin is done to 6–8 cm. straight of urine excretory duct [2; 4; 7]. and pyramidal muscles are divided along the middle line above The problem of the child’s age oprimal for surgical opera- pubis by means of blunt method, and after it the anterior wall of tion is not solved yet, as well as the method and technique of bladder is opened. The anterior surface of bladder is opened up- the surgery for various degrees of the defect. All these under- ward along peritoneal fold. After that, blunt method is used for lines the urgency of the problem. maximal separation of the lateral surface of the cervix and the The aim of the research: is to improve the results of the lower part of bladder up to the area atached dorsally to rectum. therapy of children with epispadia combined with extrophy Duble-tubular vesicular-urethral cateter is injected into blad- and accompanied by total urine incontinence. der by means of vesicle endopuncture method. A longitudal The materials and methods of the research. 71 pa- part of the anterior wall of bladder and its cervix is put inside tients with severe forms of epispadia associated with blad- with the help of bundled and caprone sutures down along the der extrophy got therapy in our hospital from 1990 to 2006. middle line to 3 cm. width. The sutures srat to be applied a little Among them there were 63 (88.7 %) boys and 8 (11.3 %) bit below the peritoneal fold with 1 cm intervals. The tissue of girls. In this group of patients there were 5 children under the bladder is caught by a needle from both sides wide enough, 1 year old (7.0 %), 19 1–3 years old (26.7 %), 36 from 3 to 7 but it should be carefully done to prevent a puncture of bladder (50.8 %), and 11 patients from 7 to 11 (15.5 %). These pa- mucous membrane. As a result there is suturing of sub-mucous tients were divided to 2 groups: control group — 39 patients, chink of the anterior wall of bladder and its cervix along 6–7 cm. who came to the hospital from 1990 to 2001 and the main After that the second line of similar suture is done for conver- group — 32 patient from 2001 to 2006. gence of the edges of the lower part of vesicular triangle. Each The results of the research. The patients of 1990–2001 of sutures catches anterior-lateral surfaces of the lower part of got traditional therapy. Among them there were 8 patients bladder and its cervix both sides. After the application of the with subtotal form (20.5 %), 25 patients with total form second line of sutures, the first line completely goes inside. The (64.1 %) and 6 with total epispadia associated with bladder second line of sutures should serve to compact covering of the extrophy (15.4 %). cateter along its whole length. Longitudinally parallel to the ca- 6 from 39 patients (15.4 %) had combination of total teter 3–4 suturs are applied for creation of an elbow in the area epispadia with bladder extrophy, so that group of patients of bladder cervix with the angle equal to 110–120 degrees. The earlier had cyst plastics according to Bairov’s method. After medial margins of the запирательного отверстия are revealed, the operation 2 (5.1 %) patients had divergence of sutures, and a sterile fishing line with 0.5–1.0 mm. (dependently on and later these patients got urethrosigmoanastamosis ac- the age of a child) diameter is passed trough it, wind 3–4 times cording toUlliyev’s modification of Matisen’s method. The around ramus inferior jssis pubis and bind along the middle rest 33 patients had sphincter plastics according to Derjavin’s line so that diasthasis bone moved closer. After that urethra is traditional method. Immediate results of the operation in the created by means of one moment orthoneourethroplastic meth- control group showed that 18 patients (54.5 %) had comlete od. During post-operative period cateter is used for constant elimination of urine incontinence, and 6 patients (18.1 %) washing of the cavity of urinary bladder and new urethra with had only partial one. In 9 cases (27.3 %) urine incontinence 0.1 % miramistin solution. For the stimulation of regeneration couldn’t be eliminated. Good and satisfactory results of the 0.2 mummy was administered two times a day for 20 days and operations were registered in 39 patients. Besides that, 32 pa- methyl uracyl 500 mg. 3 times after meal for a month. Vesicular- tients (82.0 %) had preserved diasthasis 2–4 cm. because of urethral cateter was removed on the 10th day after operation. divergence of the symphisis and it had negative effect on the Conclusion. Thus, immediate results after the modi- posture, step and appearance of penis. Due to non-satisfactory fied therapy method showed that 19 patients had good ef- results we decided to improve the complex surgery for better fect (59.4 %), 10 patients (31.2 %) — satisfactory, and 3 pa- results of the operations. tients (9.4 %) non-satisfactory result. So, improvement of 32 patients with severe forms of epispadia were accepted the surgery helped to eliminate urine incontinence in 29 pa- from 2001 to 2006. tients (90.6 %). On the roentgenogram done in 2 months after Dependently on the defect of genesis the patients were operation there was no registered divergence of symphisis in divided as follows: subtotal form 11 (34.4 %), total form 17 any of the patients and its had positive effect on the posture (53.1 %) and combination of the total epispadia with bladder of these patients. The appearance and size of penis of the pa- extrophy 4 (12.5 %) patients. tients of that group was closer to normal ones, in comparison In that group of the patients we applied a modified sphinc- with the control group patients. Among the patients who got ter plastics according to Derjavin’s method and our own meth- traditional therapy the percentage of good and satisfactory od for convergence of symphisis. The technique of the opera- results was 18.3 % lower than in the main group. tion was the following: a patient is places on the operation desk On the basis of the aforesaid we can conclude that the on his back with downcast shins. Femors are wide open, and modified method improves the efficiency of the operation, de- a bolster is placed under lumber-sacral part. The prepuse skin creases the percentage of relapses and diminishes the number of the boys is stured with silk thread, which is used to pull the of days stayed in hospital.

61 Section 4. Medical science

References: 1. Averin V. I. Segment cytoplastics of intestine in children.//Belorussian medical journal. – № 3 (17). – 2006. – P. 34–37. 2. Beknazarov J. B., Tadjibayev A. A. Modern therapy of the problems of urine incontinence. Pediatric journal, – 2007, – № 4. – P. 34–37. 3. Salimov Sh. T., Fakirov A. Z., Beknazarov J., Adilova G. S. Comparative characteristics of the methods of penis prolonga- tion in severe cases of epispadia//Pediatric surgery. – Moscow, – 2001, – № 4. – Р. 18–21. 4. Fakirov A. Z. Orthoneourethroplastics for epispadia//Bulletin of Russian State Medical University. – 2001. – № 2. – Р. 96. 5. El-Sherbini. Complete repair of bladder exstrophy in boys: is it possible to avoid hypospadias? Urology and nephrology center. Egypt. – may 2005, – 47 (5). 6. Amirzargar M. A., Yavangi M., Ghorbanpour M., Hosseini Moghaddam S. M., Rahnavardi M., Amirzargar N. Reconstruc- tion of bladder and urethra using ileocecal segment and appendix in patients with exstrophy-epispadias complex: the first report of a new surgical approach.//Int Urol Nephrol. – 2007, – 39 (3): 779–85. 7. Stein R., Fisch M., Stockle M., Hohenfellner R. Urinary diversion in bladder ktrophu and incontenent epispadias; 25 years of experence.//J Urol. – 1999, Sep. – 54, (3); – Р. 117–181.

Shokirova Sadoqat Muhammadsolievna, The senior research associate of Andijan State Medical Institute, E‑mail: [email protected]

The analysis of perinatal outcomes in preterm labor in Women at high risk of intrauterine infection of fetal Abstract: in the structure of antenatal mortality due to intrauterine infection (IUI), 27.2 % are viral infection, 26.3 % — an infection of mixed etiology, and 17.5 % — a bacterial and the tendency to increase of mortality is strongly pronounced, accounting for 5.97 % per year. Keywords: intrauterine infection (IUI), perinatal mortality, outcomes in preterm. Relevance. Intrauterine infection (IUI) at the present regarded as the consequences of intrauterine infection. The stage is one of the major problems of obstetrics and perina- first group consisted of 62 women at high risk of infection, tology [1; 4].The fetus develops in the difficult conditions of gave birth to children with no signs of IUI, the 2nd group — relationships with the mother, so the presence of foci of in- 68 pregnant women gave birth to children with a mild form fection in a pregnant woman is always a risk to the fetus and of IUI. Group 3 consisted of 69 mothers of infants with severe newborn. forms of IUI. In group 1, all children were born at term with- One of the most important problems of modern obstet- out complications. rics and perinatology is a progressive increase in infectious In group 2, in term of 29–36 weeks born prematurely pathology of the fetus and newborn. Infectious diseases de- 7 (9.6 %) of children, and in 90.4 % of cases, children were tected in 50–60% of hospitalized term infants and 70 % of born with a mild form of IUI. preterm infants. According to the results of autopsies of new- With a very low birth weight to 1000 g in group 3 were borns, 37.5% of died children this pathology was the main born within the period 22–28 weeks 16 (21.6 %) very pre- cause of death, which accompanied or complicated the course term infants, in term of 29–36 weeks — 19 (25.6 %) of pre- of the underlying disease [2; 3; 5]. term infants, and in term of 37 42 — were born 27 (36.4 %) The leading role of intrauterine infections among the full-term infants. causes of adverse perinatal outcomes determines the charac- At mothers of 1st group 80.7 % of children were born with ter of a comprehensive study of the problem. an estimate of 6–7 points, and in 2nd groups of mothers 58.9 % The purpose of research. Studying of perinatal out- of children were born with 4–6 rating points and 7–8 rating comes in childbirth at women with high risk of intrauter- points — 35.6 %. At mothers of 3d group were died 8 (10.8 %) ine infection of the fetus. of neonates in an antenatal period and in an intranatal period — Material and methods. The object of the study were 6 (8.1 %) of children who were not subjected to Apgar scores. 209 pregnant women at high risk of infection. At the end of Of the remaining 62 newborns: 1–3 points were assessed 15 pregnancy, all the women were divided into 3 groups depend- (24.2 %), 2–5 — 16 (25.8 %), 4–6 — (21.0 %), 7–8 — (29.0 %). ing on the availability of neonatal signs of infectious diseases In groups 1 and 2 baby girls and boys were about equally. that have emerged in the first 3 days of postnatal life, and In 3 group the boys were more than the girls at 50.1 %.

62 The analysis of perinatal outcomes in preterm labor in Women at high risk of intrauterine infection of fetal

An extremely low birth weight (999 g.) was observed normal weight (group 1–51 (82.3 %), in group 2–50 (68.5 %), only in group 3 in 8 (10.8 %) of children, the largest number of in group 3–33 (44.6 %). The fetal presentation was mainly ce- children which were born with low weight was noted in group phalic: 44 (75.9 %) and 78 (84.8 %) in groups respectively — 3–36 (48.6 %). The vast majority of children were born with there was no statistically significant difference (table. 1). Table 1. – In the course of childbirth of survey pregnant 1 group (n = 62) 2 group (n = 73) 3 group (n = 74) Indices абс. % абс. % абс. % Presentation of fetus Cephalic 44 44 39 53.4* 25 33.8*** Pelvic 10 10 17 23.3 22 29.7 Facial 1 1 3 4.1 6 8.1 Transverse 7 7 14 19.2 21 28.4** In the course of childbirth Physiological 50 80.6 45 61.6* 35 47.3*** Rush 1 1.6 2 2.7 4 5.4 With premature nym amniorrhea 7 11.3 9 12.3 10 13.5 With stimulation 2 3.2 6 8.2 15 20.3 Caesarean 0 0.0 15 20.5** 23 31.1** With pliers 0 0.0 3 4.1 8 10.8 Entanglement 2 3.2 10 13.7* 12 16.2*** Note: * — differences with respect to the data group 1 significant (* – P < 0.05; ** – P < 0.01; *** – P < 0.001) The physiological course of childbirth in the comparison The signs of trouble are: a low score on a scale condition of group was observed in 37.1 % more than in comparison to baby at birth, lack or excess of weight, lack of or change in the children of the main group (P < 0,05). The childbirth at other nature of a child crying, rapid heartbeat, changes in muscle women’s were burdened. tone, impaired sucking and swallowing more appear in chil- The condition at birth was good in an half of children dren of basic group than in group of comparison. (50.0 %) of comparison group, in 16 (27.6 %) — satisfactory, In the first group, all babies were born healthy and ev- 8 (13.8 %) — were born in a state of asphyxia. eryone is alive, in group 2 in the neonatal period 13.7 % of In the basic group were observed hypoxia in 29 (31.5 %) children died. Basically, infant mortality was high in group 3, of children, good condition was only in 22 (23.9 %), in satisfac- in the antenatal period died 10.8 % of infants, in the intrana- tory condition were born at about a third of the children. Most tal — 8.1 %, neonatal — within 7 days died from severe com- of the children cried immediately after birth in both groups. plications of 20.3 % of the infants (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1. The structure of perinatal mortality

63 Section 4. Medical science

In group 1 in the perinatal period were observed isolated malformations — in 10 (27.0 %), cephalohematomy — in 2 cases of diseases, symptoms of which are practically got better (2.7 %), hematological disorders — in 3 (4.1 %). In the first after the quickly symptomatic treatment. 7 days in this group from various kinds of complications still In the 2nd group 15 (20.5 %) of children had mild disease. died 20.3 % of newborns. In the group 3, the picture was the exact opposite, Survivors of Conclusion. The signs of trouble are: low Apgar score at 46 children had severe complications: hypoxic-ischemic en- birth, lack or excess of weight, lack of or change in the nature cephalopathy — in 5 (6.8 %), pneumopathy — in 6 (8.1 %), of a child crying, rapid heartbeat, and the changes in muscle intrauterine growth retardation — 20 (20.7 %), congenital tone, impaired sucking and swallowing. References: 1. Воскресенский С. Л. Оценка состояния плода. Кардиотокография. Допплерометрия. Биофизический профиль. Учеб- ное пособие. – Мн.: Книжный дом. – 2004. – 304 с. 2. Володин Н. Н. Протоколы диагностики, лечения и профилактики внутриутробных инфекций у новорожденных детей: Методические рекомендации для врачей-неонатологов. – М. – 2001. – 94 с. 3. Гащенко О. В. Комплексная оценка внутриутробного плода с целью прогнозирования исходов родов и выбора спо- соба родоразрешения: автореф. дис… канд. мед. наук. – Ростов н/Д, – 2000. – 24 с. 4. Стрижаков А. Н., Игнатко И. В. Потеря беременности. – М.: Медицинское информационное агентство, – 2007. – 224 с. 5. Стрижаков А. Н., Игнатко И. В. Современные методы оценки состояния матери и плода при беременности высокого риска//Вопросы гинекологии, акушерства и перинатологии. – 2009. – Том. 8, – № 2. – С. 5–15.

Teshaev Shukhrat Jumaevich, DM, professor, Manager by the Department of Anatomy and Operative Surgery with A Topographical Anatomy, Bukhara State Medical Institute Yadgarova Gulnara Sadritdinovna, Senior scientific employee-researcher, Assistant of the Department of Anatomy and Operative surgery with a Topographical Anatomy, Bukhara State Medical Institute, E‑mail: ss‑[email protected]

Morphometric parameters of maxillodental at 3‑year-old children with artificial and natural food Abstract: To the article data are driven on the study of anthropometric parameters for the children of 3th sum- mer age with an artificial and natural feed. The row of differences is shown in моrphоfunctional development for children at the different types of feed. Keywords: maxillodental system, anthopometrical parameters, the physiognomical height of face, the morpho- logical height of face, 3‑year-old children. Growth and development maxillodental system (MS) of the bottom jaw changes, are formed articulate tubercle of tem- each child appreciably depend on properties and the features poromandibular joint, palatal arch. Natural feeding promotes received by it from parents, important role has also social formation of correct occlusion [2]. status. The hereditary factor defines not only external shape It is known that the child is born with so-called bird- of the child and its specific features, but sometimes and oc- beak jaw (prognathism) of newborn (bottom jaw is located currence of some original reactions or hereditary illnesses. on the back), and suction movements promote its moving Growth and deve-lopment of MS are under the influence of forward and to correct formation. The act of suction also is a set of interdependent factors [1; 2; 4]. In development of MS basis for formation of breath functions, occlusion and swal- the kind of food of the child (artificial or natural) and social lowing [5; 7; 8]. status of family [3; 5; 8] also has importance. One of the very Wrong feeding leads to that at the child it is fixed mutual first and basic functions of masticatory apparatus is suction relation between jaws which is called “infantile” or «physi- act. Modern researches have shown that this act at natural ological retrogeniuses», at which the bottom jaw gets distal and artificial feeding (AF) has essential differences. Under position. This results from the fact that movers of bottom jaw, the influence of the loadings arising at suction, the corner of and also the circular muscle of mouth and tongue muscle

64 Morphometric parameters of maxillodental at 3‑year-old children with artificial and natural food insufficiently develop. In development of deformations of from 15.0 up to 16.5 cm., on average 15.9 ± 0.16 cm. MHF at MS it also matters cha-racter of food [3]. 3‑year-old boys of 2nd group fluctuates from 10.0 up to 11.0 cm., Purpose of our research is to define anthopometrical on average it is equal to 10.5 ± 0.11 cm., and at girls is in limits parametres of face (APF) and corner of the bottom jaw (СBJ) from 9.5 cm. up to 11.0 cm, on average — 10.3 ± 0.16 cm. at 3‑year-old children with natural and AF with parents, and PHF at 3‑year-old male children of 3rd group fluctuates also AF children, which are in children’s home (house of from 14.0 up to 16.0 cm., on average 15.3 ± 0.22 cm., and at baby), conformity of the received results to compare to golden girls from 13.7 to 15.0 cm., on average 14.7 ± 0.22 cm. MHF at section principle. 3‑year-old boys of 3rd group fluctuates from 10.5 up to 12.0 cm, Materials and methods. Research have been spent in on average it is equal to 10.9 ± 0.16 cm., and at girls is in limits kindergartens and in children’s ho-me (house of baby). Chil- from 9.0 cm. up to 10.5 cm., on average 9.6 ± 0.16 cm. dren have divided into 3 groups. A kind of food of children In clinical practice it is accepted to study with division of (natural — 1st group), (artificial — 2nd group), and also chil- face into top, middle and bottom parts: top — from border dren from children’s home being on artificial food (3rd group) of scalp of forehead up to middle part of superciliary arches, have defined by means of the special questionnaire which was middle — from the middle part of superciliary arches up filled with parents in a kindergarten and tutors in children’s to subnasal points, bottom — from sub-nasal points up to home. APF measured by special compasses and metre tape. mental part. When these three sizes are equal — the face is CBJ defined goniometer at open mouth (Persin L. I., 1998). considered ideal, corresponding to golden section principle. For definition of occlusion condition plaster models at For the description of ideal proportions of body of hu- 20 boys and at 20 girls of 3 flight age with natural food, and man, many norms and standards were offered, but the gold as at 10 boys and at 10 girls of 3 flight age with AF and at proportion defines its beauty. The gold proportion has been 10 boys, 10 girls being on AF in children’s home are removed. described for the first time in the th4 century B.C by Eukleides. Statistical processing of the received results spent by means He represented unique division of AВ line into two pieces of standard methods of variation statistics with use of tables (AC and СВ) in such manner, that division of AВ into AC is of R. B. Strelkova (1986). equal to division of AC into CB. Result of this division is the Results of research and their discussion. Research have number φ, equal to 1,618. Thus, the golden section is a parity shown that the physiognomical height of face (PHF) at 3‑year- of proportions at which whole so concerns the bigger part as old children of boys of 1st group of fluctuates from 16.2 up to the most part concerns to smaller [Shaparenko P. F., 1994]. 18.0 cm., on average 16.8 ± 0.19 cm. At 3‑year-old girls var- The form at the heart of which construction lie symmetry and ies from 15.5 up to 17.0 cm., on average — 16.2 ± 0.16 cm. golden section combination, promotes the best visual percep- Morphological height of face (MHF) at 3‑year-old boys of tion and occurrence of sensation of beauty and harmony. Pro- 1st group fluctuates from 10.0 up to 12.0 cm., on average it is portions of various parts of our body make the number very equal to 11.2 ± 0.22 cm., and at girls is in limits from 10.5 cm. close to golden section. If these proportions coincide with val- up to 11.5 cm., on average 10.9 ± 0.11cm. ue of number of Fibonachchi (1:1,618) exterior or body of PHF at 3‑year-old children (boys) of 2nd group fluctuates the person is considered ideally combined [6]. from 15.5 up to 17.5 cm., on average 16.3 ± 0.22 cm., and at girls MHF and their parity is resulted in table 1. Table 1. – Morphometric parametres of face and their conformity to principle «Gold proportion» 1st group 2nd group 3rd group Parametres of face Boys Girls Boys Girls Boys Girls PHF 16.8 ± 0.19 16.2 ± 0.16 16.3 ± 0.22 15.9 ± 0.16 15.3 ± 0.22 14.7 ± 0.22 MHF 11.2 ± 0.22 10.9 ± 0.11 10.5 ± 0.11 10.3 ± 0.16 10.9 ± 0.16 9.9 ± 0.16 Height of the top part of face 5.6 ± 0.08 5.4 ± 0.07 5.5 ± 0.07 5.3 ± 0.07 5.1 ± 0.07 4.9 ± 0.08 Height of average part of face 5.5 ± 0.07 5.3 ± 0.06 5.4 ± 0.07 5.3 ± 0.06 5.1 ± 0.08 4.9 ± 0.08 Height of the bottom part of face 5.6 ± 0,07 5.4 ± 0.07 5.4 ± 0.06 5.2 ± 0.07 5.0 ± 0.08 4.8 ± 0.07 Fibonachchi number 1:1.60 1:1.617 1:1.61 1:1.612 1:1.60 1:1.619

Comparisons shows that at 3‑year-old boys of 1st group, the At 3‑year-old boys of 3rd group, parity of distance from tip parity of distance from tip of chin up to the top line of eyebrows of chin up to the top line of eyebrows (10.6 ± 0.12 cm.) to dis- (11.5 ± 0.20 cm.) to distance from the top line of eyebrows up tance from the top line of eyebrows up to top (6.6 ± 0.11 cm.) to top (7.1 ± 0.14 cm.) is equal — 1:1.60. This parity is equal is equal to 1:1.60. At girls (10.2 ± 0.13 cm./6.3 ± 0.16 cm.) this 1:1.617 at girls (10.9 ± 0.18 cm./6.7 ± 0.16 cm.). At boys of 2nd parity is equal to 1:1.619. groups the parity of distance from tip of chin up to the top CBJ jaw at 3‑year-old boys of 1st group is equal on aver- line of eyebrows (11.3 ± 0.15 cm.) to distance from the top age — 118.0 ± 1.62 0 (right side), 119.5 ± 2.16 0 (left side), line of eyebrows up to top (7.0 ± 0.13 cm.) is equal to 1:1.61. and at 3‑year-old girls of this group — 116 ± 1.62 0 (right But at girls this indicator (10.8 ± 0.18 cm./6.7 ± 0.14 cm.) side), 119 ± 2.16 0 (left side). At 3‑year-old boys of 2nd group is equal to 1:1.612. CBJ from both parties it is almost identical, it is on average

65 Section 4. Medical science equal to 122.5 ± 0.94 0, and at 3‑year-old girls of 2nd group after comparison of boys. Middle part of face is more constant, on average makes 121.0 ± 1.62 0 (right side), 123.0 ± 1.08 0 than top (depends on the beginning of line of hair) and bot- (left side). tom (depends on term of eruption and quantity of teeth). At 3‑year-old boys of 3rd group CBJ is on average equal 3. In all groups, the parity of parametres of parts of face is to 123.1 ± 1.82 0 (right side), 123.2 ± 1.82 0 (left side), and at close to number of Fibona-chchi or parametres of a gold pro- 3‑year-old girls of this group on average makes 122.5 ± 0.94 0 portion. These parities are more authentic at 3‑year-old girls in (right side), 123.2 ± 1.08 0 (left side). comparison of boys. AF not only does not provide children with necessary 4. At 3‑year-old children of both sexes and all groups basi- quantity of nutrients, but also does not give high-grade func- cally meet the open form of occlusion where corners of the tional loading on MS of growing organism, for which account CBJ is more blunt (120–1250), it is rare (5–6 %) neutral form there is backlog of some morphometric parametres of parts where corners of the bottom jaw is more than 1350. of human body. 5. CBJ is more blunt at 2nd and 3rd groups of children at of Conclusions: both sexes. It tells about backlog of formation of the bottom 1. MHF and PHF at children with AF is less than at chil- jaw. Besides, at all groups the corner of the bottom jaw on the dren with natural food. It is especially expressed at children left side is more blunt than the right side. This parametre testi- from the children’s homes, being on artificial food. fies to more physical development of right side of the bottom 2. Parity of top, middle and bottom parts of the face at jaw after comparison of left (right side is more functional in girls of all groups are closer to the rule of Gold Proportion, the masticatory act). References: 1. Andreishev A. R. Associated maxillodental and facial anomalies and deformations//Publishing house: GEOTAR-MEDIA.: library of doctor-expert. – 2008. – Р. 257. 2. Dmitrienko S. V., Vorobyov A. A., Krayushkin A. I.//Morphological features of maxillofa-cial area at anomalies and defor- mations and methods of their diagnostics. Publishing house: ElBi-Spb; – 2009. – Р. 213. 3. Chetvertnova G. A. Influence of natural and artificial feeding on colonization resistance of oral cavity and condition of maxillofacial area: dissertation of Doctor of Medicine. – Volgograd, – 2008. – P. 137. 4. Shaporenko P. F., Shipitsyna A. V., Yermoleva V. A. Features of morphological standards of head at newborns, young men and girls 17–21 years//Morphology. – 2004. – vol. 126, – No. 4. – Р. 139. 5. Shmurak M. I, Tvere V. M, Simanovskaya E. Yu., Nyashin Yu. I. Problem of feeding of children at early age//Youth science. Prikamye: Scientific labour collection. – Perm. – 2006. – th7 release. – Р. 27–30. 6. Dubner H., Keller W. “New Fibonacci and Lucas primes,” Math. Comp. – 68:225 (2003 417–427. S1 – S12. MR p. 99.) 7. Marti I. et al. Effect of lactose on rheology of milk protein dispersions//3 International Sympo-sium on food Rheology and Structure. – 2004. – P. 207–211. 8. Tverier V. M., Simanovskaya E.Yu., Nyashin Yu. I. et al. R. Biomechanical description of the breast feeding//5th World Congress of Biomechanics: Intern. Proc., Munich (Germany), 2006. Bologna. – 2006. – P. 521–525.

Yarovenko Vladimir Vladimirovich, Dnipropetrovsk Regional Clinical Center of Cardiology and Cardiosurgery, Dnipropetrovsk, Ukraine E‑mail: [email protected]

Dynamics of proinflammatory cytokines using conventional ultrafiltration after cardiac surgery Abstract: The work is devoted to the influence of ultrafiltration for manifestations of inflammatory response and the dynamics of proinflammatory cytokines in patients after cardiac surgery. Keywords: cardiopulmonary bypass, ultrafiltration, inflammation, cytokines. Introduction This syndrome arises mainly due to contact between the Сardiac surgery and cardiopulmonary bypass blood and the artificial surfaces of the bypass circuit [10]. (CPB) initiate a systemic inflammatory response syn- Attempts to prevent CPB-mediated inflammation by dif- drome [3, 7] that may lead to considerable postoperative mor- ferent methods are warranted, because a reduction in tality as well as complications such as bleeding, thromboem- the inflammatory response may contribute to organ func- bolism, fluid retention and temporary organ dysfunction [12]. tion protection and hence to improved recovery and

66 Dynamics of proinflammatory cytokines using conventional ultrafiltration after cardiac surgery to decreased mortality from surgical procedures, particular- lowed by a continuous infusion of 400 mg/h until completion ly in critically ill patients. of surgery). Diverse therapeutic strategies to modulate the system- Systemic heparinization was performed by applying ic inflammatory response after cardiac surgery are being -ex 300 IU/kg body weight prior to cannulation, and the activat- amined: reduction in the area of foreign surfaces «minimized ed clotting time (ACT II; Medtronic) was maintained above extra-corporeal circuit» [5; 13], removal of inflammatory me- 400 seconds during CPB. After termination of CPB and surgical diators by ultrafiltration [11], pharmacologic strategies for hemostasis, heparin was neutralized with protamine sulphate combating the inflammatory response [8], use of leukocyte- (1:1 ratio). Cardioplegic solution (Custodiol, Alsbach-Hahnlein, depleting filters [1], improving the biocompatibility of the Germany) was administered for myocardial protection through CPB circuit [2; 4]. a combination of anterograde and retrograde techniques. CPB-induced systemic inflammatory response syn- The extracorporeal circuit in both groups consisted of drome is characterized by the activation of complement sys- a roller pump (Terumo System 1, Terumo CVS Co, USA), tem, monocyte/macrophages and neutrophils, and the release a membrane oxygenator with phosphorylcholine coating of cytokines and vasoactive substances [14]. (Skipper with A. g.i. l.e.TM treatment; Eurosets), an arterial Proinflammatory cytokines, such as tumor necrosis factor filter, a cardiotomy reservoir, and a pack of custom polyvinyl (TNF)-α, interleukin (IL)-1β and IL‑6, can be induced by a chloride tubing. All patients underwent standard non pulsa- wide variety of stimuli and act on a large number of effector tile hypothermic CPB to a core temperature of 30 °C. Pump cells [14; 7]. Thus, their concentrations may reflect the status prime consisted of 600 mL. of crystalloid solution, 500 mL. of of the inflammatory response when multiple initiating pro- HES 130/0,4, 400 mL. of 15 % mannitol and 5000 U of hepa- cesses are involved. rin. Perfusion pressure during CPB was maintained between Previous clinical studies have suggested that the serum 50 and 70 mm. Hg. CPB was discontinued after rewarming levels of IL‑6 are the best parameter for assessing the status the patient to a core temperature of 36 °C. of the inflammatory response to surgical stress [15]. IL‑6 is Patients in the control group received no ultrafiltration. In a pleiotropic cytokine involved in the regulation of immune the CUF group, the patients were treated using conventional responses and also plays an important role during acute-phase ultrafiltration during CPB that removed any excess fluid and responses, which include fever, corticosterone release and he- hemoconcentrated the patients’ blood using a hemoconcen- patic production of acute phase proteins. This cytokine is pro- trator (DHF 0.6 Sorin Group USA, Inc.). Suction was ap- duced by a variety of cells after some form of stimulation, such plied to the filtrate port to achieve an ultrafiltration rate of as an infection, trauma or immunological challenge, which 100–150 ml/min. The total amount of fluid filtered by con- stimulates the release of immune-competent proteins, such ventional ultrafiltration was 31,8 ± 6,4 mL/kg. as CRP from the liver and, together with TNFα and IL‑1β, Leukogram and concentration of inflammatory markers causes activation of T cells [14; 15]. (tumor necrosis factor-α [TNF-α], interleukin‑6 [IL‑6]) were We investigated the effects of ultrafiltration of CPB on detected in arterial blood samples before intubation, 30 min- systemic inflammatory response and clinical outcome follow- utes after the end of CPB and 24 hour postoperative. ing open heart surgery. Measurements of TNF-α and IL‑6 levels were performed Material and Metods by means of commercially available enzyme-linked immuno- After obtaining institutional review board approval and sorbent assays (Orgenium Laboratories, Vantaa, Finland). written, informed consent, 42 adult patients with primary val- The appropriate volume of sample or standard was applied to vular disease were prospectively enrolled in this study. a 96‑well microtiter plate precoated with the corresponding Patients were randomly divided into two groups: (1) con- monoclonal antibody. After the aspiration of the wells, plates ventional ultrafiltration (СUF group) (n = 21); or (2) control were washed with a specific surfactant provided by the manu- group (n = 21) use of a non ultrafiltration of CPB. facturer. A solution of enzyme-linked polyclonal antibody and Exclusion criteria were impaired renal function with substrate was added to each well. The optical density of each serum creatinine levels > 1.6 mg/dL, liver function test re- well was read at the appropriate wavelength. sults indicating impaired liver function, a history of diabetes Statistical processing was carried out using the software mellitus and preexisting chronic inflammatory disease. Pa- package SPSS 19.0. All data are presented as the mean ± SD. Di- tients enrolled in this protocol did not receive aprotinin. chotomous variables were analyzed with the Fisher exact test. anesthetic management was standardized and consisted A P value of < 0.05 was considered statistically significant. Re- of induction with propofol, fentanil and vecuronium. Anes- sults were considered significant for P < 0.05. thesia was maintained with sevoflurane and fentanil, with ve- Results curonium and/or pancuronium for muscle relaxation. Fluid Clinical Outcome Parameters management consisted of crystalloid solution administration Seventy percent of the patients in both groups were men. during the pre- and post- CPB periods. There were no significant differences between the groups in All patients received an intraoperative infusion of age distribution, male-female ratio, preoperative creatinine tranexamic acid (1 g. in 20 minutes before skin incision, fol- concentration, CPB time, and crossclamp time (Table 1).

67 Section 4. Medical science

Table 1. – Demographic characteristics end perioperative data* CUF group Control group Parameter P Value (n = 21) (n = 21) Age, y 60 ± 11 62 ± 10 0.63 Gender,% male 73 67 0.78 Weight, kg. 73 ± 11 77 ± 10 0.91 Creatinine, mg/dL 1.1 ± 0.36 1.2 ± 0.36 0.72 Body surface area, m 2 1.9 ± 0.16 1.8 ± 0.16 0.82 Ejection fraction,% 62 ± 8 66 ± 8.6 0.44 EuroSCORE,% 2.19 ± 0.79 2.5 ± 1.1 0.91 Bypass time, min. 109 (79–128) 97 (80–121) 0.65 Aortic cross-clamp time, min. 77 (60–104) 77 (60–104) 0.92 Note: * — Measurements are presented as the mean ± SD. The p values are unadjusted for multiple comparisons During the postoperative course, 2 units of packed red similar in the two groups (p = 0.12). A significant difference in blood cell were transfused to 1 patient in the CUF group and other clinical parameters. Under ultrafiltration reduces the time 2 patients in the control group. No patient underwent surgi- of mechanical ventilation (p = 0.03), and length of stay of pa- cal reexploration for bleeding. Postoperative bleeding was tients in the intensive care unit (p = 0.05), are shown in Table 2. Table 2. – Postoperative clinical parameters* CUF Control Parameter Value (n = 15) (n = 15) Patient transfused in ICU 1 (6.6 %) 2 (13.3 %) 0.35 Chest tube drainage, mL/kg/24 h 3.58 ± 1.3 4.4 ± 2.8 0.12 Time to extubation, min. 456 ± 138 643 ± 248 0.03 Length of ICU stay, days 5 ± 1.7 5.9 ± 1.5 0.05 Note: * — Measurements are presented as the mean ± SD. The p values are unadjusted for multiple comparisons Baseline levels of white blood cell count in the ultrafil- and 104.1 ± 65.4 pg/ml (p = 0.001 compared to baseline). tration and control groups were similar (5.7 ± 1.5 · 10 9/L Between-group differences also reached statistical significance (СUF) and 6.8 ± 2.1 · 10 9/L (control); p = 0.39). In blood (p = 0.022). After 24 hours, there was a gradual decrease in the samples taken after 30 min. after CPB, marked leukocytosis, concentration of IL 6 (СUF, 48.95 ± 30.1 pg/ml vs. control (16.04 ± 4.7 · 10 9/L (CUF) and 16.9 ± 6.3 · 10 9/L (control); 69.9 ± 44 pg/ml; p = 0.066). Intra-group differences were also p = 0.3), which was maintained until the end of the study. In statistically significant (p = 0.008 compared to baseline group both groups, 2 stage, the value of this index was significantly ultrafiltration) and (p = 0.004 compared to baseline control higher than baseline levels (p = 0.012). 24 hours after the end group). It should be noted that at stage 3 between-group dif- of cardiopulmonary bypass intergroup differences number ferences in the content of this cytokine were on the threshold of leukocytes reach statistical significance (11.7 ± 3,2 · 10 9/L of statistical significance. (CUF) and 14.4 ± 3.25 · 10 9/L (control); p = 0.03). Conclusion Baseline levels of TNF-α were similar in both groups. Our study showed that the use of conventional ultrafiltra- (CUF, 11.63 ± 3.17 pg/ml vs. control 10.63 ± 1.18 pg/ml; tion during cardiopulmonary bypass reduces the intensity of p = 0.3). Statistically significant intragroup changes and differ- the inflammatory response in cardiac surgical patients. ences between the groups on the stages of the study of this in- This is manifested in: dicator has not been revealed. The mean value of the concentra- 1. Twenty-four hours after the cardiopulmonary by- tion of TNF-α at the second stage 11.34 ± 6.03 pg/ml (CUF) pass white blood cell count in patients with ultra- vs. 17.05 ± 18 pg/ml (control); p = 0.18. Сytokine concentra- filtration was significantly lower compared with tion for 3 phase 9.28 ± 4.07 pg/ml (SUF) vs. 9.29 ± 3.94 pg/ml controls. (control); p = 0.39. 2. Conduct ultrafiltration significantly reduces the con- Baseline levels of IL 6 were similar in both groups. (CUF, centration of IL‑6 in thirty minutes after the end of 1.65 ± 0.32 pg/ml vs. control 1.1 ± 0.62 pg/ml; p = 0.12). cardiopulmonary bypass. Thirty minutes after the end of cardiopulmonary bypass level 3. In our study, we were unable to determine the impact of IL 6 significantly increased in both groups. The maximum of ultrafiltration on TNF α. average value in the control group amounted to ultrafiltra- 4. In the ultrafiltration’s group reduced length of stay in tion and 61.35 ± 47 pg/ml (p = 0.005 compared to baseline) intensive care and duration of mechanical ventilation.

68 Dynamics of proinflammatory cytokines using conventional ultrafiltration after cardiac surgery

References: 1. Boodram S., Evans E. J. Use of leukocyte-depleting filters during cardiac surgery with cardiopulmonary bypass: a review. J Extra Corpor Technol – 2008, – 40: 1: 27–42. 2. De Somer F., Francois K., van Oeveren W., Poelaert J., De Wolf D., Ebels T., et al. Phosphorylcholine coating of extra- corporeal circuits provides natural protection against blood activation by the material surface. Eur J Cardiothorac Surg – 2000, – 18: 602–6. 3. Hess P. J. Jr. Systemic inflammatory response to coronary artery bypass graft surgery. Am J Health Syst Pharm – 2005, – 62: 18: 4: 6–9. 4. Hoel T. N., Videm V., Baksaas S. T., Mollnes T. E., Brosstad F., Svennevig J. L. Comparison of a Duraflo II-coated cardio- pulmonary bypass circuit and a trillium-coated oxygenator during open-heart surgery. Perfusion – 2004, – 19: 177–84. 5. Immer F. F., Ackermann A., Gygax E. et al. Minimal extracorporeal circulation is a promising technique for coronary artery bypass grafting. Ann Thorac Surg – 2007, – 84: 5: 1515–1520. 6. Kotani T., Kotake Y., Morisaki H. et al. Activation of a neutrophilderived inflammatory response in the airways during cardiopulmonary bypass. Anesth Analg – 2006, – 103: 1394–1399. 7. Landis C. Why the inflammatory response is important to the cardiac surgical patient. J Extra Corpor Technol – 2007, – 39: 4: 281–284. 8. Landis C. Pharmacologic strategies for combating the inflammatory response. J Extra Corpor Technol – 2007. – 39: 4: 291–295. 9. Lim H. K., Anderson J., Leong J. Y. et al. What is the role of leukocyte depletion in cardiac surgery? Heart Lung Circ – 2007. – 16: 4: 243–253. 10. Menasche P., Edmunds L. H. Jr. Extracorporeal circulation: the inflammatory response. Cardiac surgery in the adult. – New York: McGraw-Hill – 2003, – Р. 349–360. 11. Pérez-Vela J., Ruiz-Alonso E., Guillén-Ramírez F. et al. ICU outcomes in adult cardiac surgery patients in relation to ultra- filtration type. Perfusion – 2008, – 23: 2: 79–87. 12. Rubens F. D., Mesana T. The inflammatory response to cardiopulmonary bypass: a therapeutic overview. Perfusion – 2004,– 19 (Suppl 1): S5–12. 13. Zamora E., Delgado L., Castro M. A. et al. Coronary artery bypass surgery using the mini-extracorporeal circulation system: a Spanish unit’s experience. Rev Esp Cardiol – 2008; 61: 4: 376–381. 14. Warren O. J., Smith A. J., Alexiou C., Rogers P. L., Jawad N., Vincent C., et al. The inflammatory response to cardiopulmonary bypass: part 1— mechanisms of pathogenesis. J Cardiothorac Vasc Anesth. – 2009. – 23 (2): 223–31. 15. Otania S., Kuinoseb M., Murakamic T. et al. Preoperative Oral Administration of Pentoxifylline Ameliorates Respira- tory Index after Cardiopulmonary Bypass Through Decreased Production of IL‑6. Acta Med. Okayama, – 2008, – Vol. 62, No. 2, – Р. 69–74.

69 Section 5. Pedagogy

Section 5. Pedagogy Kenenbayeva Marzhan Akhmetkarimovna, Pavlodar state pedagogical Institute, candidate of pedagogical sciences, associate Professor Botalova Olga Borisovna, Pavlodar state pedagogical Institute, candidate of pedagogical sciences E‑mail: [email protected] Competitiveness of future teacher in modern education Abstract: The sustainable development of modern society is related to its competitiveness. But the competitive- ness of society depends on the competitiveness of each individual of the society and marketability of each future specialist. Keywords: competitiveness of personality, education, future teacher. Nowadays the concept of competitiveness acquires a new It is able to take decisions and to be responsible, and it is a conceptual meaning and becomes more topical in the science personality one can rely on and to whom one can trust. Such of pedagogy. a person is respected by others and he respects himself. Such In order to perform the comparative analysis of old and a person is welcomed among friends and acquaintances, and new paradigms of competitiveness, several scientists use the he is demanded in the professional field. As a result of the metaphors of a shark and a dolphin [1]. Using metaphors, above mentioned, the concept competitiveness becomes it is possible to draw a conclusion that, within the context more and more important in the science of pedagogy. of the old paradigm of competitiveness, a competitive per- Nowadays the facilitation of the competitiveness de- sonality could be compared to an image of a shark, which, in velopment of new future teachers as professionals becomes the process of achieving its goal, is able to swallow anybody more and more actual in the educational process of higher standing in its way. This image of a competitive personality educational establishments. One of the basic aims of modern has grown old. education is to prepare the society, especially the new genera- It is the insight and totality of views, possessed by previous tion, for the life under the changeable social and economic generations of mankind concerning a competitive personality, conditions, including labor market conditions. based on the insight into biological competition. Nowadays is According to V. Andreyev, a competitive future teacher is the time, when a new paradigm of competitiveness is born that a future teacher, able to achieve the set goals in the change- makes us to change radically our views concerning the com- able environment, managing a great number of professional petitive personality, which could be symbolically compared tasks and possessing certain individual features [2]. L. Mitina with a dolphin. It is a person, able to cooperate, to help oth- emphasizes that competitiveness is the success of actions and ers, perceiving his competitors as his potential partner for co- achievements. A competitive personality better overcomes operation. He is able to maintain the balance between I‑ego crisis, rising to a new developmental stage as a result of the and I‑eco in his thinking and actions. A dolphin-type com- obtained experience [3]. petitive personality can be a leader and at the same time also In relation to the field of actions it is important that, in a member of a team, working together with others and co-op- the educational process, modern youth would acquire diverse erating with them. In the context of the new paradigm, a com- experience concerning actions, and that the range of their ac- petitive personality in the process of its development, instead quired actions and the formed and developed skills, as a result of competing with others, its competitors, competes with it- of these actions, would be as wide as possible. Nowadays the self — it combats its bad habits, shortcomings, disability and youth needs to acquire new experience of socio-economic and unwillingness to perform something important or necessary professional activities. In order to become a competitive per- to do. It is a determined personality, possessing clear goals for sonality, it is very important that the youth gains adequate in- future. The competitive personality of the new type is creative sight about themselves and the professional environment: and flexible in its thinking and actions; therefore it is able to their abilities, interests, needs, goals for life and selfrealization deal with the problems in the unusual, nonstandard situations. opportunities in the nearest environment.

70 Competitiveness of future teacher in modern education

Future and new future teacher’s competitiveness depends – self-confidence; on the fact, whether he would be able to integrate successful- – critical thinking and the skill to deal with problems; ly into the labour market, how flexible and creative he would – flexibility; be in his thinking and actions, particularly in the problem – analytical skills; the skill to use the new technologies, situations, when it is necessary to have nonstandard think- programming and foreign language skills; ing, the actions, which would be based on competences in – persuasion skills, the skill to offer or sell one’s ideas; the new, unusual environment. Everyone must be ready psy- – creativity in dealing with problems [5]. chologically for the moment, when it would be necessary, We should take into account also the Japanese experience whether to improve one’s professional skills and to develop concerning the development of three basic groups of future further as a future teacher in conformity with already ob- competitive future teachers’ skills and abilities: tained profession, or to find new ways of career development – technological skills are related to the acquisition of pro- by acquiring new competences and qualifications. The stu- fession teachers’; dents as the future future teachers need the assistance for – communicative skills are related to the true attitude career development; therefore it is important to ensure also at towards the maintaining of interconnections between the the higher educational establishments the career counselling, people of different classes, groups, cultures and the individual which would enable the students to identify themselves in oneself; relation to the chosen profession, would help to overcome – conceptual skills are an art to forecast events, to plan the doubts, motivation crises in the process of their professional activities of a large number of people, on the basis of analysis, development. It would facilitate their psychological and pro- to make responsible decisions. fessional readiness to start their independent, responsible ac- When evaluating the future teacher’s competitiveness, tivities in the chosen profession. particular attention is paid to the future teacher’s ability to According to O. Potemkina, the competitiveness mani- make decisions, plan, maintain the dialogue, organize people, fests in the activity. One of the spheres of this activity is the and implement the control over the activities of pupils. In the future teacher’s professional development and the choice of practice of preparing Japanese future teachers particular at- his career, planning of future, forecasting and facilitation of tention is paid to the integrity of thinking. There is envisaged career development. According to the scientist’s point of view, a transition from homo sapiens (a thinking human, a man of the indicators of a competitive future teacher are as follows: sense) to homo integrans (integrated human). On the whole it – employee’s values orientation; will ensure the graduates’ competitiveness, which consists of – factors of labour motivation; three components: – peculiarities and reflexes of a professional’s life; – indicators of quality content; – ability to perfect oneself, to improve the professional skills. – quality of the technologies of studies and education; All these positions, necessary for a new future teacher – quality of a personality’s educational level. as an individual, will significantly influence his professional In Japan a competitive future teacher means a future activities, relations with colleagues and other people. O. Po- teacher, who is able to achieve the set goals in different and temkina, developing her idea, emphasizes that intellectual and rapidly changing environment, managing to deal with a large creative activity is an important sphere for the development number of professional tasks, and who possesses certain indi- and manifestation of a personality’s competitiveness [4]. vidual qualities. We consider that the studies of Japanese expe- The USA scientist K. Hansen, future teacher of the career rience provide an opportunity to discover something unique, support system, has developed a conception of a quintessen- but the most important is that it is an approach, which is suc- tial career, where she substantiates several functional indica- cessfully approbated in the practice of Japanese vocational tions of a competitive personality: education and career education for the preparation of new – communicative skills (verbal and written communication); future teachers and the facilitation of the development of their – teamwork skills and abilities; leadership skills; competitiveness. – observation of professional ethics; But the experience of the USA scientists proves that – good capacity for work, including endurance, effort, team competitiveness of the organizational employees is self-motivation, diligence, healthy ambitions, initiative, ven- formed under the influence of different factors. The research- ture, positive attitude towards wok; ers offer to the managers of organizations to determine the – driver’s skills; efficiency of employees by answering to the following ques- – logic, intelligence, competence in education and profes- tions: who is rarely absent from work or who can compen- sional activities; sate his absence so that the activities of an organization as – organizational skills; a system would not be hindered; who works well without – business skills, which are used by people to start their being forced; who performs his work in a qualitative and own business, including the ability of self-determination, proj- timely manner independently; who does not disturb oth- ect administration skills and abilities, the talent for marketing ers with his continuous suggestions and the management; oneself as a future teacher; whose work is similarly qualitative, when his boss is present

71 Section 5. Pedagogy and absent; who continuously strives for the improvement Thus we can see that in the substantiation of competitive- of his work; who prevents or deals with conflicts, facilitates ness provided by several scientists it is possible to observe co-operation and maintains the moral state? The model explicit tendency to characterize a competitive person, while of these questions is used as the basis for the preparation of acting in a particular field of education, identifying several a competitive personality, and it performs the function of functions to be performed and human qualities necessary for the demand for certain material [5]. performing such functions. References: 1. Pauli G. Crusader for the Future: A Portrait of Aurelio Peccei, Founder of the Club of Rome. – Oxford: Pergamon. – 2007. – 105 p. 2. Andreyev V. Pedagogy of Creative Self-Development. Book 2. – Kazan. – 2008. 3. Mitina L. Psychology of the Competitive Personality’s Development. – Moscow, – 2013. – 400 p. 4. Potemkina O. Psychological Diagnostics of Professional’s Competitiveness. – Moscow. – 2012. 5. Hansen K. Emphasizing your Transferable and Marketable Skills in Your Cover Letter. – 2008. [online] [11.09.2009.]. Available at: http://www.quintcareers. com/cover_letter_transferable_skills.html.

Gulevich Tatyana Mikhailovna, Moscow State Regional Institute of Humanities, Candidate of pedagogical sciences, Senior Teacher, The Department of social pedagogics E-mail: [email protected]

Influence of the social environment on development of creative potential in younger schoolchildren Abstract: The article reveals the importance of social environment in development of creative potential in young- er schoolchildren. The subject-subject relations between adults and children in the course of creative activity are analyzed not only from the point of degree of influence of social environment on creative abilities, but also from the point of its importance. Keywords: a creative person, creative potential, social environment, younger schoolchildren. Implementation of a new educational paradigm in XXI responsibility for oneself and the surrounding world. Social century imposes certain requirements for the development reality acts as a basis for gradual immersion in the develop- of an artistic personality that should have flexible productive ing problem field of culture and understanding of socio- thinking and developed active imagination. cultural experience for the younger schoolchild. However, Nowadays, one of the fundamental principles of renewal of the driving force of a child’s social development is not just educational content is personal orientation that presupposes the obtaining of human experience, but accumulation and ex- development of creative abilities in participants, individualiza- pansion of life experience in the process of special interac- tion of their education taking into consideration their interests tion with an adult. and inclination to creative activity. The strategy of modern edu- Hence, the task of development of the younger school- cation lies in the objective to give all students without excep- child, on the one hand as a social human, i. e. the ability to oc- tion «an opportunity to develop their talents and artistic po- cupy their place in the society, and on the other hand as a tential implying the ability to realize their personal plans» [5]. cultured person learning culture and reforming it in their ac- Special relevance of the problem of creativity develop- tivity, is current. ment is given to younger schoolchildren. At this age, learned Striving to learn the surrounding world and manifest their cliché forms of behavior and thinking have not become dom- attitude towards it, the child refers directly to art as one of the inant yet. A younger schoolchild has a vivid imagination, most important kinds of children activity. Thus, one can and which, without a doubt, is a condition for creative establish- should refer to the younger school age as a sensitive period of ment of a personality. And, most importantly, there are such creative development of a person. Conceiving a passion for new formations in the structure of personality of the younger art, the child practices their skills and develops valuable moral schoolchild as self-analysis and internal plan of actions, de- qualities. Socialization of their personality and development centration, self-understanding and extension of I‑image. of its civil characteristics take place. The younger school age is a step in personal formation The issue of creativity was widely considered by the rep- of a child, development of their abilities to growing up, resentatives of cognitive movement.

72 Influence of the social environment on development of creative potential in younger schoolchildren

In fact, one can refer the works of F. Galton, who stud- and spiritual resources is disastrous. Spirituality and creativ- ied intellectual gift (here, creativity acts as an intellectual gift), ity is a word combination, which is the key to discovering to the first researches [7]. the value of these two notions. This problem is a scientific R. Assagioli reckoned that creativity is the process of ris- relay in XXI century [12]. ing of a personality to «ideal I» and a way of its self-revelation. So, what is the role of creative activity and what social Thurstone was one of the first researchers to pay attention conditions should be created for successful all-round develop- to difference between creative ability and intellect. He noted ment of younger schoolchildren? that such factors as peculiarities of temper, ability to learn The relevance of the issue is explained by the fact that the quickly and generate ideas play an important role in creative formation of an artistically active personality possessing the activity, and that creative solutions come at the moment of ability to solve life problems effectively and in out-of-the-box relaxation and not at the moment when the mind deliberately way is formed in younger school age and is a condition of fur- focuses on solving problems. ther development of the personality and their creative activity. Empiric researches in psychology of creativity aimed All spheres of a child’s psychic are naturally involved in at revelation of intellectual activity, personal characteristics creativity by art and nature filling their life with real and not and capacity for creative activity (D. B. Bogoyavlenskaya, fictional values. It gives schoolchildren who learnt the internal M. A. Kholodnaya etc.) should be noted separately. essence of art an opportunity to turn their labor into beauty, Creative intellectual achievements are based on «the in- the source of pleasure for themselves and people around them. tegration of different «psychical contents» in the form of Hence, social environment that implies the uniqueness of con- knowledge, believes, emotional impressions, special states of tent of art and its forms in their oneness is seen by us as a consciousness etc. — M. A. Kholodnaya writes — with in- reflection of reality (surrounding world) through art. crease of creative level of intellectual gift, its psychological School period is characterized by rapid development mechanisms become more and more personalized. Person- of imagination determined by an intensive process of acquiring alized, unique cognitive mechanisms take the place of gen- diversified knowledge and its application in practice. The im- eral cognitive factors in the conditions of super-ordinary cre- portance of imagination in this sphere of human activity is ative intellect» [3, 302]. considered equal to thinking. It is important that conditions D. B. Bogoyavlenskaya believes that a creative person- of freedom of action, independence and leadership should be ality is a human with a high level of intellectual activity, ex- created for a human in order to develop imagination. pressed creative motivation, which is the result of cycle-per- In cases when due to these or those reasons imagination in sonal activity processing in itself its cognitive, emotional and children is underdeveloped, they start doubting the existence spiritual experience [2]. even of quite real things. For instance, K. I. Chukovsky wrote Notwithstanding a big number of researches aimed at that when in one of the schools pupils were told about sharks, studying creativity, the diversity of aspects and approaches to one of the children shouted: «Sharks do not exist!» [6]. define conditions of realization and development of creative Along with the reduction of a human’s ability to fantasize, qualities in a person, the significant number of questions re- the personality becomes poorer, the abilities of creative think- mains insufficiently developed. Particularly, it refers to defini- ing decrease and the interest for art and science fades. tion of mechanisms of manifestation and formation of creative Younger school children perform most part of their ac- qualities of a personality in younger school age. Considering tivities with the help of imagination. Their games are a fruit the importance of studies, a complex of social factors, influ- of vivid fantasy. They are engrossed in creative activity. The ence of micro-environment on the development of creativity, psychological basis of the latter is creative imagination. When it is important to study their role during this age period. in the process of studying children face the need to realize It is justified by a number of theoretical provisions un- abstract material and they need analogies, a support due to in- covering the practicability of research of creativity in younger sufficient life experience, imagination comes to rescue. Thus, schoolchildren (L. S. Vygotsky, Yu. E. Gilbukh, N. E. Veraksa, the meaning of the function of imagination in psychical de- O. N. Garnets, V. T. Kudryavtsev, M. S. Semiletkina, E. L. Ya- velopment is great. kovleva etc.) and practical value lately gained by the questions Younger school age is called the peak of childhood. The of influence of the peculiarities of micro-environment on the child preserves many children’s qualities – carelessness, na- development of creativity in younger schoolchildren. ivety, looking at an adult from bottom to top. But the child The growing interest for value-motivation plan of creativ- starts losing children’s spontaneity when they acquire a dif- ity enables us to make a conclusion about the establishment of ferent logic of thinking. Studying is an important activity for a wide research strategy that regards spiritual and moral side them. They do not only gain knowledge and skills at school. of a human-creator as of paramount importance. Today, a lot They gain a certain social status. Their interests, values and of importance is given to spiritual and moral extent of human lifestyle change. creativity: aspect of responsibility, «deed» — V. D. Shadrikov, Social world is a world which one is included into through a modern researcher, speaks about it. People are able to do a social communication and subject-oriented activity. Participa- lot and the misbalance between their technological abilities tion in the activity is the basis of interaction of a personality

73 Section 5. Pedagogy with social environment. Since childhood, in the process of communicative and cognitive skills, forms active live position cooperated creative activity, the motivation for activity and and increases the level of self-esteem in younger schoolchildren. personal experience are formed and the specific of needs, inter- Hence, we believe that if a pedagogical space of socio-cul- ests and value orientations are determined; also, psycho-phys- tural development of younger schoolchildren is created, which iological bases of correction and self-regulation are defined. will include macro- and micro-environment of development Personal development is defined by many external and in- of «social understanding», zones of development of «sub- ternal determinants. External factors include social environ- ject qualities of a child» (self-cognition, self-upbringing, self- ment, namely, affiliation of an individual with a certain culture, regulation, self-rehabilitation, self-realization, value-self-de- socio-economic class and family environment, which is unique termination) and, herewith, goals and content of educational for everyone. On the other hand, internal determinants include activity of primary school are agreed with the institutions of genetic, biological and physiological factors [14]. supplementary education, then one can expect value attitude Methodological ground of modern educational paradigm to the surrounding world in younger schoolchildren, develop- in terms of influence of social environment on creative abili- ment of reflexive control, confidence in themselves, emotional ties of a person was clearly expressed by G.P. Schedrovitsky: stability, social adaptability, self-dependence, social activity, «Does creativity belong to an individual or does it refer to a increase of the level of moral manner as a result of their socio- functional place in human organization and structure? I answer cultural development. this question strictly, of course… A simple thing is stated: there Artwork can make the life of younger schoolchildren inter- is a culture, a combination of knowledge, which is rendered esting and rich. Events on socialization should be performed from generations to generations, and then, orthogonally to all through the preparation to contests and exhibitions, master- this, a human is born, and he will either join this spirit and it classes; such forms of work should be offered, which will be will become available, or he will not join it» [10, 21]. aimed at cultivation of kindness and love for their Motherland. Hereof, it is obvious that the need of formation of cre- Today, more and more solid steps of educational system ative abilities should be established in culture, reflect in main aimed at the formation of creative thinking and imagination of cultural values and concepts realized in the child’s social en- schoolchildren through creative activity are observed. vironment. In this article we would like to note the activity of an artis- It is important to understand the differences in results, tic union «Felt: items made of loose wool» of the Municipal which socio-pedagogical concepts different in quality give us. budgetary educational establishment of supplementary edu- The whole strategy of life depends on the nature of socio-ped- cation for children and the youth, the center for art develop- agogical environment, whether it will be innovative (creating ment «Sozvezdiye» in Shatursk municipal district of Moscow conditions for active experiment) or conservative (rendering region, which contributes to development of emotionally- steady traditions and customs). sensuous world of a child, where they feel secured and free. Based on the above stated, there is a task of formation of a Children with different level of development and social social environment, which could offer a child both innovative status, i. e. gifted and with pathologies, retardation of mental and psychologically comfortable climate for release of their development, left- and right-handed, children from well-off creative abilities, and the system of organizational measures and underprivileged families, cooperate, develop and study and oral norms limiting and forming social responsibility for together at the given artistic union. the results of their creative activity. In order to develop creative abilities of younger school- Taking into account the need for reformation of the sys- children, teachers designed a model of development of cre- tem of education and its transition to a new scientifically- ative personality of a younger schoolchild. grounded concept of creative development and self-develop- Specialists rely upon the works of: ment of a personality, we see a solution in the following steps: • L. Yu. Subbotina. Development of imagination in 1. Active implementation of specialists on socio-peda- children [8]; gogical work in schools and supplementary education; • Yu. G. Tamberg. Development of creative thinking in 2. Organization of diverse forms and kinds of extracur- a child [9]; ricular activity on development of creative abilities; • A. Ya. Tsukar. Classes on imagination develop- 3. Stimulation of creative and research activity of teach- ment [11]. ers on implementation of new achievements of pedagogical As a means to increase the level of creative activity, such and psychological science in the form of teaching. forms of work as artistic exercises and tasks were selected. At younger school age the child’s activity becomes goal- Developing goals and tasks of the given program, teachers pro- oriented, meaningful and intended, which means that social ceed from general goals and tasks of work, which are aimed at environment becomes the main factor that forms the system the formation and development of abilities to manage creative and defines the peculiarities of development of creative abili- process in schoolchildren: fantasizing, understanding of regu- ties and further attitude of a person towards life in the whole. larities, solving difficult problematic situations. Artwork is an excellent educational and socializing In the process of social support of development of cre- means that contributes to self-expression, development of ative abilities in younger schoolchildren, the sense of external

74 Influence of the social environment on development of creative potential in younger schoolchildren and internal safety, relaxedness and freedom due to the sup- through an integral systematic approach. It determines the port from their artistic fantasies is formed. task in creative art, which does not narrow down to simple im- Schoolchildren participate annually in contests and exhi- age of an object, but expression of personal attitude towards it. bitions of different level. The conditions of organization of creative environment Thus, in 2014 the pupils took the st1 place in the Sixth for the development of creative potential in younger school- open Russian contest for decorative-applied and folk art children are expressed in the following combination of forms, «Magic colors of life» conducted at the Republican Acad- methods and means: emy of supplementary education; 10 pupils became the prize – gaining sensation experience and reflection of objective winners of the 1st and 2nd degree at the International contest- reality on the basis of knowledge about it in the form of active exhibition «Star project»; 3 girls became the winners of the research of the surrounding world that presupposes the transi- All-Russia contest «Russia is the address of childhood». tion from passive contemplation of the studied object to active One can conclude that subject-subject relations realized at understanding and creative research work with it; the given artistic union ensure mutual creativity and coopera- – development of colored vision through comparison of tion between an adult and a child, acceptance and support of two aspects of social environment: natural and anthropogenic their artistic manifestations. environment; Thus, to solve the problem of development of creative – communication with famous regional artists; potential of a younger schoolchild, their activity and the en- – understanding of the secrets of birth and formation of vironment should be in harmony. creative idea; The main indicators of the development of creative po- – integration for living a creative character and under- tential in the younger schoolchild are: presence and intensity standing of their emotional and sensuous nature when per- of interest, formed interest for creativity, formed abilities for ceiving art; adequate (according to their inner world) perception of aspects – development of creative and constructive vision of the of creative environment (emotional perception and sense of world; artistic style of artworks), degree of development of artistic-cre- – inclusion of the child into multi-aspect reflection of ative abilities, socio-useful value of the results of creative work. the world in creative art through communication with fine Pointing out the result of inner self-asserting strengths art (presentation of products of creative activity) in the form of a child as the source of children’s creativity, the source of of a dialogue that presupposes communication with big art in life itself, art, understanding the regulation of creative process, the condition of different opinions; we determine the creation of the respective social conditions – development of the sense of material; given the active role of a teacher as a guarantee of impact on – organization of subject-spatial surrounding of a the development of creative potential in children. schoolchild; The principles of definition of a combination of condi- – development of the level of originality of children’s tions of organization of creative environment for the develop- creative works (creative self-expression) through stimulation ment of creative potential in the younger schoolchildren are: of internal motivations of the children in creative activity; – principles of humanistic orientation of pedagogical – consideration of the result as the end of creative process; process; – application of games in the process of children’s art- – dialogue; work; – integration for living a creative character and under- – application of creative tasks; standing of their emotional and sensuous nature when per- – stimulation by way of evaluation of children’s creative ceiving art; works; – life-expositional. – organization of life-expositional space around a younger Out of all principles, the most important one for us is the schoolchild. principle of integration for living a creative character and un- Consequently, the development of children’s creativity derstanding of their emotional and sensuous nature when per- directly depends on the effect of social environment, because ceiving art. It gives an opportunity to consider different kinds this is where the resource for enriching subject experience of of creative art not in theme unity, but in emotional kinship younger schoolchildren can be created. References: 1. Belinskaya E. P. Social psychology: Reading-book. – M.: Aspect Press, – 2003. – 457 p. 2. Bogoyavlenskaya D. B. About paths to creativity//Nauka i zhizn, – 1977. – № 2. – Р. 116–120. 3. Bogoyavlenskaya D. B. Major modern concepts of creativity and gift. – M. Molodaya Gvardiya, – 1997. – 379 p. 4. Kaloshina I. P. Psychology of creative activity. Manual for university students – M.: Yuniti-Dana, – 2012. – 655 p. 5. Shaun McNiff Integral perception of art therapy//Curing art: art therapy journal. – 2005. – Volume 8. – № 1. – Р. 10–23. 6. Obukhova L. F. Age psychology: manual for baccalaureates/M. Yurait, – 2013. – 460 p. 7. Rogers C. Art as healing/Questions of psychology. – 1990. – № 1. – Р. 164–168.

75 Section 5. Pedagogy

8. Subbotina L. Yu. Development of imagination in children. – Yaroslavl: Nauka, – 1997. – 240 p. 9. Tamberg Yu. G. Development of creative thinking in a child. Published by «Rech», – SPb, – 2002. – 173 p. 10. Torshina K. A. Modern research of a problem of creativity in foreign psychology//Issues of psychology. – 1998. – № 4. – Р. 21–48. 11. Tsukar A. Ya. Lessons of imagination development. Published by Rolf, – 2000. – 208 p. 12. Shadrikov V. D. Psychology of activity and abilities of a man: Manual, 2nd edition, revised and completed. – M.: Logo”, – 1996. – 320 p. 13. Elkonin D. B. Psychology of development. – M.: Akademiya. – 2001. – 219 p.

Degtyaryova Galina Anatoliеvna, Kharkov Academy of Postgraduate Education, Ukraine, chief of methods of teaching languages and literature department, candidate of pedagogical science, Doctor of Philosophy E‑mail: [email protected]

The issues of standardization of teachers’ information- communication competency assessment

Abstract: In the article the approaches to standardization of teachers’ ICT-competence assessment in Ukraine and abroad are singled out. The attention to the necessity of standards’ working out in Ukraine for teachers’ ICT- competence in the system of postgraduate education is made. Keywords: ICT-competence, standards, standards of teachers’ ICT-competence assessment, certification of ICT- competency, levels of teachers’ ICT-competence, the teacher’s basic ICT-competence, indicators of teachers’ infor- mational and communication competences. Problem statement. The modern professional’s infor- NTO (http://www.e_skillsnot.org.uk), Council of European mation and communication competence (IC competence) Professional Informatics Society (http://www.cepis.org), is becoming one of the major qualities nowadays. As far as Treasury Board of Canada Secretariat (http://www.cio_dpi. we focus on teachers, the IC competence is one of the cen- gc.ca), Australia National Training Authority, National Train- tral constituents of their professional competence and its ing Information Service (http://www.ntis.gov.au). assessment is essential for their successful professional de- In the USA, the National Educational Technology Stan- velopment. K. Osadcha (2009) notes that the teachers’ IC dards (NETS), supported by the International Society for competency standards and norms set the list of the corre- Technology in Education (ISTE) are constantly implemented spondent professional requirements to improve the quality and updated in every state. The teachers-oriented Technol- of educational work via the IC skills development. She also ogy Standards have been implemented in 27 states from 42. takes notice that the educational system improvement will National Educational Technology Standard (NETS•T) and promote the further social and economic development of the Performance Indicators for Teachers (2008) perform the society” [9]. teachers’ activity coefficients and it considers the key posi- The aims and objectives of the article are to develop tions of National Educational Technology Standards for stu- the approaches to teachers’ information communication dents (NETS•S), because teachers develop, implement and competency assessment standardization in foreign countries assess the experience in order to encourage students and im- and in Ukraine in order to work out and perform the special prove the learning process, enrich each other with professional standards for teachers’ professional development assessment. practice, implement positive models for students, colleagues The analysis of recent research. The wide range of stan- and society as I. Malitska notices [8]. dards for teachers’ IC professional competency has been de- In Europe, various organizations had developed the veloped in the world. A lot of international institutions have problem of IC competency assessment and certification by been involved into this process. Here belong the Career Space 2006 already. So, in the United Kingdom it is UK — public (http://www.career_space.com), Le Cigref (http://www.ci- funding for industry certifications; in Ireland — Ireland — gref.fr), The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Higher Education & Training Awards Council; in Italy — Development (OECD) (http://www.oecd.org), Europe- an Italy — EUCIP in university syllabus; in Netherlands — an Information Technology Observatory (http://www.eito. Holland MoU for secondary schools (schools for profile), com), European Centre for the Development of Vocational in Portugal — Portugal MoU — Cisco Network Academy; Training (CEDEFOP) (http://www.cedefop.eu.int), E_Skills in Scotland — Scotland — Digital Media & ICT Vendor

76 The issues of standardization of teachers’ information-communication competency assessment

Alliance; in UNESCO — UNESCO — ICT Competence The Unified Qualification Directory for Managers, Profes- Framework for Teachers. sionals and Employees and now it is basic and universal for For example, in France (Chaachoua, 2000) — the ICT all teachers regardless of their subject-orientation. They in- competence document, obligatory for all teachers at the end clude two levels of teachers’ ICT competence: Cognitive, of initial training course in Instituts Universitaires de Forma- where teachers should know the basics of word processing, tion des Maîtres (IUFM), was developed in 2000 by a working spreadsheets, email, browser and multimedia equipment, and group appointed by the Ministry of Education of the coun- Active, which implies that teachers use modern information try [17]. It contains recommendations for the initial teachers’ technology, digital educational resources to exercise control training course (knowledge, competencies or learning objec- and evaluative activity in terms of information and commu- tives) involving the minimum software awareness, the IC in- nication technology [3]. fluential effect on teaching skills, the IC influential effect on As it was noticed by J. Zharko (2008) [4] that one stan- classroom culture, etc. dard that is generally accepted in 148 countries is The Euro- The teachers’ information technology and computer sci- pean Computer Driving License (ECDL), which provides the ence training course standards (Standardy przygotowania PC skills standardized certification and confirms the knowl- nauczycieli w zakresie technologii informacyjnej i informa- edge of the basic concepts of information technology and tyki, 2003) have been adapted in Poland. These standards de- the ability to implement these skills into professional activity. lineate tasks and training courses for different groups of teach- This certificate does not require to be updated or confirmed ers (depending on the subjects they teach, positions that they as far as it is termless. Ukraine has been the member of ECDL hold, and educational stage where they work) [17]. (2014) since 2003 [12]. Nowadays there is the opportunity of In 2008 UNESCO published an ICT-CSTT draft (ICT getting ECDL certificates in our country due to the Ukrainian Competency Standards for Teachers, 2008) [18], consider- Federation of Information Technology, which launched the ing the problem of standardization of teachers’ information project — European Computer User Certificate (Lozitskaya, communication competency assessment. The universal set of 2008) [7]. There were only two Authorized Testing Centers in guidelines in order to identify, prepare and assess the educa- Ukraine in 2008, and today there are six Authorized Testing tional materials and training programs for teachers relating Centers only in Kharkov. Task content is constantly being re- to the IC implementation into educational process as well vised as information technology is rapidly developing. Thus, as knowledge acquisition, the general list of skills allowing during the years of the existence of the Certificate, the Curricu- teachers to use IC in teaching and knowledge acquisition for lum has undergone from version 1.5 to version 4.0 and consists teachers and for students, in addition, allowing teachers to im- of 7 modules (basic knowledge of information technology, prove the performance of other professional responsibilities, computer and operating systems application, word process- improve their training through the development of teaching ing, spreadsheets, databases, presentations, information and techniques, methods of group work, leadership and innova- communication). Semantic content of these modules defines tive methods of school work management using IC to unify is- those IC competencies that any user should have, regardless of sues and terminology relating to the IC implementation into the scope of the activities. It should be noted that ECDL Foun- educational process have been developed within this draft. dation offers 10 certification programs, from entry-level for Standards mentioned above are different. To unify the beginners to the high level — for advanced users and profes- requirements of 2006 the uniform standards for the IC sional — for professionals in the field of information technol- competency assessment have been established by «The ogy. They are — EqualSkills — Computer for beginners, e‑Cit- Qualifications and Curriculum Authority». In Russia The izen — Internet and Email, ECDL/ICDL — Key computer Requirements of Teachers’ Professional Competence Quali- skills, ECDL/ICDL Advanced — Computer for advanced fications in ICT were included into The Unified Qualification users, ECDL/ICDL CAD — 2D CAD, ECDL/ICDL Image Directory for Managers, Professionals and Employees only in Editing — Digital Image Processing, ECDL/ICDL Health — 2010, and an updated Russian version of the first edition: Rec- The information system use in health care institutions, EUCIP ommendations of the UNESCO “ICT Structure of Teachers’ professional certification — Standards for IT Professionals, Competence” was published in 2011 [15]. It was the result of CTP — IT Skills (for IT teachers). long-term cooperation between UNESCO, CISCO, INTEL, Methodology and research introduction. The issues ISTE and Microsoft and was developed for Russia considering of standardization of teachers’ information communication the school information experts recommendations as well as competency assessment have been considered in Ukraine. the previous versions direct users advice in different countries. The scientific works of V. Bykov, O. Bilous, J. Bohachkov, These recommendations are complemented with the curricu- P. Grabowski, I. Hot, M. Kyrylyuk, K. Kolos, O. Kryvonos, la and requirements for teachers’ IC competency assessment S. Litvinov, S. Lozitskaya, J. Malicki, H. Prylutska, A. Spirin, (for “ICT Implementation” and “Knowledge Development”). A. Ovcharuk, K. Osadcha, D. Christmas, Mr. Shevchuk, A. Si- It should be noticed that The Requirements of Teachers’ mon etc, and in Russia — B. Burmakina, V. Moiseeva, V. Ste- Professional Competence Qualifications in ICT have been panov, E. Patarakin, A. Ishkov, I. Falin and others are devoted absent for a long time, but in 2010 they were included into to the problem.

77 Section 5. Pedagogy

Nowadays in Ukraine there are no universal standards for digital educational resourses into educational process. We can the teachers’ information communication competency assess- note that we fully agree with M. Kyrylyuk (2008) [5], who ment as well as the state qualification requirements do not com- states that “the Ukrainian education system needs all its com- prise the characteristics of teachers’ ICT professional compe- ponents to be brought to generally accepted international tence, but the certain results have already been achieved, as it is standards, which will definitely meet the highest international mentioned in the State Task Program — the ICT implementa- standards, including the ICT implementation. tion into secondary school educational process “One hundred In addition we must say that in order to develop standards percent” until 2015 (Resolution of the Cabinet of Ministers of for teachers’ ICT competency assessment, it is necessary to Ukraine, 13.04.2011 № 494). Thus, the Program (2011) [2] determine the range of minimal competencies for teachers. provides the development of national IT competencies stan- It will definitely demonstrate the basic level of teachers’ ICT dards for students and IT teachers, teachers of other subjects, competence. According to the Moscow Center Online Edu- librarians and administration of educational institutions and cation [11, 217], among the big amount of information and the development of qualification requirements for teachers’ communication technologies we can denote the content that information and communication technologies knowledge ac- will characterize the basic ICT competence, which refers to quisition. It should be noted that even in the State Programme the “invariant of knowledge, skills and experience of ICT im- “Information and Communication Technologies in Education plementation to solve problems” [11]. It is obvious that a and Science” for 2006–2010, it was indicated that the teachers’ teacher who does not have basic ICT competencies can not Information and Communication Technologies knowledge and use the full capabilities of ICT and has to be constantly sup- skills assessment during the advanced training and retraining ported by more experienced users. This fact introduces the should meet the ECDL international standards, but unfortu- necessity to raise the teachers’ awareness in the information nately in practice it happens not often. and communication technologies sphere to the level of ba- Within the Ukrainian Ministry of Education project “The sic ICT competence and constantly improve it. System of students’, teachers’ and secondary school heads’ Basic ICT subject competence includes [11, 218–219]: ICT competencies for distance education regulations and 1. The general notions in the ICT sphere. standardization provision” according with the agreement 2. The notion of electronic educational resources. № IT/551–2009 of 20.07.2009, the additional agreement 3. The notion and command of operation system in- № 1 of 05.11.2010, № 2 of 16.11.2010 in accord with the State terface. Program “Information and communication Technologies in 4. The general notion of multimedia. Education and Science” in 2006–2010, the methodic recom- 5. Office technologies skills in the context of the school mendation on the basics of information and communication subject’s didactic materials and working papers preparation. competencies standardization in the educational system of The equation editor, charts and diagrams, calculations in Ukraine was developed by the team of scientists V. Bykov, spreadsheets, work with text styles, superscript and inferior A. Spirin, A. Ovcharuk (2008) [10]. It contains a compara- symbols, scanning and optical character recognition, the use tive description of general approaches to the information of audio and video formats and documents presentations, and communication competencies standardization in for- the mode of editing the document, drawing with built-in eign countries as well as conceptual approaches to the ICT tools vector graphics can be added depending on the subject. competencies development of general secondary education in 6. The technique of graphic illustrations. Additionally, Ukraine, in particular, including recommendations concern- depending on the subject, a teacher should command simple ing the standard draft of students’, teachers’ and directors’ IC methods of converting raster vector formats (charts, formulas, competencies, as well as recommendations for the national diagrams), have basic understanding of digital photography standards development for ICT competencies for the Ukrai- techniques, color correction and tone images, and basic skills nian school system, as well as for a distance learning. for working with digital camera. Teachers’ certification of ICT implementation into the 7. Basic Internet services and technologies. 8. Basics tech- educational process (including the ICT competencies crite- nologies for websites designing. ria and standards development considering the UNESCO A. Spirin (2009) [13] takes Bloom’s taxonomy as a basis for recommendations) is one of the activities of the Association determining the teachers’ ICT competency level and presents of Information Technology Enterprises of Ukraine (AITEU, his point of view to determine the teachers’ ICT preparation 2011) [6], which was established in 2007. level. He [14, 191–193] performs 6 levels of ICT competence The first regulatory document — “The Model Regulations for a computer science teacher, which, in his opinion, he can of Teachers’ Assessment” approved by the Decree of Ministry be placed to (taking into account subject specifications): the and Education of Ukraine of 06.10.2010 № 930 was adapted in first level — beginner, the second level — minimal basic, the Ukraine in 2010. It states that one of the necessary conditions third level — basic, the fourth level — high (basic competen- of teachers’ degrees (“specialist”, “specialist of the second cat- cies improvement), the fifth level — advanced, the sixth lev- egory”, “specialist of the first category”, “specialist of the highest el — research. Performing the teachers’ ICT competences indi- category”) is the teachers’ ability to implement the ICT and cators, O. Bilous, P. Grabowski (2010) [1] introduce the ISTE

78 The issues of standardization of teachers’ information-communication competency assessment approach and six levels division with the following character- and use it according to their own needs and requirements of istics: the first level, the initial — has a notion — it is a level today’s high-tech society. It means that they should: create of information and communication competence, which sug- text documents, tables, figures, charts, presentations, Internet gests teachers’ understanding of the ICT importance for educa- technology, local area networks, databases, carry out a survey, tion promotion, he is able to demonstrate the understanding of diagnosis, testing, finding relevant information in the Internet, the ICT importance for the educational activities implementa- develop electronic products (lessons designing, demonstra- tion and encourage students to acquire knowledge via these tion materials), combine electronic products (e‑books, ency- technologies, the second initial basic level — requires teachers’ clopedias, tutorials, demo programs, etc.). abilities to use ICT to illustrate the educational materials and Nowadays, when the national standards haven’t been devel- software products while teaching a particular subject, describ- oped yet, the correspondence of teachers’ ICT level to the above ing their needs relating to organizing a teacher’s workplace, mentioned requirements is determined by the relevant local the third level, the basic, comprises teacher’s skills to imple- education authorities that inevitably lead to discrepancies in ment the modern ICTs capacities to develop students’ abilities teachers’ ICT competence assessment in different regions of and individualize their work as well as use these technologies Ukraine. In addition, we believe that we should distinguish to solve major professional tasks and work with parents; the between the standards for teachers’ ICT competence assess- fourth level provides complex theoretical and practical issues ment (taking into account the subjects delivered), as well as we completion using these technologies and the internet resources; should have an appropriate standard for pedagogical universi- providing a teacher uses Internet resources freely, operates ICT, ties graduates and standards for teachers’ professional develop- has corresponding knowledge in ICT sphere, implements this ment. These standards should be corrected at least 1 time per knowledge while conducting research and projects, works ac- 3–5 years that will take into account the changes that occur in tively with members of the educational process and involves the ICT sphere as far as it is constantly developing. colleagues to social networks cooperation, participate in peda- In Kharkov Post-Diploma Education Academy in order to gogical skills contests using ICT, he is at the fifth research level; provide the teachers’ ICT competence level assessment accord- the last, sixth, expert level comprises teacher’s free knowledge ing to the requirements of the UNESCO recommendations and of ICT and Internet resources to make teaching more effective, guidelines developed by V. Bykov, O. Bilous and Y. Bohatchkov, to improve the quality of the educational process, to be able to the teachers’ ICT competence specifications have been worked assess the ICT skills development, to be an expert in ICT imple- out. Tests and control works completion allow us to define menting into the educational process, and constantly improve the ICT competence level for every teacher with the high fac- their own level of ICT competence, performing the principle tor of probability. We should like to note that in order to meet of «long-life education». these requirements the necessary ICT competence training and The “Methodical recommendations for the ICT basics” re-education for teachers should be carried out. were developed by the Ministry of Education of Ukraine. Outcomes. The question of standardization of ICT They were added to the letter № 1/9–493 of 24.06.2011 competence levels for teachers is the top-priority goal at the “About the organization of ICT training for teachers”. Every national level, taking into account the best world achieve- teacher in accordance with these recommendations should ments in this area and the current state of the ICT implemen- be able to navigate the information space, get information, tation into the educational process. References: 1. Belous O., Grabowski P. Recommendations of the draft of the ICT teachers’ competencies. The Fundamentals of the In- formation and Communication Competencies Standardization in the Education System of Ukraine: methodical recom- mendations. – K.: Atika, – 2010. – 187 р., – Р. 65–71. 2. State program of the ICT implementation into the secondary schools educational process «One hundred percent until 2015». Decree of the Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine № 494 of 13.04.2011. 3. The Qualification Characteristics of Teachers’ Positions. The Unified Reference Book for Managers, Directors, Executives and Employees. Order № 761n from 26, August, 2010. – Moscow: ACT. 4. Zharko I. IV International Computer Literacy ECDL Standard in education. The Teachers’ Computer Literacy in terms of EU standards, the materials of Ukrainian scientific-practical conference (Poltava, 18–20 November 2008), Ministry of Education and Science of Ukraine, Poltava. – Q: Poltava. Institute for Postgraduate Education after Ostrogradski. – 2008. – 96, 28–29. 5. Kyrylyuk M. IT European Standards. The Teachers’ Computer Literacy in terms of EU standards, the materials of Ukrainian scientific-practical conference (Poltava, November 18–20, 2008), Ministry of Education and Science of Ukraine, Poltava. – Q: Poltava. Institute for Postgraduate Education after Ostrogradski – 2008. – 96, 53–55. 6. [Electronic resource]. – Educational AITEU Committee. – Access mode: http://uk.compu.wikia.com/wiki/ %D0 %9A %D 0 %BE %D0 %BC %D1 %96 %D1 %82 %D0 %B5 %D1 %82_ %D0 %90 %D0 %9F %D0 %86 %D0 %A2 %D0 %A3_ %D0 %B7 _ %D0 %BE %D1 %81 %D0 %B2 %D1 %96 %D1 %82 %D0 %B8#cite_note‑0 – Title screen. Retrieved September, 12, 2013.

79 Section 5. Pedagogy

7. Lozitskaya S. The Development of the European System of ECDL Certification in Ukraine. The Teachers’ Computer Literacy in terms of EU standards, the materials of Ukrainian scientific-practical conference (Poltava, 18–20 November 2008), Ministry of Education and Science of Ukraine, Poltava. – Q: Poltava. Institute for Postgraduate Education after Ostrogradski. – 2008 – 96, 47–49. 8. Malitska I. The Implementation of ICT Competencies Standards in the U. S.A. In Bykov Y., Bilous O., Bohachkov M. The Fundamentals of the Information and Communication Competencies Standardization in the Education System of Ukraine: methodical recommendations. – K.: Atika, – 2010 – 187, 22–31. 9. Osadcha K. The European Standards of Teachers’ ICT Competencies. Teaching Process: Theory and Practice. Pedagogical Sciences of Ukraine, Institute of Pedagogy. Education and Adult Education. – K.: ECMO. – 2009, – Vol. 1., – 675, 132–141. 10. Belous O., Grabowski P. The Fundamentals of the Information and Communication Competencies Standardization in the Education System of Ukraine: methodical recommendations. – K.: Atika, – 2010, – 187, 88. 11. Moiseev M., Stepanov V., Patarakyn E., Yushkov A. The development of ICT professional competence. The Fundamental Course. – Moscow: Publishing House «Education Service», – 2008, – 256, 32. 12. [Electronic resource]. – ECDL Ukreint. The European Certification of Ukrainian Users. – Access mode: http://www.ecdl. com.ua/Retrieved December, 23, 2013. 13. [Electronic resource]. – Spirin A. The Information Communication and Information Competence as a Component of Professional and Specialized Competence of IT teachers. The Information Technology and Learning resourses. – 2009 – № 5 (13). – Access mode: http://journal.iitta.gov.ua/index.php/itlt/article/viewFile/183/169 – Title screen. Retrieved November, 3, 2013. 14. [Electronic resource]. Spirin A. The Theoretical and Methodological Foundations of Teachers’ Professional Training on the Credit-Module System: Monograph. Exactly: Type of Waiting for them. Franko, – 2007 – 300. –Access mode: http:// ru.iite.unesco.orgpublicationsthemespolicy_briefs – Title screen. Retrieved November, 10, 2013. 15. Regulations on Teachers’ Assessment. Order of MES of Ukraine № 930 of 06.10.2010. 16. [Electronic resource]. – Chaachoua H.: Usage des TICE dans l’enseignement: Quelles compétences pour un enseignant des mathématiques? – Access mode: http://www.inrp.fr/Tecne/Rencontre/Chaach.pdf – Title screen. Retrieved Sep- tember, 12, 2013. 17. [Electronic resource]. – ICT competency standards for teachers: policy framework. – Access mode: http://unesdoc.unesco. org/images/0015/001562/156210e.pdf – Title screen. Retrieved October, 2, 2013. 18. [Electronic resource]. – Standardy przygotowania nauczycieli w zakresie technologii informacyjnej i informatyki, 03.10.08. – Access mode: http://homepage.mac.com/zbl/teksty/STANDARDY_PRZYGOTOWANIA.html – The name of the title the screen. Retrieved October, 20, 2013.

Selivanova Olga Genadievna, Vaytka State Humanities University, Associate Professor, Departament of Pedagogy E‑mail: [email protected]

The pupil as the subject of his educational activity Abstract: The article describes the author΄s approach to the formation of subjectivity of the pupil in his edu- cational activity and the relationship between the main concepts. The author regards subjectivity of the pupil as a pedagogical phenomena and characterizes the set of the pedagogical conditions of the formation of it. Keywords: the subjectivity of the pupil, the educational activity of the pupil. Traditionally the concept of the individual, personality, 3. Subject overall activity, the life experience and ex- subject does not differentiate. We believe that it is nursesery to presses in self-transformation. do. The meaningful characteristics of substructures of human’s So subjectivity is an important substructure of human organization and basic form of development are so: organization and concerned with the activity of the pupil. 1. Individual: age and sex characteristics, neurodynamic Our approach is as follows. The new paradigm of educa- properties of the brain, individually-typical features, tion the central figure in the educational process considers the temperament and inclinations, which expresses in pupil. Personality of becoming a stakeholder, resolving the ontogenesis. contradiction between system theme domestic needs (goals 2. Personality: set of relations, the nature and inclina- and values, motivations and aspirations), on the one hand, tion, orientation, which expresses in socialization. and external requirements, on the other hand. In this case the

80 The pupil as the subject of his educational activity process of the formation of the pupil’s subjectivity is to be The resolution of this conflict we see in the creation of a considered as a pedagogical phenomenon. teacher set of pedagogical conditions, that ensure the forma- We define the formation of subjectivity of the pupil as a tion of pupil’s subjectivity in learning activity: process of awareness of its needs for understanding and trans- The conditions of the analysis of the educational situa- forming ourselves and the world of ambient in the setting and tion in high school and its features correspond to it (informing achieving personal and socially significant goals teachings. students about the requirements of the curriculum and the The formation of pupil’s subjectivity is an objectively con- GEF to the result of their work, teaching, school readiness tinuous process of development of the growing ability of man diagnostics to achieve it). to be the creator of his own, successfully and effectively takes 1. The conditions of setting goals personally signifi- place in educational activities. cant activities of the means of updating knowledge and skills As a rule, the activity of the pupil is defined as a training of students, as well as their subject experience (identifying activity. When the pupil became the subject of its, his activ- gaps in knowledge, skills and abilities of students, identifying ity appeared new features. Lets comparative characteristics of matching or mismatch of subject experience with the content training and educational activities of the pupils. of student learning material, the use of techniques subjects’ of 1. Motives. In the training activity the pupils have cogni- goal-setting). tive and social motives, but in the educational activity 2. The conditions of building individual learning paths the pupils want to achieve success in there study and by creating situations of choice outside the state educational have self-motivation. standard-venous (disclosure students choices content of the 2. Purpose. In the training activity the purpose of the material, its deepening or widening, the level and ways of its study are giving by teacher, accepted by student. In development). the educational activity the pupils have socially and 3. The conditions for determining the criteria of the ac- personally meaningful goals. tivities at the basis of the requirements of the curriculum and 3. Content. As usually we can see the assimilation of self-control to achieve them (giving students the opportunity social and cultural practices in terms of knowledge, redefining requirements result tattoo own activities, identifi- skills and abilities. In the educational activity there cation of compliance or non-compliance of the educational are external (GEF requirements) and internal (per- product developed criteria). sonal) content. 4. The conditions of self-control and self-assessment 4. Result. The result of training activity is degree of as- by informing the of the results actually achieved (providing similation of knowledge and skills to according the student opportunities to track the process of their own activi- social requirements. The educational activity person- ties, to express the ratio of its results, the improvement of a ally meaningful educational results. teaching-reflective camping, teaching. So the structure of the educational activity consists of 5. The conditions of correction of its performance such components self-analysis, self-goal-setting, self-planning, (giving students the opportunity understanding how their self-control, self-concept, self-correction. own mistakes and difficulties, and educational achievements, As the analysis of educational practice in the design awareness of the process of their own activities, discussion and implementation of the learning process in most cas- of the most effective ways to achieve results in the upcoming es very active teacher. Defining the objectives, content, activities). methods and organizational forms of training, he is guided, 6. In conclusion we must say, that the theoretical sig- above all, their own ideas about upcoming activities without nificance of the study is that the subjectivity of the pupil worrying about how it is claimed specific schoolboy. The discussed in the article as the innovative characteristics of whole arsenal of carefully arrayed teacher teaching tools the individual, adequate current stage of development of often run empty, because no high learning motivation, no Russian society and the information civilization twenty-first deep understanding of how and what to change in the stu- century. The practical significance of the study is that it -al dent himself, he is not aware. For a large part of the school lows to balance the subjective and objective position of the teaching has lost its meaning and knowledge are external teacher and pupil. Since their misalignment causes negative to his real life. One of the main problems of the modern effects, namely: the dominance of object positions leads to school is given by the alienation of the child from his edu- the curtailment of the functions of a humanistic education; cation, which leads to a reduction of learning motivation, the absolutisation subject position of the student creates values hyperbole formal education (getting high, exams, a real threat of loss of teachers influence on the process of university entrance). subject-activity development.

81 Section 5. Pedagogy

Fedorenko Svitlana Viktorivna, National Technical University of Ukraine “Kyiv Polytechnic Institute”, Associate Professor, E‑mail: [email protected]

Liberal Arts Education in the instructional setting of higher school

Abstract: Liberal Arts as an element of moral and cultural development of students are highlighted in the article. The conceptual-theoretical model of Liberal Arts Education in higher school is considered. Keywords: humanism, Liberal Arts Education, higher school. Nowadays the most effective direction of humanization of time coherent world, as if a party occurring sociocultural education is the capacity of Liberal Arts in higher school. Im- processes in the world. plementation of this direction provides correlation between Russian scholar T. Yelkanova dwells on the conceptual- culture and civilization as well as didactic software for all stu- theoretical model of Liberal Arts Education in higher school. dents, which is characterized by increased cognitive interest, She argues that the model such main components as [3]: focus, stability and dynamics of motivation, intellectual and • Ethical axiological component for identifying and personal activity in all spheres of life. full use of the potential of ethical and humanistic educa- A. Whitehead, famous philosopher and educator, defined tional environment and stimulating the activity of subjects the task of higher education as “the creation of the future” of educational process of assigning humanistic values to in and through culture. He argues that culture is an activity accumulate valuable experience of self-promoting harmo- of thought, and receptiveness to beauty and humane feeling. nious integration of the individual in the context of socio- Liberal Arts Education provides a broad education focusing cultural environment. It contributes to the self-actualization on critical and creative thinking, developing the personality of students, shapes the ability to perform socially approvable for productive professional activity, citizenship in the com- patterns of behavior in dynamic, vitally important situations. munity and life in all its manifestations [2]. Ethical axiological component is aimed at internalization of In its turn, Liberal Arts Education is founded on the ideas the values to discharge potential of urgent personal values of humanism, which, according to R. Brockett “provides a way rational intellectual and practical activity of reproductive of looking at the instructional design process that emphasizes and productive character. the strengths the learner brings to the instructional setting. It is • Component of historical amplification is aimed at in- an optimistic perspective that celebrates the potential of learn- culcating a sense of responsibility towards the traditions, his- ers to successfully engage in the instructional process” [1, 245]. torical memory and the present, the future of civilization; at The “Liberal Arts” is a traditional collective name in the the unity of tradition and innovation as the most important US higher school curriculum embracing natural sciences, conditions for the conservation of human civilization. In sociocultural courses, and humanities taught by all the stu- general, it involves consideration of problems, objects, phe- dents in the course of the 2‑year study irrespective of their nomena and processes in their origin, formation and devel- professional choice. Liberal Arts are of great intellectual im- opment, understanding the specifics of the relevant historical portance, and an element of culture and enlightenment for situations, the general laws of history and uniqueness of the moral and cultural (self)development of students. It is really circumstances. The component in question contributes to a useful training that yields a comprehension of general prin- better understanding of the internal dynamics of contempo- ciples with a thorough grounding of the world perception. rary sociocultural processes and phenomena; helps determine Contents of Liberal Arts Education have been aimed the level of their development predicting possible directions of at meeting intrinsic human needs, that is, the needs of their their historical evolution and selection of options on the basis existence, personal existence: freedom and free choice of of the aims and values of the specific historical period. their views on the world, actions, behavior, attitudes, self- • Philosophical and methodological component for com- reliance and self-determination, creativity and more. To find prehensive analysis of the philosophical content of the vari- yourself, individuals need to choose and build their own world ous theoretical positions, ways of harmonization of conceptual of values, enter the world of knowledge, master creative ways structures with physical reality. Modern civilization is charac- of solving different problems, open the world of their own “I” terized by a new type of socio-cultural education, the main and learn to manage it. aim of which is to master methods of world cognition, so the As it is observed above, up-to-day Liberal Arts relate purpose of training is not only getting the result itself, but pri- not only to the humanities, but also to natural cycle. In ac- marily total mastery of the activity, its means. It causes the need cordance with this principle, it is necessary to ensure that to form methodological culture, including methods of cogni- the students feel small part of a diverse and at the same tive, professional, communicative and axiological activities.

82 Liberal Arts Education in the instructional setting of higher school

• Component of gnostic interaction deals with the dif- of processing and evaluating data of different types, the abil- ferent ways in relation to the ontological knowledge of the ity to analyze and interpret different perspectives. It provides world, forming a coherent structure of categorical apparatus students with the general system-oriented methods to dy- of thinking of the future specialist, allowing to comprehend namically alter the flow of information, algorithms of search theoretically the system “man — the world” at different lev- and analytic-synthetic processing, extraction and evaluation els of its operation. To some extent it provides the formation of information, converting the information found into their of integral system of personal values and meanings, contribut- personal knowledge system. ing to the development of adaptive personality traits in terms • Component of creative development is manifested in the of dynamic sociocultural transformation. creation of conditions for creative self-expression in a variety • Component of integrative application of knowledge of activities, academic as well as extracurricular ones. It aims at which identifies and investigates the sociocultural correlations personal development of will-be professionals who will not wait between phenomena and processes forming the different ar- for the directions and instructions and enter into an indepen- eas of knowledge and culture. It contributes to the formation dent social life and professional activities with the established and development of systematic thinking skills on the basis creative constructive and spiritual personal potential. of knowledge from different areas in the activities related to • Student-centered component is based on the princi- all spheres of human life to see and solve common problems ples of humanism and provides creating the conditions for a encountered on the intersection of different areas. more complete manifestation of students’ abilities in differ- • Sensitive-reflective component implies that any knowl- ent forms of activities organized in accordance with their val- edge must be acquired by a student as the knowledge ob- ues orientations and interests. It is aimed at their creative tained in the battle of ideas, passions, hopes, beliefs, desires self-expression and self-realization as well as development of and ideals. It promotes further development of emotional- their capabilities of adapting to the rapidly changing condi- motivational sphere of students, their systems of values based tions of modern society. on the relationship that exists between knowledge and expe- • Component of cultural infusion reflects the human- rience. This component triggers the formation of axiological istic ideas within any national culture and aimed at forma- and aesthetic regulators of all students’ activities. tion of the individual ready for active creative activity in • Component of ecological activation is based on eco- contemporary multicultural environment, preserving their integrative approach to the study of universal interconnec- socio-cultural identity, seeking to understand other cultures, tion and aimed at the formation of eco-axiological approach respecting other cultural and ethnic communities. It is based to future professional and civic activities on the concept of on the principles of cultural identity and integration into the co-evolution of nature and society. It involves systematic world community. and interrelated disclosure of global, regional and local envi- • Component of psychological adaption for mastering ronmental aspects in educational curricular and extracurricu- methods of psychological self as an active management of lar activities of students. This component contributes to more psychological states and reactions, methods of cultivating efficient formation of ecological consciousness of students personal regulation mechanisms in accordance with the situ- and the development of their fundamental value orientations ation, which can ensure the effectiveness of psychological and of ecological character, principles and norms of relationship social adaptation as well. to natural resources as national domain. In conclusion, it should be observed that the organiza- • Anthropological prognostic component takes into ac- tion of educational process in higher school with the empha- count the humanistic paradigm in education which suggests sis on Liberal Arts Education in the course of the first two that human knowledge in the learning process not only the years of study contributes to students’ personal development, laws of nature and society, but also knowledge from the an- which involves the formation of the mechanisms of self-edu- thropological, human position, knowledge of the their human cation through the fulfilment of their basic needs in: a psycho- nature, its essence and its current status, its psychology and logically comfortable interpersonal relationships and social laws of their personality development, cognitive relations status; in realization of their creative potential; in personal between the goals and means of human communication in cognitive strategies. Liberal Arts Education is focused on a variety of its forms. the individual as a unique integrated creative personality that • Component of information analysis is based on the seeks to realize their potential and is open to a new perception peculiarities of personal creative development in the con- of experience, able to maintain an informed and responsible stant, dynamic informational torrent providing for the skills choice in a variety of socio-cultural situations. References: 1. Brockett R. G. Humanism as an instructional paradigm, Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications, – 1997. 2. Whitehead A. H. The Aims of Education and Other Essays, – New York, – 1929. 3. Yelkanova T. M. Basis for humanities education: structure and contents, – European Social Science Journal, – Volume 3 (41), – 2014.

83 Section 5. Pedagogy

Shyshkin Gennadiy Aleksandrovich, Docent, Ph. D, Berdyansk State Pedagogical University E‑mail: [email protected] Bandurov Sergey Olegovich, A Third Year Student Faculty of Physics and Mathematics, Berdyansk State Pedagogical University E‑mail: [email protected] Digital electronics in an educational experiment in physics Abstract: This paper considers the problem of reducing the level of physics education in Ukraine which con- nected an acute lack of laboratory and demonstration equipment. Offers the solution through self-development and production of digital technology electronic devices for use with personal computers. Keywords: physics experiment, analog-digital converter, measurement system, analog sensors. Formulation of the problem. In modern conditions, The purpose of writing this article — is to familiarize rapid development of science and technology, manufactur- the reader with the use of elements of digital technology in the ing and mass media, the society demands from pedagogical physics education experiment by using computer technology. science new innovative approaches in the organization of Analysis of recent research and publications. The analysis the educational process of young people. Particular atten- of methodological literature, results of scientific research, disser- tion should be paid to improving of the level and quality of tations and personal experience indicates inadequate organizing physics education, because the physics is a theoretical basis and conducting of educational physics experiment in all types of of technological development. Successful students should educational institutions of Ukraine. Along with this, in the con- mastering the basics of modern science is important for the struction of electronic devices for improving the educational ex- formation of the personality of the modern human in the periment in physics were involved many scientists and method- technological society. ologists. Most electronic devices developed by V. P. Vovkotrub, Modernization of physics education is not possible with- N. V. Fedishevoy, O. S. Martyniuk can be use with personal out improving the educational experiment. Physical experi- computer. The method of application of analog-to-digital con- ment plays an important role in teaching of physics. On this verters, both industrial and independently developed, studied basis, students are introduced to the basis of physics phe- M. Galatyuk, V. I. Tyshuk, and V. P. Shevchuk. The possibilities nomena and through experiment determine the relationship of application of the analog-digital converter (ADC) together between them, check the validity of laws and theories. With with computers in the educational physics experiment. In the the help of physical experiments formed and skills of working similar direction worked R. V. Meyer, O. Danilov, R. V. Akatov, with instrumentation. N. S. Stepanov, M. Alykova, and S. V. Eremin. Last years in Ukraine, we are seeing a trend of sharp de- The basic material and the results of the study. In the crease in the level of knowledge in physics, as in secondary period of rapid development of electronics, which is connect- and higher education institutions. One of the main reasons ed with microprocessor technology, the creation of multifunc- for this situation we see in the lack of material resources of the tional computers and process of mass globalization of society. cabinets and laboratories of physics education. Computerization of all spheres of human activity could not According to the results of monitoring of the state, the affect on the educational process. Implementation in educa- level of school teaching aids in Ukraine is about 30 % of the tional process of modern information and technical resources required. Material base of the cabinets of natural sciences lab- allows to put education to a new level. oratory and demonstration equipment is about 15 % [8]. The The most advanced spheres of computer technology in majority part, are the instruments of old production, which in the teaching physics we see in improving equipment for per- most cases are technically outdated. The use of such labora- formance of the educational experiment. The economic situ- tory and demonstration equipment for training purposes does ation in the country does not allow to fully provide the educa- not bring the expected positive pedagogical results. tion institutes with necessary training equipment, which leads The lack of material support of educational institutions is to reduction of the quality of physics education. connected with the difficult economic situation in the country. To partially solve the problem in the current conditions, Educational institutions are not able to purchase the necessary we are working on the development and production of elec- equipment, which leads not only to reduction of the quality tronic devices, which can be used together with PC, it allows of education, but also to reduction of students interests in the to realize all opportunities of cabinets and laboratories for the study of physics and mathematical sciences. For this reason, educational physics experiment. Personal computer we use the priority goal of the improving of physics education is an as a measuring device and as a means of visual display of the upgrade of educational physics equipment and devices. studying dynamical processes on the screen.

84 Digital electronics in an educational experiment in physics

Complex use of personal computers and electronic ana- complex is a set of analog sensors that measure physical quan- log signal converters can be successful during the laboratory tities such as pressure, temperature, humidity, velocity, accel- and demonstration experiments. Using of PC allows to put eration, force, current, voltage and others. demonstration experiments to a new level, to develop and At the output of the sensor, the amplitude of the analog implement a demonstration in their various combinations. signal is typically tens of millivolts, which does not allow study We have developed electronic devices connected to the and measure signal in detail. To amplify the signal coming from PC, which gives us the measurement system shown in Figure 1, the analog sensor serves the amplification unit of the analog which is able to replace a number of physical instrumentation. signal (SA). This unit is a precision amplifier for amplifying Functional diagram of the developed measuring com- a voltage of analog sensors, photocells and thermocouples. The plex is shown in Figure 2. The complex consists of three output circuits, the signal goes to an analog-to-digital converter functionally interconnected units. The first unit of measuring (block 3) and then goes directly to a personal computer.

Fig. 1. Measuring complex, where: 1 – solar battery, 2 – power supply signal amplifier, 3 – signal amplifier, 4 – analog-to-digital converter, 5 – power supply analog-to-digital converter, 6 – thermocouple

Fig. 2. Functional diagram of the measuring complex Schematic diagram of the amplifier is shown in Fig. 3 [1; 5]. the use of the sensor element. If it is necessary, this block The main element is the amplifier chip LM 358, its choice is may be removed and the voltage from sensor can be sent motivated by the fact that it includes two independent oper- directly to the block 3 (Fig. 2). ational amplifier with common power supply that allows you For converting, the amplified analog signal (block 2) simultaneously amplify analog signals on two channels. The in the digital signal for further sending to a PC has been de- amplifier is configured so that the maximum output voltage veloped a third unit, the analog-to-digital convertor. We as- may reach 3V. The sensing elements are connected to the ter- sembled this unit and it is a multichannel ADC, the circuit minals 1.2–1.5 according to the polarity shown on (Fig. 3). diagram is shown in Fig. 4 [3; 6]. Outputs 1.6–1.7 are outputs of the amplified signal. Sup- The computer operates on discrete values, so an ADC is ply voltage (OA) may vary from 7.5 V. to 12 V. and con- a physical part of the measuring system, which uses analog nected to pin 1.1. Variable resistors R13, R20 define (gain), sensors. This device is intended to convert the analog volt- the maximum measured value depending on the used sensor age supplied on its input into digital form. Sensor, on which elements. Variable resistors R10, R17 is set to zero. Setting output present voltage of the measured physical quantity, can the output (OA) is performed above mentioned variable re- be matched to the ADC, if the output voltage of the sensor sistors. The settings procedure is individual, depending on does not exceed the maximum voltage on the ADC input [2].

85 Section 5. Pedagogy

Fig. 3. Circuit diagram of the precision amplifier

Fig. 4. Is a circuit diagram of ADC

Development of the unit was based on a circuit diagram kU R U = in 4 that is described in the literature [6]. The device has 5 ana- Substitute the formula (2) (3) and get: in . RR24+ log inputs J1‑J5, and 6 digital outputs 1–6 which can be used kR 1 = 4 RR+=kR to record additional digital signals. The device is able to con- From this formula, we find , or 24 4 . The RR24+ vert analog signals to digital simultaneously with five sensors, resistance of the resistor R2 can be calculated according to the with an amplitude not exceeding 5V. Resistors R2, R4 (anal- formula Rk24=−()1 R . ogously to subsequent channels resistors R5, R7; R8, R10; Figure 3 divisors set the width of the input voltage range R11, R13; R14, R16) formed divider which defines the range of the ADC, 0 to 10 V, while the measurement accuracy ADC of input supply voltage and is calculated in such a way that its U1 will be: = 97, мВ ; where U1 – the maximum value of output was not more than 5V. Increased allowable amplitude 1023 for one of the input channels will lead to distortion in the the input range is 10V. other inputs. Calculation of the voltage divider can be per- Clock frequency is 20 MHz. MC that has been modified formed on the formulas. by installing an external crystal frequency 4 MHz. on Z1. The The current flowing through the divider is given by: maximum sampling rate depends on the bandwidth speed se- U I = in , (1) rial communication RS‑232 and lies in the aisles of 0.5 kHz. RR+ 24 The device is powered from the separate stack-mounted where — the voltage applied to the divider. Uin and stabilized power supply unit (PSU). Its capacity of 2,4W. Output voltage divider: and the output voltage is 9V. Communication with the PC URin 4 UI04==R . (2) uses the interface Bu1, RS‑232 (com – port) the data ex- RR+ 24 change rate is 9600 baud. Moreover, it is possible to use the where = 5V constant amplitude of the input signal to the MC. U0 RS‑232 to USB adapter, which enables commutate the signal Reduction Factor voltage divider defined by the formula: from RS 232 to USB interface painlessly. U k = in . The voltage applied to the divider: To program the microcontroller we have assembled U 0 «EXTRA — PIC» programmer [4; 7] and used the program Uk= U in 0 . (3) «WinPic800».

86 Digital electronics in an educational experiment in physics

The device is able to convert analog signals simultane- The program allows you to set the desired recording ously with five sensors. After converting the signal from the speed and bandwidth of the measured values. The “detail” ADC is fed to the computer. By PC specific requirements. saves the results of the experimental data in a format txt for The main element of the ADC is a programmable 10‑bit further detailed review and study of the results. microcontroller (MC) PIC16F876A. This microcontroller Production and setting of the proposed complex is was programed according to the text of the program, see [6]. possible in physics cabinets and technical workshops, By means of program “UM–ADC‑1” performed chart- problematic student labs. The proposed electronic device- ing monitoring and recording. The “UM–ADC‑1” is designed measuring complex does not use expensive and scarce ele- for 5‑channel ADC and allows simultaneous monitoring all ments. Manufacture of such devices by students studying five channels. The program has a function of the input signal at schools and extracurricular work contributes to the so- emulation, which allows to evaluate the configured settings. lution of a number of educational issues: professional ori- With the functions of the program, can be set different units entation of teaching physics; improvement of the material of measurement in different numerical ranges, i. e. adapted base of educational institutions; development of students’ for use of specific sensors. In case of exceeding of the limits practical skills; effective use of personal computers for edu- of the input signal, audible and visual alert will be triggered. cational purposes. References: 1. Бандуров С. О. Применение операционных усилителей в учебном физическом эксперименте/С.О Банду- ров//Сборник материалов Двадцатой Всероссийской научной конференции студентов‑физиков и молодых учен- ных. – 2014. – C. 613–615. 2. Данилов О. Е. Создание компьютерного измерительного комплекса с аналоговыми датчиками для школьного каби- нета физики/О. Е. Данилов//Дистанционное и виртуальное обучение. – № 3. – 2013. – C. 93–102. 3. Bandurov S. O., Shyshkin G. A. Analog-to-digital converters in the educational physics experiment//The priorities of the world science: experiments and scientific debate Proceedings of the V International scientific conference – 2014. – Р. 103–107. 4. Shyshkin G. A., Bandurov S. O. Basics of digital in the training of teachers of physics and technology/European Confefence on Education and Applied Psychology/3rd International conference. – 2014. – Р. 27–31. 5. Милевский А., Chip. Mk. ru – [Electronic resource]. – Простой усилитель термопары. – Access mode: http://chipmk. ru/index.php?option=com_content &view=article&id=142:2011–05–10–14–53–51&catid=43:2011–02–17–08–03–15& Itemid =29 (дата обращения 01.11.2013). 6. Носов Тимофей. [Electronic resource]. – Универсальный многоканальный АЦП УМ-АЦП1. – Access mode:http://www. qrz.ru/schemes/contribute/constr/umadc/(дата обращения 28.08.2013). 7. Носов Тимофей. [Electronic resource]. – Универсальный программатор pic контроллеров. – Access mode: http://www. qrz.ru/schemes/contribute/constr/extra-pic/(дата обращения 10.09.2013). 8. Розпорядження Кабінету Міністрів України від 27 серпня 2010 р. № 1720‑р «Про схвалення Концепції Державної цільової соціальної програми підвищення якості шкільної освіти на період до 2015 року». – [Electronic resource]. – Ac- cess mode: http://zakon4.rada/gov.ua/laws/show/1720–2010- %D1 %80 (дата звернення 06.02.2014).

87 Section 6. Political science

Section 6. Political science Kosyak Yaroslav Olegovich, Drahomanova National Pedagogical University at Kiev, Postgraduate Department of Political Science E‑mail: [email protected]

Political Myth and virtual space: interaction in modern society peculiarities Abstract: The article deals with the problem of interaction between virtual space and political myths in modern society. On the one hand, the myth-making today is seen as a method of modeling new virtual realities. On the other, the variety of technological means and digital technology deepen the separation of the illusory and the real world and create a unique mythological space. This defines the role of virtuality environment, as a specific ground for the creation of political myths. Keywords: political myth, mythmaking, virtuality, manipulation. Topicality. In today’s world the mythmaking has be- transformed into a virtual communication through various come quite widespread. Myth becomes a means of technol- technologies based on the use of images and actual experi- ogy management, manipulation, influence in different spheres ence of communication. Virtual reality acquires the features of society. Myths are created, based not on indyvidual, but and functions of the medium of communication and social- mass consciousness, the so-called crowd effect. Moreover the ization, but not always people that «live» in a virtual reality thoughts of G. Lebon seem to be fair and true that the crowd are conscious of a way out of it, and even recognize that it is “never seeks the truth, but turns away from the evidence that it conditional. does not like, preferring to worship delusion, as only delusion The issue of virtual reality, the idea of «a better world» attracts it. Who can become part of the crowd in thought eas- goes deeper into history. The prerequisites for its occurrence ily becomes its master; who does not want it, always gets to can be considered the ancient human dream of freedom from be its victim” [1, 188]. the physical shell, which was perceived by some as a barrier The technology of political mythmaking is based on the to exercise their desires and fantasies. It is human nature to fact that it (the myth) should reflect the features of psycho- stay not only in the natural environment. Mankind has cre- logical expectations of the crowd and not reality. Thus, spon- ated its own artificial world from its inception. And this artifi- taneous mythmaking is replaced by conscious myth con- cial world became the natural place of human habitation. The struction whose purpose is not to explain reality, but build driving force of this process was to improve the conditions of a new illusion. This is clearly demonstrated by researchers human life, to make it easier, more comfortable and safer. We using the analysis of materials of mass culture and political agreeing with the view of T. Parsons, who noted that «this advertising (N. Thomas, G. Pocheptsov, S. Samokhvalova, created reality — a fictional virtual reality — might make V. Fesenko, etc.). unrealistic dreams come true: release you from everyday life, However, the myth itself has signs of reality. We agree with help with the transition to other worlds, allows you to possess the opinion of I. Zaharchenko that «using the means devel- supernatural powers and abilities» [3, 24]. oped in the methodology of modern political science it is nec- The impact of virtuality is that it gives a person something essary to reveal the illusory nature of modern myth and its that has not been able to give no religion, no ideology, no war, deconstructing function on political awareness and political no revolution or reform. Virtuality frees man from the condi- life and, simultaneously, to display the contents of the myth tionality of everyday relations, social control, guilt, require- as an aspect of reality» [2, 18]. ments and circumstances arising from the usual, stereotypical In modern life there is a total tangle of real and virtual descriptions of cognitive and value operationalization of the worlds, the real things and actions are replaced by images social world. In this context the comment by T. Parsons is re- and simulations in almost all areas. For example, in the econ- garded fair and just — “Virtuality — is always an invitation to omy the market of real goods and services is replaced by become the subject (God, man, player, individual, superman, advertising images of products and manufacturers; political hero, winner, etc.) to make yourself the subject, as if up to powers struggle with each other in a political race of per- this point there has not been a single subject or the previous sonal images; everyday communication between people is subject was defective or flawed” [4, 48–49].

88 Political Myth and virtual space: interaction in modern society peculiarities

The special attention to desire as a unifying link between the imperious weight in the state mechanism or redistribution production and consumption and the incredible development of ‘investment subsidy’ flows concerned with the financial, of tools and technologies for creating virtual reality (computer commercial and industrial groups “ [5, 28]. hardware and its software, high-speed videography, quadro- The political spectacle is played out in virtual reality sound equipment, the improvement of the technology genera- for the purpose of emotional “capture of the audience” and tion and manipulation with the three-dimensional graphics, the formation of psychological dependence; binding to vir- the use of computer cybernetic technology in processing vid- tual politics as a way of getting acute emotional experiences eo and sound in film and television industry, the operation of of viewer-citizen-voters who have not cared about the fate the Internet, etc.) provided a key role to virtuality in the im- of the homeland, but are watching the actions and fates of plementation of politics and creation of political myths. the “heroes” in a political reality show. Thus, by M. Edelman, Virtuality and its audiovisual images as the leading form the “political theater is a way to implement legit policy, and of influence allows the easiest way to overcome the threshold the viewer’s attention to the political legitimization of TV is of critical thinking through the effect of consciousness infor- a political system where the legitimacy of each political party mation overload. Much of the structured information is sup- or leader is determined by variables such as the authenticity plied by the audio-visual images, unexpected, radical ideas of the game (or the idea of matching the image) of the po- or unintended consequences of the sudden use, lack of time litical actor, the magnitude and spectacular political role (de- to reflect new information and correlate it with the real state termined by the obstacles of the current situation, enemies, of things, to inclusion of human desire to experience and get actual combat and opportunities for adequate responses), benefits from the fact which was seen as a unique, interesting political strategy (concept of ethics, social base, tools, modes or necessary information — all of which pushes the individual of action, intermediate objectives, general purpose, the future to uncritical acceptance of ideas that determine the legitimacy society, the ideal advocate, eternal enemy)” [5, 112–113]. of the desired legit subject policy direction. Thus, in the created mythological picture of the world However, the very suggestion of virtuality for you to be- disappear sharp edges, contradictions, variation of their solu- come someone turns the individual into an object that is con- tion. Political myths through the “appropriation” of events, structed in his desires and actions of actors of the legit policy. phenomena and processes to signs “good — bad” are built on Thus, when confronted with a virtual, the subject always dies the contrast between good and evil. This leads to the fact that when it becomes a television image or begins to act as a con- the pressing social problems are not solved and are removed, sumer/voter imposed by virtuality scenarios. Underlying the allowing not only to influence public opinion, political and legit virtual force is simple (availability) perception, emotion social construct myths, but also use them as a means of “mo- and updating of archaic thought patterns of its permanent bilizing the electorate.” The inflexibility mythologized in the mechanism for dualizing true — false, sin — righteousness, representations of the phenomenon, process or person is con- strong — weak, up — down, male — female, friend — enemy, ditioned by the fact that they have always identified the myth me — someone. with the moral ideal. So any criticism and objective analysis is We share the point of view of an American scholar meaningless as myth, combined with the moral ideal, is the M. Edelman that the heroes «images» in «talk shows, TV se- highest authority of any evaluation. ries, sports, video games, combatants and disasters in televi- A leading role in mythologizing the minds of citizens is sion news through the integrated emotions (through context, played by the media. Relevant opinion was issued by B. Co- intonation, emotions demonstration), provide individuals hen that “the mass media can not successfully impose people with experience filled with vivid experiences of life, form- what to think or a long time, but they are making tremendous ing a psychological dependence, urging better than rational progress, telling its readers what to think” [6, 33]. arguments to assert subconscious attitude of the individual The mythmaking value of the media in creating a picture to virtuality as to the true reality of life, where there is always of the world has not gone unnoticed by political leaders. For something going on, as opposed to natural, everyday reality, example, social policy, such as the program “tough fighting where, in contrast, almost never nothing brilliant, worthy of crime” is easy to sell, linking it with transmitted in prime time attention that can shake and be the subject of lively conversa- scenes of crimes as acts committed by psychopaths or people tions, happens» [4, 61]. obsessed with painful eagerness, rather than having to deal In his book «Constructing the Political Spectacle» with situational determinants, poverty and unemployment. M. Edelman expresses the idea that “the political process, Following the course of this opinion, it is easier to sell a “war such as TV series, sitcoms or “reality shows” are played along on drugs” after drug-induced death of a prominent athlete or as a drama in virtual reality, where voting viewers are initially maintain a prohibition of nuclear energy after the fatal tragedy afraid of different threats; looking for enemies, from which of the nuclear reactor. the threats emanate; impose “progressive” ideas, the imple- So today myth functions as new modeling method of vir- mentation of which should mean reform for the benefit of tual reality. Modern man does not deal with the reality of society. Sometimes they trigger various conflicts with the “ide- the subject as such, but simulations have mental constructs ological”, “fundamental” or “conceptual” issues, fighting for an imaginary space and associative landscapes. Blur is the

89 Section 6. Political science boundary between the fictional world and reality. And the va- mythological space. Penetrating the public consciousness, the riety of means of information technology division (photos, myth is able to stabilize/destabilize the political environment, video, computer graphics, animation, etc.) actively enhances reduce/increase the uncertainty of the political process. It all the illusory and the real world and allow you to create a unique depends on the theme and purpose of the political myth. References: 1. Лебон Г. Психология толп/Г. Лебон; [Перевод/предисл. И. В. Задорожнюка; вступ. ст. В. Н. Дружинина]. – М.: Ин–т психологии РАН: КСП+, – 1988. – 412 c. 2. Захарченко И. В. Угол четвертый: мифотворчество и виртуальная реальность//Язык, сознание, коммуникация. – Вып. 13. – М., – 2000. – 180 с. 3. Парсонс Т. Система современных обществ/Перевод с англ. Л. А. Седова и А. Д. Ковалева. – М.: Аспект Пресс, – 1998. – 266 с. 4. Edelman M. The Symbolic Uses of Politics/M. Edelman. – Urbana: University of Illinois Press, – 1964. – 164 р. 5. Edelman M. Constructing the Political Spectacle/M. Edelman. – Chicago; London: The University of Chicago Press, – 1988. – 137 р. 6. Thompson J. B. Ideology and Modern Culture: Critical Social Theory in the Era of Mass Communication. – Cambridge: Polity; Stanford: Stanford UP, – 1990. – 345 р.

90 Photosynthetic capacity and productivity of hybrids of sugar beet

Section 7. Agricultural sciences Zheryakov Evgenie Viktorovich, candidate of agricultural sciences, assistant professor, FSBEE HPT «Penza State Agricultural Academy» E‑ mail: [email protected]

Photosynthetic capacity and productivity of hybrids of sugar beet Abstract: The research has shown that the largest area of leaves which provides high photosynthetic potential of plants is observed in hybrids Nero, Spartacus and Hercules. On the basis of the conclusion which has been drawed sugar-beet hybrids with high productivity are singled out. Their productivity was determined on the basis of sugar content of roots and collection of them per hectare. Keywords: sugar-beet, photosynthesis, photosynthetic potential, leaf area, productivity, sugar content, cercosporosis. In Russia growing area of sugar beet considerably decreased were established as follows: during the 1st and 2nd decades of over the last three years — from 1 million to 292 thousand May the average temperature was 12.9–19.0 °C, during the hectares in 2011 to 905,8 thousand hectares in 2013, and in 3rd decade — 18.2 °C. The conditions of vegetation in June, the Penza region from 61.2 thousand hectares to 46.8 thou- 2012 were characterized with the optimal indicator of the tem- sand hectares. One of the main reasons for this is not only the perature — 18.6 °C and sufficient moistening — 82.1 mm. In problem of implementation of harvest, but the critical situation July the average daily temperature was 21.5 °C, the rainfall was of the spreading of root rot, lesion of leaf surface with various less than the average annual quantity by more than 40 % — by diseases, which caused significant losses with keeping. At pres- 35,3 mm. The third decade was characterized by high aver- ent there is an increase of merchandise of breeds, at the same age daily temperature of 20.6 °C, low moistening — 0,7 mm. time the proportion of hybrids of foreign selection is increasing. Meteorological conditions of August also had a pronounced There are 332 varieties and hybrids of sugar beet in the state contrast. Precipitation in the 1st decade was 31.8 mm., and the registry of selection achievements approved for use on the ter- medium temperature was 24.1 °C. In the second and third de- ritory of the Russian Federation on 1st February 2013, among cades the monthly precipitation was 62.3 and 55.7 mm. respec- them there is only 24 % of domestic breeding. Foreign breeding tively. The average temperature in August was also higher than hybrids have various degrees of adaptation to specific soil and the average long-term one — 25.6 °C. In 2013 weather condi- climatic conditions of Russia, and it can be confirmed by the tions were as follows: during the 1st and 2nd decades of May fact that yield and sugar content are not always high, and there is the average temperature was 14.8–19,8 °C, for the 3rd decade — often a high percentage of diseases [2; 4]. This causes the need 18.0 °C. The rainfall was less than average one by 5 mm.; and for competitive variety trial. The variety is a leading element of 28 mm. were in the first and second decades of May. The con- the technology, as not only the level of yield and quality of roots, ditions of vegetation in June, 2013 were characterized by an but sugar yield per hectare of sowing and tons of raw materials optimal indicator of the temperature — 19.1 °C and overmoist- also are dependent on it. Thus along with the improvement of ening (the number of precipitations exceeded at over 1.8 times agrotechnics, application of new hybrids and varieties (that are and amounted to 106.0 mm). In July the average temperature resistant to diseases and unfavourable environmental factors was 19.1 °C, the rainfall was more than the average annual one and show high stable yield of root crops) to production plays by 12.8 % — 78 mm. The meteorological conditions of August an important role in the complex of measures aimed at solving also had a pronounced contrast. The rainfaill in the 1st decade the problems of increasing of production of sugar beet [1; 3; 6]. was 25 mm., and the average daily temperature was 19.3 °C. In Field-work in the second agro-soil area of the Penza region the second and third decades there were only 19 mm. of rain- was conducted to identify such hybrids. The scheme of the ex- fall. The average temperature in August was also higher than periment included 8 options: 1 — HM 1820; 2 — Nero; 3 — the average long-term one and amounted to 19 °C. In Septem- Hercules; 4 — Triada; 5 — Spartacus; 6 — Volga; 7 — Com- ber, in the first and second decades the temperature was about pact; 8 — RMS 120. The experiment must be conducted for 13–14 °C, and in the third decade the temperature fell sharply three times, the accommodation of options is randomized. The to 7 °C. September was on average long-term level according total area of the plot is 0.4 hectares, the discount area of the to the temperature indicators, and the amount of precipita- plot is 0.3 hectares. During the years of the research conditions tion is more than average amount by 58 %. In the first decade of vegetation were diversified. In 2012 the weather conditions of August there were 51.4 mm. of precipitation, in the second

91 Section 7. Agricultural sciences decade — 40.5 mm., in the third decade — 50.3 mm. From spectively. In 2013 among all studied hybrids the largest May till September there were 408.5 mm. of rainfall, and it is area of leaves was observed on 13th August with Nero and more than average long-term rainfall by 130.5 mm. during this Spartacus — 59.48 and 59.04 thousand m 2/ha, respectively. period. The leaf area was determined by the method of cutting. At the same day the assimilatory surface of leaves from 50 to The basic process in determining plant productivity is 55 thousand m 2 was observed with hybrids Heracles (54.57), photosyntesis. It is carried out in leaves. Photosynthesis can Triada (51.58) and SY Badia (51.10); about 45 thousand occur in other green parts of plants — stems, chides, green m 2 with hybrids Volga (46.71) and HM 1820 (44.34). The fruits and the like, however, the contribution of these parts hybrids Compact and RMS 120 had leaf surface of less than to photosynthesis is usually small. It is accepted to compare 40 thousand m 2, 39.68 and 38.42 respectively. the crops among themselves, and also different states of one According to A. Nichiporovich (1970), rapid growth of sowing by the leaf area, identifying it with the notion of “as- foliage up to 40–50 thousand m 2/ha is optimal. The most fa- similatory surface”, the major portion of which are leaves. In vourable growth development for the formation of yield of general form the optimal scheme for use of assimilants for tubers is such growth development when after reaching the growth processes can be presented as follows: in early growth optimal size for such conditions leaves stunt. Probably they period the majority of assimilants of a small photosynthetic actively work longer in this state for the formation of impor- apparatus is used for root growth. For further growth it is tant reproductive and storage organs, and then they die off, necessary for plants to provide themselves with the opportu- giving them a significant part of the stored plastic and energy nity to obtain enough water and mineral nutrients. After this substances [5]. The formation of a crop depends not only on begins the increased use of assimilants for the growth of the the size of leaf area, but also on the time of its functioning. photosynthetic apparatus itself — the leaf area. This is one of Photosynthetic potential (РP) combines these indicators. РP the most important periods of plant growth. can be defined for any period of time, for example for decade The research has shown that for 2 years on average the or interphase periods, or for the vegetation period in general. highest growth of assimilatory surface of leaves occurred from Large area of leaves provides high photosynthetic potential of 1st July to the mid-August, and during the period of closing of plants (table 1). According to the results of the research hybrid row widths and intensive Saccharum accumulation it reaches Nero had the highest value of РP for the vegetation period, the peak value. During this period exactly the formation of the it was 4.08 million m 2 · day/ha, it is less than the peak value future harvest occurs. Depending on the studied hybrids the of hybrid Nero by 1.96 % in 2012. РP from 3 to 4 million leaf surface changed significantly. In 2012 among all studied m 2 · day/ha was observed with hybrids HM 1820, Hercules, hybrids the largest area of leaves was observed with Nero and Triada and SY Badia. The rest of the studied hybrids had the Spartacus on 17 August — 62.45 and 61.99 thousand m 2/ha, meaning of РP of about 2.5–3.0 million m 2 · day/ha. The regu- respectively. The smallest assimilatory surface of leaves at larity discovered in 2013 confirms the ranking of hybrids by the same day was determinated with hybrids RMS 120 and РP in 2012, with the only difference that the РP of all hybrids Compact, and it was 40.34 and 41.66 thousand m 2/ha, re- was higher by 1.02–1.96 % during the first year of research. Table 1. – Value of the photosynthetic potential, million m 2 · day/ha, 2013 Periods hybrid 01.05– 03.06– 04.07– 15.07– 30.07– 14.08– 02.09– for the period 02.06 03.07 14.07 29.07 13.08 01.09 cleaning vegetation RMS 120 0.037 0.29 0.22 0.41 0.48 0.65 0.45 2.549 compact 0.052 0.33 0.24 0.43 0.54 0.64 0.47 2.702 HМ 1820 0.053 0.36 0.29 0.48 0.60 0.72 0.53 3.033 Nero 0.042 0.45 0.39 0.64 0.81 0.98 0.77 4.082 Hercules 0.052 0.46 0.37 0.59 0.74 0.89 0.69 3.792 Spartacus 0.051 0.42 0.36 0.63 0.79 0.98 0.77 4.001 Triada 0.059 0.44 0.35 0.56 0.70 0.85 0.65 3.609 SY Badia 0.053 0.45 0.36 0.56 0.69 0.84 0.65 3.603 Volga 0.033 0.28 0.26 0.48 0.63 0.75 0.55 2.983 At the beginning of vegetation the process of growing of established that during the years of research its value de- biomass is slow, and then the pace of growth increases. At the pended both on determination period and studied hybrids. end of vegetation when leaf area is small, the daily growth of NPP varies during the process of vegetation. In the first biomass is also slow. At this time the process of redistribution month of the vegetation NPP is higher than in the next one, of accumulated assimilants from leaves, stems and roots into as in the beginning of the vegetation plants do not shade the generative organs takes place. each other; all leaves are well lit. Later on with the increase The integral indicator of the activity of the assimilative of leaf area NPP begins to decrease due to shading of lower apparatus is net photosynthesis productivity (NPP). It is leaves (table. 2).

92 Photosynthetic capacity and productivity of hybrids of sugar beet

Table 2. – Net photosynthesis productivity in interphase periods, average value for 2012–2013, g/m 2 · day. Periods three pairs of genuine hybrid shoots – three pairs of closing of leaves in row three pairs of genuine leaves – closing of genuine leaves widths– cleaning leaves – harvesting leaves in row widths RMS 120 4.20 7.21 1.64 2.09 compact 3.85 7.08 1.61 2.12 HМ 1820 4.06 6.63 1.51 2.16 Nero 4.04 6.55 1.52 2.49 Hercules 3.88 6.20 1.59 2.35 Spartacus 3.76 6.09 1.63 2.55 Triada 4.52 5.73 1.65 2.36 SY Badia 4.39 6.29 1.56 2.11 Volga 4.74 8.10 1.62 2.19 The largest increase (5.73–8.10 g/m 2 · day) was noticed crops. Well-developed and healthy foliage is a prerequisite for period of three pairs of genuine leaves before closing for high yield and quality of root crops. The number of leaves of leaves in row widths, and the lowest one — from clos- and the area of leaf surface are the criteria for determining ing of leaves in row widths to harvesting of sugar beet. On the productivity of plants of sugar beet and accumulation of average during the period of vegetation of plants of sugar Saccharum in root crops [7]. The highest yield of root crops beet the meaning of NPP was 2.09 is 2.55 g/m 2 · day. Hy- during 2 years on average was obtained by harvesting of hy- brids Spartacus and Nero had the largest value of NPP, it brids of “normal” type of Spartacus (75.42 t/ha), and Hercu- was 2.55 and 2.49, hybrid RMS 120 had the least value of les (72.66 t/ha) and “normally fruitful” Nero (74.91 t/ha). NPP — 2.09 g/m 2 · day. The leaves of plants of sugar beet Other hybrids from the group of normal ones — compact produce energy-rich carbohydrates during the process of and RMS 120 provided the yield of 57.91 and 53.87 tons photosynthesis — Saccharum that accumulates in root per hectare (table. 3). Table 3. — Productivity of sugar beet hybrids 2012 2013 hybrid sugar collection of sugar collection of Sac- yield, t/ha yield, t/ha content, % Saccharum, t/ha content, % charum, t/ha RMS 120 55.87 18.5 10.33 51.87 18.8 9.75 compact 59.45 18.3 10.88 56.37 17.8 10.03 HМ 1820 70.08 17.4 12.19 64.58 18.0 11.62 Nero 75.10 18.1 13.59 74.71 18.0 13.45 Hercules 73.26 17.9 13.11 72.05 18.7 13.47 Spartacus 76.18 18.2 13.86 74.66 18.6 13.89 Triada 70.23 19.4 13.62 68.84 19.1 13.15 SY Badia 71.54 18.9 13.52 69.09 19.0 13.13 Volga 63.64 19.7 12.54 61.59 19.5 12.01 Average value 68.37 18.5 – 65.97 18.61 – Hybrids Triada and SY Badia (which are related to the decade of August. In 2012 the prevalence was 3.2 % at the in- type of «normally sugary») lost hybrid Spartacus 5,88 and tensity of development of the disease 0.07 %. Then the disease 5,1 t/ha, respectively. continued to develop and affect new plants. High rainfall and Volga is a hybrid of “sugary” type and its yield was high temperatures contributed to it. The final number of in- 62.62 t/ha, but by sugar content of root crops this hybrid was fected plants was 23.3 %, the intensity of development was superior to all other hybrids — the average sugar content was 15.9 %. In July of 2013 the amount of precipitation was more 19.6 %, while in other years the sugar content of this hybrid than normal by 15 %, and that was the main reason for lesion was higher than 22 %. The main reason for the decline in of more than 5 % of the plants, the average area of lesion of this indicator in 2012–2013 is a strong infection of plants by lamina was 0.09 %. Warm and humid weather (average tem- cercosporosis, regrowth of new leaves and consumption of perature of the month was 19 °C, the amount of precipitation accumulated Saccharum. On average during two years of re- was 44 mm.) led to increase of number of infected plants to search cercosporosis affected all studied hybrids of plants of 27.2 % and the intensity of its development to 10.3 %. On aver- sugar beet. The first signs of infestation of plants of sugar beet age during two years of research among the studied hybrids by the fungus cercospora beticola were observed in the first the most susceptible to cercosporosis were: Volga (P = 56.8 %,

93 Section 7. Agricultural sciences

R = 19.7 %), Compact (P = 29.7 %, R = 16.1 %) and HM 1820 their sugar content. The greatest collection of Saccharum (P = 31.8 % with R = 17.4 per cent). It was noticed that these was obtained by the cultivation of hybrid Spartacus, both in hybrids are capable of re-growing of new leaves. 2012 and 2013 and it amounted to 13.86 and 13.89 t/ha, We may distinguish normally sugary hybrids by sugar respectively. The collection of Saccharum of the rest of the content of the root crops. They are Triada and SY Badia, hybrids was about 12–13.5 t/ha, except RMS 120 and Com- their sugar content was 19.25 % and 18.9 %, respectively. pact — 10.04 and 10.45 t/ha, respectively. The sugar content of root crops of other hybrids was from Thus, the results of our research allow us to recommend 17.7 to 18.6 %. The final productivity of sugar beets is col- the beet-growing economies to use hybrids of foreign breed- lection of Saccharum per unit of area, which is directly de- ing (Nero, Spartacus and Hercules) in the cultivation of sugar pendent on the magnitude of the yield of root crops and beet. They allow to obtain 13–14 tons of sugar per hectare. Reference: 1. Alekseev A. Changes of humus condition of soil and crop yield on the background of natural zeolites and fertilizer/A. Alekseev, E. Kuzin, A. Arefyev, E. Кuzinа//Bulletin of the Saratov State Agricultural University of N. Vavilov. – 2013. – No. 05. – P. 3–7. 2. Bliznov V. regulation of productivity of sugar beet by agrochemical methods/V. Bliznov, S. Nadezhkin//Bulletin of the Russian Academy of Agricultural Sciences. – 2008. – No. 6. – P. 30–31. 3. Zheryakov E. The influence of complex mineral fertilizer “Aquarinum‑5” on productivity of variety and hybrid of sugar beet/E. Zheryakov//Young scientist. – 2010. – No. 10 (21). – P. 374–377. 4. Zheryakov E. Productivity of sugar beet hybrids at application of complex water-soluble mineral fertilizer Aquari- num‑5/E. Zheryakov//Niva Volga region. – 2013. – No. 4 (29). – P. 8–14. 5. Nichiporovich A. Photosynthesis and theory of obtaining heavy yields/A. Nichiporovich. – Moscow: Publishing house Academy of Sciences of USSR, – 1956. – P. 95. 6. Shindin A., Nadezhkin S., Lebedeva T., Dunaeva J. Sugar beet: intensive technology of cultivation, – Moscow, – 2007. – P. 126. 7. Shpaar D., Dreger D., Zaharenko A. et al. Sugar beet – Minsk: FUAinfroms, – 2000. – 257 p.

94 Multi-frequency Functional Generator

Section 8. Technical sciences Dubrovin Viktor Stepanovich, Ogarev Mordovia State University, Candidate of Engineering Sciences, Associate Professor at the Department of communication networks and relay systems E‑mail: [email protected] Zyuzin Alexey Mikhailovich, Non-state educational institution of supplementary professional education «Saransk House of Science and Technology of the Russian Union of scientific and engineering public organizations», Director E‑mail: [email protected]

Multi-frequency Functional Generator

Abstract: the author describes a multi-frequency functional generator, which can be used to form the grid of frequency in communications equipment, measure and compute devices, as well as to generate quadrature signals of several harmonic frequencies and signals of different forms of the same frequency. Keywords: functional generator, block diagram, quadrature signals, frequency synthesizer, error signal. Introduction and devices, in case of the usage of BLWs these issues come Virtual laboratory works (VLWs) are widely applied dur- to the fore. For instance, the synthesis of complex signals ing the courses «General theory of network», «Digital pro- requires simultaneous application of a big number of genera- cessing of signals» and «Circuit engineering of telecommu- tors for creation of harmonic signals of different frequencies. nication devices» at the Department of Info-communication As a result, the cost of the equipment required for BLWs will technologies and network systems of Ogarev Mordovia State rise sharply. University. The main advantages of VLWs include [1]: The ways of composition of functional generators are • virtual laboratory works are safer than bench labora- described in [2; 3], and separate solutions are described tory works; in [4–6]. The task lies in the composition of a quite simple • virtual works ensure universality and multi-function- multi-frequency functional generator (MFFG), which can ality as well as flexibility and easy adaptation to dif- be used to form frequency grids as well as quadrature har- ferent object; monic signals of several frequencies and signals of different • there is an opportunity to conduct an experiment, forms of same frequency. which is not possible in ordinary conditions, or its Main part conduct can be time-consuming or costly; Structural scheme of a multi-frequency functional genera- • reduction of costs for creation of laboratory works tor is depicted in Fig.1. allows expanding their base within a short span of MFFG includes: a regulated source of quadrature har- time and ensuring a big flexibility in learning. monic signals (SQS); synthesizer of frequency (SF); two It should be noted that the use of virtual laboratory module computers (MC‑1 and MC‑2); phase modulator works in the educational process can significantly improve its (PM) that includes control pulse generator (G‑1) and com- quality, but it is not recommended to replace bench laboratory mutator (C); bipolar rectangular pulse generator (G‑2) and works (BLWs) completely. two summers.

A lot of measuring equipment is required in the multi- To form quadrature signals Vt1() and Vt2(), one can use phase systems of converter equipment, quadrature modula- either quadrature signals generator (QSG) [7–9], or different tors-demodulators of network systems, frequency multipli- phase-shift networks [10], on the basis of which different ers with phase-locked loop systems and other similar devices quadrature signal generators are built (QSG) [11–14]. for the synthesis of complex oscillatory mode and creation To form a functional generator, the works [15–21] sug- of text signals. gest using additive signal generator of triangular shape. In the If, in case of the usage of VLWs, there are usually no generator (Fig. 1), the additive generator is made of two mod- problems with nomenclature and number of used blocks ule computers MC‑1, MC‑2 and the summer.

95 Section 8. Technical sciences

Fig. 1. Structural scheme of a functional generator

Multi-frequency generator forks as follows. Vt20()=⋅Atcos(ω ),

When control energyEс is supplied to the inlet of the where A — is an amplitude, а ω0 — is a circular frequency source of quadrature signals, harmonic signals shifted relative of signals Vt1()and Vt2(). to one another by 90 electric degrees are set at its outlets after Module computer MC‑2 is inverting, hence, signals are the end of transition process. formed (Fig. 2) at the outlets of MC‑1 and MC‑2.

Vt10()=⋅Atsin(ω ), Mt11()= mod[Vt()] and Mt22()=−mod[Vt()].

Fig. 2. Principle of formation of synthesized signal

96 Multi-frequency Functional Generator

As a result of summarizing of signals Mt1() and Mt2(), a characteristics, i. e. it is «quasilinear». To evaluate non-linear St() synthesized signal of quasitriangular form is formed: nature of the synthesized signal sint , let’s calculate the value et0() Stsint () Stsint ()=⋅kV11mod[ ()tk]m−⋅22od[(Vt)], of error , i. e. deviation of the synthesized signal Stet () where k1 and k2 — are coefficients of transfer of the first sum- from the reference signal : et()=−St() St() mer through the first and second inlets respectively. 0etsint . et0() At kk12= =1 the amplitude of the signal Stsint () will be The diagram of dependence of from the actual an- x et0() equal to the amplitude value A of the signals Vt1()andVt2(). gle value is shown in Fig.2. The maximal deviation of E = 42,5 In Fig.2 the diagrams are constructed for the normal- in module exceeds 4 % ( 0max mV. under normal- * A ized value A =1. The value of the actual anglesxt= ω0 is ex- ized value of the amplitude = 1000 mV). T The works [15, 17, 20–23] suggest various ways of linear- pressed in radians. The period 0 of the fundamental harmon- ics is determined with the frequencyω0 : ization of the synthesized signal of triangular shape with the

Tf00==12//πω0 , help of a correction signal. St() consequently, the frequency of the fundamental harmonics If the correction signal k that exactly coincides in form St() and value with error signalet0()is formed, and then one adds it Ώ0 of the synthesized signal of triangular shape sint is equal Stsint () to the doubled value of frequency ω0 of quadrature signals up to the signal in the reversed phase, the result signal Nt1() Stet () Vt1()and Vt2(): will be equal to the reference signal . The task of Stk () Ω00= 2ω . formation of the correction signal is performed by a syn- At the sites of «forward line» (from zero to π/2) and thesizer of frequency and phase modulator (Fig.2). The syn-

«reverse line» (from π/2 to π) the signal Stsint () has S - like thesizer of frequency includes five frequency doublers FD‑1… FD‑5 (Fig.3).

Fig. 3. Frequency synthesizer

At the outlet of the first frequency doubler, the signal is At m2 = 2 at the outlet of FD‑2, the frequency signal formed: St2()==sin(24Ω00tt)sin()ω will be formed (Fig.4) at the sec- St()=⋅mV()tV⋅=()t 1 11 2 (1) ond outlet, the frequency of which will exceed the frequency St() =⋅mt10sin(ωω)c⋅=os()01tm(/22)s⋅ in( ω0t)), of the first harmonics of the synthesized signal sint by two m times. where 1 — is a scale coefficient of FD‑1. At m1 = 2 at the outlet of FD‑1, the frequency signal The frequency doubler FD‑5 operates according to the

St1()==sin(2ω00tt)sin()Ω will be formed (Fig.4) at the first algorithm specified in the equation (2): 2 2 2 2 outlet, the frequency of which Ώ will be equal to the frequen- St5()= []St4 () −[]St1() =−cos(ΩΩ0tt)sin ()0 = 0 (4) cy of the first harmonics of the synthesized signalStsint (). ==cos(2Ω0t)cos(()4ω0t . At the outlet of the fourth frequency doubler FD‑4, the signal is formed: At the outlet of the fourth frequency doubler FD‑3, the St()= Vt()2 − Vt()2 =−cos(2 ωωtt)sin2()= signal is formed: 4 []2 []1 0 0 (2) St3()=⋅mS32()tS⋅=53()tm⋅⋅sin(22ΩΩ00tt)cos()= ==cos(2ω0t)cos(()Ω0t , (5) =⋅(/m 24)sin( Ω t). which is supplied (Fig.4) to the respective outlet of the fre- 3 0 quency synthesizer. At m2 = 2 at the outlet of FD‑3, the frequency signal

The second frequency doubler operates according to the St3()==sin(48Ω00tt)sin()ω will be formed (Fig.4) at the algorithm specified in the equation (1): third outlet, the frequency of which will exceed the fre- St()=⋅mS()tS⋅=()tm⋅⋅sin(ΩΩtt)cos()= 2 21 2200 quency ω0 of quadrature signals Vt1()and Vt2()by eight (3) =⋅(/mt2022)sin( Ω )). times.

97 Section 8. Technical sciences

Fig. 4. Time diagram

As a result of summarizing the signalsSt2() and St3()at The correction signal Stk () is almost same as the error the outlet of the second summer, the signal is formed (Fig.4): signalet0(); hence, «quasilinear» signal of triangular form

St0()=⋅kS42()tk+⋅53St(), (6) Nt1()with insignificant deviation from the reference signal where k4 and k5 — are coefficients of transfer of the second Stet ()is formed at the outlet of the first summer. summer through the first and second inlets respectively. The qualitative evaluation of the residual error of linear-

The coefficient of transfer k4 is selected to ensure ization can be calculated with the help of the equation equationkA40⋅=E max ; herewith, the coefficient of transfer et1e()=−Stt () Nt1(), where Nt1() — is the signal of triangular k 5 shall be approximately seven times smaller than the co- form obtained in the result of correction. efficientk4 . Results of the analytical calculations and mathematical Control pulse generator G‑1 under the effect of the signal modeling (in program PSIM‑9) on determination of the re-

St1() produces (Fig.4) the signal of rectangular formSty ()af- sidual error are shown in Fig.5, whence it follows that at cor- fecting the control inlet of the commutatorK , at the outlet of rection the value of the residual error et1()reduced by ap- which the correction signal Stk () supplied to the third inlet of proximately 24 times and accounted for 0,18 % of the the first summer is generated. normalized value of the amplitude A* .

98 Multi-frequency Functional Generator

Fig. 5. Residual error of linearization

Fig. 6. Outlet signals of MFFG Fig. 6. depicts outlet signals of multi-frequency func- are formed; at the third outlet (Out3) and the sixths tional generator. outlet (Out6) — quadrature harmonic signalsSt1() and

At the first outlet of the generator (Out1) signals of St4() are formed, the frequencies of which are two times triangular form Nt1()are formed; at the second outlet higher than the main frequency of inlet signalsVt1()and

(Out2) — the signals of bipolar rectangular form Nt2() Vt2().

99 Section 8. Technical sciences

The quadrature harmonic signalsSt2() and St5() are formed 2. Implementation of correction block enabled to sig- at the respective outlets (Out4) and (Out7); herewith, their nificantly improve the linear nature of a formed sig- frequency exceeds the main frequency ω0 by four times. nal of triangular form simultaneously reducing the At the fifth outlet of the generator (Out5) the harmonic residual error by approximately 24 times. signalSt3() is formed, the frequency of which is eight times 3. The results of calculations and mathematical model- higher than the main frequency of inlet signals. ing in the program PSIM‑9 showed good coincidence.

Quadrature harmonic signalsVt1()and Vt2() are supplied 4. Proposed functional generator can operate in wide directly to the eights (Out 8) and ninths (Out 9) outlets of diapason of frequencies on retention of high metro- MFFG from the outlet of SQS. logical characteristics of formed signals. Conclusion 5. Multi-frequency functional generator can be ap- 1. Multi-frequency functional generator allows obtain- plied in precision devices of radio electronics, auto- ing quadrature harmonic signals with frequencies in matics and communication networks. correlation 1:2:4, and also a harmonic signal the 6. The generator can be made in integral or hybrid way frequency of which exceeds the main frequency by with the use of modern operational amplifier and eight times. multipliers that do not require trimming elements. References: 1. Дубровин В. С. Роль виртуальных лабораторных работ в повышении качества подготовки бакалавров по направ- лению «Инфокоммуникационные технологии и системы связи»/В. С. Дубровин, В. В. Никулин//Интеграция об- разования. – Саранск, – 2014. – № 1 (74). – С. 109–115. 2. Дубровин В. С. Способ построения управляемых функциональных генераторов/В. С. Дубровин, В. В. Никулин// T‑comm: Телекоммуникации и транспорт. – 2013. – Т. 7, № 6. – С. 22–27. 3. Дубровин В. С. Способ построения функционального генератора/В. С. Дубровин//Prospero. – М., – 2014. – № 2. – С. 63–66. 4. Пат. 101291 Российская Федерация, МПК 7 H 03 B 27/00. Функциональный генератор/Дубровин В. С., Зюзин А. М.; заявитель и патентообладатель Негосударственное научно-образовательное учреждение «Саранский Дом науки и техники Российского Союза научных и инженерных общественных организаций» (ННОУ «Саранский Дом науки и техники РСНИИОО»). – № 2010137125/09; заявл. 06.09.10; опубл. 10.01.11, – Бюл. № 1. – 7 с.: 2 ил. 5. Пат. 104402 Российская Федерация, МПК 7 H 03 B 27/00. Функциональный генератор/Дубровин В. С., Зю- зин А. М.; заявитель и патентообладатель Негосударственное научно-образовательное учреждение «Саранский Дом науки и техники Российского Союза научных и инженерных общественных организаций» (ННОУ «Саран- ский Дом науки и техники РСНИИОО»). – № 2011100735/09; заявл. 12.01.11; опубл. 10.05.11, – Бюл. № 13. – 8 с.: 2 ил. 6. Пат. 108247 Российская Федерация, МПК 7 H 03 B 27/00. Функциональный генератор/Дубровин В. С., Зю- зин А. М.; заявитель и патентообладатель Негосударственное научно-образовательное учреждение «Саран- ский Дом науки и техники Российского Союза научных и инженерных общественных организаций» (ННОУ «Саранский Дом науки и техники РСНИИОО») – № 2011119660/08; заявл. 16.05.11; опубл. 10.09.11, – Бюл. № 25. – 2 с.: 1 ил. 7. Дубровин В. С. Многоконтурная система стабилизации управляемого генератора/В. С. Дубровин, В. В. Нику- лин//Вестник Астраханского государственного технического университета. Серия: Управление, вычислительная техника и информатика. – 2013. – № 1. – С. 74–82. 8. Дубровин В. С. Уменьшение нелинейных искажений в управляемом генераторе квадратурных сигналов/В. С. Ду- бровин//Prospero. – М., – 2014. – № 2. – С. 66–70. 9. Пат. 2506692 Российская Федерация, МПК 7 H 03 B 27/00. Управляемый генератор/Дубровин В. С.; заявитель и патентообладатель Дубровин Виктор Степанович. – № 2012137334/08; заявл. 31.08.12; опубл. 10.02.14, – Бюл. № 4. – 15 с.: 11 ил. 10. Дубровин В. С. Управляемые фазовращатели/В. С. Дубровин//Южно-сибирский научный вестник. – Бийск, – 2012. – № 1 (1). – С. 38–41. 11. Дубровин В. С. Формирователь квадратурных сигналов//Южно-сибирский научный вестник. – Бийск, 2012. – Вып. 2 (2). – С. 35–38. 12. Дубровин В. С. Управляемый формирователь квадратурных гармонических сигналов/В. С. Дубровин, В. В. Нику- лин//Вестник Поволжского государственного технологического университета. Серия: Радиотехнические и инфо- коммуникационные системы. – Йошкар-Ола, – 2013. – № 1 (17). – С. 5–11. 13. Дубровин В. С. Безынерционная система управления формирователя квадратурных гармонических сигналов/В. С. Ду- бровин, В. В. Никулин, А. В. Никулин//Измерительная и вычислительная техника в технологических процес-

100 Multi-frequency Functional Generator

сах = Вимiрювальна та обчислювальна технiка в технологiчних процессах = Measuring and Computing Devices in Technological Processes. – Хмельницкий, – 2013. – № 2. – С. 98–101. 14. Пат. 127554 Российская Федерация, МПК 7 H 03 B 27/00. Формирователь квадратурных сигналов/Дубровин В. С., Зюзин А. М.; заявитель и патентообладатель Негосударственное научно-образовательное учреждение «Саранский Дом науки и техники Российского Союза научных и инженерных общественных организаций» (ННОУ «Саранский Дом науки и техники РСНИИОО»). – № 2012138489/08; заявл. 07.09.12; опубл. 27.04.13, – Бюл. № 12. – 1 с.: 2 ил. 15. Дубровин В. С. Способ формирования линейно изменяющегося сигнала/В. С. Дубровин, В. В. Никулин//Изме- рительная и вычислительная техника в технологических процессах/Вимiрювальна та обчислювальна технiка в технологiчних процессах/Measuring and Computing Devices in Technological Processes. – Хмельницкий, – 2013. – № 4 (45). – С. 72–76. 16. Дубровин В. С. Особенности применения аддитивных формирователей сигналов в функциональных генераторах/В. С. Дубровин//Южно-сибирский научный вестник. – Бийск, – 2013. – № 2 (4). – С. 41–45. 17. Дубровин В. С. Формирователь линейно изменяющегося сигнала/В. С. Дубровин//Южно-сибирский научный вест- ник. – Бийск, – 2014. – № 1 (5). – С. 70–73. 18. Пат. 81859 Российская Федерация, МПК 7 H 03 K 4/06. Аналого-цифровой аддитивный формирователь сигнала треугольной формы/Дубровин В. С., Зюзин А. М.; заявитель и патентообладатель Негосударственное научно-об- разовательное учреждение «Саранский Дом науки и техники Российского Союза научных и инженерных обще- ственных организаций» (ННОУ «Саранский Дом науки и техники РСНИИОО»). – № 2008146321/22; заявл. 24.11.08; опубл. 27.03.09, – Бюл. № 9. – 12 с.: 2 ил. 19. Пат. 81860 Российская Федерация, МПК 7 H 03 K 4/06. Аддитивный формирователь сигнала треугольной фор- мы/Дубровин В. С., Зюзин А. М.; заявитель и патентообладатель Негосударственное научно-образовательное учреждение «Саранский Дом науки и техники Российского Союза научных и инженерных общественных орга- низаций» (ННОУ «Саранский Дом науки и техники РСНИИОО»). – № 2008146300/22; заявл. 24.11.08; опубл. 27.03.09, – Бюл. № 9. – 6 с.: 2 ил. 20. Пат. 83669 Российская Федерация, МПК 7 H 03 K 4/06. Аддитивный формирователь сигнала треугольной фор- мы/Дубровин В. С., Зюзин А. М.; заявитель и патентообладатель Негосударственное научно-образовательное учреждение «Саранский Дом науки и техники Российского Союза научных и инженерных общественных орга- низаций» (ННОУ «Саранский Дом науки и техники РСНИИОО»). – № 2009103327/22; заявл. 02.02.09; опубл. 10.06.09, – Бюл. № 16. – 8 с.: 5 ил. 21. Пат. 83670 Российская Федерация, МПК 7 H 03 K 4/06. Аддитивный формирователь сигнала треугольной фор- мы/Дубровин В. С., Зюзин А. М.; заявитель и патентообладатель Негосударственное научно-образовательное учреждение «Саранский Дом науки и техники Российского Союза научных и инженерных общественных орга- низаций» (ННОУ «Саранский Дом науки и техники РСНИИОО»). – № 2009103333/22; заявл. 02.02.09; опубл. 10.06.09, – Бюл. № 16. – 3 с.: 8 ил. 22. Дубровин В. С. Определение погрешности линеаризации синтезированного линейно-изменяющегося сигнала в среде LabView/В. С. Дубровин, М. В. Ильин//Образовательные, научные и инженерные приложения в среде Lab- VIEW и технологии National Instruments: сб. тр. восьмой Междунар. науч.-практ. конф., Москва, 20–21 нояб. 2009 г. – М., – 2009. – С. 226–228. 23. Дубровин В. С. Модель для оптимизации параметров синтезированного сигнала/В. С. Дубровин, Е. А. Сай- гина//Труды Северо-Кавказского филиала Московского технического университета связи и информатики. – Ростов н/Д, – 2011. – С. 234–236.

101 Section 9. Physics

Section 9. Physics Aghayeva Rana Gazanfar, Azerbaijan National Academy f Sciences, Institute of Physics, Baku, Azerbaijan E‑mail: [email protected]

Integrals of Motion and the Non-stationary Factorization Method Abstract: The classical factorization method is constructed for a charged particle in a time-dependent magnetic field using the quantum integrals of motion. Application of this method helps to find exact solutions of Schrödinger equation for the considered non- stationary system. Keywords: factorization method, quantum integrals of motion, Schrödinger equation, non-stationary system. 1. Introduction −     At()= ft()εε()tipxy− pi++mt()()yixm/2 (3)  ()  Developed by Schrödinger [1, 9–16; 2, 183–206; 3] CFM − *   (classical factorization method) allows to determine the ei- Bt()= ft()εε()tippxy− −+im ()tx()iy / 2m (4)  ()  genfunctions (EF) and the eigenvalues (EV) for stationary −+ −+ −− −+ AB ,A  =  ,B =1,,� ��AA B, =  B  = 0.� � � � � � � problems.         (5) To solve the problem for non-stationary systems we need ++ Here A ,B are creation operators,  ()t is a definite so- to determine the wave function, ψ �,� � satisfying the wave equa- ∂ψ lution of the equation for a classical oscillator:   2 tion i = Hψ , where H is Hamiltonian of the considered εω��+ ()t ε = 0;� � � � � � (6) ∂t t problem. However, the wave function of the non-stationary 1   ft()=� expi ∫ωτ()dτ . (7) problem is not EF of the H Hamiltonian, and there- 2�  0  fore it is impossible to generalize directly CFM to the non- Formulae (5) and (6) give the following equality: stationary case. **−=� 2i , (8) The purpose of this article — to show as an example of which is valid for any moment of the t . Hereinafter the point the charged particle in a time-dependent magnetic field, that over any function denotes the time derivative. ±± the CFM can be developed for non-stationary systems, if to It is easy to check that AB ,  are integrals of motion, i. e. use a method of quantum integrals of motion [4].  ∂ ±   ∂ ±  i − HA,0 = , i − H,B = 0 . (9) 2. Non-stationary CFM  ∂t �   ∂t �  2.1 Integral of motion for the charged particle in non- stationary magnetic field Let us introduce the operators K and L : Consider a charged particle in a homogeneous magnetic +− 1 +− 1  KA =+A � , LB =+B � . (10) field Ht() directed along z‑axis. Therefore, the motion along 2 2 z — axis is drifting along the magnetic field with a constant ve- Taking into account (2)–(4) it is easy to be convinced locity. We will consider the motion in the x y plane. Let us K L choose the vector potential in the form: that the operators and are the integrals of motion for the   K L Ar(),/tH=− ()ty22,/Ht()x ,0 . (1) system (2). This means that and commute with the ope-

For simplicity, we will consider an electron as a charged  ∂  rator i − H : particle.  ∂t  In view of the foregoing Hamiltonian of the system is  ∂   ∂  1 22 i − HK,0� � = , i − HL,0� � = (11) H =− ppmtωωym++ tx   ∂t   ∂t �  ()xy() ()() . (2)  �    2m   KL ,  = 0  and   . Consequently, the operators K , L� and Here ��xy, are usual canonical coordinates, ��ppxy, — the ∂ corresponding momenta, ω()te= Ht()/2mc — the time-    i − H  have a common EF system. This implies that the dependent frequency, c — the velocity of light, — m the  ∂t  wave function of the time — dependent system can be found electron mass, e - the absolute value of its charge. by solving the problem for EV of K and L operators: Following [5, 1685–99], we obtain the annihilation op-   erators for the system with Hamiltonian (2) in the form: Kkψψ= , Llψψ= . (12)

102 Integrals of Motion and the Non-stationary Factorization Method

Construct the following motion integrals: 22 ψ 00=+Cexp imεε ()xy/ 2  −+ −+  . (19)  1  1  XA0 =+� A , YB0 =+� B C 2 ( ) 2 ( ) The coefficient 0 is defined from a normalization condi- +− +− tion for ψ 0 :  i  i  PA0x =−� A , P 0y =−� BB. (13) Cm=||επ−1 / 2 ( ) 2 ( ) 0  . (20) In a constant uniform magnetic fiel ωω()t → c /2, where They are the operators of the initial coordinates and the ωc = eH /mc and εω()te→ 22//ccxp()itω (see (6)). After K operators of initial momenta, respectively [4]. Express and the above replacements (19) will be transformed into:  L from (10) in terms of these operators: ψ =+Cexp mxω 22y / 4  2 2 2 2 0  c (). (21)      KX=+( 0 P 0x ) /2, LY=+( 0 P 0y ) /2 (14) In the formula (21) coincides with expression for the XP 00,,���� xyYP 00, � �  are the Hermitian operators. Then these opera- wave function of an electron in a uniform constant magnetic tors have the real EV that places the lower limit of EV from the field received in [6, 4584–9]. expressions (12): kl>>00,� � (see, for example [3]). This cre- It was noted above that operators K and L have a com- ates opportunity to apply CFM to solving the problem (12). ψ mon EF system. Then from the expressions (15), (17) for K 2.2. Exact solutions  and ψ L obviously that the common EF of the operators K Denote the quantities belonged to the ground state, i. e. and L has to be written down so: K nd to lowest EV of the operator , by subscript “0”. Then, using ++ ψ tn= !!dA Bt ψ CFM [1, 9–16] for determination of EV and EF of the opera- nd () ( ) ( ) 0 (). (22) ψ ()t � tor K from f. (12), we will find: The wave function nd obeys the normalization con- n ψ t 1 + dition. On the other hand, as it was noted, nd ()� will be wave ψ ~ψψ= A knn =+, Kn 0 , n =…01,,2, (15) 2 ( ) function of a considered non-stationary system, namely for a and charged particle in a time-dependent magnetic field. −  ψ = 3. Conclusion A 0 0. (16) CFM is developed for non-stationary system, namely Similarly, CFM application to the operator L from (12) for a charged particle in a time-dependent magnetic field. returns the followig results: d It is shown that if for non-stationary system there are quan- 1  + ldd =+, ψ Ld~ψψ= B 0 , d =…01,,2, (17) tum integrals of motion similar (10), it is possible to use the 2 ( ) and factorization method.  − Acknowledgment B ψ 0 = 0 . (18) The author thanks prof. F. M. Hashimzadeh for attention ψ From expressions (16) and (18) it is easy to find 0 : to this work. References: 1. Schrödinger E. A method of determining quantum-mechanical eigenvalues and eigenfunctions. Proc. R. Irish Acad. A, Volume 46, – 1940. 2. Schrödinger E. Further studies on solving eigenvalue problems by factorization. Proc. R. Irish Acad. A, Volume 46, – 1940. 3. Shi-Hai Dong. Factorization Method in Quantum Mechanics. – Netherlands: Springer; – 2007. 4. Malkin I. A., Manko V. I. Dynamic Symmetries and Coherent State of Quantum System. – Moscow: Nauka, – 1979. 5. Agayeva R. G. Non-adiabatic parametric excitation of oscillator-type systems. J. Phys. A: Math. Gen., – Volume 13: 1685–99. – 1980. 6. A. Feldman, Kahn A. H. Landau Diamagnetism from the Coherent States of an Electron in a Uniform Magnetic Field. Phys. Rev. B, – Volume 1, – № 12, – 1970.

103 Section 10. Philology and linguistics

Section 10. Philology and linguistics Akhmetova Maynur Erevshanalievna, Stavropol State Pedagogical Institute, postgraduate student, the Faculty of Linguistics E‑mail: [email protected]

Integrative nature of financial risk management terminology Abstract: Interdisciplinary approach to studying financial risk management terminology. Languages for special purposes of developed scientific fields are the most productive sources for borrowings for dynamically developing ones. Sources of term borrowings for financial risk management: their specific features and types. Keywords: terminology, integrative nature, interdisciplinary approach, term, borrowings, metaphor, Formation of financial risk management terminology in formation, and also claimed that this process was mostly English and Russian languages has got a long-term history. metaphorical [5, 112]. According to G. Lakoff and M. John- But still this process is not completed yet. As long as the do- son, “… metaphorical concepts are necessary for under- main is in vogue, it will remain the subject of debate. This will standing most of what goes on in our world… . When the cause corrections and adjustments in terminology in general basic metaphors of a scientific theory are extensions of basic and in its different aspects. Mostly financial risk management metaphors in our everyday conceptual system, then we feel deals with crises. There are multiple approaches to classifi- that such a theory is “intuitive” or “natural”… . Metaphorical cation and description of this economic phenomenon. The concepts are essential to scientific thought — without them more we face economic crises the more financial analysts we could understand very little beyond our direct physical agree, that the best way to fight these disruptive incidents is experience. It is the genius of a good scientist that he can come to prevent them in the beginning. There are many techniques up with a consistent set of natural metaphors that, when elab- for early identification of relevant risks and threats, for assess- orated, fit a wide range of phenomena” [6, 207–208]. ment of the likelihood impact, and determination methods to avoid them, or to reduce their consequences. In this case, sharing progressive experiences and best practice helps to be prepared to abnormal and unstable situations. But we have to admit, that the developing of a specific domain is impossible without developing its terminology. These two processes are connected and interdependent. Any language for special pur- poses reflects fluctuations first, and it is important for terms to be strictly defined and classified. It is even more important because of a global nature of economic crises. Most scholars hold to interdisciplinary approach to study- ing financial risk management [1; 2; 3; 4]. Analysis of finan- cial risk management terminology highlights the significance of interdisciplinary connections in modern scientific areas (see fig. 1). Languages for special purposes of developed scientific fields are the most productive sources for borrowings for dy- namically developing ones. Along with the specific financial risk management terms, there are borrowed ones, which come from Fig. 1. Integrative nature of financial other disciplines; and both groups of terms make the whole risk management terminology scope of domain’s terminology. Borrowed terms move to risk Analysis of interdisciplinary term borrowings in financial management terminology with different transformations. There risk management shows that they also have metaphorical na- might be some modifications in definitions to suit the new field, ture and may be classified according to V. M. Leychik, who or complete transvaluation of a meaning of a term. distinguished 4 types of intersystem term borrowings: Russian linguist V. M. Leychik maintained that term – adoption of a single term (e. g. black box came to risk borrowings were typical for new domains during their management terminology from cybernetics. Initially, black

104 Integrative nature of financial risk management terminology box is ‘a device or theoretical construct with known or speci- they are as close to it as desired’ [13]; loss limit ‘the maximum fied performance characteristics but unknown or unspecified loss considered acceptable in the simulation of a specific type constituents and means of operation’ [9]; and in financial risk of risk, usually in a worst case or stress test analysis’ [7, 196]. management black box is ‘a valuation or pricing formula for Terms borrowed from information technology: financial instruments that is not explained to users of the com- – cyber ‘relating to or characteristic of the culture of com- puter system that incorporates the formula Users are expected puters, information technology, and virtual reality’ [13]; cy- to accept the output of the computer “box” on faith’ [7, 39]); bercash ‘the ultimate dematerialization of money…’ [7, 93]; – adoption of a terminology fragment (e. g. Greek letters, – internet ‘a global computer network providing a variety or Greeks, in financial risk management are the quantities rep- of information and communication facilities, consisting of in- resenting the sensitivity of the price of financial instruments: terconnected networks using standardized communication alpha, beta, gamma, vega, etc.); protocols’ [13]; internet trading ‘an extremely low commis- – adoption of a whole terminology and adoption of a sion stock execution technique in which a customer enters an formation technique (these types of intersystem term bor- order over the internet…’ [7, 178]; rowings, described by the scientist, are not represented in – online ‘controlled by or connected to a computer’ [13]; financial risk management. Despite of the integrative nature InterBank on-line system (IBOS) ‘a London-based currency of the domain, it’s still unique sphere. It has its own specific payment management system’ [7, 174]. features, reflected on its LSP, that distinguish it from any other Terms borrowed from jurisprudence: scientific fields, even closely related to it) [5, 112–113]. – law ‘a system of rules created by a society to regulate Mainly financial risk management terminology includes behavior and punish crimes’ [10, 285]; blue-sky laws ‘the terms from jurisprudence, sociology, information technology, securities law of individual states in the U. S. that regulate mathematics, and psychology. But the prevailing numbers of new securities issues and many secondary market transac- names transfer from economics. Following examples of bor- tions…’ [7, 40]; law of one price ‘the economic principle that rowed terms confirm integrative nature of financial risk man- the same item or closely equivalent items must sell for the agement terminology. same price or related prices in the marketplace. It follows Terms borrowed from mathematics: that identical cash flows should command the same price, – matrix ‘a rectangular array of entries displayed in rows thereby denying investors the opportunity to profit from and columns and enclosed in brackets. The entries are ele- riskless arbitrage’ [7, 185]; ments of some suitable set, either specified or understood. – legal ‘having to do with law; related to principles of law They are often numbers, perhaps integers, real numbers or as opposed to equity. In accordance with law’ [10, 293]; legal complex numbers, but they may be, say, polynomials or other list ‘a list of investments created by a regulatory regime that expressions’ [8, 107]; risk assessment matrix (RAM) ‘a tabu- specifies a limited number of assets or classes of assets that lar organization and quantification of risk types, levels, and may be purchased and held by a financial intermediary or a locations in an operation or organization. The Ram is an in- specific purpose fund…’ [7, 186]; legal risk ‘the most impor- termediate step in some systems for risk measurement and tant legal risks in financial risk management are legal capacity, control’ [7, 269]; or ultra vires risk, and regulatory risk’ [7, 186]; – variable ‘an expression, usually denoted by a letter, – right ‘a power or privilege; authority to do something; that is defined for values within a given set. Can be used to rep- a legal, equitable, or moral entitlement to something; an indi- resent elements of sets which are not numbers but frequent- vidual liberty’ [10, 441]; prescribed right to income and maxi‑ ly it relates to numerical quantities and functions defined in mum equity (PRIME) ‘the income component of an American them together with the relationship between them’ [8, 820]; Trust unit, were the equivalent of a five-year covered call writ- variable annuity ‘an annuity contract in which the value of pe- er’s position at issuance’ [7, 244]; value recovery rights ‘options riodic income payments may fluctuate as a result of changes in embedded in some Brady bonds that increase investor returns securities market values, a cost of living index, or some other when oil prices rise’ [7, 325]; designated index’ [7, 325]; – power ‘authority; the ability or liberty to do something’ – rate ‘a measure, quantity, or frequency, typically one [10, 385]; power bond ‘a note or bond with a coupon that bears measured against another quantity or measure’ [13]; hazard an exponential relationship to a reference rate…’ [7, 239]. rate ‘the probability or rate at which an event is expected to Terms borrowed from sociology: occur during a specified interval, assuming it has not yet oc- – group ‘used narrowly the term denotes a number of in- curred. The hazard rate is often used to measure default risk in dividuals, defined by informal or formal criteria of member- bonds’ [7, 159]; interest rate risk ‘an adverse variation in cost ship, who have some shared sense of identity or are bound by or return caused by a change in the absolute level of interest relatively stable patterns of social interaction. By pointing to rates, in the spread between two rates, in the shape of the yield some real association, these last two characteristics distinguish curve, or in any other interest rate relationship’ [7, 176]; the group from aggregates or social categories that are created – limit ‘a point or value which a sequence, function, or by outsiders (as when, for example, a sociologist writes about sum of a series can be made to approach progressively, until ‘men’ or ‘junior doctors’). More commonly the term is used

105 Section 10. Philology and linguistics as an all-purpose term for any collection (actual or abstract) this source of funding…’ [7, 101]; Wholesale uninsured finan‑ of people’ [11, 137]; Derivatives policy group (DPG) ‘repre- cial institution (WUFI) ‘a proposed regulatory framework for sentatives of six large non-bank OTC derivatives dealers who a multipurpose financial intermediary that can engage in any worked with the CFTC and SEC to design voluntary oversight banking transaction except taking insured deposits’ [7, 332]. procedures for OTC derivatives activities of unregulated securi- Terms borrowed from psychology: ties firm affiliates…’ [7, 101]; Group of seven (G‑7) ‘a group of – conflict ‘a hostile or antagonistic clash between differ- countries and a loose organization of national economic and ent social groups. Any opposition of the interests of two or monetary authorities committed to working out economic more social groups whether or not there is any actual overt and currency exchange rate issues…’ [7, 156]; Working group conflict’ [12, 522]; conflict of interests ‘a situation where the on financial markets ‘a formal coordinating group of financial financial interests of an individual or institution are different market regulators created by executive order in 1988 to deal from the interests of one or more of the institution’s clients, with intermarket issues…’ [7, 333]; or in which the interests of one client conflict with the inter- – society ‘the totality of human relationships …Any self- ests of another’ [7, 71]; reproducing human group that occupies a reasonably bounded – sensitive ‘easily damaged, injured, or distressed by slight territory and has a reasonably distinctive culture and set of so- changes; having or displaying a quick and delicate appreciation cial institutions’ [11, 295]; Society for worldwide interbank fi‑ of others’ feelings; easily offended or upset’ [13];floating -rate nancial telecommunications (SWIFT) ‘a banked-owned support rating sensitive note ‘a type of floating-rate note in which the organization and network for international message transfer quarterly reset is based on a variable spread over the refer- and securities and currency trade processing…’ [7, 283]; ence index rate. The spread increases if the strike price is contin- – institution ‘any pattern of behavior which by repetition, uously reset to equal the highest or lowest market price to date’ traditional sanction and legal reinforcement acquires a degree [7, 141]; sensitivity ‘a measurement, description, or graph of of coercion could be described as a social institution: marriage the relationship between or among two or more of the variables would be a good example’ [11, 292]; depositary institution determining option value or option value derivatives’ [7, 277]. ‘a financial institution that, usually among other businesses, Terminology of financial risk management is greatly influ- accepts cash deposits for which it pays interest or provides enced by economics. Figure 2 demonstrates that economics is services in return for the opportunity to invest or lend the the methodological basis of financial risk management as well proceeds from the deposits at a higher return than the cost of as the biggest source of term borrowings. - - - - manage Information ment Bank management management Time by excepManagement tion Ecosystem manage ment business International administration develop and Research ment management - risk manage Financial ment - manage Technology ment Strategic management management Treasury - manage Active/passive ment - man resource Human agement Financial management service- Customer man agement the fields of management theory General economics General Institutional economics Business administration (accounrting, marketing, finance) Management theory Development economics Environmental economics Etc. the fields of economics

ECONOMICS Fig. 2. Economics as a methodological basis and important source of borrowings for financial risk management terminology and related fields

106 Animal appellation in English verbal lexicon

References: 1. Fink S., Beak J. & Taddeo K. Organizational crisis and change. Journal of Applied Behavioral Science, – 7: 15–37, – 1971. 2. Mitroff I., Pauchant T. & Shrivastava P. Conceptual and empirical issues in the development of a general theory of crisis management. Technological Forecasting and Social Change, – 33: 83–107, – 1988. 3. Shrivastava P., Mitroff I., Miller D. & Miglani A. Understanding industrial crises. Journal of Management Studies, – 25: 285–303, – 1988. 4. Staw B. M., Sandelands L. E. & Dutton J. E. Threat-rigidity effects in organizational behavior: A multi-level analysis. -Ad ministrative Science Quarterly, – 1981. – 26: 501–524. 5. Leychik V. M. Theory of terminology: object, methods, framework. – Moscow: Knijnyi dom “Librokom”, – 2009. 6. Lakoff George P., Johnson Mark. The metaphorical structure of the human conceptual system. Cognitive science, – volume 4, – 1980 (192–280). 7. Gastineau Gary L., Kritzman Mark P. . Dictionary of financial risk management. – USA: Frank J. Fabozzi assossiates, – 1999. 8. Clapham Christopher, Nicholson James. The Concise Oxford Dictionary of Mathematics: fourth edition. – Oxford: Oxford University Press, – 2009. 9. The American Heritage® Dictionary of the English Language, 5th edition Copyright © by Houghton Mifflin Harcourt Publishing Company, – 2013. 10. Hackney Blackwell Amy. The dictionary of essential legal terms: st1 ed. Naperville, Illinois: Sourcebooks, Inc., – 2008. 11. Steve Bruce, Steven Yearley. The Sage Dictionary of Sociology. Trowbridge, Wiltshire: the Cromwell Press Ltd., – 2006. 12. Matsumoto David. The Cambridge Dictionary of Psychology. – New York: Cambridge University Press, – 2009. 13. Oxford dictionaries. – [Electronic resource]. – Access mode: http://www.oxforddictionaries.com

Bragarnik-Stankevich Olga Samuilovna, Belarussian State University, Senior teacher, Liberal Arts Faculty E‑mail: [email protected] Animal appellation in English verbal lexicon Abstract: The aim of this research is to offer semantic verbs-zoonyms classification based on the morphemic struc- ture of a word. That namely means to describe the group of verbs with roots, affiliated with names of animals in English. Keywords: zoonyms, lexical semes, conversion, semantic groups. Verb is the part of speech that mostly can be com- people and animals coexisted in a natural neighborhood. Ani- bined in lexical-semantic groups, so comparative linguistics mals were included in the social hierarchy of a human society; has its aim to present lexical-semantic classification of verbal they seemed to be a special human hypostasis (in animism, predicates. It can be done by two ways. The first way involves totemism, etc.). The inclusion of our knowledge about the the transition of general semantic classification of verbal lexi- fauna in figurative human characteristics is a natural stage in con to a consistent and complete description of the indi- the development of language [2]. vidual lexical-semantic groups. The opposite way leads the The aim of this research is to offer semantic verbs- studying of the descriptions of the individual groups to the zoonyms classification based on the morphemic structure of generalizing of the results [1]. This way, the studying of the a word. That namely means to describe the group of verbs with broadest groups, based on the unity of lexical semes, brings roots, affiliated with names of animals in English. us to the knowledge of the semantic structure of the vocabu- English language vocabulary completion at the expense lary in a whole, as small groups are always a part of broader of formation of such verbs occurs in different periods of the ones and can be adequately described only on the basis of language. Most often, this trend was due to the fact that such this relationship. a derivation helped to denote a specific action economically. In this regard verbs formed from the notion-names of That happened relatively to the animal, whose name is used animals (zoonyms) are of particular interest to us. In the lin- to form a new word. guistic literature, zoonyms are also known as animalisms, zoo- For example, there is a large number of verbs in the stud- metaphors, zoolexems, zoomorphisms, comparative phrases ied group of zoonyms that refers to the notion ‘hunting’. By with animalistic component, word combinations with com- the means of zero derivation a noun into a verb one can easily ponent-names of animals, etc. get a new lexical unit with the meaning ‘hunting that kind of The role of animals in human life has always been ex- animal’: to seal — hunt for seals; to shrimp — fish for shrimps; tremely high, especially in the early days of mankind, when to mouse — hunt for or catch mice; etc. [3].

107 Section 10. Philology and linguistics

It is to be mentioned that the most productive way to c) To repeat something monotonously, to study with- form animalisms in the English language is conversion. Con- out comprehension: version, also called zero derivation, is the creation of a word To parrot (to cuckoo) — to repeat mechanically [4]. from an existing word without any change in form. In the field In this group one can find verbs which meanings are based of animal verbal lexicon verbification typically involves simple on adjacency. Such linguistic correlation happens because conversion of a noun to a verb. For example, to badger — to ask typical animal actions are transferred to humans’ behavior. someone to do something repeatedly and annoyingly; to beetle — It also happens that during language development not only to make one’s way hurriedly; to hawk — to peddle [3]. actions, but also typical features of animals, attributed to them Here we should mention that it is important to distin- by people, transfer to language usage as separate unites. For ex- guish such verbs according to the notion of lexical ambigu- ample, verb to beaver away means to work tirelessly as beavers ity. For example, verb to seal, meaning applying a non-porous are known for building dams, canals, and lodges. To ferret out coating to a surface to make it impervious, has nothing in com- means to rummage as very keen sense of smell is a typical fea- mon with a fish-eating aquatic mammal. For avoiding such ture of the ferret. In its turn verb to chicken out means to be afraid mistakes while carrying out the research one should consult of something as chicken is very small and very defenseless. a dictionary. 3. Verbs describing professional spheres of life: In Oxford English Dictionary one could find no more For example, verb to bull means to buy shares hoping to than 100 verbs with roots, affiliated with names of animals. sell them at a higher price later. If you draw a parallel with As it was mentioned above there is a large number of verbs fighting bulls, these animals have a certain combination of that refers to the notion ‘hunting’. In this research we have the aggression, energy, strength, stamina and intellect. To bull is aim to study verbs with animal names giving meanings other often contrasted with verbto bear — to forecast that prices of than hunting that kind of animal. stocks or commodities will fall, especially to sell shares hoping All these words can be divided into following semantic to buy them back later at a lower price. It is said to be from a subgroups: proverb warning against ‘selling the bear’s skin before one has 1. Verbs used for describing people behavior, way caught the bear’. Verb to kite means to write or to use (a check, of life, attitude to their being. This subgroup includes the bill, or receipt) fraudulently. That’s also an informal term that examples: has reference to financial duties. To peacock — to display oneself ostentatiously; to strut To crab means to steer an aircraft or ship slightly sideways like a peacock; to compensate for a crosswind or current. And verb to bat is To squirrel away — to save, to put aside, to keep in reserve, used in sports, such as baseball, meaning to take in turns the to accumulate (verb originates from one of the most notable fea- role of hitting rather than fielding [3]. tures of squirrels — their ability to keep the nuts for the winter); 4. Verbs denoting semes ‘pursuit’, ‘surveillance’, ‘su- To crow — to express great pride or triumph, especially in pervision’ include: a tone of gloating satisfaction; To bug — to conceal a miniature microphone in (a room To rabbit on — to move quickly; to run away; to talk at or telephone) in order to monitor or record someone’s con- length, especially about trivial matters; versations; To cat — to look for sexual partners; to have an affair To dog — to follow (someone or their movements) or affairs; closely and persistently; (of problem or bad luck) to cause To swan — to travel around from place to place; you trouble for a long time. To skunk — to defeat (someone) overwhelmingly in a game To sleuth — to carry out a search or investigation in the or contest, especially by preventing them from scoring at all; manner of a detective; To duck — to move one’s head or body downwards to To hound — to harass, to persecute, or to pursue relentlessly; avoid being hit or seen. [3]. To fish — to try to get something or find out something; That is the largest group presented. It includes the verbs to try to catch something using your hands; with the meanings describing practically each moment of hu- To mouse out — to nose out [3]. mans’ lives. 5. Verbs with the meaning of deceit, intimidation: 2. Verbs describing specific acts, made by human To buffalo — to overawe or to intimidate (someone); beings. The subgroup includes: To pigeon — to dupe, to cheat; a) Having a meal: To fox — to trick or to confuse somebody; To hog — to swallow without chewing; To rook — to defraud, to overcharge, or to swindle To wolf down — to eat food very quickly, to gobble; (someone) [4]. To pig out — to eat large amount of food [4]. 6. Verbs with the meaning of cowardice, uncertainty, b) To play a fool: slowness: To ape, to monkey — to imitate the behavior or manner of To crane — to hesitate in passing the difficulties; someone or something, especially in an absurd or unthinking To quail — to tremble of fear, to be discouraged; way; to behave in a silly or playful way [3]. To turtle (to snail, to slug) — to move slowly.

108 Peculiarities of Ivan Franko’s poetics of translation (based on John Milton’s tragedy “Samson Agonistes”)

It’s rather complicated to analyze animal words in language extra linguistic factors. Habits and lifestyles of birds and fish, corpus. The metaphorical sense based on the relationship of animals and insects arouse certain associations with the ap- similarity (adjacency) is of particular interest here, i. e. ascrip- pearance and behavior of a person. tion of anthropomorphic qualities to certain animals. English It may seem that verbs with roots, affiliated with names of uses animal words in a dazzling array of idioms and metaphors, animals, include mostly phrasal verbs. That is wrong. Only 31 % often nothing to do with actual animals. One should persis- of all the verbs from the studied group (that includes all the verbs tently consult to explore this rich figurative language. with animal names roots) tend to form phrasal verbs when used Statistical analysis of similes involving animal words in with preposition. Other 69 % include the verbs that are polyse- English language corpus generates a detailed picture of the mantic or change their meaning being used in spoken language. characteristics that English ascribes to animals: cat: nimble, It is an interesting fact that 50 % of all the studied zoonyms curious, nervous, silent, comfortable, cool; dog: sick, loyal, attach negative meaning beyond their standard definition. friendly; horse: healthy, hungry; bull: strong, mad, angry; Only 5 % have positive connotation with regards to their pleas- lion: brave, righteous, fierce, bold, protective, strong; pig: ing emotional connection, while 45 % of verbs do not possess happy, foul, drunk, sick; fox: sly, smart. It is apparent that any connotation and are neutral. These numbers show that the these characteristics are largely linguistic conventions and studied group includes the contrasts of a verb with its primary, often have little to do with our understanding of real animals: literal meaning with what that verb specifically denotes. That horses are healthy, but dogs and pigs are sick [5]. shows the frequency of how anything may be associated with Statistical analysis of verbs with roots, affiliated with a zoonym beyond an implied value of judgment or feelings. names of animals in English indicates that only 13 % of all So, extra-linguistic reality is especially reflected in the group the verbs can be used in professionally specialized fields of of verbs with roots, affiliated with names of animals, which is the life. Such spheres include finances, sports, agriculture, and object of our study. It is reflected brighter than in any other area transport. Other verbs are frequently used in everyday life. of language comprehension. Images of animals are endowed, at Moreover, 54 % of commonly used verbs belong to informal first glance, by non-motivated properties and sometimes it is style. Such a widespread use of animal names for character- even contrary to the logic of things. These images trace back istic of a man and his actions can be easily explained with to the depths of the human mind, to its beliefs and mythology. References: 1. Karimova N. Lexical-semantic classification of certain groups of verbs in Russian and Tajik languages in comparative terms: the dissertation … the candidate of philological sciences: 10.02.20. – Dushanbe, – 2006. – 218 p. 2. Gurevich T. Japanese: zoonyms translation problem/T. M. Gurevich//Comparative Linguistics. Typology of languages. Translation Theory: Issues of the 3rd International Conference. Moscow-Kazan, 2006–2008. – Moscow: Moscow State University, – 2008. – P. 47–56. 3. Oxford Dictionaries. [Electronic resource]/Online Oxford Dictionaries. – Mode of access: http://www.oxforddictionaries. com/. – Lang. Engl. 4. Linguistic portal ABBYY Lingvo-Online. [Electronic resource]/ABBYY Lingvo-Online. – Mode of access: http://www. lingvo-online.ru/ru. – Lang. Engl., Rus. 5. Using the Corpus. [Electronic resource]/Online Oxford Dictionaries. – Mode of access: http://www.oxforddictionaries. com/words/using-the-corpus?q=in+the+first+or+ second +etc.+instance/. – Lang. Engl.

Poriadna Olena Oleksandrivna, postgraduate, Kryvyi Rih National University E‑mail: [email protected]

Peculiarities of Ivan Franko’s poetics of translation (based on John Milton’s tragedy “Samson Agonistes”) Abstract: The article is devoted to the features of translational concept of I. Franko. The problems of translation are observed in the key of literary imagology, the question of artistic interpretation is justified by comparative analysis as a demonstration of individual mastership of I. Franko. Keywords: intercultural dialogue, cultural-interpretative approach, linguistic approach, equivalence, adequate translation. The relevance of this research includes I. Franko’s explora- Restoration age John Milton, however, this aspect has not re- tions about life and works of an outstanding British poet of the ceived an appropriate examination. Although some scientists

109 Section 10. Philology and linguistics such as I. Zhuravska, S. Bortnyk, G. Kochur, R. Zorivchak So, all these prefaces are large single unit, in which I. Franko have partly depicted this subject in their works. But the re- tried to create a two-level dialogue: firstly, as a mediator, accu- search of originative relationships between I. Franko and mulating his main concept of the Ukrainian nation formation, J. Milton is extremely important, because both of artists have also he acquainted the readers with literary work of the fighter many similarities as for their biographical facts (they had dif- for national ideas — J. Milton. Secondly, I. Franko, finding par- ficult life, due to their political position, revolutionary spirit allels in spirituality, mentality, created an intercultural dialogue. and nationalist ideas, which were constantly promoted in Let’s return to the comparative analysis of the tragedy. their works, they were sent to prison by authorities) and as The title by itself is emotionally enough charged, it motivates for originative work. to actions, fighting and freedom, of course, it shows all mood Therefore, I. Franko has chosen the works for his trans- of the tragedy. J. Milton used the word of Greek origin in the lations carefully, first of all he searched spiritual and mental title — “Agonistes”, which means “fighter”. Hypothetically, affinity for creation, outlook, life position among outstanding let’s say that the answer to the question: why J. Milton ap- English artists. pealed to the Greek language in choosing the title’s name lies The main aim of the research is the analysis of content- directly in his preface, where he took as an example the work formal and mental-ideological peculiarities of I. Franko’s poet- of artists in writing tragedies in ancient times. ics of translation. As we can see, I. Franko translated identically to the J. Milton starts his dramatic poem “Samson Agonistes” with original title, which consists of a proper noun “Samson” and a preface to a reader “Of that sort of dramatic poem which is apposition, which gives a qualitative description of the main called tragedy”, where the author is full of responsibility against character: “fighter”. the genre of tragedy, which appeared in ancient times, and dis- I. Franko saved the genre according to all peculiarities of tinguishes it among the other poetic genres, making accent tragedy: translation conveys a sharp, irreconcilable conflict on its high moral values and useful features: “Tragedy, as it was of the main hero, who is full of sorrow because he couldn’t anciently composed, hath been ever held the gravest, morality, cope with his mission, he couldn’t make free his people from and most profitable of all other poem” [8, 2]. J. Milton prepares the Philistines, and finally instead of hero he became a slave. the readers beforehand that this dramatic poem will not be- In the text of translation the philosophical meaning of the come another theatrical performance with elements of comedy. conflict is shown. I. Franko, following by J. Milton, translated The author emphasizes that while writing this work he followed tragedy without the division into acts, actions or parts which the best traditions of the masters of drama in ancient times, such are obviously specific to the genre of tragedy. The text of trans- as Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, and Italians. As a result of lation, same as the original, has a dynamic plot, relatively small following ancient traditions of writing drama J. Milton says to amount of events, all the main characters are subordinated to readers that dramatic poem is written by unstable Metre, the the source text. ancient Greeks called “Monostrophic”, or even “Apolelyme- I. Franko in his translation could realize the main idea of non” — without division into strophes. The author also rejected J. Milton, compositional features of the translated text include the division into acts and scenes, because, according to him, the conceptual level of poetic drama (theme, issue, conflict), all these are needed for the performance on the stage, and his plot, chronological of events, dynamic presentation. work is not provided for the theater. In his translation I. Franko without any violations of But in his translation I. Franco has omitted this preface norms remained contents according to the original text, also and its concepts, instead of that he replaced it on his own pref- he depicted the semantic capacity to readers (as a result, re- ace, which consists of three parts. cipient in his text of translation can find clearly created char- In the first part “Life of J. Milton” I. Franko submits the acters and storyline), emotional side and expressiveness of biographical facts of the British poet, outlines the period in the translation. As for the form, some differences are noticed which the artist lived and worked, and, indeed, its impact on here. Firstly, the original text has 1758 rows, every fifth row is the literary work of the author. In an expanded preface we find enumerated by J. Milton, but the translation of I. Franko out about the sad circumstances about J. Milton: from 1644 his has 2478 rows which he did not enumerate at all and gave eyesight began to spoil, and in 1652 he completely lost it. Thus, as a complete text. Consequently, I. Franko’s translation is the dramatic poem “Samson Agonistes” was written in 1671, 720 lines longer than the original text. But this fact does not when the British poet has lost his eyesight. mean that I. Franko has not followed the source text, con- In the second part “Literary Works of Milton” versely, he skillfully followed the sequence transcribed mono- I. Franko introduces to Ukrainian readers the literary heri- logues and dialogues of actors. tage of the poet, where he gives a brief review to some of At the beginning of translation I. Franko used one of the J. Milton’s famous works. translational transformation — the addion (L. Barkhuda- In the third part, “Analysis of Milton’s drama” I. Franko rov in his researches distinguishes four types of transforma- depicts to the readers not just short content of the tragedy, tions: change, substitution, omission, and, of course, addi- but also he analyzes the composition, verification features and tion is one of them [1, 190]). Translation begins with the other details as a literary critic. addition of reinforcing particles “no” that changes the focus

110 Peculiarities of Ivan Franko’s poetics of translation (based on John Milton’s tragedy “Samson Agonistes”) while reading: “Ще трохи далі взич руки своєї” — “A little function and fits to the language of the recipient. Another onward lend thy guiding hand”. As we can see, the translation example of translation mastership is the replacement of the has some differences in the use of verbal and noun structures, metaphor “prosperous days” on “дні щастя”, so I. Franko also I. Franko uses an inversion, but the meaning of the first achieved adequate translation by the remedy of compensation. line does not change. Besides the additions and lexical- In the selected fragment objective and subjective factors semantic transformations it is evident that the leading factor are observed, which influence on the adoption of certain of this is to preserve the stylistic identity. translation decisions. Therefore, I. Franko, following the direct In order to implement the translation of research objective dependency, adapts his text of translation to a differ- let’s turn to the analysis, which includes on the one hand, ent social environment — national. Achieving equivalency in cultural-interpretive approach that examines the functioning translation reaches the level of lexeme, and application of pho- of translation in the context of the target culture, preserves nics causes the poetic speech. a creative individuality of an interpreter, on the other hand, However, I. Franko usually made accent on the accuracy linguistic approach which requires purely lingual interpretation of translation, he said: “When the words of the first three cat- of the text [4, 185]. egories are doing the main basis of literary work, giving to it Let’s illustrate the fragments of dialogue between meaning and action, the words of the second category — it is Samson and Chorus, based on the example of the original like making shadow in painting which enlivens and makes flex- text rows 187–218, where I. Franko achieved functional ible a picture” [2, 20]. This statement explains a significant equivalency: “Now of my own experience, not by talk” — “Те- expansion to the form of translation, as I. Franko has repeat- пер я знаю власним досвідом”. So, the translation of I. Franko edly resorted to explanations, supplemented his translation of did not undergo any significant changes at the lexical-seman- poetical details and components, refined verbal and noun con- tic level, he reproduced the unity of content with the help of structions, finally, he tried to make perfect all these details in lexical equivalents in the target language, so it caused some the correct construction of Ukrainian sentences. controversy in the verbal and noun structures because Eng- In order to enhance the national cultural flavor, provide lish and Ukrainian languages ​​are quite different for stylistic melody of speech, achieve lexical-semantic and expressive ef- resources. The next line of translation includes the previous fect I. Franko used the conversion, which caused the appear- line: “not by talk” — “не з наслуху лише” — it is his own ing of ukrainization, such as “благовістив той ангел”, “моєї creative solution where the translator uses to transformation неньки”, “старшини краю нашого й князі”, “священний за- and adds stylistically colored lexical unit. This fragment is ob- повіт”, “божа заповідь”, “божий дар таємний” etc. served individual features of style and idiolect of I. Franko, but On the basis of comparative analysis, we can say the point is that linguistic closeness between translated text that I. Franko transfered all the poetic world of J. Milton’s and original text is on the maximum level. Thus, he masterfully tragedy successfully: translated tropes of poetic speech: metaphor “counterfeit a 1) there is no any element of content which was not de- coin” — “фальшивий гріш”, such a replacement should be picted by the translator; considered as an investigation of Ukrainian translator while 2) semantic equivalents are found perfectly; choosing an appropriate semantic and stylistic equivalence. 3) the text of translation conveys dynamism and expres- In order to make an expressive effect I. Franko adds an epithet siveness of the original text. “други милі”, meanwhile the original text has just “friends”. So, the reception of British poet J. Milton has opened The phrase “many evils” translator replaces a bright metaphor a new link in establishing the intercultural dialogue in the “рознородне горе”, that performs clarifying and amplifying main I. Franko’s concept of creation the nation. References: 1. Бархударов Л. С. Язык и перевод. – М.: Междунар. отношоненя, – 1975. 2. Франко І. Твори в 50‑ти т. – Т. 12: Поетичні переклади та переспіви/Упоряд. та комент. В. І. Шевчук, за ред. Д. В. За- тонського. – К.: Наук. думка, – 1978. 3. Швейцер А. Д. Теория перевода. Статус, проблемы, аспекты – М.: Наука, – 1988. 4. Шмігер Т. Історія українського перекладознавства ХХ сторіччя. – К.: Смолоскип, – 2009. 5. Bell R. Translation and translating: theory and practice (applied linguistics and language studies) – London: Longman Group, – 1991. 6. Gutt E. Translation and relevance: cognition and text. – Oxford: Blackwell Publishers, – 2000. 7. Newmark P. Approaches to translation. – Hertfordshire: Prentice Hall, – 1988. 8. The Poetical Works of John Milton. – Volume III. – London: William Pickering, – 1832.

111 Section 11. Philosophy

Section 11. Philosophy Klages Yan Sorintovich E‑mail: [email protected]

It’s a banal world A philosophical essay of objective idealism, transcendental dialectics Abstract: The essay presents a table on dialectics showing that the consciousness is the epitome of earth and cosmic elements. The karmic calendar is enclosed. Keywords: nature, Earth and Cosmos, dialectics, convolution, scan, consciousness. The reference will be given to the elements. It is better to external, convolution and deconvolution. The rest is odd. Here, define an element as the fifth dimension. Since ancient times, I fill my philosophy with a concrete content and substance pre- people have known the following elements: earth, water, metal senting it in the form of a table and authentic calendar. It can be (air) and fire. And even wood. I would add two new elements: easy to comprehend it and fill the calendar with own content. a human being and civilization. It makes seven elements in I will also apply the terms left and right hemispheres of the total. Respectively, there are seven cosmic elements: Earth, brain. I will not go deep into sciences, because it is the philoso- Jupiter, Moon, Sun, Venus, Mars and Zodiac. There is noth- phy from where they originate. I had worked on this philosophy ing else. It is sufficient. They define seven physical notions for ten years until it all became clear. It is very difficult to relieve such as space, matter, gravitation, energy, time, information oneself of illusions. I have tried everything on myself. I have and movement (changes). For the sake of clarity, I will use used all my knowledge and experience. I am 57 and this year I philosophical categories in somewhat unusual sense, dialectic have become a new man. An ordinary one. I will not deny that sense to be precise: content (identity), substance (difference), the power of elements is a divine design. I will not deny the form (negation), phenomenon (synthesis) and realization Evil in the world. I have to stop my explanations here and the (changes, removal), as well as in usual sense — the internal and rest can be found on the Internet. Table 2. – Time (karmic) deconvolution (earth and cosmic realization of elements) within transcendent dialectics F M W E F M W E F 30 42 54 66 78 90 02 14 26 Rat 31 43 55 67 79 91 03 15 27 Ox 32 44 56 68 80 92 04 16 28 Tiger 33 45 57 69 81 93 05 17 29 Rabbit 34 46 58 70 82 94 06 18 30 Dragon 35 47 59 71 83 95 07 19 31 Snake 36 48 60 72 84 96 08 20 32 Horse 37 49 61 73 85 97 09 21 33 Goat 38 50 62 74 86 98 10 22 34 Monkey 39 51 63 75 87 99 11 23 35 Rooster 40 52 64 76 88 01 12 24 36 Dog 41 53 65 77 89 02 13 25 37 Pig Table 3. F M W E Fire Metal Water Earth Jupiter (Zodiac) Sun Moon Venus Mars Content Difference Negation Removal Changes Thinking Perception Imagination Memory Consciousness Here are three deconvolutions (dialectics) of conscious- Decartes said: I think, therefore I exist. This is a wis- ness (of the world): space, time and psychic. Interactions and dom that can be felt. But he didn’t understand that the con- subtle bodies are considered (energetic and informational lev- sciousness is an element and people are its children with els of the world and consciousness). their «games on the God’s ground». They cannot but think,

112 It’s a banal world - 5 (intellectual Instruments IT technologies) digital, transgene, (GMO, slaves) adver services,Business IT, tising, codes mass (education, Culture sciences) media, etc., Networks (Social, Data base base Data (Social, Networks system,management Neuron) Civilization Property rights (realization) Changes body. Physical Expensive goods State Legislation signature Image, Structures Zodiac 6 Services (authorities) Formalism Will, choice limited of consciousness Calendar of payment) (means Money banks purses, Cards, Exploitation, Management, (works) Control - Fantasy-memory People Consciousness associative Theoretical memory (knowledge) Information form Internal Mental 3 notions, goals, (ideas, incentives) dreams, criti ((non) Perceptions cal) or rudely Intuitive Memory - of the environ Emulation ment Mars 4 with memory of knowledge (similar) Abstract unconsciously thinking Thinking (logical, dialectic) Peoples Sex, virtual real and thinking Abstract - Venus 3 fantasy Leaves (grass) Branches (bushes) Riparian, crowns Time (mental energy) (mental Time External form Karma 6 Trunks (forest) Roots Practical emotional emotional Practical memory Unconscious if there is no memory Self-consciousness bushes, etc. selva Taiga, brush forests, dense woods, jungles mag Drugs, pharmacy, ic, medicine Insects Wood Accidental (by Accidental mistake) household, quotidian rush Smell (mist) Smell Winds Draughts Sport Chemistry Gravitation Substance Aura 7 Atmosphere Cold Climate Birds Metal (Air) Moon Wisdom Moon 2 mystery Source Fire Philosophy Energy Content Quintessence 1 Light (spectrum) Heat Month calendar sunny sunny calendar Month character (temper) Spirits Fire Sun 1 ordinary mind Cunning, plan aggressively Quickly, Seas (lakes) Seas Rivers Behavior Matter Internal phenomenon Astral 4 Ocean Flows Pool Fish Water Jupiter 5 symbolic intellect Theoretical thinking Holes Roads Travels Space External phenomenon Emotions 2 Mountains Towns Locality (region) Animals Earth 7 - the uncon psychic, - and in scious, emotions tuition Instincts, unconsciousness Space Righthemisphere Earth - Table 1. – Mental deconvolution of consciousness (incarnation of earth and cosmic elements) within transcendent dialectics Table 1. – Mental deconvolution of consciousness (incarnation earth and cosmic elements) within transcendent Internal form Internal External form The fifth dimension Activity management Realization of CE Content Dialectics Body Substance External phenomenon Right hemisphere CE Convolution EE Deconvolution Transcendence phenomenon Internal Changes (parts, structure) Realization of EE Convolution EE Convolution Earth elements. Left hemisphere His Left hemisphere time memory, torical

113 Section 11. Philosophy but their thinking primarily takes place at unconscious level. and time, with its karma. Civilization is an element: the de- Unconscious simply means non-verbal, without words, for velopment of nature goes same way, no matter how delu- example, in form of emotions etc. And an element is the fifth sive it is. The property of elements is one in all and all in one. dimension, entrance to which is sought for. It is expressed as Hegel believed that it was self-development of spirit and, complexity, fractionality, diversity and freedom. The world may be, he was right. Hence, consciousness and civilization consists of seven elements in space; four of them are in time, lie in the nature. They have become clear elements realized in spite of the traditions of its notion. God’s will can be the through people. Today, the mankind attempts to robotize the eighth element. Let it be behind the scene, especially when it world and, perhaps, it will become a new element: robots in can be so easily taken for the superiority of elements. No neuron networks, in other words, Cosmos, when robots can matter how much people try to fight them or use them, the think and operate at their own level. Now, it is information nature wins. But this is what life is all about — it is the inter- society. And the ancient people were right that there are action of elements, for us, civilization and nature. In space eight elements.

Klages Yan Sorintovich E‑mail: [email protected]

A new theory of human psyche in a new dialectics Abstract: The article shows the true localization phenomena of psyche in the hemispheres of the brain. Keywords: mind, thinking, will, memory, perception, hemisphere. I present the true picture of psychic phenomena of the other incentives as primary drive of the consciousness, unre- hemispheres of a human’s brain in a short characteristic of alized at unavailability of the memory of the left hemisphere, their specific or their general characteristic. characterized as content, identity and preservation; There are the following easily-accessible phenomena of 3. Emotions (unconscious perception with intuition as consciousness in the left hemisphere (dominating in people): orientation), characterized as an internal form, negation and 1. Historical memory, knowledge (theoretical), charac- redundancy; terized as substance, difference, novice; 4. Instincts as will (priority) and primary drive of life 2. Thinking (ordinary mind, cunning, plan and intellect activity (as phenomenon, removal and symbolism), character- as the symbolic, identity, dialectic thinking), characterized as ized as an external form, realization and synthesis. content, identity, preservation; I can add that it is the emulation of the environment. An 3. Perception (critical, active with intuition as learning, activity is self-consciousness. Moreover, to illustrate it, I en- realization or rude, passive, the non-conscious), characterized close a scheme «Interrelation of psychical phenomena and as an internal form, negation, redundancy; typology of a personality»: 4. Will as physical thinking, characterized as an external form, realization, synthesis. It forms activity and other mani- Choleric Sanguine person festations of consciousness such as phenomenon, removal, MIND, WILL CONSCIOUSNESS, symbolism. OPINION The following less-accessible phenomena are in the right Logician Ethicist hemisphere: Rationalist Extravert 1. Abstract thinking (analogue) such as work with the Phlegmatic Melancholic memory of the left hemisphere or imagination, transcendent ATTENTION, MIND, IMAGINATION and non-conscious, characterized as substance, difference EMOTIONS and novice; Sensory person Intuition person 2. Fantasy (practical emotional memory or self- Introvert Irrationalist consciousness, mind) containing ideas, goals, images and

114 A philosophical treatise. The truth

Peshkov Vladimir Georgievich E‑mail: [email protected] A philosophical treatise. The truth Abstract: Tao that can be expressed in words is not a constant Tao. Laozi. Tao Te Ching. Keywords: truth, not true, verity, lie, reality, abstraction, actuality. The goal of philosophy is to understand the substance of with actuality. Words cannot be a criterion of the truth. Words things, i. e. learn the truth. Every man has their own notion express our sensations. The truth lies beyond our sensations. about the substance of things, but it doesn’t always comply The truth can be understood with mind. But we have to with the truth, i. e. something that really exists, and something describe it and discuss it with words. We will imagine real- that exists is the truth; hence, something that exists is true ity on the assumption of our sensual experience, i. e. we will and something that doesn’t exist is not true. The substance combine two incompatible worlds and this is where the para- of things lies in what exists. Here, we mean real existence, dox of our consciousness lies. We understand what we create. which is true, i. e. what really exists is true. The truth is one Laozi spoke about it. He called reality Tao and he said that and it is a reality. It is objective. What is not true is subjective; Tao created with words is different from actual Tao. Paradox, thus, it exists in multiple numbers. of course, belongs to our consciousness. It is not in reality. Kant divided the world into noumena and phenomena, So, what is the criterion of the truth, its results obtainable and we will also add actuality. Noumena are reality. Phenom- by our sense organs; results of the processes that take place in ena are abstraction, which is created by our consciousness in reality? It is important to understand the substance of these the soul detaching from reality. Consciousness creates ab- processes to further apply them in practice. stract, sensual images filling them with sensations, and creates The matter is based on substance, i. e. something that has a relation between them. Actuality is the synthesis of reality properties. There is an old philosophy of maxim — «one can- and abstraction, noumena and phenomena. Actuality is the not obtain anything from nothing». Nothing has no proper- world, in which we exist and where all subjects have an ab- ties, i. e. there is no existence; hence one cannot create from stract, sensual cover and real filling. The relations between nothing. Thus, we deduce a principle that to exist there has to the same subjects in reality and in actuality are absolutely be volume, i. e. occupy place, because only volume can have different. The relations between abstract covers, which are in properties. If there is volume, there are properties. If there is consciousness, are one thing; and the relations between real no volume, there are no properties. If there are no properties, fillings, which are beyond consciousness, are another thing. there is no existence. One should note that sensual cover is an exceptionally Emptiness should be a natural form of existence of the uni- subjective phenomenon, and we do not take it beyond our verse as absolute still — absence of properties in the structure. consciousness. The fact that things surrounding us have a But we do not observe still anywhere, why? To understand it, geometric form, have sensations, colors, sound, smell etc. one should consider the properties of emptiness carefully. does not belong to reality. Beauty is subjective. It is in our Unlike nothing, emptiness has properties. It is homogenous consciousness and it can’t be anywhere else. And the fact that and isotropic, i. e. it has a three dimensional volume, and it is we see a big beautiful world beyond our consciousness is an il- also infinite — one cannot set a limit to emptiness. The fact lusion; hence, the relations between subjects in reality and that emptiness has volume gives the universe the right to ex- actuality are different. ist in the form of emptiness, i. e. emptiness is the substance The truth should not be confused with verity. The truth that forms the basis of the matter. refers to reality. Verity and lie refer to actuality. Actuality is Thus, emptiness is a substance. Its existence does not de- the world of our sensations and our sensations are the cri- pend on anything, but its property — infinity alters the form teria of verity and lie in this world. For example: it is rain- of existence of emptiness. Classic emptiness is absolute still, ing outside and to make sure of it, it is enough to look out something integral, frozen and accomplished. Infinite empti- of the window, then we will learn whether it is verity or lie. ness cannot be integral, frozen or accomplished, because in- Our sensations cannot be the criteria of the truth. One can finite is always more than integral; hence, infinite emptiness look in any microscope, even a tunnel one; they will not see cannot exist as an independent substance. But it has to ex- reality anyway. Reality is beyond our sensations. Liquid, solid, ist, because the universe has to exist and it doesn’t matter in vapory — these are the properties of reality and we can sense what form. The occurred paradox between emptiness and its them, but solid and soft are our sensations and reality goes properties leads to its metamorphoses, i. e. makes emptiness beyond them again. a substance that forms the basis of the universe. Plato has a concept of the truth «… one who speaks Infinite can exist only in the form of discrete. Discrete about things as they are, speaks the truth; one who says oth- emptiness can only be formed by movement, because move- erwise, lies». In this concept the word «truth» should be ment is an alternative to still. What can move in emptiness? replaced with the word «verity» and only then it will comply Emptiness itself, of course. Movement is energy, a substrate

115 Section 11. Philosophy creating an independent substance, a revolving volume of to capture as much space as possible, but it is countered by emptiness. The revolving volume of emptiness is an elemen- neighboring elementary particles; hence, interactions can be tary particle of the matter, then indivisible atom of the matter. of three types. Natural urge of an elementary particle to inter- We understand that to exist, emptiness has to move. act is harmonic. Elementary particles select partners to inter- But emptiness should understand it too to start moving. act: one is attracted; another is turned down, which creates Mind is an ability to understand, thus, movement is ratio- lines of force. A line of force is a complete chain of harmoni- nal, i. e. creation of an elementary particle of the matter is cally interacting elementary particles. The peculiarity of the a mental act. Movement creates elongation and duration, line of force lies in the fact that when elementary particles in- but there is a need for cause-and-effect connection so that teract harmonically in it, they increase the speed of revolving, movement can exist in elongation and duration, and for that i. e. they increase their capacity, and cooperating with external movement has to have memory. Elementary particles fill the lines of force, each elementary particle uses a collective capac- entire volume of the universe and in order to exist as indepen- ity of the line of force. dent substances, they have to interact. To do that, they have Individuality of elementary particles gives more powerful to feel one another, and it’s not possible if they don’t have elementary particles an opportunity to involve neighboring senses. The above said makes it clear that movement in the elementary particles in its revolving orbit creating cells of the form elementary particle has mind, senses and memory, i. e. filed. A cell of the field consists of lines of force and their neu- it is true movement unlike the mechanical one. Movement tral filling as well as a central elementary particle on which of the above said is miracle and miracle is created by God. lines of force are closed. The central particle revolves the For us, everything that takes place in reality, i. e. the truth, is whole cell of the field through the lines of force receiving ad- a miracle, because we exist in a different world and we have ditional energy. The cell of the field is an independent sub- different criteria of actuality of this world. stance with its mind, senses and memory, which gives it an Elementary particles fill the entire volume of the universe, opportunity to interact with other cells of the field through i. e. they are a part of continuum, uninterrupted medium; the lines of force. thus, reality does not consist of separate but independent Physical field is multilayered. The primary layer creates in- substances. Reality is discrete, and at the same time, it is un- teraction of elementary particles. Interacting, they create the interrupted, i. e. it is impossible to separate particles one from cells of the filed. It is the second layer of the field. In turn, another, even though they move freely relative to one another. interacting, the cells of the field create the third layer of the Modern science builds mathematics and physics on the no- field and this process goes into eternity. If we take a look at tion — a separate substance. The separate substance exists in macrocosmos, we will see solar systems of the cell of the field actuality, i. e. in abstraction. Here we are surrounded by sepa- of one n‑level, which create the galaxies of the cell of the field rate subjects. And it is not in reality; thus, building of science of another n+1 level etc. The same happens in microcosmos, with the help of the notion a separate substance is a mistake. but in the reverse order. Modern science studies fiction created by our consciousness. The substance of interaction of elementary particles and If one knows the substance of elementary particles — bas- cells of the filed lies in the transfer of energy from particle es of the matter, it is not difficult to understand the structure to particle or from cell to cell, and this process has speed of a physical field. Physical field is a field of harmonic interac- of interaction. The peculiarity of interaction of cells lies in tion. Revolving, elementary particles either help one another the fact that when shifting from one level to next level, the revolve creating harmonic interaction, or prevent one another speed of interaction drops catastrophically. It happens be- from revolving creating negative interaction, or are in neu- cause the number of interacting elementary particles grows tral interaction neither helping nor preventing one another by many times when shifting from one level to another. As from revolving. Natural urge of all elementary particles is an example, let’s consider solar system. It is filled with the to interact harmonically. Thus, physical field is the field of cells of the filed. Speed of their interaction is roughly light harmonic interaction. speed, which is much higher in the lines of force. And the Properties of emptiness form the basis of the properties speed of interaction of the solar system with neighboring of the matter. Emptiness is homogenous and isotropic, and it systems is many times less. shows that there are no standards in emptiness, which, in turn, The difference of speed of interaction bears the substance is the foundation of the principle of individuality, i. e. every- of determinism, i. e. events, which take place at one layer of thing that happens with emptiness is individual. Primarily, the field, begin at lower layers of the field. Event that happens elementary particles are individual. They are individual in ca- with us is a synthesis of energy flows, which are conceived at pacity, and, consequently, in revolving speed, and in the vol- primary layer of the field and, before they reach us shifting ume they occupy. There are hardly two absolutely identical from one level to another, a lot of time passes, which explains elementary particles in the universe. Individuality of the entire how the future is in the past. universe results from the individuality of elementary particles. A man exists in two worlds. When they are a wake, they The substance of interaction of elementary particles exist in actuality and are related to it through sense organs. lies in the fact that revolving, each elementary particle strives During sleep, their sense organs are off and their soul con-

116 A philosophical treatise. The truth nects directly with the physical field and receives information the Mendeleev’s table; herewith, in reality, there is not clear from it in the form of dreams. If, when awake, we receive infor- border between chemical elements. Physical properties of the mation about the external environment from only one layer of substance also depend on the relation of linear sizes of atoms the fields, during sleep the soul can receive information from of the substance — cells of the field to the step of lines of different layers and it explains the phenomenon of prophetic force of the field. If the atoms of the substance are significantly dreams. There is a category of people, such as prophets, who bigger than the step of lines of force, they squeeze up against can receive information from the lower layers of the field even each other solidly with lines of force and the substance gains when awake, and the lower they go in layers, the further they a fixed state of atoms — solid state. If atoms of the substance can see in the future. or molecules are a little bit smaller than the step, atoms or If the physical field was not multilayered, chaos would molecules gain a less fixed state — liquid state. If atoms of rule the world and we would never be able to see the future. the substance are significantly smaller than the step of lines Hence, the fact of multilayered filed can be considered as the of force, the substance gains vapory state. It should be noted first evidence of our correct understanding of the substance that lines of force have a spiral-like form and their step in the of reality — the truth. cosmos, in the field of harmonic interaction, is considerably Modern scientists studied well the structure of a live cell, smaller than near the earth surface; hence, in outer space, the but they cannot create it artificially from the same materials. substance gains solid state or simply freezes. The thing is that live organisms build themselves on their Revolving, helicopter screw rests upon not only air, but own selecting chemical elements according to the principle also field. If one removes air and creates a vacuum, it can rest of individuality and harmony, and that is artificial, i. e. it is not upon a physical field. The rotations of revolving screw should possible to create by simple mixing of chemical elements. This be significantly increased. This simple experiment, relative to fact can also be referred to the evidence of our correct notion modern experiments on a Collider, will be a reliable evidence of reality — the truth. of our correct notion of the truth. In our notion, the presence of the physical field can be I will now end giving examples confirming the truth. They proved experimentally by creating mechanical traction in are endless, because our notion of the truth explains every- the vacuum. Chemical and physical properties of a substance thing that takes place in our world from the point of common are created by the field, i. e. it is a relation of linear sizes of sense. We now end studying this issue and the author hopes atoms of the substance — cells of the field to the step of lines that we have considerably moved closer to understanding the of force. It can be seen upon the placement of the substance in truth. However, we will not put a full stop, but ellipsis.

117 Section 12. Chemistry

Section 12. Chemistry Sivtseva Anastasia Vasilievna, Institute of Physical-Technical Problems of the North, SB RAS, research associate, Department of Materials Sciences E‑mail: [email protected]

A short review: specific properties of the gel — carrier of the active phase in metal-polymer catalysts Abstract: Preparations of the gels, these be used on carrier of the active phase of catalyst and its chemical char- acteristic are rewiewed. To investigate of non-additivity effects possible when applying two joint catalytic reactions, may be used metal-complex catalyst based on polyacrylamide gel, believing that the catalyst of this type described above has a number of advantages in comparison with catalysts on the hard drives. Keywords: metal-polymer catalysts, gels, carrier of active phase of catalyst. Interest in the creation of a new type of polymers (based The decrease of catalytic activity of sulfonic cation ex- on gels) in working condition swell, but not dissolve in the re- changer KU‑2 with ions of iron (III) more than 2‑times was action medium, due to the fact that these structures combine observed also in the process of interaction of acetic acid with the advantages of crosslinked and soluble macroligands. They hydrogen peroxide by increasing the degree of crosslinking have a higher permeability to the solvent and the substrate, of 2 to 12 % [4, 54–57]. This effect the authors explain the and a relatively higher degree of use of functional groups decrease in the mobility of the active centers of the catalyst other than high-molecular organic (or inorganic) polymer due to the formation of more rigid and ordered structure of compound three-dimensional structure [1, 44]. The pres- the polymer. Such effects, which testify to interdiffuse braking ence of functional groups capable of coordinating interaction reactions in phase of ionite catalysts, in case of catalysts based with ions of transition metals, makes it easy to prepare metal on high-swollen gel structures, apparently, should be less. In complex catalysts in a gel base. this regard, an important role is played the method of prepara- According to [2, 321], the gel is a structural grid of the tion of the polymer matrix of the catalyst. polymer, disperses in the liquid, and has a number of specific Common methods of producing swelling of gels is a properties. method of radical polymerization [5, 406–412; 6, 893–899; 7, 48–52; 8, 446–456; 9, 83–85], which can be performed in var- ious conditions. The suspension [10, 547–553], emulsion [11, + the solvent → 5623–5641], precipitation [12, 551–556] polymerization also describe in literature. The ammonium (potassium, sodium)

persulfate may be used like initiators of radical polymeriza- The specific properties of the gels are their ability to hold tion [8, 446–456]. Sometimes polymerization using a redox a lot of liquid, repeatedly (up to thousands times) greater system is carried out in the presence of transition metal ions than their own weight, and high conformational mobility [9, 83–85] or in the presence of compounds with transition of mesh structures, which can be adjusted by changing the metals [5, 406–412]. degree of crosslinking of polymer chains. The consequence There are various methods of crosslinking of linear poly- of this mobility of three-dimensional polymer network with mer chains during polymerization or after it to obtain in- the functional groups may be able to kind of “settings” of the soluble cross-linked structures. These include radiation catalyst on the substrate that is referenced by a number of method [13, 191–202], polymerization under the action of researchers discussing properties of organic ion-exchangers plasma [14, 1221–1222], thermal treatment of dry monomers metal-containing catalysts [3, 36–50; 4, 54–57]. or their mixtures, using cross-linking agents. In [3, 36–50] studied the effect of the degree of In [15, 120–146] described the preparation of metal- crosslinking copper (II)-containing ion-exchangers with containing polyacrylamide hydrogels (PAAH), which con- pyridine groups AN‑40 AN‑25 on the decomposition of sists the heating of solutions of acrylamide and of ammonium

Н2 О2 and it is shown that in both cases, increasing the de- persulfate with or without added into the reaction mixture gree of crosslinking of 4 to 8 % of their catalytic activity is of ions Ni (II), Co (II), Cu (II), Fe (II, III) to 333–363 K reduced in 3 times. and subsequent treatment of the polymer mass of solution of

118 A short review: specific properties of the gel — carrier of the active phase in metal-polymer catalysts potassium hydroxide (5–15 %). In this case, the formation So, in the case of the preparation of polyacrylamide gels of three-dimensional polymer structure due to intermolecu- (PAAH) as a crosslinking agent is usually used N, N’-methy- lar imidization amide groups, occurring simultaneously with lene-bis-acrylamide [2], which comprises two hydrolytically the polymerization reaction of acrylamide, and the variation unstable peptide bond. amount of the swelling of the samples is due to partial hy- In acidic and alkaline environments amide group of drolysis of the crosslinks in the subsequent processing of the PAAH hydrolyzed to carboxyl group, which leads to the par- obtained gels alkaline solutions. The disadvantages of these tial destruction of the cross-pieces and makes a major contri- methods include thermal acceleration of decomposition of bution to the growth of swelling hydrolyzed PAAH, since it the polymerization initiator is ammonium persulfate, uncon- leads to increase in cell size in the grid of the polymer and trolled number of intramolecular and intermolecular cross- to increase the mobility of the polymer chains. This can sig- linking due to local overheating of the volume of the reaction nificantly change interdiffuse characteristics of the catalysts in medium and the partial hydrolysis of intermolecular cross- the reaction. The presence of transition metal ions in phase of links, flowing along with the saponification of amide groups gel can affects the hydrolysis [7, 48–52]. of the polymer chains during the alkaline treatment of the The catalytic hydrolysis of amides, esters, simple pep- samples. Because of this, there are certain difficulties with re- tides and model compounds with peptide bonds, with the producibility of the properties of the catalysts. participation of transition metal ions [16; 17, 1801–1815] More appropriate is the preparation of the gels using a were mainly concerned with their accelerating effect on this crosslinking agent. This method allows to obtain three-dimen- process. This assumes the coordination of the metal ion on sional structure at low temperatures and controlled to vary the the carbonyl oxygen of the peptide bond or chelation with his degree of crosslinking gels by changing the amount of cross- participation. Such coordination helps to increase the excess linking agent in the reaction mixture when carrying out the positive charge and facilitates nucleophilic attack, resulting in polymerization. the rupture of the C–X bond.

where X = RNH or EtO. the inhibition of alkaline hydrolysis of the polymer network When the carbonyl group is not activated, the hydrolysis of PAAH and the more Ni (II) in the gel phase, the more of C–X bond can be significantly slowed down. pronounced inhibitory effect. The authors suggested that In [7, 48–52; 18, 1318–1322] noted that Nickel ions in- the inhibition may be caused by coordination of the metal ion crease the hydrolytic stability of polyacrylamide gel due to through nitrogen atoms linking the fragments of the gel:

,

where X, Y = Cl-, OH-. syneresis can be caused by different reasons, including the in- This coordination is likely to considerably reduce the mag- fluence of electrolytes on the external environment. nitude of the excess positive charge on the carbonyl carbon, As shown in [7, 48–52], the original (non-hydrolyzed) making it difficult nucleophilic attack of the hydroxyl anion. PAAH is not subject to syneresis. This means that swollen

It has been found that for each fixed Ni (II) ions on PAAH is PAG holds so much water that the electrolyte NiCl2 solu- a threshold concentration of alkali, which is Ni (II)/PAAH tions in the lab in the investigated range of concentrations withstand without failure. So, for [NiCl2] = 0.01 mol/l this does not lead to its displacement, but can only equilibrium threshold is observed of [NaOH] = 0.1 mol/l. to be distributed in the hydration sphere of the swollen gel. Increased swelling associated with hydrolysis of PAAH is For the detection and investigation of non-additivity ef- totally removed after the interaction of hydrolyzed gel with fects possible when applying two joint catalytic reactions, may 0.1 mol/l solution of Nickel chloride. The swelling property of be used metal-complex catalyst based on polyacrylamide gel, the gel reaches the value characteristic for the original (non-hy- believing that the catalyst of this type described above has a drolyzed) sample of PAAH, i. e. the phenomenon of syneresis. number of advantages in comparison with catalysts on the The syneresis is called spontaneous reduction of jellies hard drives. Namely, a higher permeability for the reactants or gels, followed by liquid separation. It occurs as a result of and products of reactions, higher conformational mobility compaction spatial structural grid formed in jellies macro- of the polymer matrix, contributing to the optimization of molecules in the gel — particles of the dispersed phase. The catalytic processes.

119 Section 12. Chemistry

References: 1. Копылова В. Д., Астанина А. Н. Ионитные комплексы в катализе. – М.:”Химия”. – 1987. 2. Tanaka T., Sun Shao-Tang, Nishio I. Phase transition in gels. “Scatter Techn. Appl. Supramol. And None-eguilibrim Syst. Proc. NaTO Adv., Study Inst., Wellesley, Mass., 3–12 Aug., 1980. – New-York; London. – 1981. 3. Астанина А. Н., Фрумкина Е. Л., Копылова В. Д. Связь между составом координационных центров ионитных ком- плексов и их каталитической активностью. В сб.XI: Комплексные металлорганические катализаторы полимеризации олефинов. – Черноголовка, – 1991. 4. Пропой Н. А., Астанина А. Н., Волков В. И. и др. Влияние предсорбционной обработки карбоксильного катионита на состав комплексов меди (II) и железа (III) и на их каталитическую активность в процессе окисления сульфида натрия молекулярным кислородом.//Журн.физ.химии. – 1989. – Т. 63. – № 11. 5. Kanda A., Dural M., Sarasin D., Francois J. Theta point of polyacrylamide in aqueous solution and temperature dependence of the molecular dimensions.//J. Polymer. – 1988. – V. 26. – № 3. 6. Джардималиева Г. И., Помогайло А. Д. Полимеризация и сополимеризация металлсодержащих мономеров как путь синтеза структурно-организованных катализаторов.//Кинетика и катализ. – 1998. – Т. 39. – № 6. 7. Жиленко М. П., Папина Ю. Е., Руденко А. П. Влияние сорбции ионов Ni (II) на синерезис и щелочной гидролиз на- бухших полиакриламидных гидрогелей.//Вестн. МГУ. Сер.2. Химия. – 2000. – Т. 41. – № 1. 8. Wu Xuanchi. Polymerization of acrylamide initiated by potassium persulfate in the presence of manganous salts.//Polum. Commusn. – 1984. – № 6. 9. Ricka J., Tanaka T. Phase transition in ionic gels induced by copper complexation.//Macromolecules. – 1985. – Vol.18, – № 1. 10. Hirayama Chuichi, Yamaguchi Kazuku, Matsumoto Kazuaki, Motozato Yoskiaki. Preparation of poly (N, N‑dimethyl- acrylamide) gels having a void in the center of the bead by suspension copolymerization.//Kobunski Ronbunshu. – 1983. – Vol. 40, – № 9. 11. Hernandeezbarajas J., Hunkeler D., Heterophase Water-in-Oil Polymerization of Acrylamide by a Hybrid Inverse-Emulsion, Inverse-Microemulsion Process.//Polymer. – 1997. – V. 38. – Iss. 22. 12. Ito K., Ujihira Y., Yamashita T., Horie K. Change of free volume in polymer gels as studied by positron annihilation life- times.//Acta Physica Polonica A. – 1999. – V. 95. – № 4. 13. Pietrzak M. Gamma-Radiolysis of Aqueous-Solution of Acrylic and Polyacrylic–Acid in the Presence of Cu 2+.//J. of Ra- dioanal. And Nucl. Chem. Articles. – 1995. – V. 198. – Iss. 1. 14. Beck A. J., France R. M., Leeson A. M., Short R. D. Ion flux and Deposition Rate Measurement in the RF Continnous Wave Plasma Polymerization of Acrylic-Acid.//Chem. Communications. – 1998. – Iss. 11. 15. Тяу Ван Минь. Факторы формирования центров катализа окислительных процессов в металлокомплексах на по- лимерных носителях. Дисс. … канд. хим. наук. – М. – 1993. 16. Хьюз М. Неорганическая химия в биологических процессах. – М.: Мир. – 1983. 17. Simita O., Fukuda A., Kuze E. Polyacrylamidic hydrogels in basic solutions//J. Polym.Sci.: Polym Phys. Ed. – 1978. – V.16. – № 10. 18. Прудников А. И., Сметанюк В. И. и др., Синтез гель комплексов Ni с азотсодержащими макролигандами и исследо- вание их структуры методом ИК-спектроскопии.//ВМС. Сер. А. – 1997. – Т. 39. – № 8. – С. 1318–1322.

Sivtseva Anastasia Vasilievna, Institute of Physical-Technical Problems of the North, SB RAS, research associate, Department of Materials Sciences E‑mail: [email protected]

A short review: the oxidation of cysteine by molecular oxygen

Abstract: The oxidation of cysteine by molecular oxygen depending on the conditions of reactions are consid- ered. The rate and nature of the oxidation of SH-groups depend on the ratio of the redox potentials of SH-groups and oxidant, the concentration of reagents, pH, and temperature. Keywords: oxidation of cysteine, copper (II) complexes. Most of the works related to the oxidation of cysteine polypeptide chains of proteins and active centres of many

НSCH2 СH (NH2)COOН (2‑amino‑3‑mercaptopropionic enzymes [1, 9]. Oxidized to disulfide, fragments of cys- acid, Cys), relates to the biochemistry because Cys is part of teine in proteins involved in the formation of intra — and

120 A short review: the oxidation of cysteine by molecular oxygen intermolecular crosslinking of macromolecules that signifi- the rate and nature of the oxidation of SH-groups depend on cantly modifies the properties of proteins. the ratio of the redox potentials of SH-groups and oxidant, the Study of the oxidation of cysteine by molecular oxygen is concentration of reagents, pH, and temperature. of interest not only to clarify the mechanism of the biological SH-groups can be oxidized spontaneously — by air oxy- aspects of the process. It can be useful when solving problems, gen (so-called auto-oxidation), but the rate of such processes is for example, by purification of hydrocarbons from sulfur-con- usually low [5, 1971–1978]. The authors of [3, 1075–1081] taining products, in particular, mercaptans [2, 42–46]. believe that auto-oxidation most likely caused by the presence Depending on conditions, the oxidation of cysteine oxy- of trace quantities of metals of variable valence in thiol com- gen can be described by the following equations: pounds. Oxidation of SH-groups by molecular oxygen pro-

2Cys + O2 → (Cys)2 + H2O2; ceeds at an appreciable rate only in the presence of catalysts,

4Cys + O2 → 2 (Cys)2 + 2H2O. especially with ions of iron or copper, forming complexes with Disulfides, in turn, can undergo further oxidation. Accord- oxidized thiols: ing to [3, 1075–1081; 4, 769–770; 5, 1971–1978; 6, 322–328],

In the acidic medium (pH = 2–5) thiol compounds are al- valence in its original compound — it is the same for MnSO4, most the same inert to O2 in the presence and in the absence MnCl2 and KМnO4; CuSО4, CuCl, Cu (MeCN)4ClO4; FeSО4 of metal ions of variable valence in solutions. The oxidation of and FeCl3. When this catalyst can be any compound in which cysteine by oxygen in the presence of iron protoporphyrin by the metal ion is associated with ligand — weak complexone, kinetic method in a static system investigated by Trusov P. U. and such a strong chelating agents like EDTA and cyanide ion and others [7, 380–383] and it is shown that when the pH dramatically inhibit the catalytic activity of a given number. is 6,2 D, L‑cysteine almost not oxidized. The authors associ- When the change of pH was found that the kinetic orders ated this with a low concentration of RS — anion in solution, as catalytic oxidation reaction components do not remain con- the SH-group of cysteine dissociates by half at pH = 8,19. That stant and independent of the structure of oxidized thiols. In mercaptide ion is oxidized easier than not dissociated SH-group neutral medium, the speed is directly proportional to the con- specifies the fact that the SH-groups with a higher pKa (for ex- centrations of thiol compounds and O2 and weakly dependent ample, SH group of glutathione) are oxidized slower than SH- on the concentration of metal ions. In alkaline medium, they groups with a lower pKa (for example, SH-group of cysteine). become independent of the concentration of thiols, for some, In neutral and alkaline mediums (pH = 6 to 12) the rate the reaction rate ceases to depend on the concentration of O2, of oxidation increases hundreds times in the presence of cata- and the order reaction for metal ion increases to 2. In particu- lytic amounts (10–6–10–5 М) of ions of metals of variable va- lar, with small changes in the structures group probably facili- lence [3, 1075–1081]. The magnitude of the rate of oxidation tates and homocysteine (homocysteine one CH2 group more of thiols pass through a maximum for all catalytically active than in the group probably facilitates) in the catalytic oxidation metal ions, and catalyzed by copper ions oxidation group of these thiol compounds in the presence of copper ions de- probably facilitates the maximum rate is observed at pH = 8,5, tected large differences: for example, if homocysteine kinetic n+ and in the catalysis by Mn ions is at pH = 10,5. It follows that orders for [O2] and [Cu ] remains equal to 1 as in neutral zwitter-ionic forms of thiols do not possess special proper- and alkaline media, for the group probably facilitates the order n+ ties favourable to their oxidation, as it was considered earlier. for [O2] is set to 0, and the order for [Cu ] increases to 2 in Indeed, for ESH maximum share of this form in equilibrium an alkaline medium. These data show that in the neutral envi- with the other exists at pH =м9,5 and is 0,9 at pH 8,5 and ronment of the catalytic oxidation reaction for all vehicle flow pH = 10,5 (at the point of maximum rate of oxidation during on a single mechanism, and alkaline for some of them (group the catalysis with copper and manganese) 0,5 and 0,2, respec- probably facilitates cysteine) is there a change, the others are tively. The authors noted that the largest differences in the oxidized at the previous mechanism. Complex kinetic behavior n+ oxidation rates for the catalytically active metals are observed of systems RSH-M -О2 in solutions of different acidity and its at the points of maximum dependence of W0 = f (pH), and in sensitivity to the chemical structure of oxidized compounds, is this range, the activity of metals in comparable conditions is associated with the peculiarities of complex formation of thiols reduced to ~5 times in the transition from one metal to an- with metal ions and significant differences in the interaction of other. A number of catalytic activity is as follows: these forms complexes with O2 molecule. Cu > Mn > Fe > Ni >> Co, About the oxidation state of copper in the formed com- moreover, the authors of [3, 1080] found that the activity does plexes in the literature there is no single point of view. Thus, not depend on the degree of oxidation of metals of variable it is shown that in the nitrogen atmosphere, the reaction

121 Section 12. Chemistry proceeds with the rapid formation of an intermediate para- (L‑arginine, glycine, D, L‑lysine and L‑histidine) in the magnetic complex of Cu2+. Then this complex decomposes oxidation of cysteine by molecular oxygen. An assumption with the formation of monovalent copper ion Cu+. was made that for efficient electron transfer from cysteine to RSH + Сu2+ → [RSH... CuII] → Cu+ + RSSR. weakly associated with the catalyst to the oxygen atom of the Recovery of copper ion to the monovalent state noted in cysteine must enter the inner sphere of the complex, which is [8, 355–367; 9, 90–96]. Further, according to [9, 90–96], the catalyst for this reaction. thiolat-anions form or low mercaptide Cu+: In [11, 398–406; 12, 1069–1074], it is shown that the 2RS– + Cu+ → CuSR ↓, role of catalytically active particles in the oxidation of cys- when RS– are monofunctional mercaptans, or soluble com- teine can perform the complexes of composition состава + + – – plex compounds with Cu (in presence of more hydrophilic [(Cu ) ( SR)2] and the reaction flows entirely in the co- functional groups of thiol compounds in the structure), ordination sphere of Cu+ with access to the volume of solu- – + – – 2RS + Cu+ → [(Cu ) ( SR)2] . tion of the reaction products, aminopyralid and hydrogen Constants of complex formation of Cu+ with thiol com- peroxide. Moreover, in [13, 51–62] concluded the course pounds is so great that the concentration of free ions Cu+ of the catalytic oxidation reaction of aminothiols preserv- in aqueous solutions does not exceed 10–10–10–17 mol/l de- ing the valency of copper in the process of catalysis in the pending on the pH of the medium when the total concentra- state +1 and with the transfer of electrons in the coordina- + tions in the solution of copper compounds is of the order tion sphere of Cu from thiolat ions to O2. In alkaline me- of 10–4–10–6 mol/l. dium, according to the authors, the oxygen molecule more Stauff and Nimmerfall [10, 852] investigated the cata- efficiently retained in the sphere of Cu+, recovering there 2+ lytic activity of complexes of Cu with different ligands during the catalytic oxidation to Н2О. References: 1. Степанов В. М. Молекулярная биология. Структура и функции белков. – М.: Высшая школа. – 1996. – С. 9. 2. Харлампиди Х. Э. Сераорганические соединения нефти, методы очистки и модификации.//СОЖ. – 2000. – № 7. – С. 42–46. 3. Багиян Г. А., Королева И. К., Сорока Н. В., Уфимцев А. В. Окисление тиольных соединений молекулярным кислоро- дом в водных растворах.//Изв. АН. Сер. хим. – 2003. – № 5. – С. 1075–1081. 4. Kamidate T., Itoh K., Watanabe H. Kinetic method for determination of copper (II) by the use of its catalytic effect on the oxidation reaction of cysteine.//Analytical sciences. – 1990. – V.6. – P. 769–770. 5. Darkwa James, Mundoma Claudius, Simoyi Reuben H. Antioxidant chemistry. Reactivity and oxidation of DL-cysteine by some common oxidants.//J. Chem. Soc., Faraday Trans. – 1998. – V. 94. – № 14. – Р. 1971–1978. 6. Winterbourne C. C., Diana M. Reactivity of biological important thiol compounds with oxygen, superoxide and hydrogen peroxide.//Free radical biology & Medicine. – 1999. – V. 27. – № 3/4. – Р. 322–328. 7. Трусов П. Ю., Астанина А. Н., Руденко А. П. Механизм переноса электронов с цистеина на кислород в присутствии протопорфирина железа.//Вестн. МГУ. Хим. – Т. 28. – № 34. – C. 380–383. 8. Pessi L., Montefoschi G., Musci G., Cavallini D. Novel findings of the Copper-catalyzed oxidation of cysteine.//Amino acids. – 1997. – V.13. – Iss. 3–4. – P. 355–367. 9. Багиян Г. А., Королева И. К., Сорока Н. В., Уфимцев А. В. Комплексы меди (I) с димеркаптосоединениями в качестве катализаторов окисления меркаптанов и сероводорода молекулярным кислородом в водных растворах.//Журн. Прикл. Хим. – 2003. – Т. 76. – Вып. 1. – С. 90–96.

10. Stauff J., Nimmerfall F. Chemilunescence of oxidation reactions. VIII. Chemilunescence of redox reactions with O2. 2.Reac- tion kinetics of cysteine in the presence of copper (II) catalysis//Naturforsch. – 1969. – V 246. – № 7. – P. 852. 11. Багиян Г. А., Королева И. К., Сорока Н. В., Уфимцев А. В. Кинетика каталитической реакции окисления тиольных со- единений в водных растворах в присутствии ионов меди.//Кинетика и катализ. – 2004. – Т. 45. – № 3. – С. 398–406. 12. Багиян Г. А., Королева И. К., Сорока Н. В., Уфимцев А. В. Катализ ионами меди окисления аминотиолов молекуляр- ным кислородом. Стехиометрия реакции.//Изв. АН. Сер. хим. – 2003. – № 5. – С. 1069–1074. 13. Багиян Г. А., Королева И. К., Сорока Н. В., Уфимцев А. В., Скурлатов Ю. И., Деденчук И. В., Семеняк Л. В., Штамм Е. В. Ион-молекулярные механизмы каталитического окисления тиольных соединений в присутствии ионов меди.//Химическая физика. – 2005. – Т. 24. – № 6. – С. 51–62.

122 Informational technology as the element of management efficiency in the economy

Section 13. Economics and management Andrushko Yana Viacheslavovna, Kyiv National Economic University named after Vadim Hetman, the student, the Faculty of International Economics and Management E‑mail: [email protected]

Informational technology as the element of management efficiency in the economy Abstract: The use of the information technologies as a component of I 3 –Technology in the economy (informa- tional, innovative and intellectual technologies) is examined in the article. The results of the research are analyzed for the purpose of defining of the information technologies development as the element of management efficiency. Keywords: information technologies, economy, management efficiency, IT Development Index, competitiveness. Formulation of the research problem. The management ogy to achieve optimum market parameters of the control efficiency and resolution of complex economic problems — object [4, 14]. are the main tasks in the economy. Management efficiency is The purpose of scientific research and analysis is the dealt with international companies and enterprises, insurance consideration of the impact of informational technology, par- companies and banks. Every day thousands of professionals ticularly Internet technology, on foreign economic activity, make decisions based on the evaluation and analysis of effec- as well as on managing the efficiency and competitiveness of tiveness. And for this purpose, there exists I 3 –Technology — different sectors of the economy of Ukraine. the tool which was formed for solving complex economic It’s an open secret that information technology (IT) — is problems. Modern information technologies, which are based a pervasive part of modern life. Thanks to the development on the professional use of information resources, allow econo- of IT a dynamic globalization occurs, associated with chang- mists to operate effectively in difficult economic situations and es in social and economic spheres. Information technology contribute to the competitiveness of the enterprises of Ukraine now actively influences the institutions of the society, and the during the foreign economic activity [1]. state power particularly. Analysis of recent research. For modeling ideas and de- Thorough analysis of IT given by Ukrainian and foreign velopments, settling the new challenges of analysis and forecast- scientists, namely B. V. Korneychuk, A. Y. Toporets, Z. V. Arkhi- ing, management efficiency in the economy might be useful pova, enabled us to define information technology as a process “ I 3 − Technology in the economy” based by Professor I. A. Ri- that uses a combination of methods and software-and-hardware abinin. This problem was also studied by E. D. Solozhentsev, means for data collection, processing, storage, transmission and V. V. Karasev, N. V. Khovanov and others. presentation of information in order to receive a new quality, This development is a kind of brand in creating a scien- reduce labor costs and improve the management efficiency pro- tific direction. The I 3 − Technology includes: informational, cesses of using the informational resources [2]. intellectual and innovative technologies. Thus, the main components of information technology are: • Informational, since the database and automatic pro- data collection of primary information, data processing and get- cessing of statistical data are used in the economy. ting results, transmission of the results to the information user. • Innovative, since logic and probabilistic calculation and Competitiveness of national economies is closely structural representation of systems and processes is used. linked with the development of the IT sector, and this can • Intellectual, because due to the statistics the knowledge be seen in the plot of Competitiveness Index (vertical) and base is formed, which allows to obtain new knowledge of man- the index of IT development. The more developed the IT agement efficiency criteria. sector is, the more competitive a country is. We present it in And as the information is one of the most valuable re- the scheme (fig. 1). sources of the society, including the economy, we will con- The orientation to innovation and the development of sider information technology as the element of management the IT sector provides economic growth in all highly-devel- efficiency in I 3 –Technologies. It should be noted that the oped countries and some developing countries (Japan, China, complex of methods of processing of disparate economic Israel, Malaysia, India etc.). Those were the governments of data in the operational information was worked out for de- these countries which became the main investors in high-tech, cision-making with the help of foreign information technol- and also supported the industry in the form of preferences,

123 Section 13. Economics and management creating a transparent environment for business, a compre- The results of the research. Development reserves are hensive support to small and medium-sized businesses. hidden in the intensity of usage of modern information tech- Support for Internet technologies — are the key compo- nology. According to the study, the technical ability to access nents of the economy and the society as a whole. the Internet in Ukraine is created at a high level — about We have been interested in the question of Internet tech- 90 % of companies have already provided high-speed Inter- nologies promotion in the Ukrainian business environment. net (about 76 % of Ukrainian enterprises connected all their For this purpose, we had analyzed the results of research con- computers to the Internet, 14 % — connected more than half ducted by GfK Ukraine (the Ukrainian research company of the computers, 10 % — up to half computers and 0.5 % — that is comprised to GfK Group net “Gesellschaft für Kon- do not have computers with Internet access). sumforschung” (The Society for Consumer Research) in Ger- It should be pointed out, however, that especially for this many). 1017 interviews were taken with business leaders. The study, the company has developed an index of intensity of businesses that have at least four computers took part in the use of the Internet by enterprises in Ukraine. In Ukrainian poll. The sample is representative for Ukrainian enterprises by the average index is at around 25 on a scale from 0 to 100. the number of employees, regions and sectors. The maximum It is clear that this index is higher in the more developed sampling error is 3,1 %. regions of Ukraine, in particular in the central region. The largest index is in Kiev (31,6 %), the lowest — in the North- ern region (21,4 %). The data are presented in Figure 2. The research showed that firstly the Ukrainian compa- nies use the Internet to talk about themselves, but the main way to represent the company online is a website — 62 % have it. 49 % of respondents place their personal data in on- line directories. 34 % use a paid online-advertising, wherein 25 % of which have a single online advertising experience — less than once a year. 32 % buy products via the Internet and 23 % — look for the network staff. About a third of the surveyed companies are purchasing goods online, and 12 % are selling products on the Internet, 7 % have their own In- Fig. 1. IT Development Index ternet shop.

Fig. 2. The Average Mean Index

Fig. 3. The Purpose of Using the Internet

124 Informational technology as the element of management efficiency in the economy

GFK research of management efficiency also affected only by 0,7 %, while for the remaining companies the average such aspects as the impact of the Internet on the Compa- fall was 7,3 %. ny’s financial results, which revealed that the revenues grow It turned out that among the companies whose index is more intensively and less fall for those companies which use above average, the proportion of companies whose reve- the Internet more intensively [5]. nues grew in 2013 was more than among those companies According to calculations, the active use of the Inter- whose index is below average. That is shown in Figure 4. net provides additional 6,6 % growth rate in revenues. In Among the companies with the index above average there 2013 profits, actively using the Internet technology, decreased are more profitable projects (fig. 5).

Fig. 4. Index of Using the Internet by Enterprises

Fig. 5. The Average Income and Loss of Enterprises Using the Internet What is more interesting is that, even the average wage As the experience of developed countries shows, there is a among the enterprises with an index above 25 increased direct relationship between the level of penetration of Internet by 6 %, while the index of below 25 — by 3 % a year. Thus, technologies and the growth of GDP. According to the data, the companies that use the Internet intensively, have higher in- increase in the index of the intensity of Internet use in Ukraine’s come growth, high profitability, wage growth and create more economy by 10 points will lead to GDP growth by 1 %, which in work places. monetary terms is estimated at additional 14 billion UAH. Driven by the availability of large skilled labor pool as well We can’t but mention that powerful IT- centers are as relatively low personnel costs, Ukraine was the fastest grow- formed in Ukraine: in Kyiv, Dnepropetrovsk, Lviv, Odessa ing IT market in the whole CEE region before the financial and others that have already created a lot of work places in crisis. Developments in the coming years will show whether it the industry with high level of wages [6]. And thanks to will regain this status. this — powerful projects are implemented. An example is However, in Ukraine IT industry is still underinvested in the BIONIC Hill in Kiev — the first Ukrainian innovation many areas. The low level of IT expenditures and low share park, in the creation of which the state invested 50 million of IT services and software sales in the total market value USD. The leading Ukrainian and international compa- means a high potential for further growth. nies will work there, a key specializations of which are IT, An important feature of Ukrainian IT market is rela- biotechnology and energy conservation. The project will tively high proportion of IT outsourcing work (as opposed create 35 thousand workplaces. There will be also created to development of customized software), which some- an educational institution BIONIC University in the park times is viewed as a relatively low-value adding activity [8]. together with leading IT-companies. Its goal is to train highly

125 Section 13. Economics and management qualified specialists by using advanced learning technologies created, which are useful for solving problems in foreign trade that are directly related to practical activities. activities. While using information technologies an index So we can state the fact that: on the international arena of intensity of Internet technologies and their penetration rate Ukraine currently benefits mainly due to human capital (high should be considered, which will allow successful implement adult literacy rate and the spread of higher education), and low of enterprise management. cost of mobile communications and the Internet. Together with the achievement of the quality level of AVentures Capital estimated that Ukraine has already the information technology development, the practice of stra- formed multibillion IT industries. About 100 thousand pro- tegic management efficiency solutions of complex economic grammers are working in the local IT companies, and besides problems will get a powerful tool to automate the collection, these are the world-class developers. Ukraine now takes the first processing, storing, analyzing, organizing, sharing and report- place in the number of developers in Eastern and Central Eu- ing the information of any enterprise. It requires: rope, and the number of IT people in the country is growing. – a range of measures to achieve a new level of perfor- Besides, market experts expect that the volume of Ukrai- mance of the industry (as nowadays most companies are fo- nian IT market will continue to increase, both with respect cused on work with foreign customers, while the domestic to domestic sales and export of IT services. Participation of market is still in its infancy); non-Ukrainian companies in Ukrainian IT business is also ex- – support for start-up movements, which lay the foun- pected to increase. The main consumers of IT products are in dation for the emergence of new approaches and trends, al- financial sector, telecommunication sector, trade, industry as lows to become the cradle of big business in the future; well as the public sector [8]. – creating an environment for the physical comfort for The conclusions. Thereby at the present stage of the de- the players of the IT market. velopment of competitive market new problems with manage- Due to the joint, effective and efficient operations of the ment efficiency appear, the essence of which is in need of business elite and the state, the Ukrainian high-tech industry organization of enterprises information flows into a single has a chance to not only catch up, but also overtake Europe in information space. That’s for what the I 3 -Technologies are the next five to eight years. References: 1. Solozhentsev E. D. I 3 − Technologies in the economy. – P. 5–20 2. Arkhipova Z. V., Parkhomov V. A. Information Technologies in Economics: Studies. Allowance. – Irkutsk: BSUEL, – 2003, – 184 p. 3. Trofimov V. V. Information systems and technologies in economics and management. – Glava 1. – P. 10. 4. Toporets A. Y. Information Technologies in Economics: Studies. Allowance. UDC 519.68. – Moscow, – 2005. – L. 5. 5. [Electronic resource]. – Mode of access: http://reklamaster.com/ 6. [Electronic resource]. – Mode of access: http://www.ukr.net/news/tehnologii.html 7. Bozhko V. P., Vlasov D. V., Gasparian M. S. Information Technology in economics and management: Teaching Materials. – M.: EAOI. – 2008. – 120. 8. [Electronic resource]. – Mode of access: http://investukraine.com/sectors/information-technologies

Bakhyt Arnabol Bakhytuly, President of «Kazsportinvest» JSC, Russian Scientific-Research Institute of Economic of Agriculture of Russian Academy of Science, postgraduate student Nurgazina Gulmira Esimbaevna, Candidate of economic sciences, associate professor, candidate for a doctor’s degree E‑mail: [email protected]

Globalization and internationalization of world food and agricultural product markets

Abstract: Interpretation of globalization and internalization influence on the world food and agricultural product markets is examined in the article. Moreover, the global problem of food safety is also examined. Keywords: globalization, internalization, global economic problem, agricultural product markets, world food security.

126 Globalization and internationalization of world food and agricultural product markets

Being an objective trend of the development of human Guinness, Bailey’s, Pillsbury and Haagen-Dazs represent just civilization, globalization provides additional opportunities a small part of the new company’s production. and offers great benefits to the economies of countries. Due to The USA market occupies the first position in M&A this objective process the production costs saving is reached, transactions volumes rating. Over the last few years there resources allocation is optimized on a global level, the range is have been carried more than 40 transactions with the overall broadened, the quality of products in the national markets is cost of over $100 billion. The most significant one is the -ac heightened and scientific, technological and cultural achieve- quisition of Kroger Co by Grocery, the top bakery company, ments become more available. But this process involves the for $13 billion. Among other M&A transactions that could costs and risks for national economies of both rich and poor also be mentioned are: Hicks, Muse, Tate & Furst investment countries. Regarding those countries which do not have pos- company’s acquisition of a part of American Home Products sibilities for controlling what is happening outside their bor- company, which owns such successful and proven trademarks ders, global and natural processes can bring a negative impact. as Jiffy Pop and Chef Boyardee, for $1,2 billion; IBP Inc.’s ex- The companies’ aim for concentration is induced by the pansion in the meat market by way of acquisition of Russer competitive advantages of large businesses over the small Foods, the USA’s largest processed meat products manufac- and medium-sized economic units. These are: incomparable turer with an annual sales of $150 million; the USA’s largest possibilities of financing the new products development and poultry manufacturer company Tyson Foods’ acquisition of quick implementation into mass production; relatively easier Hudson Foods corporation for $700 million in 1997. Regard- loan approvals, availability of bond financing and availability ing the restaurant business sector, the most noticeable was the of governmental support in case of emergency; setting of the merger between Ralcorp Holdings Inc.’s cereal and snack busi- production program on a larger market where there is always nesses with General Mills in 1997 which cost $570 million. an effect of averaging the degree of volatility; opportunities for European market is lagging behind the USA market in production diversification; cutting the production and mar- terms of number and volumes of transactions. The merger keting costs due to the economies of scale; larger export ca- of Irish companies Avonmore Foods and Waterfood Foods pability due to low production costs and well-developed sales could serve as an example of activity expansion and diversifi- network beyond national economy; possibility of heightening cation by means of M&A transactions. The united Avonmore the level of strategic planning to the highest level of corporate Waterfood Foods became the leading company in cheese management without causing any damage to the efficiency production and occupied the 4th position among the Euro- of its functioning and keeping the low level of operational pean companies in milk and dairy products sales. One of control and management by the management sector; ability the last M&A transactions that was carried on in Europe (in to withstand the outside impacts. All of these factors lead to March 1999) was between Danish company Danisco and Cul- strengthening of the concentration processes along with em- tor corporation, the producer of food additives from Finland. bracing the new levels of quality. Having survived four waves The acquisition of the latter cost Danisco $1,4 billion. Among of mergers and acquisitions since the beginning of XX cen- the transnational M&A transactions that can be mentioned tury, by the end of the 2nd millennium world economy had there are Sainbury’s (UK; the largest operator in food super- reached the new stage — a stage of globalization. Contracts markets segment) acquisition of Star Markets (USA; owns between aircraft-making companies Boeing and McDon- 60 supermarkets in Boston) for $500 million and Coca-Cola nel Douglas, car manufacturing concerns BMW and Rover Bottling’s (USA) purchase of rights for the UK Cadbury Group, Daimler-Benz and Chrysler, oil companies British Schweppes (3rd largest operator on the world beverages mar- Petroleum and Amoco, Mobil and Texaco, financial institu- ket) corporation’s trademarks for $1,871 billion. Unilever, tions Morgan Stanley and Dean Whitter Discovery, auditor the Dutch-British world leader in the food industry, has been companies Coopers&Lybrand and Pricewater-house and taking an aggressive stance in developing markets. Over the companies from other sectors confirm this thesis. Concentra- past few years the company has acquired ice-cream produc- tion and globalization trends have also affected companies in ing monopolies in Brazil, Argentina, Colombia and Mexico. the food industry. The processes of mergers and acquisitions extend beyond For several years now Eastern Europe and USA are being the transactions between companies that are already present in shaken by the mergers and acquisitions (M&A) in this sector, this market. For instance, after the completion of one of the and the volumes of these transactions are getting accounted purchase transactions, which is estimated at $7,7 billion, Du- for larger and larger sums of money. The merger of Guinness Pont Co., one of the world’s largest chemical companies, will and Grand Metropolitan into Diageo company is recognized become the sole owner of Pioneer Hi-Breed International Inc., as the biggest M&A transaction that has been carried in re- the world’s largest crops and seeds producing company. In our cent years in the food industry. This transaction, the cost of opinion, all the above-mentioned examples of M&A transac- which is estimated at £ 24 billion, led the united company tions (see the table) demonstrate well the broad scope and with annual sales of $12 billion to the same level as that of activity of concentration processes that are now widely ob- Allied Domecq, a leading corporation in the food industry. served in food industries of developed countries. But what is World-famous brands such as Gordon’s Gin, Smirnoff Vodka, more important is that the results of M&A transactions provide

127 Section 13. Economics and management a better basis for the most accurate determination of the mar- for correction of the investors’ guidelines for estimating the at- ket value of a company (particularly of that being acquired) and tractiveness of the analyzed sector as a whole. Amount of Business area of the Purchasing company Acquisition (country) Transaction date transaction, P/S P/E company aquired (country) $ million Randalls Food Market (USA) Restaurant business Safeway (USA) Jule 1999 1,43 0,66 40,65 Cruzcampo (Spain) Beer Heineken (Netherlands) May 1999 914,6 n/a 23,96 Alba Proteins (UK) Pet food IAWS (UK) October 1998 5,72 n/a 19,07 Dean Foods Agriculture Agrilink (USA) 1999 400 0,71 9,85 Host Marriott (USA) Restaurant business Autogrill (Italy) Jule 1999 529 0,77 8,4 Hudson Foods Inc. (USA) Poultry farming Tyson Foods (USA) September 1997 643 0,39 – Star Markets (USA) Food supermarkets Sainsbury (UK) June 199 482 0,45 – The advantages of economic globalization do not realize fast decrease of barriers in trade of agricultural production is automatically, and not all countries feel them equally. It is clear objectively very important. that these integrating rates do not reflect the acceleration of The modern stage of global food resources formation is economic growth in some world parts, as well as continued characterized by the system crisis of the world market posing stagnation in other world parts. Global rates for now depend serious threat of food security. primarily upon internal conditions and politics of economi- The deficiencies of world food resources, the increase in cally the strongest countries. prices for the most important types of production generat- The problem of steady, dynamic growth of world economy still ed by excess of demand over the offer, aggravated by global expects the solution, and, probably, the potential economic glo- warming of climate, a lack of hydro carbonic raw materials, balization is still insufficiently used for this purpose. Benefits speculation and politicization of commercial transactions as- from globalization are distributed unevenly and at the view of sume need of acceptance of joint efforts of the world commu- many countries — it is unfair. All achievements of the economic nity on rendering food aid, strengthening of system of social globalism of the last two decades XX century did not take off protection, innovative development of agriculture on the basis from the agenda the overcoming problem of dangerous gaps in levels of expansion of scales of investments. of countries’ economic development, a task, which in the 70’s was in The condition of world food security defines tendency, epicenter of the movement for a new international economic essence in which in the following: order. For 20 % of the population of the planet living in the rich • Hunger scales in the world are increasing, number of countries 86 % of world GDP, and are the share of the poor- starving steadily grows, and the whole regions till some years in est 20 % — only 14 %. The remaining disparity is not only the a row are in a condition of an acute shortage of the food; heritage of colonialism and historical destiny, but also the result • Problem of the millennium — to cut in the world starving unfair and unequal cooperation today. by half and underfeeding (to 500 million people) it is not car- Unilateral advantages of globalization leave many coun- ried out. Moreover, since 2006 their number increased almost tries and regions on the periphery of progress and even out by 70 million people and now there are 923 million people; of its sphere. The problem of more equitable distribution of • Along with cumulative action of many factors, food needi- economic globalization process of keeps relevance and con- ness of millions of people is caused by high prices of food, wors- tinues to excite the international community. ening quality of life and threatening achievement of long-term One of aspects of the world economy globalization is the in‑ global food security; terstate strategy formation of trade in agricultural production, • The initial response measures (control of prices, export in the process of realization which on the international reduction, etc.) accepted by the governments, make only the scene interests of different groups of countries face. The -ag limiting impact. Many of these measures, being quick, in the ricultural sector of the majority of economically developed long term are inefficient and have negative impact on level and countries is protected by a difficult and quite effective state stability of the world prices; system of measures, which concludes such tools as tariff sys- • In the long term high prices of food can be favorable to tem, non-tariff restrictions, quantitative restrictions of im- agriculture in all developing countries if they are followed by port, selective licensing, voluntary restrictions of export and providing the major public benefits and improvement of quality etc. The protectionist system is supplemented with the state of life. Advantages which small farmers will get, can stimulate subsidizing of national agricultural producers by means of sustainable economic development, and also provide stability grants, preferential financing and other forms. Annual finan- of the rural territory. cial support of agricultural sector of economically developed The revealed tendencies of development of world food mar- countries reaches more than 250 bln. dollars. As international ket taking into account the limiting factors causing deep pro- trade is one of the most important moving forces of economic cesses in world economy do not allow to predict high rates of a growth of the world community, a question of essential and gain of food and raw material resources, even in remote prospect.

128 Communicational delay backgrounds in modern World economy forecast: obstacles overcoming milestones

By calculations of experts of FAO till 2030 production For many states carrying out the effective and reasonable of grain will increase by 20–21 %, and the total amount will policy aimed at self-sufficiency by food — a basis of food reach 2149–2150 million tons at requirement of 2675 million security. Other countries need program implementation tons, use of seafood will be 100 million tons at requirement of accumulation of currency resources for purchasing food of 168 million tons. The gain of foodstuff making till 1985 — abroad and acceptance of preventive measures for decrease in 30 million tons a year, in 1985–1995 — 12 million tons is damage which can result from sudden loss of access to the reduced, in 1996–2030 no more than 9 million tons a year food markets. Thus the most obvious step on this way is the are supposed. Dynamics of demand thus will be opposite as formation of internal reserves of the food for consumption the population of the planet in 2030 will be about 8,9 billion during the crisis period. But the use of stocks for satisfaction people (an annual gain — 90 million people) at the general of demand in an emergency situation is a temporary measure. unevenness of its distribution on regions of the world. Eventually in the course of ensuring national food security Situation with food supply is aggravated because of aspira- achievement of an effective ratio of consumption level and tion of the states to increase quality of the food inaccessible self-sufficiency by the food, and also establishment of opti- now, approximately, for one billion people. It is specified in mum size of import of agricultural production in the presence the Report on the world development of 2008 prepared by the of effective system of insurance in emergency situations is es- staff of the International bank of reconstruction and develop- sential to the majority of the countries. ment of the World bank that for a solution of the food problem Thus, the main global economic problem of the agricultural during the period from 2000 to 2030 it is necessary to increase markets is ensuring food security. The problem of food security production of grain by food needs for 50 % and meat for 85 %. mentions as ensuring sufficiency of deliveries of food at all lev- Negative tendencies of formation of food resources els — global, national, regional and individual as the system make and will make depressive impact on the food market of insurance upon the risks connected with these deliveries. as in general, and the certain countries, irrespective of their The optimum combination of three elements — inter- economic state. nal production, import, creation of public stocks — allows Tendencies of planetary scale (food crisis, global cli- creating effective system of food security. Import from differ- mate change, deficiency of hydro carbonic raw materials, ent countries promotes reduction of risk in connection with an increase in prices for energy carriers and food, etc.) ad- a crop failure in the export countries. Internal production versely influence on all national food systems, promoting serves as an instrument of insurance against risks connected formation of potential threats of food security. The defi- with sufficiency and availability of import. Accumulation of ciency increased by imbalance of supply and demand; ex- stocks is temporary, but rather effective measure for elimina- port reduction; speculative tendencies and politicization of tion of sudden shortages of food. commercial transactions, makes depressive impact to the Within multilateral system of world trade regulation it is world food market. It means that the food security of the necessary to form a set of rules which will consider specific state can be guaranteed only at further dynamic innovative features of different groups of countries, to have sufficient development of own production of raw materials and food, flexibility, to promote implementation of the most suitable stability of the rural territory and eradication of poverty as combination of measures in the field of a trade policy to social phenomenon. reach food security of all countries. However, trade liberal- Versatility of a problem of food security dictates the need ization is not the only way of achievement of food security. of searching one more way of its providing. The combination Trade and internal production have to complete each other of the following elements can be optimum option: preserva- organically. tion and expansion of internal production of the food, ensur- Reforms in agricultural area have to be directed on ing steady import, creation of appropriate stocks of the food. strengthening of food security and achievement of steady in- And any of listed depending on a situation in each concrete ternal production, ensuring access to the stable and predict- country can be the leading element. able world market.

Dvoynykh Kostyantyn Yevgenovych, Odessa national university, Ph.D Economics E‑mail: [email protected]

Communicational delay backgrounds in modern World economy forecast: obstacles overcoming milestones Abstract: The article is devoted to forecast perspectives in modern World (network one) economy conditions. As a corresponding invariant for transition economical conditions the international ethnical processes are defined.

129 Section 13. Economics and management

On that basis is possible to suggest super-ethnos economical model as certain invariant for simulation and forecast- ing in modern World economy. Keywords: modern World economy, forecast, economical invariant, ethnical processes, simulation, super-ethnos. The fact of point of no return passing concerning settled a number of previous models by becoming (in its turn) to economical approaches (in forecast and simulation context) basis for next models certain quantity. At the same time is the principal characteristic of modern World (network) between next models and corresponding previous ones are economy. Such bifurcation psychologically is still enough occurring certain pathways of communications where pre- complicatedly perceived on collective level, however there is a viously chosen model of current research could be absent. clear reality directed into world economical development per- In other words has to exist a number of coherent models spectives. In the context of modern World economy the eco- which conjoining primary assumption (invariant existing in nomical reality dynamic is far ahead relatively any previously different approaches collisions) and forecast technology for declared knowledge reactive analysis possibilities. In particu- new network economy. De-facto such technology is a system lar, it concerns economical forecast and simulation. Therefore, effect from ethnical processes models network superposi- questions of processes and trends analysis improvement in tion becoming to base for semi-natural experiment regular accordance with known approaches are conceding regard- providing in network conditions for economical forecasting. ing timeliness of decision-making concerning: which from According to its applied realization network principles such approaches (perhaps unknown today) are the right ones. It experiment providing has to be accessible and affordable for means in modern World economy technological possibilities everybody, Only in such conditions timely answer on net- for any kinds of simulating and forecast providing are existing work economy key task can be received which forecast ap- de-facto. Remains only to understand: in which ways and for proach is right one [2]. which tasks such available instrument has to be used. For primary network models construction the economi- In the context of economical forecast invariant ethnical cal invariant (ethnical processes) should be formalized in processes definition is necessary to address: in network econo- context of economical science knowledge famous sources sys- my invariant is needed in principal replacement the imitational tematization. Such systematization result has to be extremely and natural simulation kinds on semi-natural ones. The rea- clear and acceptable for network development logic. Namely son of that is: essential simulating kinds are certain extremities existence a certain number basic elements and principles considered to stable economic understanding. Therefore, these their interrelations have to be defined. Generalized conclusion simulation kinds can nor be defined as perspective ones. Simul- economical literature analysis: there are two extreme poles. Be- taneously, for semi-natural simulations is being considering tween them are existing different transition forms of energetic necessary networks flexibility. Thus, especially economical in- exchange in economical activity widely various kinds. Eco- variant is guarantying its external interrelations (economical nomical thought systematization permits to suggest next its reality hierarchical perception elements). Exactly that is a structure in modern World economy problems context: principle for real collisions providing for a number of differ- • Openness problems — Eurasian super-ethnos represen- ent economical systems during of their simulation and forecast tatives (Russian Federation) scientific thought; process. From that point of view is being obviously: exactly • Closeness problems — Western super-ethnos represen- semi-natural simulating is able to answer for modem world tatives (USA and EU) scientific thought [1]. economy question: not how in better way provide forecast- As common background for such structure is possible to ing in accordance to stable understandings, but how to work mention: out timely decision concerning concrete forecast approach – lack of dominating (in world context) scientific thought (even, still unknown) — it should be chosen as is right one [1]. of effective economic systems representatives from other su- The Neo-economy (World one) is a radical destruction of per-ethnoses; philosophical reality established stereotypes perception (estab- – their joint recognition force-major circumstances as lished way terms as pace acceleration, resources exhaustion, self- natural experiments over the independent from human ra- destruction, destructive psychology). Therefore, known eco- tional will processes (it concerns wars as ethnical processes nomical analysis approaches are fixed into invariant deprivation sublimation); methods. So, they are depended from economical changes dy- – tactical recognition and research by all scientific com- namics. Thus, the neo-economic difference is in considering for munities the energetic exchange transitional schemes between economical analysis the newly-additional factor: semi-natural world economical poles including transition energetic streams experiment as a number of ethnical processes ones. direction and intensity descriptions (statistics as a basis for The semi-natural experiment compulsorily requires its conclusions and forecast). own network Internet-realization. The basic prerequisite for In order to compare in such sphere economical poles as this is a transition from ethnical processes primary models key criteria can be highlighted: to their network grouping. Anyone from such similar mod- • psychological — economical self-feel comparatively els has to be a result of superposition or combination from other super-ethnoses;

130 Communicational delay backgrounds in modern World economy forecast: obstacles overcoming milestones

• applied — own economical activity directions aggregat- super-ethnos) into a war to destroy (considered for conflicts ing specialization on the basis of economical reality collective between super-ethnoses). In other words, we are talking about feeling. coercive intervention attempts into ethnical process in order For Western super-ethnos is considered dominating glob- to artificially break super-ethnos (Eurasian) within itself. Pay al feel and strategic sureness concerning compulsory inflow attention: exactly Eurasian super-ethnos (not in contrary to of external energy (even if now unknown time and ways). acknowledged economical thought) is giant world energetic Applied instrument in such psychological situation becomes donor in various formats. But Russia (war initiator) does not management and marketing approaches improvement in re- have recourses excesses for own strategic consumption and source limitation conditions, but also technologies for unlim- development So, today available recourses are being spending ited Universe resources reaching systematic development [1]. on obviously losing strategic goals which will be stipulated by Strategic rightness of such vision feeling provides harmonious losses through: superposition between newly technologies and stable man- • directly military costs; agement approaches. Therefore, all their combinations by all • any various standoffs for to being in contrary to global means will be useful for Western super-ethnos economy. world economy; What is about Eurasia super-ethnos then necessary to con- • any kinds of Western super-ethnos sanctions (including clude the next dominating understanding and psychological satellites); conviction: under external contacts this super-ethnos any kinds • incorporation or annexation a‑priori unprofitable and of energy are leaving in any conditions by various ways and for- economically unpromising regions (taking into account Rus- mats [4]. Thus, in management prevail various attempts of co- sian economy format); ercive restriction for this irreversible (according to perception) • artificial manipulations in the context of international process manifestation. Simultaneously is occurring necessity to law power changing where Russian Federation (including its realize strategically risky technologies for unlimited Universe ancestors) historically always came to fiasco; resources reaching. In its turn, that is a reason for obsolete tech- • strategic internal recourses depletion (including hu- nologies based on strategic resources within limited Earth ex- man one); panse using. Seems necessary to add that other super-ethnoses • all consequential derivative long lasting additional factors. economical thought and collective perception a‑priori agrees Then a newly vision on Russian economical thought is with such constellation. That is why their attention is concen- forming (concerning infinite loop trends in the context of stable trated on balance and proportions compliance between two negative economical situation overcoming). Is obviously that world economical poles. Therefore is possible to confidently global economic trend formations are stipulated by collective say: two world economical poles are stipulating world potential subconscious (by ethnical psychology). Lack on collective level difference whose local demonstrating itself initiates world im- the rational logic concerning economical activity (as a conse- portance economical aftermaths. Leftover super-ethnoses gen- quence — military or political ones) means: there is a natural erate links (world economy elements) for energy flowing in process — ethno-genes [4]. Pay attention on the fact that war world economy expanse. On such understanding basis it be- compulsorily leads to energy leaving processes acceleration and comes possible to format certain milestones for forecasting in diversification for any participants. For most vulnerable in this modern World economy conditions. context (world market donor) there is uniquely economical sui- Events in Ukraine during 2014 have actualized the problem cide. Thus, natural experiment 2014 is already possible to define of common analysis for economical thought sources written in as artificial attempt to sever super-ethnos within itself which: peaceful conditions. In the first place, because of exactly eco- – has unlocked internal hidden energy enormous volumes; nomical thought poles (Western and Eurasian super-ethnoses) – has encouraged energy streams intensification and ac- during a lot of decades have not been involved into wars within celeration within stable world schemes of exchange; themselves. That has stipulated dominating of usual for peace- – has not changed energy distribution scheme between ful time economical reality understanding. However, modern world economic poles (in anyway final recipient gets energy world economy requires another prism for these events ob- but donor — loses). serving, in particular, in the context of forecast certain basis Therefore experiment confirms that super-ethnos is an distinguishing and formalization in such conditions. Men- energetic independent system and can be used as an invariant tioned events should be recognized as natural experiment in for World economy during transition period. To a certain ex- world economy founding certain global economical trend. tent it witnesses in favor of assumption that World economy is From economical invariant (ethnical processes) point of vi- super-ethnoses interrelation implication. So, super-ethnos sion this experiment essence is: global attempt to transform model can be used as a basis for effective forecast in modern the domination on certain territory standoff (processes within World economy conditions. References: 1. Dvoynykh. K. E. Paradigma ekonomicheskogo vampirizma [The paradigm of economical vampirism], Law literature, – Odessa, Ukraine. – 2007.

131 Section 13. Economics and management

2. Toffler E. Shok budustchego [Future shock]. – Publishing house AST, – Moscow, Russia. – 2002. 3. Gumilev L. N. Etnogenes i Biosfera Zemli [Ethnogenes and biosphere of the Earth]. – Azbuka-klassika, – S.-Petersburg, Russia. – 2002.

Gorodetskaya Olga Stanislavovna, Podolsk Institute (branch) of Moscow State University of Mechanical Engineering (MAMI), Candidate of Economics, Associated Professor, The Department of Enterprise economics and administration in machine manufacturing E‑mail: [email protected]

Analysis and projection of economic activity in Russian machine manufacturing Abstract: The article presents the results of the analysis of entrepreneurship in machine manufacturing in the Russian Federation and its elements (organizational and innovating potential, entrepreneurial environment, social and economic effectiveness). The method of entrepreneurship risk is evaluated in machine manufacturing. Risk evaluation is based on descriptive model methods of extrapolation and the method of minimal sum of squares cal- culations is applied. Results can be used in the macroeconomic of Russia and regional entrepreneurial regulation. Keywords: analysis of projection of economic tendencies, entrepreneurship, projection of economic tenden- cies in machine manufacturing. In the course of reformation of the national industry, ma- with the previous year; in 2013 it accounted for 96,6 % com- chine manufacturing commercial enterprises conduct a neces- pared with the previous year [6]. sary complex modernization of production giving an impor- According to the national statistics, the Russian machine tant role to the improvement of control systems and technical manufacturing industry will increase the production along re-equipment in the conditions of sharp market competition. with the foreign firms. It is confirmed by forecasts and evalu- Not only analysis of economic activity, but also a specially ations of BusinesStat: by 2018, the volumes of import of ready developed method of projection of economic processes in metal processing machines will grow by 4,7 % per year at av- the industry as a main goal of optimization of entrepreneurial erage. The national manufacturers will also increase the pro- machine manufacturing risks is required for the effective solu- duction. In 2018 the level of production of metal processing tion of problems of entrepreneurial activity in the Russian ma- machines will be about 5,8 thousand pieces of ready equip- chine manufacturing sphere [1, 84], [2, 48]. It is determined ment. The demand for hydro-manipulators production for by the fact that machine manufacturing is one of the main in- the forest management in the Russian Federation rises every dustries of the economy that define the development of other year, which is proved by the replacement of existing outdated complexes such as fuel and energy, chemical, oil and chemical, equipment and increase in the volume of forest harvesting in transport and construction [3, 100]. Thus, the most impor- the Russian Federation. The following regions take the leading tant specific indicators of gross domestic product in Russia, role in the structure of forest harvesting in the Russian Fed- and, consequently, the competitiveness of the manufactured eration: Khabarovsk region, Primorsky Krai, Irkutsk region, product, depend on the development level of the machine Arkhangelsk region and the Republic of Karelia. The average manufacturing industry. The machine manufacturing includes cost of a ready item is 800 000 rubles; the planned number of a complex of fields of processing industry that performs ma- personnel is 150 people and the volume of main project in- chine manufacturing and includes general machine manufac- vestment is 100 million rubles. [9] turing, transport machine manufacturing, radio-electronics, In recent years, the possibility of industrial risks in the electro-technical and instrumentation manufacturing indus- management of machine manufacturing entrepreneurial ac- try, agricultural machine manufacturing, machine tool manu- tivity has taken significant place among other entrepreneurial facturing and energy machine manufacturing [1, 86]. Accord- spheres in the industrial activity due to production growth. ing to statistical data, the peak of entrepreneurial activity in With regard to this reason, one of the first places is taken by the Russian Federation was the highest in 2010. For instance, machine manufacturing after electric energy, chemical and in 2009 it accounted for 66,8 % compared with the previous metal industries, including machine tool and automobile year; in 2010 it accounted for 115,2 % compared with the pre- manufacturing [3, 101]. vious year; in 2011 it accounted for 111,1 % compared with To put Russia back on the world market as one of the the previous year; in 2012 it accounted for 102,7 % compared leaders of aircraft industry by 2015, it will require $20 billion,

132 Analysis and projection of economic activity in Russian machine manufacturing including about $12 billion from the federal budget (with- «AvtoVAZ-Renault-Nissan» sold 24,1 % less — 50 455 cars, out consideration of costs on buying aircraft equipment un- and during 8 months the decrease was 10,2 % to 479 144 cars. der state defense order). According to the concept, the state In the whole, the car sales in August reduced by 25,8 %. The should bear a high share of responsibility, particularly, in the chairman of the committee of automobile producers of AEB sphere of covering the risks that aircraft industry can’t cover Joerg Schreiber noted that the state program on utilization on its own [8]. gave hope regarding the end of the market fall. However, the As a proof of the above said, the project of a Law program hasn’t started yet. There is also deficit of financing «About industrial policy» was passed unanimously during for a full-scale technical re-equipment in ship-building in- the first reading at plenary meeting of the State duma in Octo- dustry. As Alexey Rakhmanov, the president of the Russian ber 2014. The document is intended to significantly improve state «Unified ship-building corporation» (USC) explained, the situation with investment climate in the industry as well as the existing investment in the industry is not sufficient for its give serious preferences to high technology sectors of the Rus- proper development. The corporation will analyze programs sian industry, including machine manufacturing. It presup- of technical re-equipment according to regional and cluster poses the implementation of long-term (till 2025) tax benefits principle and the investment programs will be selected, which and preferences for new complex projects [7]. are optimal and can give the priority to investments that will According to 2014 data, there is financing deficit and finan- cut costs and increase workforce productivity [7]. cial risks in the machine manufacturing industry. For example, But things are not that bad in machine manufacturing after the examination of the situation in the Russian market entrepreneurship. Investment programs are in operation. For of trucks that showed a drop by 20 %, taking into account the example, OJSC «Petrozavodskmash», a production site of experience of fellow colleagues in the industry and with the CJSC «AEM-tekhnologii» (a part machine manufacturing purpose to preserve financial stability of the company, Sep- division of Rosatom — Atomenergomash), put a new au- tember 26, 29 and 30 were announced the days of downtime tomated thermal incinerator in the operation at the site of at KAMAZ with regard to separate personnel categories, with- pipe spools and collectors of assembly-welding production. out presence at their work stations and payment of two thirds The incinerator is intended for high temperature release of of average salary. According to the decree, not all KAMAZ part of pipe spools of the main circulation pipeline of the employees will have additional days off in September. Regular, APS. During thermal processing the fluctuation of tempera- repair and prevention works will be conducted as before. The tures in the zone of the incinerator should not be more than departments involved in realization and shipment of ready two-three degrees. The use of high-speed pulse gas burners in product, production of spare parts, bus chassis and diversifica- the new incinerator allows adhering to the given condition, tion products as well as a part of the personnel servicing the which increases the quality of thermal processing of the weld- continuously operating production in the number required ing joints and items. Furthermore, according to the results for the sustenance of its work in stand-by duty, functioning of commissioning tests, the incinerator shows good techni- of the life support systems and property safety will perform cal and economic indicators. One can talk about the fact that work traditionally, according to a regular five-day schedule. with the implementation of the given incinerator the costs on During the days of downtime, KAMAZ lawyers, accountants thermal processing from the point of gas flow as a main com- and HR specialists will do their work. It is especially noted ponent of fuel and energy resources will reduce by 20–25 %. that if required, for the purpose of monthly plan realization, During the incinerator construction, modern technologies the downtime days will be cancelled. 30 thousand employees and materials were used. The lining of the new incinerator will be working at «AvtoVAZ» by 2020. It became known (special ceramic fiber thermal insulating material) does not that redundancy of the personnel of «Volzhskiy avtozavod» require long advance heating before the loading of items for will not stop even after the cut of losses. 45 % of employees processing, which saves the gas flow and reduces production will be redundant during next six years. Thus, only 30 thou- cycle. Tube recuperator increases the efficiency of work of sand out of 55 thousand employees will be left at «AvtoVAZ» the new equipment, which is installed in the system of smoke by 2020. The situation of automobile factory in Tolyatti re- removal. The air for burning is heated here, which saves fuel mains unsatisfactory. During the first six months of this year gas. The new thermal incinerator was acquired during an in- «AvtoVAZ» brought a loss of 55 million Euros to Renault and vestment program realized in OJSC «Petrozavodskmash» the redundancy of staff and production reduction continue. under the guidance of CJSC «AEM-tekhnologii» in order Nevertheless, there are quite optimistic forecasts regarding the to increase the volumes of production and assimilate the pro- profit and growth of production. August sales of «AvtoVAZ» duction of equipment for the atomic industry of Russia [7]. in 2014 dropped by 32,3 % compared with August of the pre- Another example. A new industrial park will be created vious year (from 39 to 26,5 thousand vehicles). According to at the site of OJSC «Uralmashzavod». The future indus- the report by the Association of European Business (AEB), trial zone will occupy about 202,5 ha. Industrial park is a the largest Russian automobile producer sold 18,5 % less cars specially organized territory controlled by one operator and (247 289 units) from January to August 2014 compared with aimed at placement of production complex. The site should the same period in 2013. Thus, in August 2014 the group be provided with energy carriers, infrastructure and required

133 Section 13. Economics and management administrative and legal conditions. The project of creation of But, as Tatiana Golikova, the head of the Audit cham- the industrial park on the base of Uralmashzavod is realized in ber, stated during a parliamentary reading in the Federation order to attract investors as well as increase the efficiency of Council, according to the information of RIA «Novosti», the freed sites, particularly, production and service companies of main risk for the Russian economy in October 2014 will be machine manufacturing complex capable of developing inter- the drop in oil and gas prices lower than the projected level. nal cooperation and providing for the needs of OJSC «Ural- Another risk is the limited internal financial resources and mashzavod», CJSC «URBO» with regard to materials, parts, possible difficulties in the attraction of external ones. Also, spare part etc. It is planned that for project work a managing according to the words of the Head of the Audit chamber, company will be selected, which will be engaged in attract- the level of inflation can be higher than expected in 2014 and ing investors and promoting the industrial park. It is planned further periods. With regard to such situation, entrepreneur- that the operating group under the governor of Sverdlovsk ial risks in machine manufacturing will grow. Entrepreneurial region will analyze all materials on creation of the industrial risks of machine manufacturing enterprises are a combina- park by July, 15. Gazprombank (main stakeholder of Ural- tion of presupposed dangers related to specific activity in ma- mashzavod) is ready to support the project. The volume of chine manufacturing and high level of risks of this activity, required investment will be defined by the concept of creation taking into consideration unfavorable results of operation and and development of the industrial park, which will be pre- management of a machine manufacturing enterprise with the pared by the operating group. Earlier, the bank bought a part possibility of profit loss, damage to property of the enterprise of the factory’s site, where a new enterprise «Uralmash — and health of the personnel, which should be insured. The ten- drilling equipment» was set up. Before the purchase of this dency of production growth in machine manufacturing may site, the production of drilling equipment was stopped. In the significantly increase provided the machine manufacturing last few years, OJSC «Gazprombank» invested 20 billion enterprises conduct an effective evaluation and insurance of rubles in the project [7]. risks saving themselves in the process of production activity Also, entrepreneurs in machine manufacturing try to and having confidence in the conditions of strict industrial modernize the production and improve the quality of prod- competition [1, 22]. ucts: according to the plans of the top-management of the In- In order to evaluate entrepreneurial risks in machine man- dustrial group «Generatsiya», modernization of the factory ufacturing and their further prevention, including insurance, of OJSC «DZKHM» (a part of the group of companies op- we improved the method of evaluation and insurance from erating under the brand «Generatsiya») started and will be risks of machine manufacturing enterprises (MEandIR) with performed in several stages. On the 10th of September, within the help of extrapolation method on the basis of a complex the frames of the first stage of modernization of the enter- analysis of the entire activity of machine manufacturing firms. prise, an automated site of robotized welding of items and In the process of machine manufacturing there are often indi- metal structures was put into operation. The nomenclature of cators provoking risks, which require appropriate evaluation product release of the site is volume and spatial items as well and insurance. The optimal variant of projection of such risks is as metal constructions with outline dimensions. Currently, the methods of regression and extrapolation transformed for the production of equipment for the construction of Belarus MEandIR with the help of the following calculation: APS is performed at the site. Unlimited possibilities of the Y (N + 1) = A0 + A1 × Y (N) + A2 × Y (N – 1) + robotized site will allow producing equipment for APS and + A3 × Y (N – 2) +…+ AK × Y (N – K), any other industrial enterprise [7]. where А0 and А1 are the parameters of activity in machine Izhevsk electromechanical plant «Kupol» (an enterprise manufacturing; Y is an actual value of a result feature. Pre- of the AAD group «Almaz-Antei») will spend 1,5 billion liminary calculation of parameters is performed through the rubles on modernization of production in 2014. «Only in the method of minimal sum of squares (MSS); the parameters of last 3 years 3 billion rubles were given for investment activ- activity in machine manufacturing for evaluation of their value ity. Machines, different devices, generators, supply sources and their possibility are obtained with the help of MSS de- are purchased and premises are reconstructed and repaired. viations of actual values from the ones discovered through IEMP «Kupol» produces the systems of anti-aircraft de- regression equation. fense (AAD) of short range, the main developer of which is On the assumption of the need to perform periodical another enterprise of the group — Scientific and research elec- forecast of further development of the situation in machine tromechanical institute (Moscow). Particularly, IEMP is the and equipment production, which is a very important fea- head enterprise in production of anti-aircraft missile system ture when calculating the possibility of a risk, its evaluation «Tor-М2E». Moreover, the plant performs modernization of and management, the specific of machine manufacturing anti-aircraft missile system «Osa-AKM», anti-aircraft missile enterprises and the management of their activities should system «Tor-М1» and their modification, production of on- be taken into account. It is determined by the fact that their board equipment of surface-to-air guided missile, and renders production activity is defined by many factors and cannot be services to exploiting organizations. AAD systems produced at a constant value, because the change of production factors the enterprise are in the inventory of over twenty countries [7]. depends on the difficulty of technology of creation of the

134 Characteristic aspects of the Northwest Baltic Region Sea basin manufactured products and kinds of production specializa- search, one can successfully solve the tasks of management tion at any period of time. Hence, MEandIR is adapted for of the entire machine manufacturing. The effectiveness of corporate structures of the machine manufacturing indus- production activity after the implementation of improved try. Using the developed approach to analysis and evaluation and adapted method of evaluation and insurance from of risks arising in machine manufacturing in the form of risks for machine manufacturing enterprises increases by MEandIR for further management of them and insurance 35–40 % at average and the profit grows by 15 % as mini- from them as the most effective applicable instrument of re- mum [1, 112]. References: 1. Gorodetskaya O. S. Analysis and optimization of risk management system of commercial enterprises (by the example of machine manufacturing industry): Monograph. – M.: Published by Nobel Press, – 2012. – 169 p. 2. Gorodetskaya O. S. Evaluation of entrepreneurial risks of machine manufacturing enterprises//Guidelines of an entrepre- neur. Scientific and practical publication: Collection of scientific works. Issue ХIV – M.: Russian Academy of entrepreneur- ship. Printing agency «Science and education», – 2012, – P. 46–52. 3. Gorodetskaya O. S. Entrepreneurial risks of machine manufacturing enterprises//Scientific notes: Role and place of civi- lized entrepreneurship in the economy of Russia: Collection of scientific works. Issue ХХХ – M.: Russian Academy of entrepreneurship. Printing agency «Science and education», – 2012, – p. 100–108. 4. Gorodetskaya O. S. Risks of machine manufacturing enterprises//University Herald (GUU), – 2011, – № 25 – Р. 106–107. 5. Yakovlev A. Insurance of financial guarantees. – M.: Voenizdat, – 2003. – 357 p. 6. [Electronic resource]. – Mode of access: http://www.gks.ru 7. [Electronic resource]. – Mode of access: http://www.i‑mash.ru 8. [Electronic resource]. – Mode of access: http://www.inzona.ru 9. [Electronic resource]. – Mode of access: http://megaresearch.ru

Zhelezkova Polina Evgenyevna, Admiral Makarov State University of Maritime and Inland Shipping, Ph. D student, Economics and Industrial Company Management department E‑mail: [email protected] Characteristic aspects of the Northwest Baltic Region Sea basin Abstract: This work covers the characteristic features of the port infrastructure development in the Northwest of the Baltic basin. The ports specialization is emphasized. Following the results, a need to build multimodal terminal and logistic complexes (hubs) was found. Keywords: port infrastructure, economic development, multimodal transport corridor. Maritime transport is a central link between the Baltic cross- foreign trade cargo was transported through the territory of border transformational region and the experience of network- the Northwestern Federal District. Such large Russian ports ing interaction gained in the sector is used in the future for the as Primorsk and Big Port Saint-Petersburg are located in the working out trans-national programs and development projects Gulf of Finland, Ust-Luga port is expanding (is expected to be for other types of transport represented in the Baltic region. the largest cargo port in the Russian Federation). Meanwhile the development of the ports of the Baltic Sea Here the entrance into the inner Russian marine system is Region (BSR) is still dependent on the availability of the Rus- located. The networks of auto roads and railway lines, pipe- sian cargo volume that these ports have to involve using the lines and airlines are sufficiently developed, although are in existing competitive advantages and creating new ones. need of modernization. Today the BSR ports seek to reduce the cargo delivery Russia’s North West is characterized by ports, the special- time, reduce the cost of transportation, improve the service ization of which is multidirectional. In order to understand quality and expand the range of services [3, 3]. and evaluate the specialization of the ports in the region, a North West is the only region of Russia which borders the table is presented where both service regions and the vessels countries of the European Union. This is the widest passage in which can serve in these ports, are consolidated as well as a the West for Russia. In 2010, about 30 % of the country’s list of cargo the ports process (Table 1).

135 Section 13. Economics and management

Table 1. – Russian ports specialization

Port railway Port specialization and The limited length Port The regions served station the list of cargo processed and draft of vessel, m. Big Port Avtovo, Noviy ore, coal, mineral fertilizers, Northern Europe, India, the coun- Length – 320 m., draft Saint-Pe- Port, Antropsh, grains, timber, general, con- tries of the American continent, of vessel – 11,0 m. tersburg Predport, Kupchi- tainers, ferry cargo, petro- the Baltic Sea, Southeast Asia, the no, Shushary chemicals Mediterranean, Indonesia, Malay- sia, North Africa, South Africa Vyborg Vyborg coal, mineral fertilizers, tim- Northern Europe, the Mediterra- Length – 130 m., draft ber, general, food and chemi- nean, the Baltic Sea of vessel – 7,8 m. cal in bulk Visotsk Visotsk coal, petrochemicals Northern Europe, the Mediterra- Length –250 m., draft nean, the Baltic Sea, United States of vessel – 13,2 m., Length L – 185 m., draft of vessel – 9,3 m. Kaliningrad Kaliningrad–Sor- coal, mineral fertilizers, grains, Northern Europe, the Baltic Sea, Length – 200 m., draft tirovochnaya, general, containers, ferry car- Mediterranean Sea, North and of vessel – 9,4 m., Baltles go, oil, petrochemicals, food South America, Australia Length L – 175 m., and chemical in bulk draft of vessel – 9,4m. Primorsk Primorsk oil, petrochemicals Northern Europe, the United Length – 307 m., draft States, Trinidad and Tobago, of vessel – 15,85 m. Canada, the Baltic Sea, Portugal Morocco Ust-Luga Ust-Luga (эксп.), coal, sulfur, timber, general, Northern Europe, the United Length –230 m., draft Luzhskaya (эксп.) containers, ferry cargo, oil, States, the Baltic Sea, Brazil, Mex- of vessel – 12,2 m. petrochemicals ico, Turkey Analyzing the table above, it can be concluded that the the global project on the integration of transport infrastruc- following dominates in cargo structure: tures in Europe and Asia to serve the international transit in – Crude oil and petrochemicals; the routs “East – West” and “North – South” – Container transport. It should be borne in mind that the routes and transport The most technically equipped ports in the North West corridors Europe — Asia that bypass the Baltic region are region of the Russian Federation are the ports of St. Peters- proposed. These, for example, the projects TRASECA and burg, Primorsk and Ust-Luga. In recent years, much attention “New Silk Road”. has been paid to the development and technical equipment If these projects are implemented, the cargo that can pass of Vysotsk port. through and already are on the way through the Baltic region, The transport system of the North West plays an impor- will head the southern route. In this case, both Russia and tant role in ensuring international transit between countries in other countries of the Baltic region loose [1, 1]. East and South-East Asia, the states of the Indian Ocean and Only through joint effort of all the countries in the Baltic the European Union [4, 27]. region it is possible to preserve and strengthen the economic Several international transport corridors (ITC) pass and political importance of the shortest Baltic Transport through the North West: Corridor. – Two Eurasian corridors – “Transsib” and “North-South”; Disordered competition on the brink of trade and transit – The Northern Sea Route; wars should be replaced by cooperation in the international – Pan-European (Cretan) corridors #1 and #9. legal framework. Cargo will be enough for everybody, and the The matters of the transport and energy cooperation of main task will be, above all, to improve the logistics. the North West of Russia in the Baltic region should be re- Thus, the states of the Baltic region, including Russia, flected in the new Partnership and Cooperation Agreement should work together to create a multi-modal Europe — Asia between Russia and the EU [2, 74]. transport corridors. Such corridors should be the same from Special attention should be paid to the Russian North the places of cargo traffic formation to the place of delivery of West as the only macro-region, bordering the EU in the frame- cargo, logistics solutions with a through rate should be used work of EU-Russia dialogue in the field of transport and infra- and no extra work and long delays at borders and complicated structure, and of the EU-Russia Energy Dialogue. customs procedures should be involved. At the global scale, the transport infrastructure of the It is important to take as much advantage of the so-called Russian North West should be considered in the context of “1520 gauge” as possible, it is a network of railways with

136 Characteristic aspects of the Northwest Baltic Region Sea basin a width of 1520 mm., connecting the ports on the Baltic Sea to Unification of Russian export, import and domestic rail- the Pacific Ocean. Given that the railways of the Baltic coun- way tariffs within two years after Russia’s accession to the tries (Lithuania, Latvia and Estonia), Finland and a part of WTO will be important for the integration of transport sys- Poland are physically located within the area of the Russian tems in Russia and the Baltic countries. railways, the rail gage of which is 1520 mm., and legally are Unification of the Russian railway tariffs will have the within the European Union, they can play a unifying role and most favorable impact on the increase in cargo handling in the serve as a bridge between the East and the West. Baltic countries ports. It will also make the Russian ports im- It is necessary to increase the number of high-speed con- prove the quality of services provided, as well as to reduce tainer trains running on the route “East — West” (including their costs due to increased competition. Among road projects shuttle train which runs at a fixed schedule). that contribute to the integration of transport of North West A Federal law on transit is required for the develop- of Russia in the Baltic region, the following are essential: ment of Euro-Asian transit (including via the Baltic region). – to complete of the Branch A of Pan-European transport Public policy should be established to attract transit cargo corridor # 1 (the so-called Via Hansetica) St. Petersburg – that would promote the development of national transit in- Tartu – Riga – Kaliningrad – Gdansk – Szczecin – Rostock – frastructure. Lubeck; It is also advisable to create a permanent body at the level – to create a branch in the Kaliningrad region from the of the Russian government to coordinate the transit policy, motorway Via Baltica (E67) Tallinn — Warsaw; to continue customs, logistics terminals creation with the help of inter- creation and improvement of the infrastructure of check- national companies, etc. points (including EU funds). It may be necessary to create a special structure that would Short distance maritime transport (short-sea-shipping) coordinate the Eurasian transit, and within the EU. To main- may make an important contribution to overload reduction of tain the Eurasian transit in the region of the Baltic Sea it is the land transport network and the integration of the Russian necessary to set up joint logistics companies and to form pow- North West in the Baltic Sea region. These are, in particular, erful agent network in the West and East to attract cargo. Large the “sea corridor” between Hamburg/Lübeck and St. Peters- companies (including joint ones) are needed, which could burg. We should try to increase the number of ferry lines con- provide transit with container park [5, 77]. necting St. Petersburg, Ust-Luga and Kaliningrad (Baltiysk) In key areas of distribution of cargo traffic and near ma- with the ports in other countries of the Baltic region. It is nec- jor international transport corridors (especially in St. Pe- essary to increase the number of flights from St. Petersburg, tersburg and Kaliningrad) building of multimodal terminal Kaliningrad and Murmansk to the airports in the Baltic region and logistics centers (hubs) is required. Work in this direc- (taking into account the actual demand) [5]. tion is already underway. It is necessary to create a unified For the cooperation development of the fuel and energy system of satellite tracking of the goods transition along the sector in North West of Russia in the Baltic region, the follow- transit corridors. ing are the most important: Development of modern information systems that will – In view of the intention to build a new nuclear power receive data on all traffic and manage the transportation pro- plant in Lithuania, Poland, Belarus and the Kaliningrad re- cess functioning with the terminals is needed. gion, to carry out a more effective regional coordination in Northwest of Russia should pay attention to the promis- the energy sector; ing way of industrial transit processing, i. e. follow the “Flem- – To implement the idea of laying the energy bridge to ish-Dutch” macroeconomic model of specialization, which the West of the Kaliningrad region of Russia. Belgium and the Netherlands have successfully applied. – To complete construction of the second gas pipeline — The lack of coordination of national transport programs in “Nord Stream”. the Baltic region may lead to a significant (according to some – To complete construction of the pipeline of the Baltic estimates, 2–3 fold by 2020) excess supply of port and trans- Pipeline System‑2 with an output to the oil terminal in the port services over the real demand. The consequence of this commercial port of Ust-Luga. would be enormous waste of capital costs and undermining In order to obtain economic benefit, it is necessary to stability in the Baltic Sea region. use technological advances in the ports, providing resources Therefore, it is necessary to coordinate and streamline to gain these achievements. To introduce innovations which certain national investment programs, to set up large trans- are the only reliable way to maintain the competitiveness of national projects and programs designed to provide a decent the port terminals. All of these, in turn, will create the mate- position and a high competitiveness of the Baltic Sea trans- rial basis for the further development of the Baltic region port route as a whole. as a whole. References: 1. Anischenko N. V. “Port economy and its development in a market economy.” («Портовое хозяйство и его развитие в условиях рыночных отношений») Morskiye Porty, – 2011.

137 Section 13. Economics and management

2. Balode I., Paiders Y. «Economic Geography of the Nordic countries.» («Экономическая география государств Север- ной Европы») – Riga, – 2009. 3. Gumenuk I. S. “Transnational territorial transport system of the Baltic region.” («Транснациональная территориальная транс- портная система балтийского региона») “The Baltic Sea Region” Magazine («Балтийский регион»), – Issue 1, – 2012. 4. Kivikari W. «The economic space of the Baltic region.» – Helsinki: Otava, – 2010. 5. Kokin A. «International Maritime Shipping» («Международная морская перевозка груза»), – Infotropik media, – 2012. 6. The development strategy of maritime activities of the Russian Federation until 2030, Orders of the Russian Federation State #2205‑P as of 08.12.2010.

Kats Svetlana Valerievna, Taras Shevchenko National University of Kyiv, Ph.D student, Faculty of Economics E‑mail: [email protected]

Nature of the basic financial derivatives Abstract: the article reveals the essence of basic derivatives. Studied by various authors approaches to defining derivatives and their definitions in the legislation and proposed his own definition of the most appropriate for use in accounting practice. Keywords: derivative financial instruments, derivatives, forward and futures contracts, options and swaps. Derivative financial instruments (derivatives) got its derived from the value of the underlying instrument under- name from the English term “derivative” — “original.” In lying the transaction. French “derivatif” — output, Latin — “derivare” — aside, In the scientific literature when considering the nature of hold. The name was a derivative of the fact that its value is derivatives suggest the following concepts (tab.1). Table 1. – The definition of “derivatives” by various authors Author Definition Butynets F. F. Financial derivatives — financial instruments on which payments will be made in the future; whose value is affected by changes in interest rates, equity prices, foreign exchange rate, index of prices, credit rating (index) or other variables that are basic; does not require an initial invest- ment [1]. Zawadzki Y. S., Derivative financial instruments and derivatives — a tool, mechanism of release and turnover are Osovska G. V., related to the sale of certain financial or tangible assets. Prices of derivative financial instruments Juszkiewicz O. O. are set depending on the price of assets that are placed in their base are called the underlying asset. Underlying asset can be securities, interest rates, stock indexes, commodity resources, precious metals, foreign currency, etc. [2]. Zahorodniy A. G., Derivative financial instruments and derivatives are the original contracts to qualifying transac- Voznyuk G. L., tions with financial or real assets (stocks, bonds, exchange commodity, precious metals, curren- Smovzhenko T. S. cies, etc.) on the terms specified in those contracts. The main purpose derivatives — to insure against possible losses in the stock market game, and provide safeguards against inflation and economic instability. The main types of derivatives are the options and futures [3]. Habyuk A. A. Derivatives — financial contracts, or financial instrument whose value is derived from the price of something else (the base). The basis of such financial instruments can be active (eg, raw materials, stocks, residential mortgage, real estate, bonds, loans), indexes (such as interest rates, exchange rates, stock indices, consumer price index), or others (such as weather conditions). Credit derivatives are derived from loans, bonds or other forms of credit [4]. Pavlov V. I., Pylypenko I. I., Derivatives — a tool, mechanism of release and turnover are related to the sale of certain financial Kryvov’yazyuk I. V. or tangible assets [5]. Note: Systematized by the author based sources [1; 2; 3; 4; 5] Despite the fact that the authors interpret the term «de- derivatives. You can not define a particular category via the rivatives» from different points of view, one can not deny same category. any of the definitions. However, it is inappropriate approach According to the researcher O. Smolyanskoyi, a feature to the definition of derivatives (derivatives) because most of derivative financial instruments (derivatives) is that their

138 Nature of the basic financial derivatives investment returns depends on the financial instruments from and most derivatives. The subject of the original contract may which they come, that their treatment is related to the cir- be not only financial instruments, but also commodities [6]. culation of the underlying financial assets. The basic tool in Depending on the scope of financial instruments can these financial contracts can be as certain types of primary be distinguished legal scholars and financial approaches to financial instruments — cash in local and foreign currencies, the interpretation of the term «derivatives» that are related securities, financial indices as indices, rates, interest rates — to each other (Fig. 1).

Fig.1. Approaches to the interpretation of the concept of “Derivatives” ( Developed by the author based sources [7])

Table 2. – The definition of “derivatives” regulatory framework Ukraine Author Definition NSA #13 “Finan- Derivative financial instruments referred to are those who belong to a specific financial instrument, indicator cial instruments” or commodity, in which the financial market can make transactions of sale of specific financial risks (such as interest rate and currency risks, the risk of changes in stock prices and commodity prices, credit risk, etc.) regardless of the underlying instrument. Value of derivatives is derived from the price of the base object, which may for example be an asset. In this case there is no transfer of principal, which would have to be repaid, and no investment income accrues. Derivatives are used for various purposes, including for risk management, hedging (insurance against possible fall of prices), arbitrage between markets, and speculation [10] National Bank of Derivative financial instruments (derivative financial instruments (derivatives) — financial contracts or finan- Ukraine cial instruments derived from (based on) other financial instrument (s), called the underlying instrument. The basis of this financial instrument (contract) can be active (eg, products shares, residential mortgage, real estate, bonds, loans), indexes (interest rates, exchange rates, stock indices, consumer price indices) or other conditions. Credit derivatives are derived from loans, bonds or other forms of credit [11] State Statistics Derivative financial instruments referred to are those who belong to a specific financial instrument, indicator Committee of or commodity, in which the financial market can make transactions of sale of specific financial risks (such Ukraine as proc tnyy and currency risks, the risk of changes in stock prices and commodity prices, credit risk, etc.) regardless of the underlying instrument. Value of derivatives is derived from the price of the base object, which may for example be an asset. In this case there is no transfer of principal, which would have to be repaid, and no investment income accrues. Derivatives are used for various purposes, including for risk management, hedging (insurance against possible fall of prices), arbitrage between markets, and speculation [11] Tax Code of Derivatives — standard document certifying the right and/or obligation to purchase or sell securities in the Ukraine future, tangible or intangible assets, and funds for such conditions. Standard (default) form of derivatives and order their release and circulation established by law [12] The Law of Derivative financial instruments — securities, fixed-term contracts (futures) Interest-term contracts (for- Ukraine “On Se- wards), fixed-term contracts on the exchange (at a future date) if the price depending on the interest rate, curities and Stock foreign exchange rate or index of securities (interest, exchange or index swaps), options giving the right to Market” buy or sell any of these financial instruments, including those involving cash form of payment (exchange and interest options) [8] Note: Systematized by the author based sources [10; 11; 12; 8]

139 Section 13. Economics and management

The term “derivative” as much as the law was en- given in the Ukrainian legislation on derivatives. Moreover, giv- shrined in the Law of Ukraine “On Enterprise Profit Tax”, en NSA are the determination of all components of the concept which today is in force defines a derivative as a “standard of «derivative financial instruments» that reflects the exact and document certifying the right and/or obligation to purchase detailed regulation of these instruments. or sell securities, or MATERIAL intangible assets, as well as The bases of the class of derivatives are futures, forwards, funds for such conditions in the future. “ This definition of swaps and option agreements. Since they are all connected derivative financial instruments is provided in the current with the implementation of specific actions within a speci- Tax Code of Ukraine [8]. fied period of time or at some point in the future, they are The above regulations do not take into account the le- called futures contracts. Term contracts are determined by gal nature of the derivative instruments that they define, and their specifications — legal documents, which is caused by therefore categorized as derivatives with nature-term agree- the amount of the underlying asset in a contract period of ments, the terms attributed to derivatives. Derivative securi- performance, currency calculation method of execution (de- ties — securities issuance and circulation mechanism which is livery of an asset or cash payments) and other characteristics. connected with the right to buy or sell within the time speci- The use of fixed-term contracts enables market partici- fied by the agreement (contract), securities and other financial pants to reduce the risk of future operations on purchase and and/or commodity resources [9]. sale of assets in the market, and reducing the potential gains or The definition of “derivatives” Ukraine regulatory frame- losses on such transactions. In this case, the seller of a certain work shown in Table 2. type of product is secured by means of a term contract of a Thus, if the law of the country not defined clearly the dif- possible drop in prices for this product at the moment when ference between the derivatives and derivatives, these terms he will need to sell and the buyer of products — from a pos- can be used interchangeably. This feature is also inherent in sible rise in prices at the time of purchase of the product on our regulations. A derivative of securities is one of the varieties the market. As a result of the conclusion of such an agreement, of its own derivatives, so do not allocate them a distinct cat- while there are two obligations: the obligations of the seller egory of «derivatives». This will strengthen the already vague and buyer obligations, which are both relevant property rights. concepts and categorical apparatus. Greater development of the market short-term agreements Attempts to overcome these shortcomings were made of entered into at the international and domestic financial mar- Parliament Ukraine adopted in different Bill, which is more kets developed. And markets fixed-term contracts are more detailed and carefully define the different categories of deriva- developed markets with more volatile prices and interest rates. tive instruments, such as the draft Law of Ukraine «On time Increased variability in interest rates do not need to identify exchange contracts» and the draft Law of Ukraine «On the with inflation or deflation process. At sufficiently moving inter- derivatives of securities» [13]. These bills are quite progres- est rates in different market participants have different predic- sive in terms of legal definition of derivatives, but at the same tions about future developments that allows them to enter into a time differ, sometimes directly contradict each other. large number of transactions opposite nature. The development The most accurate definition of «derivative financial in- of the inflation process generates the same expectations and struments» is given to (Standard) 13 «Financial Instruments» forecasts in different market participants that do not promote of the Ministry of Finance of Ukraine, is a tool by which pay- the conclusion of fixed-term contracts. ments will be made in the future; whose value changes due to The integration of the financial market of Ukraine in changes in interest rates, equity prices, foreign exchange rate, the global financial system involves the use of new finan- index of prices, credit rating (index) or other variables that are cial instruments in national practice, is characterized by basic; does not require an initial investment « [10]. Defined in great diversity and complexity of financial instruments, but the said Regulations of the Ministry of Finance, is one that re- studies the nature and significance of financial instruments flects the diverse nature of derivatives or derivatives, i now have enables the participant Finance market to get a high return the most accurate and faithful with all regulatory definitions for low investment. References: 1. Бухгалтерський словник./За ред. проф. Ф. Ф. Бутинця. – Житомир: ПП “Рута”, – 2001. – 224 с. 2. Завадський Й. С., Осовська Г. В., Юшкевич О. О. Словник економічних термінів: менеджмент, маркетинг, підпри- ємництво: Навч.-метод. посібник – Житомир: ЖІТІ, – 2009. – 444 с. 3. Загородній А. Г., Вознюк Г. Л., Смовженко Т. С. Фінансовий словник. – 4‑те вид., випр. та доп. – К.: Т‑во “Знання”, КОО; Л.: Вид-во Львів. Банк. Ін-ту НБУ. – 2010. – 566 с. 4. Олексій Хаб’юк. Банківське регулювання та нагляд через призму рекомендацій Базельського комітету: Монографія. – Івано-Франківськ: ОІППО; Снятин: ПрутПринт, – 2008. – 260 с. 5. Павлов В. І., Пилипенко І. І., Кривов’язюк І. В. Цінні папери в Україні: Навчальний посібник. – Видання 2‑ге, допо- внене. – К.: Кондор, – 2011. – 400 с. 6. Смолянська О. Ю. Фінансовий ринок: Навчальний посібник. – Київ: Центр навчальної літератури, – 2010. – 384 с.

140 Theoretical bases of the analysis of competition in the banking sector of the Russian economy

7. Леоненко П. М., Юхименко П. І., Ільєнко А. А. та ін. Теорія фінансів: Навчальний посібник/За загальною ред. О. Д. Василика. – Київ: Центр навчальної літератури, – 2009. – 480 с. 8. Закон України «Про цінні папери та фондовий ринок». – [Electronic resource]. – Mode of access: http://zakon4.rada. gov.ua/laws/show/3480–15. 9. Закон України «Про цінні папери та фондовий ринок» від 23 лютого 2006 року № 3480‑IV зі змінами та доповне- ннями. 10. Положення (стандарт) бухгалтерського обліку 13 «Фінансові інструменти»//Наказ Міністерства фінансів України від 30.11.2001 р. № 559 зі змінами та доповненнями. 11. Сайт Національного Банку України. – [Electronic resource]. – Mode of access: http://www.bank.gov.ua/control/uk/pub- lish/article?art_id=123545 12. Податковий кодекс України. – [Electronic resource]. – Mode of access: http://zakon2.rada.gov.ua/laws/show/2755– 17/page2. 13. Проект Закону України “Про похiднi цiннi папери”, запропонований народним депутатом України В. А. Ющенком та прийнятий за основу 02.03.2000.

Minligareeva Svetlana Alexandrovna, Kazan Federal University, Undergraduate, Department of Banking E‑mail: [email protected]

Theoretical bases of the analysis of competition in the banking sector of the Russian economy Abstract: The article considers the methods of evaluation of competitive ability of banks applied in Russia. A universal method of evaluation of bank competition is proposed. Keywords: banking sector, competition, methods of competition evaluation, Russian market of bank services. At the modern stage of activity and development of credit evaluation of the competitive positions of a commercial bank organizations, there are numerous methods of evaluation of without regard to real structure of the market leads to conclu- a bank’s competition; however, there is no unified method of sions that depend on the selection of concentration rate. competition evaluation in the banking sector of Russia. The disadvantage of the second approach is the presup- The issues of evaluation of competitive positions of a com- position that the acceptable consideration of the real struc- mercial bank and market competition on the real bank market ture of the market is achieved by undirected (intuitional) se- of Russia are not of abstract but absolutely pragmatic interest, lection of the number of leading market participants (more because a correct and grounded analysis enables to position often it is 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 50, 100) and assessment of the im- a bank on the Russian market of bank services appropriately, portance of their cumulative market share — market power. monitor the bank’s positions on the market, define competi- Currently, there are a lot of methods of analysis of bank tors, forecast the prospects of development of a regional chain, competition on the market of bank services that are success- evaluate market positions of the clients and make effective fully applied in the Russian conditions. Most of them are managerial decisions. based on the closed difficult-to-access information, which The applicable methods of evaluation of the competitive significantly complicates the process of analysis. ability of banks can be combined into two generalized ap- One of the methods enabling to analyze the financial proaches [1, 40]: condition of a bank is the method developed by a group of – indirect approach — when a conclusion about mar- experts headed by V. S. Kromonov. It allows defining the cur- ket competition is made on the basis of the result of an analysis rent rate of reliability of banks on the basis of calculation of of integral market concentration; six coefficients: – direct approach — when same conclusion is based К1 — general coefficient of reliability; on the information about cumulative market share of its lead- К2 — coefficient of instant liquidity; ing participants (nucleus of the market). К3 — cross-coefficient; The disadvantage of the first approach lies in the fact К4 — general coefficient of liquidity; that market competition is interpreted as antipode of market К5 — coefficient of capital protection; concentration, i. e. the more (less) the inequality of distribu- К6 — coefficient of fund capitalization of profits. tion or concentration of market shares is, the lower (higher) All coefficients are designed in the way that the bigger the level of competition is. The use of the given methods for they are, the better. According to the method, the optimally

141 Section 13. Economics and management reliable bank has the following values of the coefficients: The disadvantage of the given method is the fact that К1 = 1; К2 = 1; К3 = 3; К4 = 1; К5 = 1; К6 = 3 [2, 46]. the analysis does not include the calculation of such indica- The coefficients should be weighed and totalized. Coeffi- tors as: general coefficient of reliability, coefficient of instant cient К1 is given the biggest weigh of 45 %. The second most im- liquidity, cross-coefficient, general coefficient of liquidity, portant coefficient is K2 – 20 %. The rest of indicators have the coefficient of capital protection and coefficient of fund -capi following weighs: К3 – 10 %, К4 – 15 %, К5 – 5 %, К6 – 5 %. talization of profits. The current reliability rate N is calculated under the final J. J. Lambin reckons that one of the most important issues equation [3]: of analysis of the competitive ability of a bank is the reaction N = 45*(К1)+20*(К2)+10*(К3/3)+ of competitors. The author suggests conducting analysis ac- +15*(К4)+5*(К5)+5*(К6/3). cording to three factors: price, advertising and quality. On the The current reliability rate is designed only for the banks basis of these factors, he suggests building a matrix of elasticity that passed the system of cut-offs, the idea of which lies in of competitive reaction [5, 43]. the fact that the banks that are not of big public interest or I. V. Andreev chose bank image, tariff policy and terri- have insufficiently stable structure of balance, or are invari- torial availability as criteria of the competitive ability of a ably in pre-bankruptcy condition should be excluded at the bank. The competitive ability is calculated under the follow- preliminary stage. ing equation [6, 91]: The following method applied in Russia during the defini- Pr = 0,5 Im + 0,2 Tr + 0,3 D, tion of a competitive position of a credit organization is the where: method of I. O. Spitsyn, Ya. O. Spitsyn, according to which Pr — measure of attractiveness of a service; one should compare the bank’s position with the position of Im — measure of image; the main competitors on the market of bank services in order Tr — measure of favorability of a tariff policy for the con- to evaluate the competitive ability. sumer of a service; Such comparison is made on the basis of a range of cri- D — measure of availability. teria [4, 256]: In his work «Realia of monopolistic competition in the • absolute share of the market; Russian banking sector», S. R. Moiseev distinguishes be- • relative share of the market; tween two classes of models that enable to analyze the com- • relative earning capacity; petitive structure of the market of bank services (a scheme of • relative capital capacity. the process is shown in Figure 1) [7, 95].

Fig. 1. Classification of approaches to analysis of bank competition SCP-hypothesis was proposed in early 50ies of XX cen- interest rates on deposits and high rates on credits [7, 95]. tury by professors of the Harvard School E. Mason and J. Bain Thus, competitive structure of the market defines financial and was further named «Harvard paradigm». SCP-hypothe- results of the banks’ activity. Competitive structure of the mar- sis presupposes that concentration in the banking sector leads ket can be measured with the help of such indicators as market to the concentration of market power in single hands that en- share, number of participants of the market, coefficients of the ables to gain monopolistic profits at the expense of lowered concentration, entropy rates, Gini coefficient etc.

142 Theoretical bases of the analysis of competition in the banking sector of the Russian economy

The opposite of the SCP-hypothesis is ES-hypothesis, in Russia (0,10) are mainly the countries with open econ- which was proposed in 1971 by H. Demsetz, a professor of omy of transitional period (Macedonia — 0,20; Slova- University of California. It is based on the presupposition that kia — 0,28; Greece — 0,18) [38, 100]. Thus, it may seem high concentration, prices and profits are the result of bigger that the situation in Russia reminds of monopoly, because production and managerial effectiveness. The more effective separate banks control the price on their services within the a participant is, the higher their market share and the better frames of constant client groups; however, simultaneously, it results of the activity will be [7, 95]. reminds of absolute competition, because the market has a The most popularity was gained by the model of J. Panzar lot of subjects, free entrance-exit and the banks react to the and J. Rosse developed in 1987, which was later called H‑sta- price policy of each other. tistic. It suggests that banks have different strategies of price In reality, the Russian market of bank services is char- formation in the condition of the change of market conjuncture. acterized as the market of monopolistic competition: a big H‑statistic helps evaluate to what extent the change of the cost number of sellers and buyers of bank services, differentiation of production factors leads to the change of bank profits [1, 41]. of produced services, small number of barriers for entrance to If the market functions in the conditions of monopoly, and exit from the market, little ability of producers to influ- H‑statistic is negative or equal to zero. H‑statistic is equal to ence the prices. It should also be noted that the consumers of one when the market structure is characterized as absolutely services adhere to so called arbitral behavior, i. e. they do not competitive. H‑statistic ranges between zero and one in the go for services in a different bank even if the conditions there event of monopolistic competition. can be better. It is interesting how the competition looks among banks The coefficients of concentration (for example, market in Russia compared with other countries. In most countries, share or Herfindahl-Hirschman index) are traditionally used moderate bank competition is observed; H‑statistic reach- as an indicator for analysis of monopolization of markets of es 0,6–0,7. The countries with the closest value of ‑H statistic bank services. Table 1. – Decomposition of the method of definition of competition in the banking sector Stage Description Preparatory, At the given stage, the collection of information required to evaluate the competitive position of a commercial intra-bank bank is performed. Herewith, the information is in terms of both the bank reports and intra-bank and client- oriented work. Calculation, At this stage, such indicators as integral index of reliability of a bank according to the method of V. S. Kromonov intra-bank and other intermediate quantitative indicators are defined; the methods of J. J. Lambin and I. V. Andreev are used to conduct an analysis of qualitative indicators. Comparative, Three given indicators are compared in the dynamics; the conclusions are made and the reasons of the dynam- intra-bank ics are defined. Calculation, At the given stage, the indicators of the region (market), where the examined commercial bank functions, are region- defined. In this regard, it is required to determine the level of monopolization of a regional segment (or total) al/market of the banking sector. One should define the competitive structure of the regional segment (market in the whole) in order to be able to apply SCP-hypothesis or ES-hypothesis. After that, one should determine the regional competitive ability of the banking sector (or the entire sector) with the help of H‑statistic model and Herfindahl-Hirschman index. Comparative, Then, one should correlate the results of development of the regional segment or market and evaluated bank; correlative define the ability of the bank’s influence on the market or market’s influence on the bank. At this stage, the market share in the region (or country-scale) of the examined bank is defined with the help of calculation of indicators proposed in the method of the brothers Spitsyn. All above mentioned is done in the dynamics at the given stage; the totals of the results are calculated, the reasons are determined etc. Comparative At this stage, on the basis of the indicators according to the method of Spitsyn, the level of bank concentration is throughout defined; density of competition, all indicators are evaluated and correlated in the dynamics; the reasons of the the sector dynamics are determined and reflected in the conclusions. The higher the level of concentration and density are, the higher the competitive ability of the entire sector of the country will be. Conclusion On the basis of conducted analysis, the competitive ability of the banking sector of Russia is defined. The given indicator can be applied to correlate with identical indicators of other countries in order to define the totals of the development for a certain period of time. Having considered the essence and peculiarities of the of a bank in the market environment, one can conclude that above mentioned methods and approaches to the evaluation none of the methods covers the complex activity of a credit of competition of credit organization in the banking sector of organization on the market, which generates a disadvantage the country, region or the evaluation of competitive position of this or that method.

143 Section 13. Economics and management

On the basis of the existing methods on evaluation of it is practical to structure and unite the methods of evaluation bank competition, we developed a unique method, which of the bank competition in order to give an all-round analysis could serve as an example of the evaluation of bank competi- of the competition of the banking sector, which will enable tion relying on the all-round activity of the banks. Table 1 us to formulate final conclusions on competitive positions of presents decomposition of a step-by-step definition of the lev- the banks as well as competitive ability of the national bank- el of competition in the banking sector. Thus, in our opinion, ing sector. References: 1. Motokhin A. M. Method of evaluation of competitive positions of a commercial bank/Motokhin A. M.//Banking. – 2013. – № 37. 2. Rybin E. V. Ways to increase competitive ability of Russian banks: student’s book/Rybin E. V. – M.: Finances and sta- tistics, – 2012. 3. Profile [Electronic resource]: Method of Kromonov V. S. – Weekly journal, 2014. – Access mode: http://www.profile.ru 4. Spitsyn I. O., Spitsyn Ya. O. Marketing in a bank: students’ aid/Spitsyn I. O., Spitsyn Ya. O. – Ternopol: Pispaip, – 2010. 5. Lambin J. J. Strategic marketing: a European approach: students’ aid/Lambin J. J. – SPb.: Nauka, – 2012. 6. Andreev I. V. Criteria of competitive ability of the homogeneous bank services: student’s book/Andreev I. V. – M.: Market- ing, – 2010. 7. Moiseev S. R. Realia of monopolistic competition in the Russian banking sector/Moiseev S. R.//Modern competition. – 2013. – № 1.

144 Improvement of legal regulation of bank lending as a factor contributing to the development of small and medium-sized...

Section 14. Science of law Ruchkina Gulnara Flyurovna, Financial University, Dean of Law Faculty, Doctor of Science, Professor E‑mail: [email protected] Melnichuk Marina Vladimirovna, Head of Chair of Foreign Languages‑3, Doctor of Science, Professor E‑mail: [email protected]

Improvement of legal regulation of bank lending as a factor contributing to the development of small and medium-sized businesses in Russia Abstract: The paper analyzes the need and possibility of obtaining bank loans by small and medium-sized busi- nesses. Requirements of a credit institution to be met in order to obtain a loan are defined. The necessity to improve the legal regulation of the bank lending to promote development of small and medium-sized businesses is justified. Keywords: small and medium enterprises, credit resources, collateral, credit institution, government support, finance lease. The economic prosperity and social well-being of a coun- on the small business credit market. VTB and Promsvyazbank try largely depends on the degree of small business develop- complete the top three). ment and medium business sustainability. Undoubtedly, the financial crisis has made the situ- In countries with successful economies the above sec- ation in this segment still worse. The primary effort tor accounts for the major share of all tax payments and a (RUR1.0 trillion) was directed by the government to sup- considerable portion of the gross domestic product — up to port large business entities. In the meantime, the sphere 50–70 %. The situation in Russia is different: more than half of lending to small and medium businesses was shrinking. of the gross domestic product is created by large industrial Many banks in that period cut down on programs of lending holdings while small and medium enterprises are facing seri- to small and medium businesses because of high operating ous difficulties in running their businesses. The situation is costs (exceptions were about twenty largest banks, such as not likely to be altered by the fact that the share of small Sberbank, VTB 24, URALSIB, Alfa-Bank, KMB Bank, Bank enterprises in the Russian GDP for the last five years has of Moscow, Rosbank, NOMOS-Bank, PSB and other banks). grown more than twofold. According to the Russian Federa- Until now the limited supply of loans for small enterprises tion Ministry for Economic Development, the contribution and the lack of a competitive market of lending services have of small and medium-sized businesses to the country’s GNP been the causes of high interest rates. Interest rates in that as of 2012 totaled 19.2 % (the benchmark designated by the period stopped at the level of 23–24 % in rubles. Six-month Russian Federation Government for Russia is 40–50 %), loans — 23 %, 6 months to a year — 23.3 %; more than while as far back as in 2011 this figure in the USA and Ger- a year –23.8 % per annum. To reduce interest rates, there many was at the level of 50–52 %, with 55–62 % in France are various ways to control the costly part of the loan, includ- and 52–55 % in Japan [1]. ing the selection of the best form of credit for a business and In this situation the credit market with a real opportu- the use of government financial support programs. As for a nity for a company to obtain much-needed credit resources is franchising program, the bank selects a franchisor company, an important factor of support and development of small and performs its audit, arranges for cooperation and makes an medium-sized businesses (the loan portfolio for small and offer to the enterprise. The latter can suggest a company of its medium-sized businesses in Russia amounts to RUR 4.2 tril- own choice as the franchisor in which case the bank takes lion). To make credit resources available to enterprises means time to audit the company and make an agreement. not only to support the existing small and medium-seized At present, there are over 4 million small enterprises and business sector and bring it out of the shadows but also to private entrepreneurs in Russia. And 70 % of small businesses promote emergence of new business entities (Sberbank with are engaged in the provision of services (primarily in commer- its 26.5 % of total loans granted in 2012 is the biggest player cial activities). In the current year, the number of individual

145 Section 14. Science of law entrepreneurs has decreased by approximately 300,000. On to the lack of reliable information about an entrepreneur’s ac- the one hand, in the past year there was considerable tax tivity, which is a reason for loan rejection. loosening such as increased access to a simplified taxation It is quite clear that entities enjoying financial stability system, significant modification of the patent system, intro- and a firm position in the market of goods, works and services duction of the voluntary procedure of using the unified tax have better opportunities for being provided with financial re- on imputed income (UTII). On the other hand, the consoli- sources through lending. For credit institutions, an ideal bor- dated social tax reform of 2009 resulted in a situation when rower is an entity with revenues of RUR 60 to 200 million, the small businesses began to pay more from the payroll fund. loan amount of RUR 6 to 9 million, a 6–12 month loan term, If in 2010 almost all taxpayers using the simplified taxation doing business for 2 years and collateral on the whole loan system paid 14 %, then in 2011 the payments rose to 26 % amount. However the social function of a credit institution is, and only for those engaged in socially important industries for in fact, lending to small and medium-sized businesses to sup- which in 2012–1013 the rate was reduced to 20 %. All other port them in launching their activities. The primary objec- small businesses pay the general 30 % rate. The majority of tive in this case is the development of small and medium-sized contributions have a fixed value irrespective of either the size businesses in the country. Moreover, a small entrepreneur of an enterprise or its production efficiency. may in the future become a solid corporate customer capable In this regard, the growing need of small and medium- of consuming a wider scope of financial products, including sized businesses in borrowings is quite logical (according to those of the investment nature. expert estimations, the amounts of lending to small and me- Meanwhile, the majority of banks would not consider the dium-sized businesses can reach those in developed countries above-mentioned entity as a prospective borrower. Standard not earlier than in 15 years). The borrowed funds are used requirements of a credit institution are successful business ac- by enterprises for various purposes such as working capital tivities for at least 6–12 months, satisfactory financial perfor- replenishment, procurement of shop, production or office mance, the transparent history of the capital origin, absence of equipment, repair of sales and production areas, acquisition claims from creditors and tax authorities as well as a positive of transportation vehicles and real estate, capital and/or ordi- credit history. nary repairs, acquisition of licensed software, etc. Credit institutions carry out comprehensive measures At the same time the level of lending to small and me- aimed at increasing returns, on the one hand, and reducing dium-sized businesses is insufficient, which is caused by the credit exposure, on the other hand (credit policy). The credit following factors: lack of reliable borrowers; high operating risk assessment means evaluation of the borrower’s status in costs; non-coverage of loans; non-conformity to require- terms of its ability to settle obligations, feasibility of granting ments; non-transparency of business; limited scope of activi- a loan and the borrower’s ability to repay the principal debt ties carried out by small and medium-sized businesses, which along with interest payment in time. It should be added that complicates their assessment; lack of incentives to encourage the financial result of a credit institution is affected by loan adequate reflection of financial results in reporting documen- loss provisions. The requirement for loan loss provision allow- tation and hence submitting non-transparent and unreliable ances is stipulated by the Russian Central Bank [2], motivated reports; low quality of business plans for receiving loans; in- by bank credit risks and depends on the financial status and adequacy of small business profitability to loan interest rates, stability of the borrower. which is aggravated by bank commissions, etc. Granting a loan is preceded by a considerable amount As a rule, entrepreneurs apply for loans at the beginning of preparatory work in order to obtain the maximum infor- of their activities, without clear understanding of growth pros- mation on a potential client/borrower [3]. If the potential pects and would-be incomes; nor do they have sufficient legal borrower is an individual entrepreneur the credit institution and economic knowledge to design an acceptable financial analyzes the client’s solvency using combined methods of as- project of their development or a possibility to provide ap- sessing a physical person and a business entity (for instance, propriate financial documents required by a credit institution. taken into account are personal expenditures as well as directs Meanwhile, business plans are given close scrutiny: subject costs of running a business). Lending to small and medium- to analysis are not only the financial calculations but also the sized entities is not profitable because of small loan amounts. market research carried out by a potential borrower. An incor- At small loan amounts with market-competitive interest rates, rectly written business plan complicates the expert examina- the profitability is reduced to a minimum. At the same time, tion and can be a motive for the loan application rejection. no matter how small a loan may be, it needs labor efforts of To support entrepreneurs, credit organizations are offering bank employees for servicing the loan application, assessment ready-made model business plans. In cooperation with social and monitoring of the collateral and servicing the loan itself. organizations business models are created suitable for imple- The priority in granting a loan depends on the type of mentation according to an available business plan. business activity. Credited with great caution are the con- The low transparency of small and medium-sized busi- struction industry, brokerage business, transportation of nesses, poor organization of the accounting policy, inadequate goods, manufacturing and sales of premium-class products. qualification of employees, use of illegal (“gray”) schemes lead More often loans are granted to business entities engaged in

146 Improvement of legal regulation of bank lending as a factor contributing to the development of small and medium-sized... trade (retail and small-scale wholesale shops, small-scale The effective cooperation of financial institutions and wholesale networks), in services (real estate leasing, public businesses appears to be possible only with active govern- catering, sports and recreation and medical services, car re- ment intervention. Federal, regional (interregional), sectoral pair service), in production (small enterprises in the food and (intersectoral) and municipal programs of small business chemical industries, modular productions (bakeries, sausage development and support are the principal tools of the gov- shops, packing lines)). ernment policy in this sphere. The complexity of the orga- The possibility of obtaining a loan is also dependent on a nizational structure of the government support of small and freely available collateral. The optimum collateral for a cred- medium-sized businesses makes this policy inefficient and it institution can be real estate, motor transport and equip- limits the range of entities to be supported. ment. Along with that, any asset that meets the requirements In 2006 the Moscow Government established the Small of free turnover, liquidity or having the price exceeding the Business Credit Assistance Fund. Similar funds were created obligation amount may serve as collateral (at present, it is the under the support of the Russian Government in 79 sub- collateral department of a credit institution that evaluates the jects of the Russian Federation with a total capital worth collateral for small and medium-sized businesses). RUR 36.4 billion (surety organizations in the Russian Fed- Assets accepted by banks as collateral, according to eration issued more than 32 thousand warranties totaling “Regulation on the Procedure for Making Loan Loss and RUR 87.5 billion. The attracted finance volume amounted Similar Debt Provisions by Credit Institutions” (approved by to more than RUR 185.1 billion). The Fund’s warranty is the Central Bank of Russia, March 26, 2004, No. 254‑P) [4], granted to entrepreneurs included in the Moscow Register of also include listed securities The most popular among them Small and Medium-Sized Businesses engaged in business for are government securities that can ensure the loan amount at least six months and current on taxes and duties payable of 95 % of their value. The so-called “blue chips” also pos- to budgets of all levels of the budget system. The Fund in- sess high liquidity. Assets provided as collateral may include cludes 45 banks. precious metals in bullions (gold, silver, platinum and pal- Vnesheconombank (The Bank for Development and ladium). The use of precious metals as collateral should be Foreign Economic Affairs) is the main paying bank in the compliant with the Procedure for Operations with Mineral government support of small and medium-sized business- Raw Materials Containing Precious Metals Prior to Refin- es. However, the Federal Law of May 17, 2007, No. 82‑FZ ing approved by RF Government Resolution dd. Decem- “On the Bank for Development” [6] in paragraph 15 of ber 01, 1998, No.1419 15. According to paragraph 8 of the Part 3, Art. 3 does not clearly define Vnesheconombank’s Procedure, mineral raw materials, not encumbered, can be activities. The bank participates in the financial support used as collateral. Essential collateral terms stipulated by of small and medium-sized businesses through financing the parties in concluding a loan agreement are defined in of credit organizations and legal entities that provide sup- Art.47 of the RF Law of May, 29, 1992, No.2872–1 “On port to small and medium enterprises. Moreover, in doing Collateral” [5]. In the court practice the essential terms so, Vnesheconombank must meet the requirements of the are interpreted somewhat differently: according to the con- Memorandum on Financial Policies of State Corporation clusion made in Regulation of the Federal Antimonopoly “The Bank for Development and Foreign Economic Affairs Service of the East-Siberian District of 30 October, 2002, (Vnesheconombank)” [7], in which except the definition of No. A74–2353/02‑K1‑F02–3217/02‑S2 (“Consultant Plus” the loan term (over 2 years) and amount — no more than Legal Reference Service), the essential terms include the RUR 150 million — no specific mandatory instructions are subject of collateral, its assessment, nature, amount and made. Furthermore, Vnesheconombank cannot act inde- term of execution of collateral-covered obligation as well pendently in performing the function imposed on it. The as indication of its location (the same position is reflected in Decision of the Vnesheconombank Supervisory Council other court decisions. See, e. g.: Resolution of the Federal as of February 5, 2009, has defined the procedure for the Anti-Monopoly Service of the Volga District dd. 11 May, financial support of small and medium-sized businesses 2000, No. A06–1429–6/99//Consultant Plus Information by Vnesheconombank according to which the support is System). The mortgage holder is interested in the safety of provided by an 100 % affiliated credit organization — “The a mortgaged asset; therefore, the creditor has the right to Russian Bank for Development” public joint-stock company exercise control over its storage. It should be noted that the (further “The Russian Bank for Development”). legal limitation for application and enforcement of collateral The small and medium-sized business support primari- reduces the loan obligation coverage. ly concerns enterprises engaged in the innovation and high- It is still possible to obtain a loan without collateral. The tech businesses. Banks that provide loans to small business loan repayment is guaranteed by a warranty statement issued entities in regions are refinanced by Vnesheconombank in by the general director of an enterprise or the proprietor. compliance with a standard procedure developed by the However, small loan amounts, higher interest rates and short latter. Vnesheconombank’s program also provides financ- lending terms do not solve the problems of financial support ing for a non-banking small business support infrastruc- of small and medium-sized businesses. ture including loan cooperatives and microfinancing

147 Section 14. Science of law organizations, leasing and factoring companies that work It is important to develop and introduce new effective with small businesses. loan guarantee programs defining distribution of loan risks The need to change approaches to crediting small and me- between the private capital and the state. dium-sized businesses is obvious. Regions are to play an im- Furthermore, the early Federal Law “On State Support of portant part in this process. The modern credit market must the Small Business in the Russian Federation (repealed) [9] satisfy the demands of small and medium-sized businesses in stipulated concessional lending facilities (according to Art. 11 borrowed funds in the full scope. of the Federal Law of 14.06.1995, No.88‑FZ “On State Support The development of the small business lending institu- of the Small Business in the Russian Federation”, loans to small tion is a fairly complex process, the success of which depends businesses were granted on concessional lending terms while on consistent implementation of effective multi-aspect and the corresponding difference was indemnified to credit institu- multi-directional measures. Measures aimed at development tions at the expense of small business support funds. Moreover, of lending to small and medium-sized businesses include but credit institutions themselves were granted certain benefits un- are not limited to improvement of the system for evaluating the der this regulation), whereas the current Federal Law “On De- solvency of small and medium business entities; development velopment of Small and Medium-Sized Businesses in the Rus- of new lending programs; interest rate reduction; improvement sian Federation” [10] does not stipulate such facilities, which of lending terms, particularly introduction of standardized pro- adversely affects the development of the small and medium cedures allowing lending operation cost saving and reduction entrepreneurship despite the fact that paragraph 2 of Art. 15 of of the application consideration time; loan risk reduction by the Law refers credit assistance funds to the infrastructure of using various loan warranty and loan collateral schemes; en- small and medium-sized business support. couraging large business enterprises to act as warrantors for Therefore, the right of the above businesses to lending small and medium-sized businesses; streamlining regulatory concessions rather than a possibility of concessional lending requirements of the Bank of Russia (thereby making it pos- to them should be formalized in legislation. Special funds sible to reduce loan interest rates); expansion of subsidizing should indemnify the respective difference to credit institu- the loan interest rate; measures directed toward increasing tions based on a loan agreement rather than at their own op- the transparency of small and medium-sized business activi- tion. At present there is a two-sided need (both on the part ties; development of the support infrastructure; educational, of businesses and credit institutions) in the legal recognition particularly, legal work in the small and medium business en- of the respective concession. vironment; establishing regional and municipal small and me- One of the effective solutions to the lending problem dium business support funds rendering, among other things, might be active use in the financial market of the financial assistance in collection of documentation for obtaining a loan; leasing concept. To obtain a financial lease for acquisition of development of alternative sources of financial support. fixed assets for small and medium-sized businesses is easier Microfinancing [8] is a financial tool capable of making and cheaper than obtaining a bank loan, the more so that such up for the current slowdown in the lending to small and medi- transactions are supported by government subsidies extended um-sized business entities. The development of microfinance to cover the advance payment [11]. organizations is targeted at making financial resources avail- Credit organizations as per paragraph 2 Art. 5 of the Federal able to small and medium-sized businesses. Law “On Banks and Banking Activity” may engage in leasing In our opinion, it is necessary to develop and adopt new activities independently using their own funds, which makes it financial and legal instruments to facilitate cooperation of possible to increase their income and reduce costs of the lessee. Russian banks with small and medium-sized businesses in the Given that credit institutions are originally adapted to the field of providing the needed financial support, the more so leasing activity, the Federal Law “On the Financial Rent (Leas- that the majority of banks have already designed work pack- ing)” [12] should reflect this fact. This will constitute the basis ages intended for servicing the above-mentioned businesses. for boosting the activity of credit organizations in that direction. References: 1. Экономический форум. Приложение. – № 103 (5134). – 2013. 2. Положение ЦБ РФ № 254‑П//Вестник Банка России. – 2004. – № 28. 3. Федеральный закон от 30 декабря 2004. № 218‑ФЗ «О кредитных историях»//СЗ РФ. – 2005 – № 1 (часть 1). – Ст. 44. 4. Вестник банка России. – 2004. – № 28. 5. Ведомости СНД и ВС РФ. – 1992. – № 23. – Ст. 1239. 6. СЗ РФ. – 2007. – № 22. – Ст. 2562. 7. Распоряжение Правительства РФ от 27 июля 2007 № 1007‑р (ред. от 21 ноября 2011) «Меморандум о финансо- вой политике государственной корпорации «Банк развития и внешнеэкономической деятельности (Внешэконом- банк)»//СЗ РФ. – 2007. – № 32. – Ст. 4166. 8. Федеральный закон от 2 июля 2010 года № 151‑ФЗ «О микрофинансовой деятельности и микрофинансовых орга- низациях»//СЗ РФ. – 2010. – № 27. – Ст. 3435.

148 Improvement of legal regulation of bank lending as a factor contributing to the development of small and medium-sized...

9. Федеральный закон от 14.06.1995 № 88‑ФЗ «О государственной поддержке малого предпринимательства в Россий- ской Федерации» (утратил силу)//Собрание законодательства РФ. – 1995. – № 25. – Ст. 2343. 10. Федеральный закон от 24.07.2007 № 209‑ФЗ «О развитии малого и среднего предпринимательства в Российской Федерации»//СЗ РФ. – 2007. – № 31. – Ст. 4006. 11. Приказ Минпромторга РФ от 15.02.2010 № 123 «Об утверждении Ведомственной целевой программы «Развитие малого и среднего предпринимательства в отраслях промышленности и торговле»//Информационная программа КонсультантПлюс. 12. Федеральный закон от 29.10.1998 № 164‑ФЗ «О финансовой аренде (лизинге)»//СЗ РФ. – 1998. – № 44. – Ст. 5394.

149 Contents

Section 1. Biology ...... 3 Berlyakova Olga Gennadyevna, Ermak Natalia Borisovna, Potokina Marina Vladimirovna Soil-ecological condition of the tailings OJSC “Abagurskaya agglomeration factory” ...... 3 Kondratyuk Ekaterina Yurievna, Polikarpov Ivan, Novikov Eugene Does the maturation rate affect on longevity in red-backed voles (Myodes rutilus) in laboratory condition ...... 6 Orlova Darya Genadievna Bio-morphological characteristic of some wood and bush plants of maloideae web. subfamily of Orenburg with regard to the variability of fruit and seed parameters ...... 8 Section 2. Geography ...... 12 Volkova Tatiana Aleksandrovna, Antipceva Julia Olegovna, Mishchenko Aleksander Aleksandrovich Prospects of preservation and present condition of geological and geo-morphological sites of tourist interest in Krasnodar region ...... 12 Section 3. History and archaeology ...... 14 Babkova Nadezhda Vyacheslavovna “Cossack with Musket” in the process of formation of Ukrainian state symbols in the 20–21 century ...... 14 Dalibor M. Elezović Seifert’s explication of historicism and the subject of research of historical science ...... 16 Stepanyan Khachatur Rostomi The criticizm of the policy of “militray communism” applied in Soviet Armenia by the social-political thought of Armenian Diaspora (1920–1930s) ...... 19 Section 4. Medical science ...... 23 Hakobyan Arman Pargevi Posoperative pain treatment with epidural injection after lumbаl disc surgery ...... 23 Hakobyan Arman Pargevi, Abrahamyan Samvel Panduchti Peculiarities of anesthesiology of minimal invasive spine surgery ...... 25 Gafurova Malika Ravshanovna Specific features of the childbirth process and postpartum period in Women with epilepsy ...... 27 Ibragimova Feruza Ikromovna, Jumatov Urozmat Jumatovich, Idiev Gayrat Elmuradovich Influence of the harmful factors of manufacture of synthetic detergents and cleaners on the clinical-functional parameters of the oral cavities in the workers ...... 31 Khwan Oleg Innokentyevich Characteristic lesions of liver in cases of car accident trauma with lethal outcome ...... 32 Komshuk Tetiana Sergiivna Comparative characteristic of fetometrycal indicators of cerebrospinal fluid system of the fetal brain in the second trimester of gestation ...... 34 Nabiyev Abduvali Mirzaliyevich, Zakhidov Ulugbek Basitovich Refractometric value and eсhobiometric researches in progressive myopia ...... 36 Nazirova Zulfiya Rustamovna Optimization of the therapy for children with allergic diseases of eyes ...... 38 Norova Mavjuda Bakhodurovna, Teshaev Shukhrat Jumaevich, Baymuradov Ravshan Radjabovich Anthropometric parameters of the head and maxillofacial part in Children with diabetes mellitus and its complience to the principle of the golden ratio ...... 41 Ploshchenko Yulia Alexandrovna Perioperative changes of levels of Interleukin–6 and Endotheline–1 in elderly patients during anesthetic management of surgical interventions ...... 44 Ruziyev Sherzod Ibadullayevich Expert diagnostics of diabetes mellitus in the cases of sudden death ...... 47 Samieva Gulnoza Utkurovna The character of dysbiotic changes in the acute period of stenosing laryngotracheitis of respiratory tract ...... 49 Teplov Alexander Yurievich, Farkhutdinov Albert Mansurovich. Protein sensibilisation has different effect on the contractile function of «fast» and «slow» skeletal muscles of a mouse in vitro ...... 51 Tumaeva Tatiana Stanislavovna, Naumenko Elena Ivanovna Disadaptation infants at high risk — the result of the negative impact of complicated pregnancy and childbirth ...... 53 Usmanov Shukhrat Urazalievich, Djuraev Ahror Mahmudovich Optimization of detection and treatment osteoporosis in children ...... 56 Hamdamov Bahtiyor Zarifovich Comparative evaluation of methods of amputation related to tibiotartus with severe forms of diabetic foot syndrome ...... 58 Khudoynazarov Khayrulla Khamitvich, Tadjibayev Alisher Tukhtapulatovich Optimization of therapy methods for children with epispadia associated with extrophy ...... 60 Shokirova Sadoqat Muhammadsolievna The analysis of perinatal outcomes in preterm labor in Women at high risk of intrauterine infection of fetal ...... 62 Teshaev Shukhrat Jumaevich, Yadgarova Gulnara Sadritdinovna Morphometric parameters of maxillodental at 3‑year-old children with artificial and natural food ...... 64 Yarovenko Vladimir Vladimirovich Dynamics of proinflammatory cytokines using conventional ultrafiltration after cardiac surgery ...... 66 Section 5. Pedagogy ...... 70 Kenenbayeva Marzhan Akhmetkarimovna, Botalova Olga Borisovna Competitiveness of future teacher in modern education ...... 70 Gulevich Tatyana Mikhailovna Influence of the social environment on development of creative potential in younger schoolchildren ...... 72 Degtyaryova Galina Anatoliеvna The issues of standardization of teachers’ information-communication competency assessment ...... 76 Selivanova Olga Genadievna The pupil as the subject of his educational activity ...... 80 Fedorenko Svitlana Viktorivna Liberal Arts Education in the instructional setting of higher school ...... 82 Shyshkin Gennadiy Aleksandrovich, Bandurov Sergey Olegovich Digital electronics in an educational experiment in physics ...... 84 Section 6. Political science ...... 88 Kosyak Yaroslav Olegovich Political Myth and virtual space: interaction in modern society peculiarities ...... 88 Section 7. Agricultural sciences ...... 91 Zheryakov Evgenie Viktorovich Photosynthetic capacity and productivity of hybrids of sugar beet ...... 91 Section 8. Technical sciences ...... 95 Dubrovin Viktor Stepanovich, Zyuzin Alexey Mikhailovich Multi-frequency Functional Generator ...... 95 Section 9. Physics ...... 102 Aghayeva Rana Gazanfar Integrals of Motion and the Non-stationary Factorization Method ...... 102 Section 10. Philology and linguistics ...... 104 Akhmetova Maynur Erevshanalievna Integrative nature of financial risk management terminology ...... 104 Bragarnik-Stankevich Olga Samuilovna Animal appellation in English verbal lexicon ...... 107 Poriadna Olena Oleksandrivna Peculiarities of Ivan Franko’s poetics of translation (based on John Milton’s tragedy “Samson Agonistes”) ...... 109 Section 11. Philosophy ...... 112 Klages Yan Sorintovich It’s a banal world ...... 112 Klages Yan Sorintovich A new theory of human psyche in a new dialectics ...... 114 Peshkov Vladimir Georgievich A philosophical treatise. The truth ...... 114 Section 12. Chemistry ...... 118 Sivtseva Anastasia Vasilievna A short review: specific properties of the gel — carrier of the active phase in metal-polymer catalysts ...... 118 Sivtseva Anastasia Vasilievna A short review: the oxidation of cysteine by molecular oxygen ...... 120 Section 13. Economics and management ...... 123 Andrushko Yana Viacheslavovna Informational technology as the element of management efficiency in the economy ...... 123 Bakhyt Arnabol Bakhytuly, Nurgazina Gulmira Esimbaevna Globalization and internationalization of world food and agricultural product markets ...... 126 Dvoynykh Kostyantyn Yevgenovych Communicational delay backgrounds in modern World economy forecast: obstacles overcoming milestones ...... 129 Gorodetskaya Olga Stanislavovna Analysis and projection of economic activity in Russian machine manufacturing ...... 132 Zhelezkova Polina Evgenyevna Characteristic aspects of the Northwest Baltic Region Sea basin ...... 135 Kats Svetlana Valerievna Nature of the basic financial derivatives ...... 138 Minligareeva Svetlana Alexandrovna Theoretical bases of the analysis of competition in the banking sector of the Russian economy ...... 141 Section 14. Science of law ...... 145 Ruchkina Gulnara Flyurovna, Melnichuk Marina Vladimirovna Improvement of legal regulation of bank lending as a factor contributing to the development of small and medium-sized businesses in Russia ...... 145